eNodeB Feature-Description PACKAGE 4.0.pdf

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0

Radio Access Network

Provides the Feature ID, dependency & limitation, and detailed description from the point of view of high level design.

Document Version 2.0 December 2015

Document Number: 2600-00I10TGAP

© 2015 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means whether, electronic, mechanical, or otherwise without the prior written permission of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. No warranty of accuracy is given concerning the contents of the information contained in this publication. To the extent permitted by law no liability (including liability to any person by reason of negligence) will be accepted by SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd., its subsidiaries or employees for any direct or indirect loss or damage caused by omissions from or inaccuracies in this document. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. reserves the right to change details in this publication without notice.

SNMTC-v3-0312

This manual should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and/or operating the product. Owing to product variations across the range, any illustrations and photographs used in this manual may not be a wholly accurate depiction of the actual products you are using. This manual may be changed for system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior notice. Samsung Networks documentation is available at http://www.samsungdocs.com

Contents Preface

vi Relevance ........................................................................................................................................ vi Conventions in this Document ........................................................................................................ vi New and Changed Information ...................................................................................................... vii Revision History ............................................................................................................................... ix Organization of This Document ....................................................................................................... x Related Documentation ................................................................................................................... x

Chapter 1

Air Performance Enhancement 1 LTE-ME2019, DL SU 2x2 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) .............................................................................. 1 LTE-ME2020, Rx Diversity ................................................................................................................. 6 LTE-ME2022, DL SU 4x4 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) .............................................................................. 9 LTE-ME2023, DL SU 4x2 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) ............................................................................ 15 LTE-ME5110, FDD Carrier Aggregation (5+5) ................................................................................. 20 LTE-ME5111, FDD Carrier Aggregation (3+5) ................................................................................. 22 LTE-ME5112, FDD Carrier Aggregation (3+3) ................................................................................. 24 LTE-ME6004, DL Smart ................................................................................................................... 26 LTE-ME6005, UL Smart (Interference Coordination for UL) ........................................................... 32

Chapter 2

Call Control 38 LTE-SW0111, UE Counting per Category ........................................................................................ 38 LTE-SW0114, Enhancements for Diverse Data Applications .......................................................... 41 LTE-SW0315, Extended Access Barring (SIB14) .............................................................................. 45 LTE-SW0321, UE Context Management ......................................................................................... 49 LTE-SW0322, E-RAB Management ................................................................................................. 56 LTE-SW0501, S1 Interface Management ........................................................................................ 63 LTE-SW0510, Geo Redundancy of MME ........................................................................................ 75 LTE-SW0521, X2 Interface Management ....................................................................................... 84 LTE-SW3010, PDCP Sublayer Support ............................................................................................ 92 LTE-SW4101, Capacity based Call Admission Control .................................................................... 94 LTE-SW4103, Preemption ............................................................................................................ 104 LTE-SW5500, CA Call Control ....................................................................................................... 112

Chapter 3

Load Control 125 LTE-SW2004, Blind Offloading to WCDMA .................................................................................. 125 LTE-SW2020, Load Distribution over Backhaul Links ................................................................... 128 LTE-SW2103, UL Congestion Prevention ...................................................................................... 131 LTE-SW2104, eNB Overload Protection ....................................................................................... 136 LTE-SW2108, Smart Congestion Mitigation ................................................................................. 139

Chapter 4

Mobility Control 142 LTE-SW1002, Idle Mobility Support ............................................................................................. 142 LTE-SW1004, S1 Handover ........................................................................................................... 158 LTE-SW1005, X2 Handover ........................................................................................................... 167 LTE-SW1202, PS Handover between LTE and UTRAN .................................................................. 177 LTE-SW1204, Redirection to UTRAN without SI ........................................................................... 189 LTE-SW1205, Redirection to UTRAN with SI ................................................................................ 195 LTE-SW1208, CSFB to UTRAN with Redirection with SI ............................................................... 202 LTE-SW1209, CSFB to UTRAN with PS Handover ......................................................................... 210

Contents

LTE-SW1301, Idle Mobility to GERAN .......................................................................................... 217 LTE-SW1302, PS Handover between LTE and GERAN .................................................................. 222 LTE-SW1304, Cell Change Order to GERAN without NACC .......................................................... 233 LTE-SW1305, Cell Change Order to GERAN with NACC................................................................ 239 LTE-SW1306, Redirection to GERAN without SI ........................................................................... 245 LTE-SW1307, Redirection to GERAN with SI ................................................................................ 250 LTE-SW1310, CSFB to GERAN with Redirection with SI................................................................ 256 LTE-SW1311, CSFB to GERAN with CCO without NACC ............................................................... 264 LTE-SW1312, CSFB to GERAN with CCO with NACC ..................................................................... 272 LTE-SW1313, CSFB to GERAN with PS Handover ......................................................................... 281 LTE-SW2011, Service based Intra-LTE Handover ......................................................................... 288 LTE-SW2014, SPID based Dedicated Priority ................................................................................ 295 Chapter 5

Radio Scheduler 305 LTE-ME1101, PDSCH Resource Allocation .................................................................................... 305 LTE-ME3203, Aperiodic CQI Reporting......................................................................................... 309 LTE-ME3206, Periodic Channel Status Reporting ......................................................................... 311 LTE-ME3307, UL Sub-frame Bundling .......................................................................................... 316 LTE-ME3309, Resource allocation enhancement for SIB ............................................................. 320 LTE-ME3503, CFI-based PUSCH adaptation ................................................................................. 324

Chapter 6

Radio Transmission 328 LTE-ME0102, FDD 3MHz Bandwidth ............................................................................................ 328 LTE-ME0201, Frame Structure Type 1 (FDD) ................................................................................ 333

Chapter 7

Services 336 LTE-SV0303, OTDOA ..................................................................................................................... 336 LTE-SV0404, VoLTE Quality Enhancement ................................................................................... 344 LTE-SV0503, Multicell and Multicast Coordination (MCE) ........................................................... 351 LTE-SV0504, eMBMS Resource Allocation ................................................................................... 358 LTE-SV0514, Adaptive Delay Reduction for eMBMS .................................................................... 363 LTE-SV0515, eMBMS Session Monitoring .................................................................................... 368 LTE-SV0517, eMBMS Service Restoration .................................................................................... 374 LTE-SV1100, TCP Optimization ..................................................................................................... 378

Chapter 8

RAN Sharing 382 LTE-SW5001, Multi-PLMN Support .............................................................................................. 382

Chapter 9

SON 390 LTE-SO0201, Intra-LTE ANR .......................................................................................................... 390 LTE-SO0301, PCI AutoConfiguration ............................................................................................ 416 LTE-SO0401, RACH Optimization ................................................................................................. 426 LTE-SO0602, Cell Outage Compensation ..................................................................................... 441 LTE-SO0702, Coverage and Capacity Optimization ...................................................................... 450 LTE-SO0802, Cell On/Off in Multi-carrier Sites ............................................................................ 457 LTE-SO0804, DL MIMO TX Branch On/Off .................................................................................... 464 LTE-SO0901, Minimization Drive Test Optimization .................................................................... 472 LTE-SO2011, Drive Test Optimization (Coverage and Capacity Optimization)............................. 480 LTE-SO2021, Tx Power Control (Coverage and Capacity optimization) ....................................... 491 LTE-SO2031, Antenna Tilt Optimization (Coverage and Capacity Optimization) ......................... 499 LTE-SO2032, Antenna Tilt Optimization (Cell outage compensation) .......................................... 512 LTE-SO2041, New Cell Site Recommendation .............................................................................. 522

Chapter 10

System Test and Analysis 530 LTE-OM9001, Cell Traffic Trace .................................................................................................... 530

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

iv

Contents

LTE-OM9002, Subscriber and Equipment Trace........................................................................... 536 LTE-OM9004, CSL (Call Summary Log) Report ............................................................................. 541 LTE-OM9010, VoLTE Monitoring .................................................................................................. 543 LTE-OM9100, Key Performance Indexes ...................................................................................... 548 LTE-OM9101, L1 and L2 Counters ................................................................................................ 554

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

v

Preface This document provides detailed descriptions of new/enhanced features in the PKG 5.0.0 software release. Some features, commands, parameters, or counters are not supported by all software releases or approved for all markets.

Relevance This manual applies to the following products/software. Name

Type

PKG 5.0.0

Software

Conventions in this Document Samsung Networks product documentation uses the following conventions.

Symbols Symbol

Description Indicates a task. Indicates a shortcut or an alternative method. Provides additional information. Provides information or instructions that you should follow to avoid service failure or damage to equipment. Provides information or instructions that you should follow to avoid personal injury or fatality. Provides antistatic precautions that you should observe.

Menu Commands menu | command This indicates that you must select a command on a menu, where menu is the name of the menu, and command is the name of the command on that menu.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

vi

Preface

File Names and Paths These are indicated by a bold typeface. For example: Copy filename.ext into the /home/folder1/folder2/bin/ folder.

User Input and Console Screen Output Text Input and output text is presented in the Courier font. For example, context CLI commands are presented in bold small caps. For example, Type the RTRV-NE-STS command in the input field.

New and Changed Information This section describes information that has been added/changed since the previous publication of this manual.

In this document release, LTE-SW5001, Multi-PLMN Support feature is newly added and the contents of LTE-ME5110, FDD Carrier Aggregation (5+5) feature and LTE-ME3203, Aperiodic CQI Reporting feature are enhanced compared to Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 Ver. 1.0.

The following table shows new and enhanced features for PKG 5.0.0 compared to PKG 4.0.0. Development Type

Feature ID, Name

New features

LTE-ME2019, DL SU 2x2 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) LTE-ME2020, Rx Diversity LTE-ME2022, DL SU 4x4 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) LTE-ME2023, DL SU 4x2 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) LTE-ME5110, FDD Carrier Aggregation(5+5) LTE-ME5111, FDD Carrier Aggregation(3+5) LTE-ME5112, FDD Carrier Aggregation(3+3) LTE-SW0111, UE Counting per Category LTE-SW0114, Enhancements for Diverse Data Applications LTE-SW0315, Extended Access Barring (SIB14) LTE-SW3010, PDCP Sublayer Support LTE-SW5500, CA Call Control LTE-SW2004, Blind Offloading to WCDMA LTE-SW2020, Load Distribution over Backhaul Links LTE-SW2103, UL Congestion Prevention LTE-SW2108, Smart Congestion Mitigation LTE-SW1202, PS Handover between LTE and UTRAN LTE-SW1204, Redirection to UTRAN without SI LTE-SW1205, Redirection to UTRAN with SI LTE-SW1208, CSFB to UTRAN with Redirection with SI

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

vii

Preface Development Type

Feature ID, Name LTE-SW1209, CSFB to UTRAN with PS Handover LTE-SW1302, PS Handover between LTE and GERAN LTE-SW1304, Cell Change Order to GERAN without NACC LTE-SW1305, Cell Change Order to GERAN with NACC LTE-SW1306, Redirection to GERAN without SI LTE-SW1307, Redirection to GERAN with SI LTE-SW1310, CSFB to GERAN with Redirection with SI LTE-SW1311, CSFB to GERAN with CCO without NACC LTE-SW1312, CSFB to GERAN with CCO with NACC LTE-SW1313, CSFB to GERAN with PS Handover LTE-SW2011, Service based Intra-LTE Handover LTE-SW5001, Multi-PLMN Support LTE-ME3203, Aperiodic CQI Reporting LTE-ME3206, Periodic Channel Status Reporting LTE-ME3307, UL Sub-frame Bundling LTE-ME3309, Resource allocation enhancement for SIB LTE-ME3503, CFI-based PUSCH adaptation LTE-ME0102, FDD 3MHz Bandwidth LTE-ME0201, Frame Structure Type 1 (FDD) LTE-SO0802, Cell On/Off in Multi-carrier Sites LTE-SO0804, DL MIMO TX Branch On/Off LTE-SO2032, Antenna tilt optimization(Cell outage compensation) LTE-SO2041, New cell site recommendation LTE-SV0404, VoLTE Quality Enhancement LTE-SV0504, eMBMS Resource Allocation LTE-SV0514, Adaptive Delay Reduction for eMBMS LTE-SV0517, eMBMS Service Restoration LTE-SV1100, TCP Optimization LTE-OM9010, VoLTE Monitoring LTE-OM9100, Key Performance Indexes LTE-OM9101, L1 and L2 Counters

Enhanced features

LTE-ME6004, DL Smart LTE-ME6005, UL Smart (Interference Coordination for UL) LTE-SW0321, UE Context Management LTE-SW0322, E-RAB Management LTE-SW0501, S1 Interface Management LTE-SW0510, Geo Redundancy of MME LTE-SW0521, X2 Interface Management LTE-SW4101, Capacity based Call Admission Control LTE-SW4103, Preemption LTE-SW2104, eNB Overload Protection LTE-SW1002, Idle Mobility Support LTE-SW1004, S1 Handover LTE-SW1005, X2 Handover LTE-SW1301, Idle Mobility to GERAN LTE-SW2014, SPID based Dedicated Priority LTE-ME1101, PDSCH Resource Allocation

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

viii

Preface Development Type

Feature ID, Name LTE-SO0201, Intra-LTE ANR LTE-SO0301, PCI AutoConfiguration LTE-SO0401, RACH optimization LTE-SO0602, Cell Outage Compensation LTE-SO0702, Coverage and Capacity Optimization LTE-SO0901, Minimization Drive Test Optimization LTE-SO2011, Drive test optimization (Coverage and Capacity optimization) LTE-SO2021, Tx Power Control(Coverage and Capacity optimization) LTE-SO2031, Antenna tilt optimization(Coverage and Capacity Optimization) LTE-SV0303, OTDOA LTE-SV0503, Multicell and Multicast Coordination (MCE) LTE-SV0515, eMBMS Session Monitoring LTE-OM9001, Cell Traffic Trace LTE-OM9002, Subscriber and Equipment Trace LTE-OM9004, CSL(Call Summary Log) Report

Revision History The following table lists all versions of this document. Document Number

Product/Software Version

Document Version

Publication Date

Remarks

2600-00GAR0GAP

PKG 3.0.0

1.0

2 February 2014

-

2600-00GAR0GAP

PKG 3.0.0

2.0

4 February 2015

-

2600-00GM80GAP

PKG 3.1.0

1.0

26 June 2014

-

2600-00GM80GAP

PKG 3.1.0

2.0

9 April 2015

-

2600-00GXYAGAP

PKG 4.0.0

1.0

20 Oct 2014

-

2600-00GXYAGAP

PKG 4.0.0

2.0

14 January 2015

-

2600-00I10TGAP

PKG 5.0.0

1.0

29 July 2015

-

2600-00I10TGAP

PKG 5.0.0

2.0

4 December 2015

-

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

ix

Preface

Organization of This Document Section

Title

Description

Chapter 1

Air Performance Enhancement

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to Air Performance Enhancement.

Chapter 2

Call Control

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to Call Control.

Chapter 3

Load Control

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to Load Control.

Chapter 4

Mobility Control

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to Mobility Control.

Chapter 5

Radio Scheduler

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to Radio Scheduler.

Chapter 6

Radio Transmission

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to Radio Transmission.

Chapter 7

Services

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to Services.

Chapter 8

RAN Sharing

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to RAN Sharing.

Chapter 9

SON

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to SON.

Chapter 10

System Test and Analysis

This chapter describes PKG 5.0.0 LTE features related to System Test and Analysis.

Related Documentation 

Samsung eNB (OAM) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0



Samsung eNB (Transport) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0



Samsung LTE eNB Command Reference for PKG 5.0.0



Samsung LTE eNB Parameter Description for PKG 5.0.0

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

x

Chapter 1

Air Performance Enhancement

LTE-ME2019, DL SU 2x2 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) INTRODUCTION Multiple antenna techniques aim to improve data robustness or provide an increase in data rates by utilizing special signal structure and exploiting un-correlated fading channels for each transmitted signal. In case of two transmit antennas on an eNB and two receive antennas on the same UE- it is known downlink 2x2 singleuser MIMO. The following figure shows concept of single user MIMO using m transmit and n receive antennas.

As shown in the figure above, each receiver side antenna receives a composite signal made up of transmitted signals modified by their channels. Under specific channel conditions, the transmitter can structure the transmitted signals to, either send modified copies of the same transmission (transmit diversity) or, send different transmission (spatial multiplexing). The former case provides signal robustness and the latter provides increase in data rate.

BENEFIT Provide improvement in cell capacity and throughput as UEs with better channel conditions can benefit from the multiple streams transmission.

Served the improved throughput or reliable communication due to the multiple streams transmission.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Need 2CRS supported terminal UE. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

1

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

2T RRU is required.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Samsung supports DL SU-MIMO Spatial Multiplexing (SM) in both Transmission Mode 3 (TM3: open-loop SM) and Transmission Mode 4 (TM4: closed-loop SM) employing either 2x2 antenna configuration that is 2 transmit eNB antennas and 2 receive UE antennas.

Transmit Diversity Transmit diversity is default MIMO mode in LTE. This redundancy leads to increase in signal-to-noise ratio and therefore, signal robustness. Transmission Mode 2 provides transmit diversity by transmitting a single PDSCH codeword using four antennas.

Spatial Multiplexing In spatial multiplexing, there is no signal redundancy as with transmit diversity; antenna ports transmit different symbols. There are two modes that can provide spatial diversity; such as TM3 and TM4. TM3 uses a predetermined CDD-based precoding and favorable to high speed UEs. TM4 uses a codebook-based precoding and favorable to low speed UEs because scheduler adopts the best precoder per UE based on the precoder fed-back by UE. For both TM3 and TM4, rank adaptation based on fed-back rank information is supported so that the most appropriate number of transmission layers (and codewords) can be adopted. Mode

Description

Antenna Ports

Layer

Codewords

Channel Rank

UE Feedback

TM3

Open loop spatial multiplexing with cyclic delay diversity

2

2

2

2

CQI, RI

TM4

Closed loop spatial multiplexing with precoding matrix

2

2

2

2

CQI, RI, PMI

Transmission Mode 3 TM3 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses pre-determined precoding matrix. The process of applying pre-coding is defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211. Open loop spatial uses Channel Quality Information (CQI) and Rank Indication (RI) information fed-back from UE. TM3 is suitable for scenarios when the UE is in good channel condition. A stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage scenario will get the most benefit from this mode. Codewords, layers mapping in open-loop spatial multiplexing (TM3) for 2 antenna ports are tabulated as follows: Number of codewords

Number of layers

CW, Layer mapping

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

2

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement Number of codewords

Number of layers

2

2

CW, Layer mapping

Transmission Mode 4 TM4 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses PMI index fed-back from UE, to construct downlink PDSCH codeword to maximize signal to noise ratio at UE receiver. A PMI index is a pointer to a set of pre-coding weights that are applied to downlink code-words prior to transmission. The process of applying pre-coding is defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211. TM 4 is suitable for scenarios when UE is in slow time-varying channel because there is a delay associated with a PMI report from UE and a corresponding downlink transmission that utilizes the reported PMI index. A stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage scenario will get the most benefit from this mode. Codewords, layers mapping in closed-loop spatial multiplexing (TM4) for 4 antenna ports are tabulated as follows: Number of codewords

Number of layers

1

1

2

2

CW, Layer mapping

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

3

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Active To enable this feature, DL_ANT_COUNT should be set equal to or greater than n2TxAntCnt. Execute the CHG-CELL-IDLE command to change the parameter DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT to two to enable 2x2 SU-MIMO.

Key Parameters RTRV-CELL-IDLE/CHG-CELL-IDLE Parameter

Description

DL_ANT_COUNT

This parameter is the number of Tx antennas used by an operating cell.

DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT

This parameter is the number of downlink CRS ports that are supported by the system.

RTRV-DL-SCHED/CHG-DL-SCHED Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter describes user-defined cellId.

DL_MIMO_MODE

This parameter specifies transmission mode. Each one is corresponding to certain multiple antenna techniques. TM1: Single-antenna port (port 0), DCI format 1 or 1A is used. TM2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1 or 1A is used. TM3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2A or 1A is used. TM4: Closed-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2 or 1A is used. TM5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A is used. It is a test mode and it is not supported. TM6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding, DCI format 1B or 1A is used. It is a test mode and it is not supported. TM7: Single-antenna port (port 5), DCI format 1 or 1A is used. It is supported for only 8T8R TDD. TM8: Dual layer transmission, or Single-antenna port (port 7/port 8), DCI format 2B or 1A is used. It is supported for only 8T8R TDD. TM9: UE specific RS based Transmission (Rel 10) [Related Specifications] 3GPP TS 36.213

ALPHA

Fairness weight in PF scheduler. If alpha is increased, scheduling fairness increase such as Round Robin scheduling.

BETA

Channel quality weight in PF scheduler. If beta is increased, scheduling efficiency increases such as Max C/I.

GAMMA

Priority weight in PF scheduler.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

4

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.201 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer; General description‟ [2] 3GPP TS 36.211 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and Modulation‟ [3] 3GPP TS 36.212 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding‟ [4] 3GPP TS 36.213 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures‟ [5] 3GPP TS 36.214 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer; Measurements‟ [6] 3GPP TS 36.300 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

5

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

LTE-ME2020, Rx Diversity INTRODUCTION Currently, receive diversity techniques are not specified in the LTE specification, because receive diversity places no requirements in the transmitter. However, it needs to be noted that receive diversity enables to make better quality on uplink received signal. Samsung eNB support Rx diversity using Minimum Mean Squared Error (MMSE) combining with Interference Rejection Combining (IRC) receiver.

BENEFIT Rx diversity enables to communicate in the more reliable transmission condition.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION In Rx diversity, the receiver needs to combine multiple streams from different antenna into a single stream. The challenge here is how to use the information from all the antennas effectively. In fact, it is just a matter of choosing the appropriate weight for each received signals (see the following figure).

There are multiple ways to choose the weight of receiver, but Samsung eNB uses linear MMSE (LMMSE) receiver with IRC to suppress inter-cell interference.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

6

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

Linear Minimum Mean Squared Error (LMMSE) Receiver with Interference Rejection Combining (IRC) To obtain receive diversity, Samsung eNB considers LMMSE criterion with IRC. This advanced receiver employing IRC is effective in improving the cell-edge user throughput. The IRC receiver utilizes the covariance of interference and noise factors of multiple receiver branches, and combines the received signals for multiple receiver branches so that the Mean Square Error (MSE) between the combined signal and the desired signal is minimized, instead of Maximal Ratio Combining (MRC). The specific combining criterion is as follows:

1 The channel estimator of the eNB receiver estimates the channel of the desired signal, and generates the covariance matrix of interference and noise. oEstimate the channel matrix of the desired signal

oEstimate the covariance matrix of interference and noise

2 Using the estimated channel and the covariance matrix, MMSE weight is calculated to perform IRC. oMinimum Mean Squared Error (MMSE) criterion

oMMSE criterion achieves the optimal balance the noise enhancement and interference suppression oCombined weight

3 Interference rejection is achieved by MMSE combining at the eNB receiver.

The IRC scheme based on MMSE criterion achieves an optimal balance of noise enhancement and interference suppression. Hence, IRC provides the enhanced performance to UEs at the cell boundary that experience serious interference from other cell. The receive diversity can be obtained from combining the calculated weight with received signals for each receiver path.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is an optional feature and can be activated and deactivated with the parameter IRC_ENABLE. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

7

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

Default IRC_ENABLE is 'FALSE (IRC OFF) (IRC_ENABLE= 0)'. Execute the CHG-PUSCH-IDLE command to set IRC_ENABLE to 'TRUE (IRC ON) (IRC_ENABLE = 1)'.

Execute the RTRV-PUSCH-IDLE command to retrieve the configuration information for IRC_ENABLE.

The operator can disable this feature by setting IRC_ENABLE to 'FALSE (IRC OFF)' (IRC_ENABLE= 0).

Key Parameters RTRV-PUSCH-IDLE/CHG-PUSCH-IDLE Parameter

Description

IRC_ENABLE

This parameter is used to enable to use IRC 0: False (IRC OFF) 1: True (IRC ON)

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.201 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); LTE physical layer; General description [2] Goldsmith, A. J. Wireless communications. Cambridge University Press, 2005

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

8

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

LTE-ME2022, DL SU 4x4 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) INTRODUCTION Multiple antenna techniques aim to improve data robustness or provide an increase in data rates by utilizing special signal structure and exploiting un-correlated fading channels for each transmitted signal. In case of four transmit antennas on an eNB and four receive antennas on the same UE- it is known as downlink 4x4 single-user MIMO. Below figure, illustrates the concept of single user MIMO using m transmit and n receive antennas. The following figure is m x n single user MIMO concept:

As shown in the figure above, each receiver side antenna receives a composite signal made up of transmitted signals modified by their channels. Under specific channel conditions, the transmitter can structure the transmitted signals to, either send modified copies of the same transmission (transmit diversity) or, send different transmission (spatial multiplexing) or combination of both. Transmit diversity provides signal robustness and spatial multiplexing increases data rate.

BENEFIT The operator provides improvement in cell capacity and throughput as UEs with better channel conditions can benefit from the multiple streams transmission.

The user can be served with improved throughput or reliable communication due to the multiple streams transmission.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency 4Tx RU is necessary.

Category 5 UE (4Rx ready UE) is necessary. (This feature's release schedule is subject to change by UE availability that supports this feature.) Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

9

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Samsung plans to support the DL SU-MIMO Spatial Multiplexing (SM) in both Transmission Mode 3 (open-loop SM) and Transmission Mode 4 (closed-loop SM) employing 4x4 antenna configuration that is 4 transmit eNB antennas and 4 receive UE antennas.

Transmission mode 3 TM 3 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses pre-determined precoding matrix. The process of applying pre-coding is defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211. Open loop spatial multiplexing uses CQI (Channel Quality Information) and RI (Rank Indication) information fed-back from UE. TM 3 is suitable for scenarios when the UE is in good channel condition. A stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage scenario will get the most benefit from this mode. Codewords, layers mapping in open-loop spatial multiplexing (TM3) for 4 antenna ports are tabulated as follows: Number of codewords

Number of layers

1

2

2

2

CW, Layer mapping

3

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

10

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement Number of codewords

Number of layers

CW, Layer mapping

4

Transmission Mode 4 TM 4 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses PMI index fed-back from UE, to construct downlink PDSCH codeword to maximize signal to noise ratio at UE receiver. A PMI index is a pointer to a set of pre-coding weights that are applied to downlink code-words prior to transmission. The process of applying pre-coding is defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211. TM 4 is suitable for scenarios when the UE is in slow time-varying channel because there is a delay associated with a PMI report from UE and a corresponding downlink transmission that utilizes the requested PMI index. A stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage scenario will get the most benefit from this mode. Codewords, layers mapping in close-loop spatial multiplexing (TM4) for 4 antenna ports are tabulated as follows: Number of codewords

Number of layers

1

1

CW, Layer mapping

2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

11

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement Number of codewords

Number of layers

2

2

CW, Layer mapping

3

4

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, DL_ANT_COUNT should be set equal to or greater than n4TxAntCnt

Execute the CHG-CELL-IDLE command to change the parameter DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT to four to enable 4x4 SU-MIMO.

Execute the CHG-DL-SCHED command to change the downlink transmission mode. oci_tm3 is transmission mode 3. oci_tm4 is transmission mode 4.

Key Parameters RTRV-CELL-IDLE/CHG-CELL-IDLE Parameter

Description

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

12

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement Parameter

Description

DL_ANT_COUNT

This parameter is the number of Tx antennas used by an operating cell.

DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT

This parameter is the number of downlink CRS ports that are supported by the system.

RTRV-DL-SCHED/CHG-DL-SCHED Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

DL_MIMO_MODE

This parameter specifies transmission mode. Each one is corresponding to certain multiple antenna techniques. TM1: Single-antenna port (port 0), DCI format 1 or 1A is used. TM2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1 or 1A is used. TM3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2A or 1A is used. TM4: Closed-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2 or 1A is used. TM5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A is used. It is a test mode and it is not supported. TM6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding, DCI format 1B or 1A is used. It is a test mode and it is not supported. TM7: Single-antenna port (port 5), DCI format 1 or 1A is used. It is supported for only 8T8R TDD. TM8: Dual layer transmission, or Single-antenna port (port 7/port 8), DCI format 2B or 1A is used. It is supported for only 8T8R TDD. TM9: UE specific RS based Transmission (Rel 10) [Related Specifications] 3GPP TS 36.213

ALPHA

Fairness weight in PF scheduler. The larger alpha is, the better the fairness is.

BETA

Channel quality weight in PF scheduler. The larger beta is, the better the channel efficiency is.

GAMMA

Priority weight in PF scheduler. The larger gamma is the smaller scheduling delay is. However, if it is very high, system capacity can be decreased because scheduler considers delay excessively.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.201 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer; General description‟ [2] 3GPP TS 36.211 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and Modulation‟ [3] 3GPP TS 36.212 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding‟ [4] 3GPP TS 36.213 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures‟ Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

13

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

[5] 3GPP TS 36.214 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer; Measurements‟ [6] 3GPP TS 36.300 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

14

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

LTE-ME2023, DL SU 4x2 MIMO (TM3 and TM4) INTRODUCTION Multiple antenna techniques aim to improve data robustness or provide an increase in data rates by utilizing special signal structure and exploiting un-correlated fading channels for each transmitted signal. In case of four transmit antennas on an eNB and two receive antennas on the same UE, it is known downlink 4x2 singleuser MIMO. The following figure shows concept of single user MIMO using m transmit and n receive antennas.

As shown in the figure above, each receiver side antenna receives a composite signal made up of transmitted signals modified by their channels. Under specific channel conditions, the transmitter can structure the transmitted signals to, either send modified copies of the same transmission (transmit diversity) or, send different transmission (spatial multiplexing). The former case provides signal robustness and the latter provides increase in data rate.

BENEFIT The operator can provide improvement in cell capacity and throughput as UEs with better channel conditions can benefit from the multiple streams transmission.

The user can be served the improved throughput or reliable communication due to the multiple streams transmission.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Need 4CRS supported terminal UE.

4T RRU is required. Currently TM3 is default MIMO mode and TM4 cannot be enabled. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

15

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

TM4 will be officially supported after IOT and then MIMO mode selection parameter (dlMimoMode) will be enabled.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Samsung supports the DL SU-MIMO Spatial Multiplexing (SM) in both Transmission Mode 3 (TM3: open-loop SM) and Transmission Mode 4 (TM4: closed-loop SM) employing either 4x2 antenna configuration that is 4 transmit eNB antennas and 2 receive UE antennas.

Transmit Diversity Transmit diversity is default MIMO mode in LTE. This redundancy leads to increase in signal-to-noise ratio and therefore, signal robustness. Transmission Mode 2 provides transmit diversity by transmitting a single PDSCH codeword using 4 antennas.

Spatial Multiplexing In spatial multiplexing, there is no signal redundancy as with transmit diversity; antenna ports transmit different symbols. There are two modes that provide spatial diversity: TM3 and TM4. TM3 uses a predetermined CDD-based precoding and favorable to high speed UEs. TM4 uses a codebook-based precoding and favorable to low speed UEs because scheduler adopts the best precoder per UE based on the precoder fed-back by UE. For both TM3 and TM4, rank adaptation based on fedback rank information is supported so that the most appropriate number of transmission layers (and codewords) can be adopted. Mode

Description

Antenna Ports

Layer

Codewords

Channel Rank

UE Feedback

TM3

Open loop spatial multiplexing with cyclic delay diversity

4

2

2

2

CQI, RI

TM4

Closed loop spatial multiplexing with precoding matrix

4

2

2

2

CQI, RI, PMI

Transmission Mode 3 TM3 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses pre-determined precoding matrix. The process of applying pre-coding is defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211. Open loop spatial uses Channel Quality Information (CQI) and Rank Indication (RI) information fed-back from UE. TM3 is suitable for scenarios when UE is in good channel condition. A stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage scenario gets the most benefit from this mode. Codewords, layers mapping in open-loop spatial multiplexing (TM3) for 4 antenna ports are shown in the table below. Number of codewords

Number of layers

CW, Layer mapping

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

16

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement Number of codewords

Number of layers

2

2

CW, Layer mapping

Transmission Mode 4 TM4 is spatial multiplexing scheme that uses PMI index fed-back from UE, to construct downlink PDSCH codeword to maximize signal to noise ratio at UE receiver. A PMI index is a pointer to a set of pre-coding weights that are applied to downlink code-words prior to transmission. The process of applying pre-coding is defined in 3GPP specification TS 36.211. TM 4 is suitable for scenarios when the UE is in slow time-varying channel because there is a delay associated with a PMI report from UE and a corresponding downlink transmission that utilizes the reported PMI index. A stationary or pedestrian speed UE in good RF coverage scenario gets the most benefit from this mode. Codewords, layers mapping in closed-loop spatial multiplexing (TM4) for 4 antenna ports are shown in the following table. Number of codewords

Number of layers

1

1

2

2

CW, Layer mapping

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

17

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, DL_ANT_COUNT should be set equal to or greater than n4TxAntCnt. Execute the CHG-CELL-IDLE command to change the parameter DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT to four to enable 4x2 SU-MIMO.

Key Parameters RTRV-CELL-IDLE/CHG-CELL-IDLE Parameter

Description

DL_ANT_COUNT

This parameter is the number of Tx antennas used by an operating cell.

DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT

This parameter is the number of downlink CRS ports that are supported by the system.

RTRV-DL-SCHED/CHG-DL-SCHED Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

ALPHA

Fairness weight in PF scheduler. The larger alpha is, the better the fairness is.

BETA

Channel quality weight in PF scheduler. The larger beta is, the better the channel efficiency is.

GAMMA

Priority weight in PF scheduler. The larger gamma is the smaller scheduling delay is. However, if it is very high, system capacity can be decreased because scheduler considers delay excessively.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.201 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer; General description‟ [2] 3GPP TS 36.211 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and Modulation‟ [3] 3GPP TS 36.212 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding‟ [4] 3GPP TS 36.213 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures‟

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

18

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

[5] 3GPP TS 36.214 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer; Measurements‟ [6] 3GPP TS 36.300 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

19

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

LTE-ME5110, FDD Carrier Aggregation (5+5) INTRODUCTION The FDD Carrier Aggregation (5+5) feature enables an eNB to aggregate with 5+5MHz LTE Component Carriers (CCs). The purpose of multiple CCs aggregation is to have wider channel bandwidth, which helps operators to increase bitrates for end-users.

BENEFIT An operator can combine individual CCs from different bands and bandwidths. The feature ensures that all the spectrum resources are utilized effectively across the network for improving efficiency and achieving peak throughputs.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency  HW dependency oSupport Channel Cards: CA could be restricted depending on the hardware configuration.



Required Network Elements oNetwork Elements Dependency: No special network element required null



Others: Device needs to support this feature.

Limitation Due to UE availability of CA with 4x4MIMO, CA with 2x2MIMO can be supported.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The Samsung eNB supports a combination of 5+5 MHz CCs in downlink. Each aggregated carriers is referred to as CC. Figure below illustrates the 5+5 aggregated LTE channels.

FDD 5 MHz FDD 5 + 5 MHz CA FDD 5 MHz

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

20

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

The operator can have the following three types of carrier allocation based on the spectrum usage:

Intra-band Contiguous CA Intra-band Non-contiguous CA Inter-band Non-contiguous CA For detailed description of CA functionality and its operational procedures, see LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control.

SYSTEM OPERATION Refer to the System Operation section of LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control feature for configuration, key parameter, and detailed information on counters associated with this feature.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.101 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception‟ [2] 3GPP TS 36.211 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and Modulation‟ [3] 3GPP TS 36.212 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding‟ [4] 3GPP TS 36.213 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures‟ [5] 3GPP TS 36.300 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2‟ [6] 3GPP TS 36.331 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification‟ [7] 3GPP TR 36.814 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects‟ [8] 3GPP TR 36.912 „Feasibility study for Further Advancements for E-UTRA (LTE-Advanced)‟

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

21

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

LTE-ME5111, FDD Carrier Aggregation (3+5) INTRODUCTION The FDD Carrier Aggregation (3+5) enables an eNB to aggregate with 3+5 MHz LTE Component Carriers (CCs). The purpose of multiple CCs aggregation is to have wider channel bandwidth, which helps operators to increase bitrates for endusers.

BENEFIT The operator can combine individual CCs from different band and bandwidths. All the spectrum resources are utilized effectively across the network for improving efficiency and achieving higher peak throughputs.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Device needs to support this feature.

CA could be restricted depending on the HW configuration.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The Samsung eNB supports a combination of 3+5 MHz CCs in downlink. Each aggregated carriers is referred to as CC. The following figure shows the 3+5 aggregated LTE channels.

The operator can have the following three types of carrier allocation based on the spectrum usage:

Intra-band Contiguous CA Intra-band Non-contiguous CA Inter-band Non-contiguous CA

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

22

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

For detailed description of CA functionality and its operational procedures, refer to LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control feature description document.

SYSTEM OPERATION Refer to the System Operation section of LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control feature for configuration, key parameter, and detailed information on counters associated with this feature.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.101 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception‟ [2] 3GPP TS 36.211 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and Modulation‟ [3] 3GPP TS 36.212 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding‟ [4] 3GPP TS 36.213 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures‟ [5] 3GPP TS 36.300 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2‟ [6] 3GPP TS 36.331 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification‟ [7] 3GPP TR 36.814 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects‟ [8] 3GPP TR 36.912 „Feasibility study for Further Advancements for E-UTRA (LTE-Advanced)‟

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

23

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

LTE-ME5112, FDD Carrier Aggregation (3+3) INTRODUCTION The FDD Carrier Aggregation (3+3) enables an eNB to aggregate with 3+3 MHz LTE Component Carriers (CCs). The purpose of multiple CCs aggregation is to have wider channel bandwidth, which helps operators to increase bitrates for endusers.

BENEFIT The operator can combine individual CCs from different band and bandwidths. All the spectrum resources are utilized effectively across the network for improving efficiency and achieving higher peak throughputs.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Device needs to support this feature.

CA could be restricted depending on the HW configuration.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The Samsung eNB supports a combination of 3+3 MHz CCs in downlink. Each aggregated carriers is referred to as CC. The following figure shows the 3+3 aggregated LTE channels.

The operator can have the following three types of carrier allocation based on the spectrum usage:

Intra-band Contiguous CA Intra-band Non-contiguous CA Inter-band Non-contiguous CA

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

24

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

For detailed description of CA functionality and its operational procedures, refer to LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control feature description document.

SYSTEM OPERATION Refer to the System Operation section of LTE-SW5500: CA Call Control feature for configuration, key parameter, and detailed information on counters associated with this feature.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.101 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception‟ [2] 3GPP TS 36.211 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and Modulation‟ [3] 3GPP TS 36.212 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding‟ [4] 3GPP TS 36.213 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures‟ [5] 3GPP TS 36.300 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2‟ [6] 3GPP TS 36.331 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification‟ [7] 3GPP TR 36.814 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects‟ [8] 3GPP TR 36.912 „Feasibility study for Further Advancements for E-UTRA (LTE-Advanced)‟

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

25

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

LTE-ME6004, DL Smart INTRODUCTION The DL-Smart feature performs centralized coordination for the radio resource of all cells connected to Smart Scheduler Server to enhance the cell performance. In this case, each eNB allocates the physical radio resource to the UE based on the results of the coordination.

BENEFIT This will result in performance enhancement for DL data transmission.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency This feature works with Smart Scheduler server. Smart Scheduler server supports C-RAN only, D-RAN only, or H-RAN mode.

The eNB operates RT or NRT mode depending on the mode of Smart Scheduler server.

This feature needs time synchronization between cells. This feature requires backhaul latency between eNB and Smart Scheduler Server less than 30ms (in round-trip-time (RTT)) for DRAN or HRAN. Limitation The number of cells supporting a Smart Scheduler server is different according to the type of the server.

MR based DL Smart is necessary when Carrier Aggregation (CA) is activated.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The network for DL-Smart is consisted of one Smart Scheduler and a large number of eNBs. Samsung supports three types of DL-Smart networks as C-RAN, D-RAN, and H-RAN. Each network diagram is referred from the following figures. (A) C-RAN

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

26

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

(B) D-RAN

(C) H-RAN

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

27

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

Each eNB is connected with Smart Scheduler server and is classified as C-RAN eNB or D-RAN eNB according to the transmission delay between Smart Scheduler server and eNB. In figure (A), C-RAN eNB is concentrated with Smart Scheduler, so C-RAN network guarantees short transmission delay less than 1ms. Each RU distributed from C-RAN eNB is connected with DU using the dark fiber. D-RAN eNB is shown in figure (B) and is distributed from Smart Scheduler using Ethernet network connection with transmission delay longer than 1ms. Smart Scheduler server can support inter-cell interference coordination via same structure for C-RAN and D-RAN. Thus, Smart Scheduler server can support DLSmart although C-RAN eNBs and D-RAN eNBs are interconnected in H-RAN environment. H-RAN network is shown in figure (C). In each network architecture, if there is no Smart Scheduler, eNBs can provide stand-alone operation. The following figure shows the software structure of Smart Scheduler network:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

28

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

The following functions are performed by each SW block:

Coordinator in Smart Scheduler server oNon real time (NRT) coordination. oReal time (RT) coordination for C-RAN cells. oTransfer NRT/RT resource allocation pattern to RT-Scheduler.

Pre-Scheduler in Smart Scheduler server oSelection of the representative UE for each cell oTransfer the metric of the representative UE to coordinator.

UE Manager in Smart Scheduler server oSRS/MR based Tx power estimation of Cell oGeneration of the preferred resource allocation pattern

RT-Scheduler in eNB oSelects a candidate UE, and then transfer channel and traffic information of the candidate UE to Smart Scheduler server. (When carrier aggregation and DL Smart are enabled at the same time, RT-Scheduler receives MR for the SCell from each UE and then transfers it to Smart Scheduler Server periodically.) oAllocates resource using NRT/RT resource allocation pattern DL-Smart feature performs scheduling according to the following procedure:

1 RT-Scheduler block of the eNB selects the candidate UE for each cell. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

29

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

2 UE Manager block of the Smart Scheduler generates the preferred resource allocation pattern for each UE using DL/UL received power estimation.

3 Pre-Scheduler block selects the representative UE for each cell. 4 Coordinator block performs the coordination of radio resources for each cell based on the scheduling metric, generates the resource allocation pattern based on the coordination results and sends it to eNB.

5 RT-Scheduler block compensates the UE channel quality (CQI) based on the resource allocation pattern and allocates the control channel and the data channel to UE.

6 RT-Scheduler block confirms the resource allocation based on the resource coordination information from Post-Scheduler block and generates RLC/Modem control information.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, execute the CHG-CELLSCHR-CONF command.

If the flag of SMART_CELL_COORDI_ENABLE is false, the state of DL smart is OFF.

If the flag of SMART_CELL_COORDI_ENABLE is true, the state of DL smart is ON.

Key Parameters RTRV-CELLSCHR-CONF/CHG-CELLSCHR-CONF Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system.

SMART_CELL_COORDI_ENABL E

It is the SmartCell DL Coordination function ON (true)/OFF (false) flag, that is, the control flag of interworking function between eNB and the Smart Scheduler Server.

Counters and KPIs Family Name

Type

Description

Throughput distribution counter for CS ON OFF (1 of 2)

ThroughputAvg

Average UE throughput

ThroughputTot

Total UE throughput

ThroughputCnt

Total number of UE throughputs

Thru0_20

Number of UE throughputs ranging from 0kbps to 20 kbps

...

...

Thru16880_16900

Number of UE throughputs ranging from 16,880 kbps to 16,900 kbps

Thru16900_16920

Number of UE throughputs ranging from

Throughput distribution counter for

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

30

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement Family Name CS ON OFF (2 of 2)

Type

Description 16,900 kbps to 16,920 kbps

...

...

Thru280600_306200

Number of UE throughputs ranging from 280,600 kbps to 306,200 kbps

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.101 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception‟ [2] 3GPP TS 36.211 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and Modulation‟ [3] 3GPP TS 36.212 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding‟ [4] 3GPP TS 36.213 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures‟ [5] 3GPP TS 36.300 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2‟ [6] 3GPP TS 36.331 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification‟ [7] 3GPP TR 36.814 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects‟ [8] 3GPP TR 36.819 „Coordinated multi-point operation for LTE physical layer aspects‟ [9] 3GPP TR 36.913 „Requirements for Evolved UTRA (E-UTRA) and Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN)‟

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

31

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

LTE-ME6005, UL Smart (Interference Coordination for UL) INTRODUCTION The UL-Smart feature performs centralized coordination for the radio resource of all cells to enhance the cell performance. In this case, each eNB allocates the physical radio resource to UE based on the results of the coordination.

BENEFIT This will result in performance enhancement for UL data transmission.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency This feature works with Smart Scheduler server which supports C-RAN only, DRAN only, or H-RAN.

This function needs time synchronization. This feature follows DL Smart (LTE-ME6004) feature in terms of the network architecture, interfaces, and so on. Limitation The number of cells supported by a Smart Scheduler server is different according to the type of the server.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The network for UL-Smart is consisted of one Smart Scheduler and a large number of eNBs. Samsung supports three types of UL-Smart networks as C-RAN, D-RAN, and H-RAN. Each network diagram is referred from the following figures. (A) C-RAN

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

32

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

(B) D-RAN

(C) H-RAN

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

33

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

Each eNB is connected with Smart Scheduler server and is classified as C-RAN eNB, and D-RAN eNB according to the transmission delay between Smart Scheduler server and eNB. In figure (A), C-RAN eNB is concentrated with Smart Scheduler, so C-RAN network guarantees short transmission delay less than 1ms. Each RU distributed from C-RAN eNB is connected with DU using the dark fiber. D-RAN eNB is shown in figure (B) and is distributed from Smart Scheduler using Ethernet network connection with transmission delay longer than 1ms. Smart Scheduler server can support inter-cell interference coordination via same structure for C-RAN and D-RAN. Thus, Smart Scheduler server can support ULSmart although C-RAN eNB and D-RAN eNB are co-located in H-RAN environment. H-RAN network is shown in figure (C). In each network architecture, if there is no Smart Scheduler, eNBs can provide stand-alone operation. The following figure shows the software structure of Smart Scheduler network:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

34

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

The following functions are performed by each SW block:

Coordinator in Smart Scheduler server oDetermines inter-interference relation between serving cell and neighbor cells based on SRS. oGenerates allocation pattern using load information and inter-cell interference relation to improve the performance of cell edge UE. oTransfers resource allocation pattern to RT-Scheduler.

UE Manager in Smart Scheduler server oDetermines (1) cell edge UEs based on SRS oDetermines (2) which of cells receive inter-cell interference from UE of the serving cell based on SRS. oTransfers UE‟s information (1) and (2) to RT-Scheduler, and information (2) to Coordinator.

RT-Scheduler in eNB oTransfers load information, such as the amount of inter-cell interference which UEs generate in the serving and amount of inter-cell interference which the serving cell receives from neighbor cells, to Coordinator. oAllocates resource using UE‟s information and resource allocation pattern. UL-smart feature performs the scheduling according to the following procedure:

1 RT-Scheduler calculates the amount of inter-cell interference which UEs generate in the serving and amount of inter-cell interference which the serving cell receives from neighbor cells. And then RT-Scheduler transfers them to Coordinator in Smart Scheduler server.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

35

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

2 UE Manager determines (1) cell edge UE and (2) which of cell receive inter-cell interference from UE of serving cell based on SRS. And then UE Manager transfers UE‟s information (1) and (2) to RT-Scheduler, and information (2) to Coordinator.

3 Coordinator determines inter-interference relation between cells based on SRS. And then coordinator generates allocation pattern using load information and inter-cell interference relation.

4 Coordinator transfers resource allocation pattern to RT-Scheduler. 5 RT-Scheduler allocates resource to UEs using UE‟s information and resource allocation pattern for cell edge UEs to avoid inter-cell interference from neighbor cells.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is an optional feature and can be activated and deactivated.

Execute the RTRV-SMTUL-SCHED command to retrieve the configuration information of smart uplink scheduling.

Execute the CHG-SMTUL-SCHED command to change the configuration information of smart uplink scheduling in units of smart scheduler server. oIf the value of ulSmartCsOnOff is '0', the state of UL smart is OFF. oIf the value of ulSmartCsOnOff is not '0', the state of UL smart is ON. (The recommended value of ulSmartCsOnOff is '3')

Key Parameters RTRV-SMTUL-SCHED/CHG-SMTUL-SCHED Parameter

Description

dbIndex

This is just db index.

ulSmartCsOnOff

This parameter enables or disables the coordinated scheduling (CS) of UL smart. If ulSmartCsOnOff = 0, coordinated scheduling is OFF (false). If ulSmartCsOnOff = 1, coordinated scheduling using start RB index is ON (true). RT-Scheduler can allocate the resource from the lowest RB index or from the highest RB index for cell edge UE to avoid inter-cell interference between neighbor cells. If ulSmartCsOnOff = 2, coordinated scheduling using edge pattern is ON (true). RT-Scheduler allocates the resource using edge pattern for cell edge UE to avoid inter-cell interference between neighbor cells. If ulSmartCsOnOff = 3, coordinated scheduling using start RB index and edge pattern is ON (true). RT-Scheduler dynamically switches between CS using start RB index and CS using edge pattern.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

36

Chapter 1 Air Performance Enhancement

Counters and KPIs There is no related counter and KPI.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.101 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception‟ [2] 3GPP TS 36.211 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and Modulation‟ [3] 3GPP TS 36.212 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding‟ [4] 3GPP TS 36.213 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures‟ [5] 3GPP TS 36.300 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2‟ [6] 3GPP TS 36.331 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification‟ [7] 3GPP TR 36.814 „Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Further advancements for E-UTRA physical layer aspects‟ [8] 3GPP TR 36.819 „Coordinated multi-point operation for LTE physical layer aspects‟ [9] 3GPP TR 36.913 „Requirements for Evolved UTRA (E-UTRA) and Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN)‟

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

37

Chapter 2

Call Control

LTE-SW0111, UE Counting per Category INTRODUCTION The eNB performs counting for each category of RRC_Connected UE and collects the statistics per eNB.

BENEFIT UE counting per category supports to analyze the connected UEs' status per category.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Limitation: This statistics collection is impossible if eNB cannot acquire UE category information from MME during idle to active transition.

If a time-out occurs because UE does not transmit ATTACH COMPLETE, the statistics is counted but UE context release may be performed in MME.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION This feature enables the operator to know the number of UE in the network for each UE category. The eNB obtains UE category information during two possible states - during attachment or idle to active transition. The following figure shows during ATTACH procedure, eNB saves UE category during UE Capability Enquiry/UE Capability Information procedure and counts the statistics after ATTACH procedure is finished.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

38

Chapter 2 Call Control

The following figure shows during Idle to Active procedure, eNB saves UE category during Initial Context Setup Request/Initial Context Setup Response procedure and counts the statistics after ATTACH is finished.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable.

Key Parameters There are no related parameters.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

UE Category

UE_Category_1

Number of UEs in the UE Category 1

UE_Category_2

Number of UEs in the UE Category 2

UE_Category_3

Number of UEs in the UE Category 3

UE_Category_4

Number of UEs in the UE Category 4

UE_Category_5

Number of UEs in the UE Category 5

UE_Category_6

Number of UEs in the UE Category 6

UE_Category_7

Number of UEs in the UE Category 7

UE_Category_8

Number of UEs in the UE Category 8

UE_Category_9

Number of UEs in the UE Category 9

UE_Category_10

Number of UEs in the UE Category 10

UE_Category_11

Number of UEs in the UE Category 11

UE_Category_12

Number of UEs in the UE Category 12

UE_Category_13

Number of UEs in the UE Category 13

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

39

Chapter 2 Call Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

UE_Category_14

Number of UEs in the UE Category 14

UE_Category_15

Number of UEs in the UE Category 15

UE_Category_0

Number of UEs in the UE Category 0

REFERENCE [1] The Vendor‟s LTE solution shall support functionality to enquire UE capability and record number of UEs per eNodeB and per cell for each UE category. [2] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [3] 3GPP TS36.306 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio access capabilities (Release 9) [4] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

40

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW0114, Enhancements for Diverse Data Applications INTRODUCTION Multiple Diverse Data Applications like Instant Messaging, Interactive Content Pull, Gaming, and HTTP Video Streaming are used in UE such as Smart Phones. With increasing use of such applications, UE suffers low battery life time. So, it is necessary to optimize the power consumption of UE. Therefore, eNB is required to provide a better power efficient mode of operation.

BENEFIT Reduction in Power Consumption. Improvements in System efficiency.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Release 11 UE to support UEAssistance Information.

During transmitting UEAssistance message to UE, if UE sets powerPrefIndication to normal, UE starts or restart timer T340 with the value of powerPrefIndicationTimer received from eNB during RRCconnectionReconfiguration message.

The UE should not change the PowerPreferenceMode from Normal to lowPowerConsumption until the T340 timer expires.

The UE upon initiating RRCConnectionreestablishment procedure, releases powerPrefIndicationConfig, if configured and stop timer T340, if running.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The purpose of RAN Enhancements to Diverse Data Applications is for eNB to provide UE a power saving operation. Upon configuring UE to provide power preference indications, eNB waits for UE to provide its power saving preference. Once the Preference is known from UE, eNB provides appropriate resolution based on operator's configuration. This feature is enabled based on the Device Type of UE. If UE DeviceType is set to noBenFromBatConsumpOpt received from UE in UE-EUTRA-Capabilityv920-IE. Then this feature is disabled as no DRX solution could be provided since UE does not need a Network Controlled Battery Saving Solution. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

41

Chapter 2 Call Control

If UE DeviceType is not set to noBenFromBatConsumpOpt received from UE in UE-EUTRA-Capability-v920-IE, then this feature is enabled.

1 If this feature is enabled, eNB configures UE to provide power preference indication by sending RRC connection reconfiguration message to UE with powerPrefIndicationConfig data structure set to setup. This configuration message can be sent during any reconfiguration on the serving cell or in the reconfiguration message during handover to E-UTRA. powerPrefIndicationConfig-r11 is present in otherConfig-r9 structure. The setup parameter part of the powerPrefIndicationConfig contains powerPrefIndicationTimer-r11 parameter, which is a Prohibit timer for Power Preference Indication reporting of UE. This prevents from frequent PowerMode Change (T340 timer) of UE from Normal to Low.

2 The UE responds with RRC connection reconfiguration complete message. 3 The UE further notifies to eNB with its power saving preference by sending UEAssistanceInformation message with setting either of two possible below mentioned values opowerPrefIndication is set to lowPowerConsumption (or) opowerPrefIndication is set to normal. The UE start or restart timer T340 with timer value set to the powerPrefIndicationTimer received from eNB during RRCconnectionReconfiguration message. The UE should not change the PowerPreferenceMode from Normal to lowPowerConsumption until the T340 timer expires. The UE upon initiating RRCConnectionreestablishment procedure, UE should release powerPrefIndicationConfig, if configured and stop timer T340, if running;

4 If eNB receives the message with parameter powerPrefIndication set to olowpowerconsumption, then based on the Operator configuration, The eNB may respond to UE with either a long value for long DRX cycle or Feature/Parameter

Configuration

Value/Description

DRX

Long cycle length

80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560 ms

The eNB may respond to UE with RRC connection release message to save UE device power consumption. oNormal, then normal operation resumes.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

42

Chapter 2 Call Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the CHG-UEPWRSAVING-CONF command to set 'usedFlag' to 'USE'. The operator can disable this feature by setting the parameter to 'NO_USE'.

Key Parameters CHG-UEPWRSAVING-CONF/RTRV-UEPWRSAVING-CONF Parameter

Description

USED_FLAG

This parameter shows whether UE power saving function is supported or not.

PREF_IND_TIMER

This parameter shows Prohibit timer (T340) for Power Preference Indication reporting. Value in seconds. Value s0 means prohibit timer is set to 0 second or not set, value s0dot5 means prohibit timer is set to 0.5 second, value s1 means prohibit timer is set to 1 second and so on

SUPPORT_METHOD

This parameter shows the method to support UE power saving.

CHG-UEPWRSAVING-DRXINFO/RTRV-UEPWRSAVING-DRXINFO Parameter

Description

QCI

This parameter is the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The range is 0-255.The standard QCI defined in the standard document is 1-9. 0 and 10-255 can be used by the operator optionally.

DRX_CONFIG_SETUP

This parameter indicates whether to use the DRX for UE power saving. Release: DRX is not used. Setup: DRX profile is used

ON_DURATION_TIMER

This parameter is onDurationTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode. (onDurationTimer-Specifies the number of consecutive PDCCH-subframe(s) at the beginning of a DRX Cycle.)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

43

Chapter 2 Call Control Parameter

Description

DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER

This parameter is drxInactivityTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode. (drxInactivityTimer - Specifies the number of consecutive PDCCH-subframe(s) after successfully decoding a PDCCH indicating an initial UL or DL user data transmission for this UE.)

DRX_RETRANSMISSION_T IMER

This parameter is drxRetransmissionTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode. (drx-RetransmissionTimer - Specifies the maximum number of consecutive PDCCH-subframe(s) for as soon as a DL retransmission is expected by the UE.)

LONG_DRXCYCLE_START _OFFSET_TYPE

The long DRX cycle and drx start offset values to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode. For UE power saving, longDRCCycle can have multiples of sf80.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2. Release 11 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); RRC Control and Signalling. Release 11 [3] 3GPP TR 36.822 LTE Radio Access Network (RAN) enhancements for diverse data applications. Release 11

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

44

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW0315, Extended Access Barring (SIB14) INTRODUCTION During network congestion, core Network will not be able to allocate backhaul resources for all UE's. So, an overload control mechanism is required. Extended Access Barring (EAB) bars low priority UE's such as MTC from accessing the network during RAN overload period. These UE's are affected by relatively lesser importance. To Support EAB, barring information is transmitted in SIB14 which is broadcasted to UEs.

BENEFIT Provides RAN overload control and overload control for shared RANs. Provides Core Network Overload Control.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Release 11 UE Related Features LTE-SW4105 Access Class Barring

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Due to diverse applications and services deployed in LTE network, there could be excess traffic resulting due to use of these applications and services. So, it is necessary to mitigate E-UTRAN access during peak traffic. The peak traffic could be from both core and access network. In case of core network, MME signaling or O&M can trigger E-UTRAN to initiate EAB (From TS 23.401 Section 4.3.17.2 Point (d)). Also, peak traffic could be reduced by refraining low-priority UEs such as MTC devices to having access to eNB. 3GPP Release 11 features provides enhancements to GPRS to achieve this. This feature is Extended Access Barring. During Peak Traffic, eNB reaches congestion state.

The MME notifies to eNB about the congestion state. The eNB can initiate EAB when all MMEs connected to eNB request to restrict the load for UEs that are connected to the network with low access priority. It is achieved through OVERLOAD START message sent from MME to ENB. (From TS 23.401 Section 4.3.7.4.1).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

45

Chapter 2 Call Control

When the congestion state has reached, eNB applies EAB. The EAB is accesscontrol mechanism, which is derived from the existing Access Class Barring (ACB) method based on Access Class .In this mechanism, UE determines whether it is subject to barring based on EAB information (present in SIB14 message) from eNB. If UE in IDLE state determines that is subjected to barring, it refrains from sending a connection-request message. The EAB parameters are conveyed through SIB14 broadcast. To determine whether access barring applies, eNB provides the following EAB information in SIB14 broadcast.

Access Class's bitmap information targetted by EAB. UE category targeted by EAB. Core-eNB Overload Indication: In case of eNB to find the exact traffic area EAB to applied during Core Network Overload, following action is taken. If GUMMEI List IE is present in the received Overload START message, eNB shall, if supported, use this information to identify to which traffic the above defined rejections shall be applied. If an overload action is ongoing and eNB receives a further OVERLOAD START message, the eNB shall replace the ongoing overload action with newly requested one. [36.413 Section 8.7.6.2]

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

46

Chapter 2 Call Control

EAB Evaluation, UE and ENB Impact UE Acquires SIB14 when: oUpon receiving a PAGING message from eNB, identifies EAB Parameters modification. oIf it does not have stored a valid version of SIB14 upon entering RRC_IDLE. The eNB should set SIB14 Flag as TRUE when sending SIB1 to indicate it as present.

UE's access is denied if all the below mentioned conditions are true: oUE belongs to access class (0- 9). oUE‟s category is same as the category received in SIB14. oUE's access class is same as access class received in SIB14.

The EAB is removed by eNB through SIB14 specifying as not Barred when eNB receives OVERLOAD STOP from MME.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To change EAB activation, execute the CHG-SIB-INF/CHG-EAB-PARA command to configure the parameters (SIB 14).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

47

Chapter 2 Call Control

Key Parameters CHG-SIB-INF/RTRV-SIB-INF Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

sib14Period

This parameter is the broadcast interval for SIB 14. not_used: Does not broadcast SIB14.

CHG-EAB-PARA/RTRV-EAB-PARA Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

eabParamUsage

This parameter is the usage flag of EAB barring status.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2. Release 11 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification. Release 11 [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP). Release 11 [4] 3GPP TS22.368 Service requirements for Machine-Type Communications (MTC). Release 11 [5] 3GPP TS23.401 General Packet Radio Service enhancements for Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network. Release 11

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

48

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW0321, UE Context Management INTRODUCTION The eNB maintains UE contexts while UEs are in the RRC_CONNECTED state, and supports Initial Context Setup, UE Context Release, and Modification according to requests from MME.

BENEFIT The operator can maintain UE context for its subscribers in the RRC_CONNECTED state.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Limitation: Need UE IOT for security context modification.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Initial Context Setup The eNB performs Initial Context Setup procedures when it receives INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message from MME. Initial Context Setup procedures are used for call setup. The eNB creates UE context for UE so that it can process UE associated signaling and data transmission/reception. On receiving INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message from MME, eNB determines whether the call setup is possible or not, based on the status of resources at that moment. If there are available resources, eNB performs RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedures with UE for resource reconfiguration and transmits INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE to MME, according to 3GPP TS36.413. Usually, Initial Context Setup procedures include E-RAB setup procedures. The UE initiated Service Request triggers Initial Context Setup procedure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

49

Chapter 2 Call Control

The UE performs the random access and RRC connection establishment procedures with eNB for call setup.

1 The eNB transmits the Initial UE message to MME to establish the connection. The NAS message received from UE and SERVICE REQUEST are included in this message. oThe eNB uses eNB-UE-S1AP-ID to uniquely identify UE oThe EPS attach type may be EPS Attach (or) Combined EPS/IMSI Attach. oThe UE Identity is specified is IMSI (If UE is not registered with the network) and Old GUTI (Subsequent attach requests identify the UE with the Old GUTI).

2 If necessary, the NAS security setup or authentication procedures are performed. 3 The MME transmits the Initial Context Setup request to eNB. Information required for E-RAB(s) setup, UE contexts required by eNB to control UE, the NAS message to be sent to UE and SERVICE ACCEPT are included in the Initial Context Setup request. oS1AP Initial Context Setup Request: Contains a request to establish a context between MME-eNB and the message containing SGW tunneling information. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

50

Chapter 2 Call Control

oNAS Attach Accept: Message acknowledges the successful Attach to UE, eNB will pass this message to UE. oActivate Default Bearer Request: Message initiates the default bearer setup on UE and eNB will pass this message to UE.

4 The eNB determines whether call setup is possible based on the information received from MME. If possible, it performs the AS security activation procedure with UE.

5 The eNB reallocates internal resources for DRB(s) setup and transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to UE.

6 The UE sets up the additional DRB(s) specified by RRC Connection Reconfiguration and responds to eNB with RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete.

7 The eNB responds to MME with the Initial Context Setup response. Setup success/failure results for each E-RAB are included in the Initial Context Setup response. If eNB detects a failure in the path to the SGW, it responds to the MME with Initial Context Setup Failure message, where the cause value is 'Transport Resource Unavailable'. oThis message confirms establishment of GTP tunnel on the S1-U Interface. oThe message contains information about the RABs that are being established at startup. oEach RAB will have an E-RAB ID, transport layer IP address on eNB and eNB GTP Tunneling ID (TEID) for eNB side.

8 The MME performs the Modify Bearer procedure with S-GW/P-GW. When the path between eNB and Serving GW is in failure state, eNB responds with INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP FAILURE message instead of INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE message. It makes MME to disconnect the call of UE.

UE Context Modification The eNB performs the context modification procedure upon MME‟s request. It can change the security context, UE AMBR, and SPID through UE context modification procedure. When receiving UE Context Modification request from MME, the eNB changes UE context using the value included in the message and transmits UE Context Modification response to MME. If the security context was changed, it performs the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure with UE and then responds to MME. It uses UE context modification procedure to change UE context of the connected UE. The following UE contexts can be changed through UE context modification procedure:

UE Aggregate Maximum Bit Rate (UE AMBR) UE Security Capabilities Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

51

Chapter 2 Call Control

Security Key Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority (SPID) CSG Membership Status Registered LAI The UE context modification procedure is as follows:

If HSS initiated UE context modification procedure, HSS performs the subscriber data modification procedure with MME.

1 If UE context modification is required, MME transmits the Context Modification request to eNB.

2 The eNB changes UE context based on the information included in UE Context Modification Request message and transmits UE Context Modification Response message to MME. If the security context was changed, it performs the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure with UE and responds to MME.

UE Context Release The eNB performs UE context release procedure upon MME‟s request. The UE context release procedure is used for releasing a call from the connected UE. The MME initiated UE context release is performed based on MME‟s decision or eNB initiated UE context release is performed upon the request from the eNB. When receiving UE Context Release Command message from MME, the eNB performs the RRC Connection Release procedure with UE and transmits UE Context Release Complete message to MME. The UE context release procedure is used for call release (active-to-idle transition). The UE context release procedure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

52

Chapter 2 Call Control

If eNB initiated UE context release procedure, then eNB transmits UE Context Release request to MME to request for call release.

1 If S1 release is necessary, MME performs the Release Access Bearer procedure with S-GW.

2 The MME transmits UE Context Release command to eNB for S1 release. 3 The eNB transmits RRC Connection Release to UE. 4 The eNB performs the RRC Connection Release procedure with UE and responds to MME with UE Context Release Complete.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable.

Key Parameters CHG-SECU-INF/RTRV-SECU-INF Parameter

Description

INTEGRITY_EA_PRIOR

The integrity protection algorithm supported by the eNB EIA0: NULL EIA1: SNOW 3G EIA2: AES

CIPHER_EA_PRIOR

The ciphering algorithm supported by the eNB EEA0: NULL EEA1: SNOW 3G EEA2: AES

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

53

Chapter 2 Call Control

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

ERAB_ESTAB

EstabInitAttNbr

INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST count

EstabInitSuccNbr

INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE count

ErabInitFailNbr_CP_CC_ TO

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP)

ErabInitFailNbr_CP_CC_ FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block

ErabInitFailNbr_UP_GTP _FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to the failure in the GTP block

ErabInitFailNbr_UP_MA C_FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to the failure in the MAC block

ErabInitFailNbr_UP_PD CP_FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to the failure in the PDCP block

ErabInitFailNbr_UP_RLC _FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to the failure in the RLC block

ErabInitFailNbr_RRC_SI G_FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to receiving RRC signaling

ErabInitFailNbr_RRC_SI G_TO

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to RRC signaling timeout (not received)

ErabInitFailNbr_CP_BH_ CAC_FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to Backhaul QoS based CAC

ErabInitFailNbr_CP_CAP A_CAC_FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to Capacity based CAC

ErabInitFailNbr_CP_QO S_CAC_FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to Air QoS based CAC

ErabInitFailNbr_S1AP_C U_FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to the S1AP specification cause

ErabInitFailNbr_S1AP_LI NK_FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to the S1 SCTP link failure

ErabInitFailNbr_S1AP_S IG_FAIL

Initial E-RAB setup fails due to receiving S1AP signaling

EraseAttbyEnb_CP_CC_ TO

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP)

EraseAttbyEnb_CP_CC_ FAIL

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block

EraseAttbyEnb_UP_GTP _FAIL

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to the failure in the GTP block

EraseAttbyEnb_UP_MA C_FAIL

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to the failure in the MAC block

EraseAttbyEnb_UP_MA C_UE_INACT

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to user inactivity

EraseAttbyEnb_UP_PD CP_FAIL

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to the failure in the PDCP block

EraseAttbyEnb_UP_RLC _FAIL

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to the failure in the RLC block

EraseAttbyEnb_RRC_H C_TO

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to HO preparation timeout (not received HO command)

ERAB_ERASE_E NB

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

54

Chapter 2 Call Control Family Display Name

ERAB_ERASE ERAB_TIME

ERAB_SESSION _UE

S1SIG

Type Name

Type Description

EraseAttbyEnb_RRC_SI G_FAIL

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to receiving RRC signaling

EraseAttbyEnb_RRC_SI G_TO

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to RRC signaling timeout (not received)

EraseAttbyEnb_S1AP_C U_FAIL

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to the S1AP specification cause

EraseAttbyEnb_S1AP_R O_TO

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to the S1AP relocoverall timeout (not received)

EraseAttbyEnb_S1AP_S IG_TO

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to S1AP signaling timeout (not received)

EraseAttbyEnb_X2AP_R O_TO

eNB initiated UE Context Release fails due to the X2AP relocoverall timeout (not received)

EraseAtt

UE CONTEXT RELEASE COMMAND count

EraseSucc

UE CONTEXT RELEASE COMPLETE count

EstabTimeAvg

Average time of Initial E-RAB set-up and additional E-RAB setup

EstabTimeMax

Max. time of Initial E-RAB set-up and additional E-RAB setup

EstabTimeTot

Total time of Initial E-RAB set-up and additional E-RAB setup

EstabTimeCnt

Counts of Initial E-RAB set-up and additional E-RAB setup

SessionTimeUEAvg

Average In-Session time

SessionTimeUETot

Total In-Session time

SessionTimeUECnt

Counts of In-session time

S1ConnEstabAtt

INITIAL UE MESSSAGE count

S1ConnEstabSucc

INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST count

S1ConnEstabFail_CpCc Fail

S1 Connection Establishment fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block

S1ConnEstabFail_S1ap CuFail

S1 Connection Establishment fails due to the S1AP specification cause

S1ConnEstabFail_S1apL inkFail

S1 Connection Establishment fails due to the S1 SCTP link failure

S1ConnEstabFail_S1ap SigFail

S1 Connection Establishment fails due to receiving S1AP signaling

S1ConnEstabFail_S1ap SigTo

S1 Connection Establishment fails due to S1AP signaling timeout (not received)

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

55

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW0322, E-RAB Management INTRODUCTION The ERAB is a bearer connection between eNB and Serving GW. The MME initiates E-RAB setup, modification, and release procedures, and it also can request eNB to modify E-RAB QoS characteristics. The eNB support all those procedures according to 3GPP TS36.413. Once eNB and MME setup an E-RAB connection, eNB and S- GW can transmit user packets unlink and downlink through GTP tunnel. They distinguish each ERAB bearer by Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID).

BENEFIT The operator can provide EPS bearer service to its subscribers and manage E-RAB resources for user data transport.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION E-RAB Setup The E-RAB setup procedure is used to add an E-RAB for a new service to a connected UE. The E-RAB for a new service can be added to the connected UE through E-RAB setup procedure. When receiving the E-RAB Setup Request message from MME, the eNB considers the current resource usage status and determines whether a new bearer can be added. If a new E-RAB can be added, eNB performs the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure with UE for resource reconfiguration of the new DRB and transmits the E-RAB Setup Response message to MME. Each E-RAB will have the following information:

E-RAB ID The Transport Layer IP Address on the eNB The eNB GTP Tunneling ID (TEID) for the eNB side. QCI to assign session priority. The maximum bit rate for the E-RAB. Guaranteed bit rate for the eRAB. The E-RAB setup procedure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

56

Chapter 2 Call Control

1 The P-GW transmits the Create Bearer request to S-GW to add the new E-RAB. 2 The S-GW transmits the Create Bearer request to add the new E-RAB. 3 The MME transmit the E-RAB Setup request to start the E-RAB setup procedure. QoS information of the E-RAB(s) to be added, the NAS message to be sent to UE, and ACTIVATE DEDICATED EPS BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST are included in the E-RAB Setup request.

4 When receiving the E-RAB Setup request from MME, the eNB determines whether a new E-RAB(s) can be added. If possible, eNB reallocates internal resources and transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to UE.

5 The UE adds the new DRB(s) specified by RRC Connection Reconfiguration and replies to eNB with RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete.

6 The eNB responds to MME with the E-RAB Setup response. Setup success/failure results for each E-RAB are included in the E-RAB Setup response.

7 The UE transmits the NAS message and ACTIVATE DEDICATED EPS BEARER CONTEXT RESPONSE.

8 The eNB transmits the NAS received from UE to MME. 9 The MME transmits the Create Bearer response to S-GW. 10 The S-GW transmits the Create Bearer response to P-GW.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

57

Chapter 2 Call Control

E-RAB Modification Use the E-RAB modification procedure to change the QoS setting of a bearer (ERAB) already in service. To use the E-RAB modification procedure, operator can change UE AMBR for non-GBR bearer and E-RAB Level QoS parameters (QCI, ARP and GBR QoS Information) for GBR bearer. The E-RAB modification procedure is as follows:

1 The P-GW transmits Update Bearer Request to S-GW to change QoS setting. 2 The S-GW transmits Update Bearer Request to MME to change QoS setting. 3 The MME starts the E-RAB modification procedure by transmitting E-RAB Modify Request to eNB. The E-RAB Modify Request has the QoS information of E-RAB(s) to change, NAS message to send to UE, and MODIFY EPS BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST.

4 When eNB receives E-RAB Modify Request from MME, it selects if it is possible to change the QoS setting of the E-RAB(s). If possible, it re-allocates internal resources and transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to the MS.

5 The MS changes the QoS setting of DRB(s) that is specified in RRC Connection Reconfiguration and replies RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete to eNB.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

58

Chapter 2 Call Control

6 The eNB replies E-RAB Modify Response to MME. The E-RAB Modify Response has the success or failure of QoS setting change per E-RAB.

7 The UE transmits NAS message, MODIFY EPS BEARER CONTEXT RESPONSE.

8 The eNB transmits the NAS message received from UE to MME. 9 The MME transmits Update Bearer Response to S-GW. 10 The S-GW transmits Update Bearer Response to P-GW. E-RAB Release The E-RAB release procedure is used to release specific bearer service of a connected UE. This procedure is performed by request from MME. Also, MME requests E-RAB release based on its own decision (MME initiated E-RAB release) or as following action after an indication from eNB (eNB initiated E-RAB release). When E-RAB RELEASE REQUEST message is received from MME, eNB performs RRC connection reconfiguration procedure with UE to release the corresponding DRB (data radio bearer). When the DRB is released successfully, eNB returns E-RAB RELEASE RESPONSE message to MME. The E-RAB release procedure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

59

Chapter 2 Call Control

If eNB initiated E-RAB release procedure, eNB transmits the E-RAB Release indication to MME to notify the release of a specific E-RAB. The MME transmits the Delete Bearer command to S-GW for E-RAB release.

1 The S-GW transmits the Delete Bearer command for E-RAB release. The P-GW transmits the Delete Bearer request to S-GW for E-RAB release.

2 The S-GW transmits the Delete Bearer request to MME for E-RAB release. 3 The MME initiates the E-RAB release procedure by transmitting the E-RAB Release command. ID(s) of the E-RAB(s) to be released, the NAS message to be sent to UE and DEACTIVATE EPS BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST are included in the E-RAB Release command.

4 When receiving the E-RAB Release command from MME, eNB transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration to UE.

5 The UE releases the DRB(s) specified by RRC Connection Reconfiguration and then replies to eNB with RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete.

6 The eNB responds to MME with the E-RAB Release response. 7 The UE transmits the NAS message and DEACTIVATE EPS BEARER CONTEXT RESPONSE.

8 The eNB transmits the NAS received from UE to MME. 9 The MME transmits the Delete Bearer response to S-GW. 10 The S-GW transmits the Delete Bearer response to P-GW.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate In case of standard QCI E-RABs, there is no additional activation procedure required but to activate operator specific QCIs, execute the CHG-QCI-VAL command to equip new QCIs to be used.

Key Parameters QCIs can be configured by executing the CHG-QCI-VAL command with following parameters: Parameter

Description

QCI

QoS Class Identifier (QCI) index. The range is from 0 to 255. The QCI defined in the standard is 1 to 9. The user can use QCI values 0 and 10-255.

STATUS

Whether the QoS Class Identifier (QCI) is used. EQUIP: The QCI is used in the eNB. N_EQUIP: The QCI is not used in the eNB.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

60

Chapter 2 Call Control

Counters and KPI Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

ERAB_ESTAB_A DD

EstabAddAttNbr

ERAB SETUP REQUEST count

EstabAddSuccNbr

ERAB SETUP RESPONSE count

ErabAddFailNbr_CP_CC_ TO

E-RAB setup fails due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP)

ErabAddFailNbr_CP_CC_ FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block

ErabAddFailNbr_UP_GTP _FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to the failure in the GTP block

ErabAddFailNbr_UP_MAC _FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to the failure in the MAC block

ErabAddFailNbr_UP_PDC P_FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to the failure in the PDCP block

ErabAddFailNbr_UP_RLC _FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to the failure in the RLC block

ErabAddFailNbr_RRC_SI G_FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to receiving RRC signaling

ErabAddFailNbr_RRC_SI G_TO

E-RAB setup fails due to RRC signaling timeout (not received)

ErabAddFailNbr_CP_BH_ CAC_FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to Backhaul QoS based CAC

ErabAddFailNbr_CP_CAP A_CAC_FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to Capacity based CAC

ErabAddFailNbr_CP_QOS _CAC_FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to Air QoS based CAC

ErabAddFailNbr_S1AP_C U_FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to the S1AP specification cause

ErabAddFailNbr_S1AP_LI NK_FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to the S1 SCTP link failure

ErabAddFailNbr_S1AP_SI G_FAIL

E-RAB setup fails due to receiving S1AP signaling

ErabAddFailNbr_CP_CC_I NTERACTION

E-RAB setup fails due to ongoing inter-eNB handover

RelAttbyEnbNbr_CP_CC_ TO

eNB initiated E-RAB Release fails due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP)

RelAttbyEnbNbr_S1AP_C U_FAIL

eNB initiated E-RAB Release fails due to the S1AP specification cause

RelAttNbr

ERAB RELEASE COMMAND count

RelSuccNbr

ERAB RELEASE RESPONSE count

RelFailNbr_CP_CC_FAIL

MME initiated E-RAB Release fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block

RelFailNbr_S1AP_SIG_FA IL

MME initiated E-RAB Release fails due to receiving S1AP signaling

RelFailNbr_S1AP_CU_FAI L

MME initiated E-RAB Release fails due to the S1AP specification cause

RelActive

Number of active E-RABs abnormally released by eNB

ERAB_REL_ ENB

ERAB_REL

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

61

Chapter 2 Call Control Family Display Name

ERAB_NUM

Type Name

Type Description

RelFailNbr_CP_CC_INTE RACTION

MME initiated E-RAB Release fails due to ongoing intereNB handover

UsageNbr

Average number of E-RABs during a time period

UsageNbrMax

Maximum number of E-RABs during a time period

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

62

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW0501, S1 Interface Management INTRODUCTION The S1 interface management procedure manages the signaling associations between eNBs and MME. When eNB starts, it performs S1 setup procedures with MME according to 3GPP TS36.413, and it manages the connection by exchanging Keep Alive, S1 Reset, eNB/MME Configuration Update, and Error Indication message. The S1 interface management also include path management between eNB and SGW. Once eNB and MME setup an E-RAB connection, eNB and S-GW can transmit user packets unlink and downlink through GTP tunnel. They distinguish each E-RAB bearer by Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID). The eNB supports path management function as per 3GPP TS29.281.

BENEFIT The operator can manage the signaling associations between eNB and EPC such as setting up, resetting S1 interface, and recovering from errors.

This feature provides path monitoring between eNB and SGW

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Limitation The eNB can connect to up to 16 MMEs at the same time.

The eNB can communicate with any SGWs informed by MME without the limitation on the number of SGWs as long as there is IP connectivity between eNB and SGW.

In some operator's network, IPsec tunnelling is used between eNB and SeGW. S1 signaling and data traffic is delivered from/to EPC through the IPsec tunnel.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION There are two types of S1 interface:

S1-MME for control plane S1-U for user plane The S1-MME includes a direct SCTP connection between eNB and MME. The eNB must establish single SCTP connection to each MME during initial configuration phase. Also, SCTP connection is used to manage UE-associated S1AP connections and to carry handover related messages, eNB/MME configuration message, and NAS TRANSPORT messages. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

63

Chapter 2 Call Control

The S1-U is a direct GTP tunnel between eNB and SGW. The GTP tunnel is UEassociated connection and created when UE attaches to the network. Through the GTP tunnel, eNB delivers/receives user packets to/from S-GW. The GTP tunnel is maintained while UE is in active mode and released when UE's state changes to idle mode. The following sub-sections describe the method of configure S1-MME and S1-U interface related parameters and how eNB and MME manages S1 interface via S1AP procedures defined in 3GPP TS 36.413.

S1 Setup The S1 Setup procedure is the first S1AP procedure after a TNL (Transport Network Layer) association has been made. When this procedure is performed, the application level configuration data between eNB and MME, if there is, is removed and replaced with the newly received data. During S1 setup procedure, eNB sends its basic application level configuration data such as Global eNB ID, Supported Tracking Area list consisting of PLMN and Tracking Area Code, and Default paging DRX and MME sends its list of served GUMMEIs, Relative MME capacity and so on. If eNB initiating the S1 SETUP procedure on (or more) CSG cell(s), the S1 SETUP REQUEST message shall contain the CSG ID(s) of the supported CSG(s). The S1 Setup successful procedure is as follows:

When MME cannot accept S1 Setup request, it should respond with S1 Setup Failure and appropriate cause value. If S1 Setup Failure message includes Time to Wait IE, eNB shall wait at least for the indicated time before reinitiating the S1 Setup towards the same MME. If eNB fails to receive the S1 Setup Response message within certain amount of time configured by S1_SETUP timer, it retransmits the S1 Setup Request again to MME. Note that the S1 management interface is essential for LTE service, there is no retry count. It means that eNB retransmits S1 Setup Request to MME unlimitedly until it receives S1 Setup Response successfully from MME. TheS1 Setup unsuccessful procedure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

64

Chapter 2 Call Control

S1 Reset When an abnormal situation occurs, S1 interface of all or some UEs can be initialized through reset procedure which runs on S1-C. (However, the application level configuration data, which was exchanged by S1 Setup procedure, is not changed.) The S1 Reset procedure is executed over S1-C interface which is a control plane interface of S1. The eNB sends the Reset Acknowledge message to MMEs after receiving the Reset message and then sends the RRC Connection Release message to the target UEs. After that, UE related resources, which are controlled by eNB, are released. The S1 Reset MME triggered procedure is as follows:

Another example of S1 Reset is when eNB selects a specific S/W or H/W module is in an abnormal state and unable to provide the normal service, which has resulted in the loss of some or all transaction reference information, it sends the Reset message to the MME. When Samsung eNB determines the cell is not normal any more due to Channel Card, DSP or RF unit, it sends S1 Reset to MME. The list of UEs, whose resources should be released, can be specified by “MME UE S1AP ID” IE or eNB UE S1AP ID IE of the UE-Associated logical S1-connection list IE in S1 Reset message. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

65

Chapter 2 Call Control

Note that MME UE S1AP ID uniquely identifies a connected UE association among many UE associations within MME and “eNB UE S1AP ID” does in the same way within eNB. Hence, by informing these IDs to MME or eNB, MME or eNB can easily identify which UEs are impacted by this Reset message and releases them. The S1 Reset eNB triggered procedure is as follows:

If eNB fails to receive the S1 Reset Acknowledge message within certain amount of time configured by s1Reset timer, it retransmits the S1 Reset message again to MME upto s1ResetRetryCount times. Unlike Reset by MME, eNB does not send RRC Connection Release to UE right after Reset if Reset is triggered by eNB. The reason is that in case of Reset by eNB, the eNB is in an abnormal state and may not be able to send RRC Connection Release to the corresponding UEs correctly. Hence, instead of sending RRC Connection Release to UEs right away, the eNB relies on each UE‟s failure detection mechanism such as Radio Link Failure (RLF) detection. When UE detects RLF due to eNB‟s reset, it tries to send RRC Connection Reestablishment request to eNB and if eNB is able to accept this request, the connection continues. If it fails after several times of retries, UE will release RRC connection by itself and goes to Idle. Later when RRC connection is needed, UE will send RRC Connection Request to create new RRC connection.

Error Indication When the received message cannot be processed normally and cannot be responded with the appropriate failure message, eNB or MME can report this fact to the peer with Error Indication procedure. Currently, Samsung eNB sends Error Indication only when it fails to decode the received messages. It means whenever eNB selects that it is impossible to parse and interpret the bit stream of the received message, it sends the Error Indication with Cause IE, however, it does not send Error Indication in case of sematic error or logical errors and so on. For example, if eNB successfully decodes the received message and it turns out to have a value out of range, eNB does not send Error Indication and instead, discards or ignores the received IE or message. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

66

Chapter 2 Call Control

In case the Error Indication procedure is triggered by utilising UE associated signalling 'MME UE S1AP ID' and 'eNB UE S1AP' shall be included in the ERROR INDICATION message as below procedure. Otherwise, the Error Indication does not include 'MME UE S1AP ID' and 'eNB UE S1AP ID'. The Error Indication eNB originated procedure is as follows:

The Error Indication MME originated procedure is as follows:

eNB Configuration Update When eNB needs to update the application level data impacting UE-related context, eNB can send eNB Configuration Update message to MME with which eNB has an established S1 connection currently. If the current TAC, eNB Name, or DefaultPagingDRX value set in the PLD is changed during system operation, eNB includes not only the changed parameter values but also the unchanged parameter values in eNB Configuration Update message, and sends it to MMEs. At this time, eNB must send the message to all MMEs with S1 Setup established. When eNB Configuration Update message is sent, a timer starts configured by “s1Update” and eNB expects eNB Configuration Update Acknowledge message to be received before the timer expires. When MME cannot accept eNB Configuration Update request, it shall respond with eNB Configuration Update Failure and appropriate cause value. If eNB Configuration Update Failure message includes the Time to Wait IE, eNB shall wait at least for the indicated time before reinitiating the eNB Configuration Update towards the same MME. Both eNB and MME shall continue to operate the S1 with their respective configuration data. If eNB configuration update acknowledge message is not received before the s1Update timer expires, eNB kills the timer, resends the eNB configuration update message upto S1_UPDATE_RETRY_COUNT times. If the supported CSG ID(s) is/are to be updated in CSG or hybrid cell, the whole loss of supported CSG IDs, including those that are not to be updated, shall be included in the CSG Id List IE. The MME shall overwrite the whole list of CSG IDs Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

67

Chapter 2 Call Control

The eNB Configuration Update successful procedure is as follows:

The eNB Configuration Update unsuccessful procedure is as follows:

MME Configuration Update Similar to eNB Configuration Update, when MME needs to update the application level data impacting UE-related context, MME can send MME Configuration Update message to eNB with which eNB has an established S1 connection currently. If the current TAC, CSGID, eNBName, or DefaultPagingDRX value set in the PLD is changed during system operation, MME includes not only the changed parameter values but also the unchanged parameter values in MME Configuration Update message, and sends it to eNBs. At this time, MME must send the message to all eNBs with S1 Setup established. When MME Configuration Update message is sent, MME starts a timer configured by S1AP timer and expects an MME Configuration Update Acknowledge message from eNB before the timer expires. Note that there is no retransmission for MME Configuration Update and thus, if MME configuration update acknowledge message is not received before the timer expires, MME kills the timer and MME configuration procedure is stopped. Therefore, both eNB and MME shall continue to operate the S1 with their respective configuration data.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

68

Chapter 2 Call Control

If eNB sends MME Configuration Update failure, then there might be mismatch in the Relative MME Capacity between MME and eNB. In some cases, eNB selects MME according to the old Relative MME Capacity. The MME Configuration Update successful procedure is as follows:

The MME Configuration Update Unsuccessful procedure is as follows:

Keep Alive between eNB and MME The SCTP parameter names of the below description is used conceptually. Refer to COM-IP0401 for exact SCTP parameter names of S1 interface. The eNB and MME can monitor S1-MME connection by exchanging SCTP HEARTBEAT/ HEARTBEAT ACK messages defined by SCTP protocol. The HEARTBEAT message is periodically transmitted and the period is configured as „HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL‟. When transmitting HEARTBEAT message, eNB delivers the current time in the Heartbeat Information field, which is also included in the HEARTBEAT ACK message so that the sender and receiver can calculate the Round Trip Time (RTT). The Keep Alive between eNB and MME successful procedure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

69

Chapter 2 Call Control

When HEARTBEAT ACK message is not received, eNB tries to retransmit HEARTBEAT message periodically. The maximum number of retransmission is configured as NUM_PATH_RE_TX. The period of retransmission is „Heartbeat Retransmission Interval‟ in the below figure and calculated as HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL + RTO + RTO*[-0.5, 0.5], where RTO is increased as exponential backoff if the previous HEARTBEAT message is unanswered. The initial, minimum and maximum values are configured as RTO_INITIAL, RTO_MIN, and RTO_MAX. When HEARTBEAT ACK is not received after all the retransmission, the link status is considered as abnormal. If MME SCTP connection is considered as abnormal, MME_FAILOVER_TIMER is triggered and the call is not released when the SCTP connection is restored before the timer expiry. However, when MME_FAILOVER_TIMER expires, all active calls on the SCTP Connection are released and MME_COMMUNICATION_FAIL alarm is generated. Note that, eNB does not manage Idle calls. While MME_COMMUNICATION_FAIL alarm is ON, eNB routes new call attempts to another alive MMEs via S1-flex. For example, when there are three MMEs (MME1, MME2, MME3), eNB normally maintains three S1 interfaces, one for each MME1, MME2 and MME3 and distributes calls among them. In case S1 interface to MME1 fails, eNB routes new call attempts to two remaining MMEs (MME2 and MME3). The Keep Alive between eNB and MME unsuccessful operation procedure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

70

Chapter 2 Call Control

In case of S1 setup procedure, eNB transmits INIT message to establish SCTP association. If it fails to get the response of INIT ACK message, eNB transmits INIT message once again after one second. If it is not answered also, eNB repeats this procedure with the period of „CONNECT_INTERVAL‟ until SCTP setup is successful as described in the below figure. The SCTP Setup between eNB and MME unsuccessful procedure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

71

Chapter 2 Call Control

Path Management between eNB and S-GW According to 3GPP TS 29.281, eNB and S-GW can monitor S1-U path using ECHO REQUEST/ECHO RESPONSE messages defined by GTP-U protocol. Here, S1-U Path means a logical connection between eNB and S-GW. In other words, only single S1-U Path exists between a certain eNB and a certain S-GW even though there may be many S1 bearers between them. Hence, eNB manages only one S1-U path for each S-GW by sending an Echo Request to find out if it is alive. The following figure shows path management procedures between eNB and three S-GW, successful operation. In this case, there are three S1-U paths and for each path, eNB sends the ECHO REQUEST message to S-GW periodically and waits for ECHO RESPONSE message.

If eNB fails to receive the ECHO RESPONSE message, it resends the ECHO REQUEST message up to the configured maximum retransmissions N3_REQUEST. When eNB fails to receive the ECHO RESPONSE message even after maximum resending, it will release all E-RAB connections with the failed SGW and triggers MME to release the related calls via S1-Reset procedure. The Keep Alive between eNB and S-GW unsuccessful procedure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

72

Chapter 2 Call Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the CHG-MME-CONF command to configure MME by adding IP address and set the status to be Equip and unlock active state of the corresponding MME.

Key Parameters CHG-MME-CONF/RTRV-MME-CONF Parameter

Description

MME_INDEX

The index used to access the information. Since there are a total of 16 MMEs that can be connected to an eNB, the index range is 0 to 15.

STATUS

The EQUIP status information on MME. N_EQUIP: The MME to connect does not exist. EQUIP: The MME to connect exists

ACTIVE_STATE

The state information on the specified MME in operation. The MMEs for which the S1 Setup is established, if there is an undesired MME, this parameter value must be changed to Inactive. The default is active. If the STATUS parameter is set to Equip, it is better not to change this parameter value to inactive. Inactive: MME (S1 assigned) is not used. Active: MME (S1 assigned) is used.

IP_VER

The IP address version of MME. Either IPv4 or IPv6 is assigned.

MME_IPV4

Information on the IPV4 address of MME. This parameter value is valid only if the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv4. It is not used if the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv6.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

73

Chapter 2 Call Control Parameter

Description

MME_IPV6

Information on the IPV6 address of eNB. This parameter value is valid only if the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv6. It is not used if the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv4.

ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE

The status of MME link: Locked: A state where active calls connected to MME are all dropped, and new call connections are not possible. Unlocked: Connection to MME is normal. Shutting down: A state where active calls connected to MME are maintained, but new call connections are not possible.

SECONDARY_MME_IPV4

The secondary IP address of the IPv4 type set in MME node to support the SCTP Multi Homing function. It is valid only if the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv4. This is for SCTP multi-homing

SECONDARY_MME_IPV6

The secondary IP address of the IPv6 type set in MME node to support the SCTP Multi Homing function. It is valid only if the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv6.

S1_TUNNE_GROUP_ID

This parameter defines IPSec Tunnel Group ID of MME. (valid only if IPsec tunnel group function is supported)

This is for IPv6.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.412 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN); S1 signalling transport [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS29.281 General Packet Radio System (GPRS) Tunnelling Protocol User Plane (GTPv1-U) [5] IETF RFC4960 Stream Control Transmission Protocol

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

74

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW0510, Geo Redundancy of MME INTRODUCTION This feature is a part of S1-flex of 3GPP complaint feature, which allows eNB to interoperate with multiple MMEs for redundancy and high availability. It enables operator to configure a pool of active and standby MMEs. The eNB selects a standby MME for new UEs when all the active MMEs are down.

BENEFIT The operator can explicitly configure a group of standby MMEs to use only when all the active MMEs are out of service.

From SLR4.5, the eNB selects standby MMEs based on their Relative MME Capacity (RMC) values. The operator can control the frequent selection of certain standby MMEs using their RMC value, thereby increasing the service availability and reducing OPEX.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION The operator must ensure that the following conditions are met when enabling this feature:

Hardware: No impact Device: No impact Interface: The MME must provide the relative capacity information through S1AP interface for load balancing between MMEs.

Performance: No impact Capacity: No impact Pre-requisites: No impact

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The S1-flex feature of Samsung enables eNB to be connected with a pool of active and standby MMEs. The eNB sets up a dedicated S1 connection with the active MME when UE connects to the network. If all the active MMEs are down, S1-flex provides high availability by allowing eNB to route UE signaling messages to the standby MME. When the failed MMEs are active and take over the functional role, eNB establishes the new calls with active MMEs and maintains the ongoing calls with standby MME.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

75

Chapter 2 Call Control

Samsung eNB can have connections with up to 16 MMEs belonging to any MME pool. Within 16 MMEs, eNB can be eNB 11 of overlapping area and either eNB 10 of MME Pool Area 1 or eNB 12 of MME Pool Area 2, as shown in the figure below.

In this scenario:

The eNB 1 to 11 are connected to MME 1, MME 2, and MME 3 from MME Pool Area 1

The eNB 11 to 16 are connected to MME 4, MME 5, and MME 6 from MME Pool Area 2

The eNB 11 is at Overlapping Area and is active for both the pools Selecting Standby MME The eNB selects the active MMEs based on their RMC and backup mode configuration. It receives the processing capacity relative to other MMEs from the serving MME through the RMC IE after setting up the dedicated S1-MME connection. Before SLR 3.1, the standby MME method was not included in the feature. To support the standby MME configuration, the backup mode parameter is introduced in SLR 3.1. With this parameter, operator can set the backup mode, active or standby, of MME among the connected MMEs. In case of backward compatibility, the standby MME selection criteria from multiple standby MMEs is enhanced. The following table shows description of each selection criteria introduced after SLR 3.1: Software Release Version

Standby MME Condition

Standby MME Selection Criteria

Scenario

Before SLR 3.1

Before to SLR 3.1 package, Samsung eNB does not

Not applicable

In the figure above, eNB 11 considers all six MMEs,

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

76

Chapter 2 Call Control Software Release Version

Standby MME Condition

Standby MME Selection Criteria

support the configuration of standby MME, which implies the eNB cannot continue services if all the active MMEs are down. SLR 3.1

SLR 4.5

Scenario MME 1 to 6, as equally active if their RMC value is greater than zero and S1 SCTP connections are active.

The eNB decides whether MME is operating as standby based on either of these conditions: BackupMode= Standby RMC= 0

The eNB selects a standby MME based on the round robin method among multiple standby MMEs whose backup mode is configured as standby or RMC value is equal to zero.

Refer to 오류! 참조 원본을

The eNB decides whether MME is operating as standby under the conditions: At first, eNB checks the backup mode of MME is standby If there is no MME that meets the first condition, then eNB checks the RMC value is zero.

If there are multiple MMEs that meet the first condition, then eNB selects the standby MME among them based on its RMC value using round robin approach. If there is no MME that meets the first condition, and are only MMEs with RMC value zero, then eNB uses the round robin approach to select the standby MME among them.

Refer to 오류! 참조 원본을

찾을 수 없습니다.

찾을 수 없습니다.

Selecting Standby MME in SLR 3.1 The following figure shows a scenario where MME 1, MME 2, and MME 3 are configured as active while MME 4, MME 5, and MME 6 as standby at eNB 11. The standby MME is selected among MME 4, MME 5, and MME 6 when all the active MMEs are down.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

77

Chapter 2 Call Control

Similarly, when there is multiple standby MMEs configured, eNB selects the final MME among the standby MMEs by round robin method. The following figure shows a scenario where eNB 11 selects the final standby MME by round robin approach among the standby MMEs: MME 1, MME 2, and MME 5 if all active MME 3, MME 4, and MME 6 are down.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

78

Chapter 2 Call Control

Selecting Standby MME in SLR 4.5 The following figure shows a scenario where MME 3, MME 4, and MME 6 are configured as active while MME 1, MME 2, and MME 5 as standby at eNB 11. The standby MME is selected by weighted round robin approach among MME 1, MME 2 and MME 5 when all of MM3, MME4, and MME6 are down.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

79

Chapter 2 Call Control

Selecting Standby MME within MME Pool This feature can be used to configure standby MMEs within the same MME pool. The following figure shows a scenario where MME 3 and MME 1 are configured as standby MME at eNB 1 and eNB 10 respectively belonging to same MME Pool Area 1. The eNB1 uses MME 3 only when both MME 1 and MME 2 are down and eNB 10 uses MME 1 only when both MME 2 and MME 3 are down.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

80

Chapter 2 Call Control

Configuring Symmetric Standby MME Samsung eNB allows configuration of standby MMEs from different MME pools of other geographical zones. With this type of configuration, operator can set the standby MMEs for a pool of active MMEs, which are located at different zones. The following figure shows a typical scenario where MME Pool 1 and MME Pool 2 serve as standby MMEs for each other symmetrically:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

81

Chapter 2 Call Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To configure specific MME to be a standby MME mode (for geo redundancy backup-mode), set BACKUP_MODE of corresponding MME to be Standby.

Key Parameters CHG-MME-CONF/RTRV-MME-CONF (MME Information) Parameter

Description

MME_INDEX

The index used to access the information. Since there are a total of 16 MMEs that can be connected to an eNB, the index range is 0 to 15.

STATUS

The EQUIP status information on MME. N_EQUIP: The MME to connect does not exist. EQUIP: The MME to connect exists

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

82

Chapter 2 Call Control Parameter

Description

ACTIVE_STATE

The state information on the specified MME in operation. The MMEs for which the S1 Setup is established, if there is an undesired MME, this parameter value must be changed to Inactive. The default is active. If the STATUS parameter is set to Equip, it is better not to change this parameter value to inactive. Inactive: MME (S1 assigned) is not used. Active: MME (S1 assigned) is used.

BACKUP_MODE

This parameter defines MME's backup mode type.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

83

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW0521, X2 Interface Management INTRODUCTION The X2 interface is used for direct communication of neighbor eNBs and handover between eNBs. The X2 handover skips the steps comparing to S1 handover and reduces the total handover time. In addition, it may reduce the HO time exchanging the HO messages instead of exchanging the handover messages between eNBs through MME depending on backhaul network structure. Also, the X2 interface is for exchanging load information between neighbor eNBs. The X2 interface has control plane and user plane. The control plane connect X2 and AP via the SCTP protocol and make it possible to exchange signaling messages such as X2 handover, load information, and interference information. The user plane uses GTP tunnels to forward the user data from the source eNB to the target eNB at handover. When a neighbor cell is added to eNB, the eNB automatically sets up X2 connection with eNB which includes the target cell. The IP address of target eNB is required to set up X2 connection, use the Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) function to find the steps for getting the IP address. The X2 connection is a SCTP-based between eNBs in the X2 application layer. The X2 interface management function includes all procedure such as setup and monitoring the X2 connection, processing errors, and resetting to manage the X2 connection.

BENEFIT The operator manages the signalling associations between eNBs, surveying X2 interface, and recovering from errors.

Efficient usage of the radio resources can be provided.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Limitation Maximum 256 X2 connections are supported.

The X2 based handover between Home eNBs is allowed if no access control at MME is needed.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

84

Chapter 2 Call Control

FEATURE DESCRIPTION X2 AP Setup The X2AP setup procedure is for setting up the X2 interface between two eNBs for the first time. Assuming that eNB 1 triggers X2 setup, the X2 AP setup procedures for successful case is as follows.

1 The eNB1 sends its global eNB ID, served cell information, neighbor information, MultibandInfoList, and GU group ID list information to eNB2 using the X2 Setup Request message. (In the perspective of HeNB, eNB 1 shall contain the CSG ID IE in the X2 SETUP REQUEST message for each CSG or hybrid cell)

2 The eNB2 receives the X2 Setup Request message and stores the information contained in it in appropriate locations. Then, eNB2 sends its global eNB ID, served cell information, neighbor information, and GU group ID list information to eNB1 using the X2 Setup Response message. (In the perspective of HeNB, eNB2 shall contain the CSG ID IE in the X2 SETUP RESPONSE message for each CSG cell or hybrid cell. The eNB receiving the IE shall take this information into account when further deciding whether X2 handover between the source cell and target cell may be performed.) The X2 AP setup procedure for unsuccessful case is as follows: Samsung eNB2 sends X2 Setup failures to the eNB1 if:

received PLMN is not supported or received ECGI is not eNB2's ECGI

1 The eNB1 receives the X2 setup failure message from eNB2. 2 The eNB1 waits as long as Time To Wait as included in the X2 setup failure message and then resends the X2 setup request message to eNB2. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

85

Chapter 2 Call Control

X2 AP Reset If an abnormal failure occurs with the X2 interface between two interacting eNBs, X2AP Reset procedure is performed to reconcile the resources between the two eNBs. The X2 AP reset procedure is as follows:

1 The eNB1 sends the X2 Reset Request message to eNB 2. 2 The eNB2 sends the X2 Reset Response message to eNB1. If there are any procedures which eNB 1 is carrying out via the X2 Interface, eNB2 stops all of them and performs the Call Release procedure for the call. Samsung eNB sends X2 Reset Request message to its neighbor eNBs when the cell of eNB is going to be released. If eNB1 could not receive X2 Reset Response message, it does not resend X2 Reset Request message and there is no further actions

Keep Alive between eNBs The eNB and neighbor eNB can monitor X2 connection by exchanging SCTP HEARTBEAT/ HEARTBEAT ACK messages defined by SCTP protocol. HEARTBEAT message is periodically transmitted and the period is configured as HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL. When transmitting HEARTBEAT message, eNB delivers the current time in the Heartbeat Information field, which is also included in the HEARTBEAT ACK message so that the sender and receiver can calculate the Round Trip Time (RTT). In case of SCTP connection is disconnected, all active calls will be disconnected. Note that idle mode UEs are not maintained in eNB and HERATBEAT message is defined by SCTP layer.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

86

Chapter 2 Call Control

When HEARTBEAT ACK message is not received, eNB tries to retransmit HEARTBEAT message periodically. The maximum number of retransmission is configured as NUM_PATH_RE_TX. The period of retransmission is „Heartbeat Retransmission Interval‟ in the below figure and calculated as HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL + RTO + RTO*[-0.5, 0.5], where RTO is increased as exponential backoff if the previous HEARTBEAT message is unanswered. The initial, minimum and maximum values are configured as RTO_INITIAL, RTO_MIN and RTO_MAX. If HEARTBEAT ACK is not received after all the retransmission, the link status is considered as abnormal.

In case of X2 setup procedure, eNB transmits INIT message to establish SCTP association. If it fails to get the response of INIT ACK message, eNB retransmits INIT message after one second. If it goes unanswered, eNB repeats this procedure with the period of CONNECT_INTERVAL until SCTP setup is successful as described in the below figure.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

87

Chapter 2 Call Control

The operator could manage the neighbor eNB link status as follows:

locked: Cancels the relevant X2 handover procedure if there is any current X2 handover call, and blocks a new X2 handover out.

unlocked: Normally processes the X2 Handover. shuttingDown: Normally processes the relevant X2 handover procedure if there is any current X2 handover call, and blocks a new X2 handover out. To recover X2 connection, operator can perform the following actions through LSM. (Refer the detail to the system operation part)

Turn OFF/ON x2 connection with each neighbor eNB manually. Send SCTP ABORT message only to neighbor eNBs which current X2 status is enable.

Send SCTP ABORT message to all neighbor eNBs regardless of the current X2 interface status.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Pre-condition SCTP connection is established and operational state is normal. Activation The NO_X2 value must be set to 'False'. Deactivation The NO_X2 value must be set to 'True'.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

88

Chapter 2 Call Control

Key Parameters The maximum number of X2 neighbor eNB is 256 or 512. The following table shows the several system parameters of each neighbor eNB information: CRTE-NBR-ENB/DLT-NBR-ENB/CHG-NBR-ENB/RTRV-NBR-ENB Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates the validity of the neighbor eNB. N_EQUIP: The information is determined as invalid. EQUIP: The information is determined as valid. This parameter must be set accurately since it determines the X2 link and handover execution.

NO_X2

This parameter determines whether to execute X2 link setup with the neighbor eNB. False: X2 link setup with the neighbor eNB is executed. True: X2 link setup with the neighbor eNB is not performed. The parameter must be set accurately for X2 link setup to be determined by the setting.

NO_HO

This parameter determines whether HO is possible with the neighbor eNB. False: Handover is done with the neighbor eNB. True: Handover is not done with the neighbor eNB. The parameter must be set accurately for Handover to be executed as determined by the setting.

ENB_ID

This parameter indicates the eNB ID of the neighbor eNB to which the neighbor cell belongs. Depending on the neighbor eNB type, the entry must be made in 20 bits for Macro eNB ID, and 28 bits for Home eNB. This information is used during handover. The eNB ID of the neighbor eNB must be entered accurately. If the information does not match, the Handover will not be executed.

ENB_TYPE

This parameter is the eNB type of the neighbor eNB. Macro_eNB: Macro eNB. Home_eNB: Home eNB.

ENB_MCC

This parameter is the PLMN information (MCC) that represents the neighbor eNB. Enter a 3-digit number whose each digit ranges from 0 to 9.

ENB_MNC

This parameter is the PLMN information (MNC) that represents the neighbor eNB. Enter a 2-digit or 3-digit number of whose each digit ranges from 0 to 9.

IP_VER

IP address version indicating the IP address of a neighboring eNB. All neighboring eNB IP version information must be the same. IPV4: Indicates IPV4 address. IPV6: Indicates IPV6 address.

NBR_ENB_IPV4

This parameter indicates the IP version 4 address of the neighbor eNB. This information is used during X2 Link setup for the SCTP connection setup. Accurately set the information to ensure proper X2 setup.

NBR_ENB_IPV6

This parameter indicates the IP version 6 address of the neighbor eNB. This information is used during X2 Link Setup for the SCTP connection setup. Accurately set the information to ensure proper X2 setup.

SECONDARY_NBR_ENB_ IPV4

This parameter indicates the secondary IPv4 address of the neighbor eNB. This information is used during SCTP multi-homing connection setup.

SECONDARY_NBR_ENB_

This parameter indicates the secondary IPv6 address of the neighbor eNB.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

89

Chapter 2 Call Control Parameter IPV6

Description This information is used during SCTP multi-homing connection setup.

ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE

This parameter is the neighbor eNB link status information. locked: Cancels the relevant X2 handover procedure if there is any current X2 handover call, and blocks a new X2 handover out. unlocked: Normally processes the X2 Handover. shuttingDown: Normally processes the relevant X2 handover procedure if there is any current X2 handover call, and blocks a new X2 handover out.

REMOTE_FLAG

This parameter indicates whether the neighbor eNB is managed by the same EMS or a different EMS. False: Neighbor eNB is managed by the same EMS. True: Neighbor eNB is managed by a different EMB.

The SCTP protocol manages using several system parameters for time interval of heartbeat message broadcast, re-broadcasting times of heartbeat or data message, and initial re-broadcast timeout value for Round Trip Time (RTO), minimum rebroadcast timeout value for RTO, maximum re-broadcast timeout value for RTO, and init message broadcast time interval for re-connection trial. Details are shown in below table. CHG-SCTP-PARA/RTRV-SCTP-PARA Parameter

Description

HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL

This parameter is the interval of transmitting a heartbeat message. A heartbeat message is transmitted to check the validity of a link in the SCTP protocol.

NUM_PATH_RE_TX

This parameter is the re-transmission count by which the SCTP path will be failure if the response to the heartbeat or SCTP data is not received for more than NUM_PATH_RE_TX.

RTO_INITIAL

This parameter is the value used to calculate the SCTP round trip time (RTT). It is the initial value of the Retransmission TimeOut which is used before the RTT value is measured through packet transmission.

RTO_MIN

The minimum value of the Retransmission TimeOut used to calculate the SCTP Round Trip Time (RTT).

RTO_MAX

The maximum value of the Retransmission TimeOut used to calculate the SCTP Round Trip Time (RTT).

CONNECT_INTERVAL

This parameter is the timer value to transmit the init msg. to attempt SCTP connection periodically if a SCTP link is not set up for a peer node which is equipped to the PLD.

NUM_ASSOC_RE_TX

The number of times to retransmit heartbeat messages or SCTP data messages in order to check whether the SCTP link is normal. The SCTP Association is disconnected if responses to the heartbeats or SCTP data messages are not received during specified (NUM_ASSOC_RE_TX) attempts.

Monitoring SCTP and X2 state of neighbor eNB are possible using RTRV-X2STS command. The following table shows output information: RTRV-X2-STS Parameter

Description

NBR_ENB_INDEX

This parameter is the index of the neighbor eNB.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

90

Chapter 2 Call Control Parameter

Description

NBR_ENB_ID

This parameter is the ID of the neighbor eNB.

SCTP_STATE

This parameter is the Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) status. It is the physical connection status between the eNBs. disable_SD_PlmnTg_MIS: shutdown by PLMN TGID (TunnelGroupId) setting mismatch disable_SD_PlmnTg_UA: shutdown by undecidable PLMN TGID disable_SD_PlmnVr: shutdown by VR (Virtual Route) ID deletion. disable_SD_NoX2: shutdown by NO_X2 setting disable_SD_SonAnr: shutdown by one-way neighbor addition disable_ABT_Inact: abort by SCTP INIT disable_OOS: out of service (all case without above case)

X2AP_STATE

This parameter is the X2AP status. It is the logical connection status between eNBs. If SCTP is disabled, X2AP cannot be enabled.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN); S1 application protocol (S1AP) [3] 3GPP TS36.423 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN); X2 application protocol (X2AP)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

91

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW3010, PDCP Sublayer Support INTRODUCTION In LTE system, the layer2 is split into three sublayers:

Medium Access Control (MAC) Radio Link Control (RLC) Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) The PDCP sublayer is defined in 3GPP TS36.323 specification, which provides the following services and functions:

Delivery of control/user plane data Ciphering Integrity protection Header compression and so on

BENEFIT The PDCP sublayer enables basic LTE service, which includes delivery of control/user plane data.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The PDCP sublayer processes Radio Resource Control (RRC) messages in the control plane and Internet Protocol (IP) packets in the user plane. The main functions are header compression, security (integrity protection and ciphering), and support for reordering and retransmission during handover. Each radio bearer that uses the PDCP sublayer is configured to have one PDCP entity. Only SRBs/DRBs mapped on DCCH and DTCH type of logical channels can use PDCP sublayer functions. The PDCP sublayer provides the following functions:

Header compression and decompression of user plane data Transfer of control/user plane data PDCP Sequence Number (SN) maintenance Timer based discard of user plane data Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

92

Chapter 2 Call Control

Discard of duplicates In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs at PDCP re-establishment of lower layers for RLC AM

Duplicate detection/elimination of lower layer SDUs at PDCP re-establishment for RLC AM

Ciphering and deciphering of user plane data and control plane data Integrity protection and verification of control plane data

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable.

Key Parameters There are no related parameters.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

Packet Loss Rate

PdcpSduLossRateUL

The calculated average loss rate of uplink SRB Packet that is received in the PDCP

PdcpSduTotalULNum

The number of UL PDCP SDUs

PdcpSduLossULNum

The number of lost UL PDCP SDUs

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.323 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) specification

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

93

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW4101, Capacity based Call Admission Control INTRODUCTION The Call Admission Control (CAC) function is basically enabled to efficiently use the limited radio resources, to guarantee the quality of user service even in case of congestion, and to protect eNB system from being overloaded. There are three types of call admission control functionalities:

Capacity-based Call Admission Control QoS-based Call Admission Control Pre-emption The Capacity-based CAC makes a decision based on the capacity that operator configures in advance. The QoS based CAC makes a decision based on the required QoS level and available radio resources of that time. The QoS based CAC has an effect only when MME requests GBR bearers. The Pre-emption allows a priority call. These three functionalities work at the same time. The operator can configure the capacity per cell and per eNB. To sustain a certain level of QoS for non-GBR services, operator can limit the maximum number of users allowed per cell. In addition, operator can configure the amount of resources that are reserved for incoming handover calls. In this case, the call admission algorithms make a decision based on the capacity that reflects the reserved resources. In case of no resources, emergency calls are allowed by pre-empting existing calls.

BENEFIT By limiting the maximum number UEs or bearers per cell and per eNB, considering radio and backhaul bandwidth, operator can control the minimum QoS level provided for UEs.

The operator can protect the system from being shutdown due to overload or congestion

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

94

Chapter 2 Call Control

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Functional Architecture for CAC The Capacity based CAC operates on the RRC connection establishment and ERAB bearer establishment while QoS based CAC and Pre-emption has impact on E-RAB bearer establishment only. This feature covers capacity based CAC. In case of other two CAC features, refer to LTE-SW4102 and LTE-SW4103. The overall call admission control procedure is as follows:

Capacity Based CAC Scheme The Capacity based CAC allows an incoming call or bearer as long as the total number of calls/bearers does not exceed the pre-configured thresholds per cell and eNB. There exist three kinds of thresholds: threshold for normal, threshold for emergency and handover user, and the maximum. These thresholds per eNB can be shown the figure below. Normal users can be allowed up to NOR_ENB_CALL_COUNT per eNB. Emergency and HO users can be allowed up to EM_HO_ENB_CALL_COUNT per eNB. These thresholds can be configured for CAC via LSM by using CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL and CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO as follows:

NOR_ENB_CALL_COUNT = MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT * CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL for the corresponding eNB. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

95

Chapter 2 Call Control

EM_HO_ENB_CALL_COUNT = MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT * CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO for the corresponding eNB. .

Also, there exist similar thresholds per cell as the figure below. Normal users can be allowed up to NOR_CELL_CALL_COUNT per cell. Emergency and HO users can be allowed up to EM_HO_CELL_CALL_COUNT per cell. These thresholds can be configured for CAC via LSM by using CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL and CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO as follows:

NOR_CELL_CALL_COUNT = MAX_CELL_CALL_COUNT * CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL for the corresponding cell.

EM_HO_CELL_CALL_COUNT = MAX_CELL_CALL_COUNT * CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO for the corresponding cell.

In case of radio bearer, capacity-based CAC applies similar concept per cell as illustrated in the figure below. Bearers for normal users can be allowed up to NOR_DRB_CALL_COUNT per cell. Bearers for emergency and HO users can be allowed up to EM_HO_DRB_COUNT per cell. Theses thresholds can be configured for CAC by using DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL and DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO as follows:

NOR_DRB_COUNT = MAX_DRB_COUNT * DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL for the corresponding cell.

EM_HO_DRB_COUNT= MAX_DRB_COUNT * DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO for the corresponding cell.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

96

Chapter 2 Call Control

eNB Capacity Based CAC Parameters In case of capacity concern, operator should consider the hardware platform and radio resources, for example, radio bandwidth, the number of channel card, and QoS level. The following table shows an example in case of 10 MHz bandwidth and the maximum values can be diverse in different channel card. The following table shows an example of system parameters configuration for capacity-based CAC. System parameter configuration can be different according to channel card and system bandwidth. System Parameters

Criteria (10 MHz BW)

Decision

MaxUeCELL (=MAX_CELL_CALL_COUNT)

600

Current # of UEs of the cell < MaxUeCELL

MaxUeENB (=MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT)

1800

Current # of UEs of the eNB < MaxUeENB

MaxRbUE

8

Current # of bearers of the UE < MaxRbUE

MaxRbCELL (=MAX_DRB_COUNT)

1200

Current # of bearers of the cell < MacRbCELL

In this context, number of active UE is equal to the number of active RRC Connections. In case of number of bearers, GBR bearers and Non-GBR bearers are counted all together. The Maximum number of radio bearers per UE, which counts only data radio bearers excluding signaling radio bearers, is limited by MAC layer protocol specification (3GPP TS 36.321) and it is not configurable by operator. The operator can configure the amount of resources that are reserved for incoming handover calls. In this case, the call admission algorithms make a decision based on the capacity that reflects the reserved resources.

Capacity Based CAC Operation This section describes capacity-based CAC operation in each call procedure: Capacity Based CAC Operation at RRC Connection Establishment

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

97

Chapter 2 Call Control

1 During the RRC connection establishment, eNB capacity-based CAC operates per call. The procedure starts when the RRC connection request message is received from UE.

2 The eNB capacity-based CAC procedure is initiated. Initially, the CAC operates at eNB level. If eNB level CAC is passed, cell level CAC proceeds. Detailed procedure can be described as follows: oeNB level CAC If the attempted RRC Connection is for normal user, NOR_ENB_CALL_COUNT is applied for the threshold. If the current number of UEs in the eNB is less than NOR_ENB_CALL_COUNT, eNB level CAC for the RRC Connection is passed. Otherwise, the call is rejected. If the attempted RRC Connection is for an emergency user, EM_HO_ENB_CALL_COUNT is applied for the threshold. If the current number of UEs in eNB is less than EM_HO_ENB_CALL_COUNT, eNB level CAC for the RRC Connection is passed. Otherwise, the call is rejected. oCell level CAC If the attempted RRC Connection is for normal user, NOR_CELL_CALL_COUNT is applied for the threshold. If the current number of UEs in the cell is less than NOR_CELL_CALL_COUNT, eNB level CAC for the RRC Connection is passed. Otherwise, the call is rejected. If the attempted RRC Connection is for an emergency user, EM_HO_CELL_CALL_COUNT is applied for the threshold. If the current number of UEs in the cell is less than EM_HO_CELL_CALL_COUNT, eNB level CAC for the RRC Connection is passed. Otherwise, the call is rejected.

3 If the call is rejected and RRCConnectionReject is sent to UE, depriotisationReq IE can be populated according to the configuration. RRCConnectionReject-v1130-IEs ::= SEQUENCE { deprioritisationReq-r11 SEQUENCE { deprioritisationType-r11 ENUMERATED {frequency, e-utra}, deprioritisationTimer-r11 ENUMERATED {min5, min10, min15, min30} } OPTIONAL, -- Need ON nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {} OPTIONAL}

4 If both eNB and cell level CAC is passed, RRC connection establishment is initiated by transmitting the RRC connection setup message to UE. If the call is rejected and the call type is an emergency call, the longest call among active calls in the cell is released. In case of a normal call, the RRC connection release message is transmitted to UE and the call is released.

5 The UE transmits the RRC Connection Setup Complete message. 6 The eNB sends MME Initial UE message

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

98

Chapter 2 Call Control

Capacity Based CAC Operation at E-RAB Setup

After the RRC establishment, eNB capacity-based CAC operates by receiving the initial context setup request or E-RAB setup/modify request message from MME for the default radio bearer and dedicated radio bearer (DRB) setup.

1 The eNB capacity-based CAC runs per E-RAB. oIf the attempted bearer is for normal user, NOR_DRB_COUNT is applied for the threshold. If current number of bearers in the cell is less than NOR_DRB_COUNT, call is admitted. Otherwise, the call is rejected. oIf the attempted bearer is for emergency user, EM_HO_DRB_COUNT is applied for the threshold. If current number of bearers in the cell is less than EM_HO_DRB_COUNT, call is admitted. Otherwise, the call is rejected.

2 If the E-RAB is successfully admitted, the RRC connection reconfiguration message is transmitted to UE to initiate E-RAB (DRB) establishment.

3 If the call is rejected, whether to admit the E-RAB is determined in interoperation with pre-emption function per E-RAB (DRB) to control the call flow (a partial success per E-RAB is ignored).

4 The eNB sends MME E-RAB setup message.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

99

Chapter 2 Call Control

Capacity Based CAC Operation at Intra-eNB Handover

The eNB receives a measurement report from UE.

1 When cell change take places within the same eNB, the eNB capacity-based CAC operates to control intra-eNB handover call admission.

2 The eNB capacity-based CAC is initiated based on a call. If the current number of UEs in the cell is less than EM_HO_ENB_CALL_COUNT, the call is admitted. Otherwise, the call is rejected. If current number of bearers in the cell is less than EM_HO_DRB_COUNT, call is admitted. Otherwise, the call is rejected.

3 If the call is admitted, the RRC connection reconfiguration message is transmitted to UE to initiate the intra-eNB handover. If the call is rejected, whether to admit the E-RAB is determined in interoperation with the preemption function per E-RAB (DRB) to control the call flow (a partial success per E-RAB is ignored).

4 The UE transmits RRC connection reconfiguration complete message.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

100

Chapter 2 Call Control

Capacity Based CAC Operation at Inter-eNB Handover

1) The eNB receives a measurement report from UE. 2) The source eNB determines HO and sends the target eNBs a Handover Request message. 3) To control inter-eNB handover call admission, eNB capacity-based CAC operates by using the E-RAB Level QoS parameter included in the Handover Request message received. The eNB capacity-based CAC is initiated based on a call. If the current number of UEs in the cell is less than EM_HO_ENB_CALL_COUNT, call is admitted. Otherwise, the call is rejected. If current number of bearers in the cell is less than EM_HO_DRB_COUNT, call is admitted. Otherwise, call is rejected. 4) If call is admitted, the Handover Request Acknowledge message is transmitted to the source eNB to initiate the inter-eNB handover. If call is rejected, whether to admit the E-RAB is determined in interoperation with the pre-emption function per E-RAB (DRB) to control the call flow (a partial success per E-RAB is ignored) 5~6) The source eNB transmits the RRC connection reconfiguration message to UE and performs SN Status Transfer. 8~10) After path switch procedure, the target eNB sends Release Request to source eNB.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the RTRV-ENB-CAC command to retrieve eNB Call Admission Control. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

101

Chapter 2 Call Control

Execute the RTRV-CELL-CAC command to retrieve the Cell Call Admission Control.

Execute the CHG-ENB-CAC command to configure the performance of the CAC function in the eNB unit.

Execute the CHG-CELL-CAC command to configure the performance in the cell unit.

Key Parameters CHG-ENB-CAC/RTRV-ENB-CAC/CHG-CELL-CAC/RTRV-CELL-CAC Parameter

Description

CALL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE

Whether to execute the Capacity-based Call Admission Control (CAC) function per cell. ci_no_use: The capacity-based CAC function per base station is not performed. ci_use: The capacity-based CAC function per base station is performed.

CELL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE

Whether to execute the call count-based CAC function, which is one of the capacitybased Call Admission Control (CAC) functions per cell. ci_no_use: The capacity-based CAC function per cell is not performed. ci_use: The capacity-based CAC function per cell is performed.

CHG-RRCONNREJECTDEPRIO-INF/RTRV-RRCONNREJECTDEPRIO-INF Parameter

Description

REJECT_DEPRIORITY_USE

This attribute represents the use of de-prioritisation IE in RRC Connection Reject message.

DEPRIORITY_TYPE

This attribute represents the de-prioritisationType IE (frequency or E-UTRA) in RRC Connection Reject message.

CHG-TIME-INF/RTRV-TIME-INF Parameter

Description

T325

This parameter is the timer value which UE start depriorising either the current carrier frequency or E-UTRA. The UE start this timer when RRC Connection Reject message which including deprioritisationReq. The default value is min5, and it can be changed by the operator during operation as follows: 0: indicates 5 minutes 1: indicates 10 minutes 2: indicates 15 minutes 3: indicates 30 minutes Refer to TS36.331 T325 for detail.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

102

Chapter 2 Call Control

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

103

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW4103, Preemption INTRODUCTION In case of no resource available, eNB can admit a new bearer by preempting existing bearers. This feature can be used to provide admission to priority users even in congestion. The decision is based on Allocation and Retention Priority (ARP) information of new bearer(s) and existing bearer(s). The ARP consists of priority level, preemption capability, and preemption vulnerability, which are delivered from MME to eNB during E-RAB establishment. When there are multiple preemptive candidate bearers, eNB selects a longest call. The MME has responsibility to configure appropriate ARP per each bearer.

BENEFIT The operator can provide a differentiated service that allows a high-priority UE to access the network even in congestion.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency MME to support this feature Limitation A connected UE could experience a call drop when eNB is congested. Related Features LTE-SV0101 IMS based Emergency

LTE-SV0105 eMPS LTE-SW4101 Capacity based CAC LTE-SW4102 QoS based CAC

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Functional Architecture for CAC The Capacity based CAC has impact on RRC connection establishment and ERAB bearer establishment while QoS based CAC and Pre-emption has impact on E-RAB bearer establishment only. This section covers preemption. In case of other two CAC features, refer to LTE-SW4101 and LTE-SW4102. The functional architecture of Call Admission Control (CAC) is as follows: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

104

Chapter 2 Call Control

The preemption function is applied to GBR and non-GBR bearers in case of no resources available. Related resources are the number of bearers defined per cell. If operator provides QoS service and has limited resources that can be allocated to GBR bearers, the lack of GBR bearers, PRBs and backhaul bandwidth can trigger preemption function. In this case, an existing GBR bearer will be preempted. The eNB follows the preemption rules defined in 3GPP TS36.413. If there are multiple preemption candidates that have the same ARP, eNB will select a candidate bearer at random. Parameter

Presence

Range

IE Type and Reference

Semantics Description

Priority Level

M

-

INTEGER (0…15)

The priority of allocation and retention. Value 15 means 'no priority'. Values between 1 and 14 are ordered in decreasing order of prioirty, that is 1 is the highest and 14 the lowest. Value 0 shall be treated as a logical error if received.

Pre-emption Capability

M

-

ENUMERATED (shall not trigger pre-emption, may trigger preemption)

This indicates pre-emption capability of the request on other E-RABs. The E-RAB shall not pre-empt other E-RABs or, it may pre-empt other E-RABs. The Pre-emption Capability indicator applies to the allocation of resources for an E-RAB and as such it provides the trigger to the pre-emption procedures/processes of the eNB.

Pre-emption Vulnerability

M

-

ENUMERATED (not pre-emptable, pre-emptable)

This IE indicates the vulnerability of the E-RAB to preemption of other E-RABs. The E-RAB shall not be pre-empted by other ERABs or the E-RAB may be pre-empted by other RABs. Pre-emption Vulnerability indicator applies

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

105

Chapter 2 Call Control Parameter

Presence

Range

IE Type and Reference

Semantics Description for the entire duration of the E-RAB, unless modified and as such indicates whether the ERAB is a target of the pre-emption procedures/processes of the eNB.

Handover of Preempted UE The preempted UE can be handed over to a neighbor cell. The eNB sends MR Solicitation to preempted UE and it performs handover procedures based on the measurement result from UE. If multiple carriers are available, they are all configured for the measurement. The operator can configure handover thresholds appropriately for the peemption case. Also, they can enable or disable the handover of preempted UE. According to eNB and UE situation, call procedure executed can be divided as follows:

Inter-frequency handover: The UE to be pre-empted supports multiple E-UTRA carriers, and inter-frequency handover is available according to the CAC preemption handover function.

Intra-frequency handover: The UE to be pre-empted does not support multiple EUTRA carriers, and intra-frequency handover is available according to the CAC pre-emption handover function.

Inter-frequency redirection: The UE to be pre-empted supports multiple E-UTRA carriers, and inter-frequency handover is not available according to the CAC pre-emption handover function.

RRC connection release: The UE to be pre-empted does not support multiple EUTRA carriers, or it supports multiple E-UTRA carriers, but inter-frequency handover and inter-frequency redirection are not available according to the CAC pre-emption handover function. The following flowchart shows operation flow before the CAC pre-emption handover function executes:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

106

Chapter 2 Call Control

Upon receiving a new call/bearer setup or handover request, eNB performs CAC function.

1 After CAC function is performed in step1, if the new 'call/bearer setup or handover' request can be accepted without pre-emption, the request is accepted and the next procedure is performed.

2 After CAC function is performed in step1, if pre-emption is needed, pre-emption function is performed to decide whether pre-emption of the existing call is available.

3 If pre-emption of the existing call is available in step3, the new 'call/bearer setup or handover' request is accepted, and the next procedure is performed.

4 The CAC pre-emption handover function is performed for the pre-empted call selected in step3. Also, CAC pre-emption handover is operated only when the entire call is pre-empted. When only some bearers of a call are pre-empted, CAC pre-emption handover is not operated for the call.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

107

Chapter 2 Call Control

5 If pre-emption of the existing call is unavailable in step3, the new 'call/bearer setup or handover' request is rejected, and the next procedure is performed. The CAC pre-emption handover function is as follows:

The eNB operates CAC pre-emption handover function according to the result of the CAC/pre-emption performance. (Continued from the [A] of the operation flow before the CAC pre-emption handover function executes.)

1 The eNB finds whether there is enough resource available for the CAC preemption handover process. oIf the CAC pre-emption handover process is available in step1, step 2 is performed. oIf the CAC pre-emption handover process is not available in step1, step 7 is performed.

2 The eNB decides target carrier that will handover the pre-empted call. oIf UE does support multiple E-UTRA carriers, one of the carriers that are not a serving carrier is selected. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

108

Chapter 2 Call Control

oIf UE does not support multiple E-UTRA carriers, the serving carrier is selected.

3 The eNB solicits UE for measurement report for the target carrier selected in step2. At this moment, it starts a wait timer to determine whether the measurement solicitation fails.

4 When the measurement report message is received from UE while the wait timer of step3 is in operation, eNB checks if there exist neighbor cells whose UE measurement results are above the configured threshold.

5 If there exist neighbor cells whose UE measurement results are above the configured threshold in step4, the best cell is selected among cells and handover preparation procedure starts.

6 If the handover preparation succeeds in step5, UE to be pre-empted is directed to perform handover.

7 If one of the events below occurs during step4 to 6, CAC pre-emption handover is unavailable. Thus it should be judged whether inter-frequency redirection is available. oThe wait timer of step3 expires while the measurement report message is not received from UE yet. oIn step 4, there is no neighbor cell whose UE measurement result is above the configured threshold. oIn step5, the handover preparation fails.

8 In step7, if UE does support multiple E-UTRA carriers, one of the carriers that are not a serving carrier is selected and inter-frequency redirection is performed.

9 In step7, if UE does not support multiple E-UTRA carriers, inter-frequency redirection is unavailable. Thus, RRC connection release procedure is performed.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The operator can enable the preemption function by setting PREEMPTION_FLAG to USE by executing the CHG-CELL-CAC command.

When this function is disabled, eNB ignores the ARP information received from MME and it does not admit a new bearer when the configured maximum number of bearers is all used.

The operator can also enable the preemption handover function by setting ACTIVE_STATE to ACTIVE by executing the CHG-PREEMPT-HO command.

Key Parameters CHG-CELL-CAC/RTRV-CELL-CAC Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

109

Chapter 2 Call Control Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by Carrier/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity system is 1 Carrier/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

PREEMPTION_FLAG

This parameter decides whether the cell enables or disables the use preemption functionality.

CHG-PREEMPT-HO/RTRV-PREEMPT-HO Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by Carrier/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity system is 1 Carrier/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

ACTIVE_STATE

Whether to use the Preemption Handover Function

PREEMPTION_HO_THRES HOLD_RSRP

RSRP threshold used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for Preemption Handover.

PREEMPTION_HO_THRES HOLD_RSRQ

RSRQ threshold used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for Preemption Handover.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

Preemption Handover per ERAB

PreemptHoDropBearerI ntra

Number of bearers released as a result of inter-eNB HO failure while performing intra-eNB HO due to CAC preemption HO operation

PreemptHoBearerIntra

Number of bearers handed over as a result of successful intra-eNB HO among the bearers on which preemption HO is performed instead of being released due to CAC preemption HO operation

PreemptHoDropBearerI nterX2

Number of bearers released as a result of X2HO failure while performingX2HO due to CAC preemption HO operation

PreemptHoBearerInterX 2

Number of bearers handed over as a result of successful inter-eNB X2HO among the bearers on which preemption HO is performed instead of being released due to CAC preemption HO operation

PreemptHoDropBearerI nterS1

Number of bearers released as a result of S1HO failure while performingS1HO due to CAC preemption HO operation

PreemptHoBearerInterS 1

Number of bearers handed over as a result of successful inter-eNB S1HO among the bearers on which preemption HO is performed instead of being released due to CAC preemption HO operation

PreemptHoErabCnt

Count of Preemption Handover per ERAB collected

PreemptHoErabTargetE arfcnDL

TargetEarfcnDl requested for collection

PreemtIntraEnbAtt

Intra-handover attempt count.

PreemtIntraEnbPrepSu cc

Total intra handover preparation success count

PreemtIntraEnbSucc

Total intra handover execution success count

PreemtInterX2OutAtt

X2-based preemption handover attempt count in

Preemption Handover

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

110

Chapter 2 Call Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description SeNB

PreemtInterX2OutPrep Succ

X2-based preemption handover preparation success count in SeNB

PreemtInterX2OutSucc

X2-based preemption handover execution success count in SeNB

PreemtInterS1OutAtt

S1-based preemption handover attempt count in SeNB

PreemtInterS1OutPrep Succ

S1-based preemption handover preparation success count in SeNB

PreemtInterS1OutSucc

S1-based preemption handover execution success count in SeNB

NoAvailableTargetCarri er

Counted when redirection is performed to the serving carrier because the target carrier of the UE does not exist during preemption HO.

MrSolicitFail

Counted when redirection is performed because MR solicit is performed by specifying a target carrier for preemption HO but no target cell above the MR threshold for preemption HO is identified within the specified timer period or report amount.

HoPrepFail

Counted when redirection is performed due to intra/S1/X2 HO preparation failure although a target carrier for preemption HO is specified and a target cell is specified as a result of successful MR solicit.

PreemptHoCnt

Count of Preemption Handover collected

PreemptHoTargetEarfc nDL

TargetEarfcnDl requested for collection

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP), Section 9.2.1.60

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

111

Chapter 2 Call Control

LTE-SW5500, CA Call Control INTRODUCTION The Carrier Aggregation (CA) is LTE-Advanced key feature that enhances the peak throughput and quality of UE by allowing UE to use two or more carrier resources simultaneously. According to 3GPP standard, single UE may aggregate up to 5 carriers and 100 MHz frequency bandwidth at the same time. Due to this feature, eNB performs the following functions:

Selection of secondary cells (SCells) Decision on the allowance of SCell addition Delivery of the L1 and L2 configuration information for SCells The basic call processing procedures such as UE Context Setup and Handover are upgraded to support the aforementioned functions.

BENEFIT The operator can enhance the utilization of frequency resource and obtain load balance effects, and more for scheduling.

The UE can improve throughput and reduce file download delay.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Rel 10 UE that supports carrier aggregation

Depending on the standard, up to 5 carriers per UE can be aggregated.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The eNB supports two following operating modes to effectively support the CA development scenario of 3GPP Rel10 TS36.300 Annex J: CA Operation Mode

Mode 1

Mode 2

Desirable Deployment Scenario

#1

#1, #2

Characteristics

Every PCells and SCells are 1:1 paired. The pre-designated paired SCell is always configured on initial connection and HO in (Colocated)

Release and re-connection SCell based on PCell-SCell Paired, and MR at initial connection and HO in (Co-located + MR)

SCell Configuration

SCell Configuration Event A2 Configuration for SCell release

Measurement Configuration State

Configured Frequency

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

112

Chapter 2 Call Control CA Operation Mode (per carrierNon-configured frequency) frequency

Mode 1

Mode 2

N/A

Event A4 Configuration for SCell addition

Mode 1: When UE establishes RRC-connection to PCell or is handed over to PCell, eNB directs UE to add the SCell collocated to the PCell. The UE does not measure L3 radio quality of SCell.

Mode 2: When UE establishes RRC-connection to PCell or is handed over to PCell, eNB directs UE to add the SCell collocated to the PCell. The UE may release and add the SCell again according to L3 measurement report of the SCell.

Check Blocks for SCell Addition Samsung eNB considers the following conditions for adding SCell: Check

Description

C1. PCell CA ON/OFF Check

This flag is configurable per PCell. If it is 0, OFF; if it is 1, ON.

C3. CA Band Capability Check

 If the supported BandCombinations and BandwidthCombinationsets received from UE radio capacity are supported by the eNB, success. This check is carried out for every supported BandCombination of UE.

C4. Cell Capacity Check

This step decides the allowed SCell addition based on the number of UEs of PCell and SCell. If a UE requests SCell addition beyond the maximum number of SCell added calls which allows the setting of SCell addition per PCell, the request is rejected.

C5. SCell Availability Check

This step is to check the service availability of the SCell requested by SCell addition as follows: SCell cell release: If the state of the cell requested as SCell is cell released, impossible to add SCell. SCell shutting down state: If the state of the cell requested as SCell is shutting down, impossible to add SCell. SCell barring or reserving: Decides the possibility of adding SCell considering all cells barred and reservedforOperatorUse of SCell.

C6. Co-Schedulability Check

This steup is to check whether co-scheduling of PCell and SCell is allowed or not. By using IDs set in expansion to cell configuration, set the SchedulableUnit as a parameter and if the cell requested as SCell is in the SchedulableUnit same as PCell, success; otherwise, failure.

C8. UE FGI 112 Check

If FGI bit 112 is 1, success; if it is 0, failure.

C4 Checking is moved to SCell activation stage.

Basic Operation for CA At the Setup of Initial Context Setup (Mode 1, 2) The eNB performs checks in serial order to determine the CA availability on obtaining UE capability (at the reception of initial context setup request or of UE capability information),

C1. PCell CA ON/OFF Check Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

113

Chapter 2 Call Control

C3. CA Band Capability Check C5. SCell Availability Check If the conditions C1 and C3 are met according to the CA operation modes, eNB sends the following configurations in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message transmitted to UE in the conventional setup procedures. In case of Mode 1,

If C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell, the eNB configures UE to add the paired SCell that meets C3 condition. In case of Mode 2,

If C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell, oThe eNB configures UE to add paired SCell that meets C3 condition oConfigures the event A2 measurement for SCell release. If neither of conditions is failed, eNB performs the conventional initial context setup procedure, that is, UE does not perform any other CA-related operations. Once completing UE context setup, even if the states of C1 to C5 are changed from the 'CA unavailable' to 'CA available' before the release of RRC Connection or the handout to other cells, the current SCell and SCell measurement configuration are not changed. As ever, even if the conditions C1 to C5 during RRC connection are changed 'the CA available' state to 'CA impossible' state, eNB does not perform SCell release nor measurement configuration. On Receiving Event A4 Measurement for SCell Addition Trigger (Modes 2) Before eNB receives Event A4 Measurement Report (MR) for SCell addition, UE is supposed to have no added SCell at the SCC. The eNB performs the following in serial order for the neighbor cell triggering the event on receiving Event A4 MR for SCell addition trigger:

C6. Co-Schedulability Check C5. SCell Availability Check If all conditions C6 and C5 are satisfied, eNB sends UE a separate RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to set the following: In case of Mode 2,

Add the reported neighbor cell triggering Event A4 as SCell Release event A4 measurement on SCC of the added SCell Configure the event A2 measurement for releasing SCell whose SCC of the added SCell is Measurement Object (MO). On Receiving Event A2 MR for SCell Release Trigger (Modes 2) On receiving event A2 MR for SCell release trigger, eNB sends to UE a separate RRCConnectionReconfiguration message for UE to set the following:

SCell release in SCC corresponding to MO of the triggered event A2 Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

114

Chapter 2 Call Control

Release of event A2 measurement for SCell release at SCC of the released SCell is MO

Configuration of event A4 measurement for SCell addition at SCC of the released SCell is MO On Receiving RRC Connection Re-establishment The eNB performs the following just after receiving the RRCConnectionReestablishment message from the UE: Release of all SCells configured. After completes the RRC connection REestablishment (RRE) procedure, the configuration related to the CA on the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message is performed as same as the RRC connection establishment. Operation at Intra-eNB Handover If CA supporting eNB receives a HO event MR and the neighbor cell triggering the event is a cell belongs to eNB includes the PCell, the following check operations are performed in serial order to determine CA availability in the target cell:

C1. PCell CA ON/OFF Check C3. CA Band Capability Check C6. Co-Schedulability Check C5. SCell Availability Check Based on the conditions according to the CA operating modes, eNB adds the following configurations in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including MobilityControlInfo. In case of Mode 1,

If all conditions C1 and C3 are satisfied, and C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell, UE is configured to add the paired SCell on the SCC. In case of Mode 2,

If all conditions C1 and C3 are passed, and C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell, UE is configured to add the paired SCell on the SCC.

The eNB configures event A2 measurement for SCell release at SCC of the added SCell is MO.

Operation at Inter-eNB Handover (X2, S1 HO) Operation of Source eNB In inter-eNB HO procedure, the source eNB sends the target eNB the S1AP or X2AP: Handover Request message includes the follows:

Serving SCell list (sCellToAddModList) set by the source eNB CandidateCellInfoList on the serving frequencies. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

115

Chapter 2 Call Control

UE-RadioAccessCapability. Operation of Target eNB When the target eNB supporting CA receives the S1AP or X2AP: Handover Request message from the source eNB, it performs the following check operations in serial order to determine the CA availability of UE from the source eNB:

C1. PCell CA ON/OFF Check C3. CA Band Capability Check C6. Co-Schedulability Check C5. SCell Availability Check C8. UE FGI bit 112 Check If all conditions C1 to C3 are satisfied, eNB configures as followings: In case of Mode 1,

If C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell, eNB configures UE to add paired SCell that meets C3. In case of Mode 2,

If C5 is satisfied for the paired SCell, eNB configures UE to add paired SCell that meets C3.

The eNB configures event A2 measurement for SCell release at SCC on which the SCells are added. When UE unsatisfied C8 performs S1 HO, and the handover type described in the S1AP: Handover Required message is either of the following cases, the target eNB does not include the configuration of SCell addition nor measurement for searching SCell in the Handover Request Acknowledge message, but configures one more separate RRC Connection Reconfiguration message after completion of the handover of UE.

UTRAN to LTE GERAN to LTE Additional Feature: PCell Frequency Switching Merits PCell Frequency Switching enables SCell-configured UEs to perform interfrequency handover to the SCC earlier than UEs not configuring SCell, thereby SCell-configured UEs can maintain a higher throughput level compared to non-CA UEs. In addition, PCell Frequency Switching is free from PCell throughput degradation caused by measurement gap since CA UEs with a configured SCell can measure L3 channel quality of neighbor cells on the SCC without measurement gap.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

116

Chapter 2 Call Control

Setting of Related Parameters Event A2/A1 thresholds for SCell-configured UEs to trigger inter frequency searching are defined as configurable system parameters, which shall be set to higher values than those for non-CA UE. Event A3 offset/A5 threshold2 for SCellconfigured UEs to trigger inter frequency handover are defined as configurable system parameters, which are recommended to set the same or higher values than those for non-CA UEs. Operation On meeting event-triggering conditions for SCell-configured UEs, SCellconfigured UEs perform inter frequency searching and inter frequency handover to the SCC. The following figures show state transition diagram of SCell configuration and measurement configuration in PCell Frequency Switching

CA_InterF_: Threshold or offset for SCell-configured UEs to trigger interfrequency carrier searching or handover

InterF_: Threshold or offset for non-CA UEs (including CA UEs which do not have SCell added) to trigger inter-frequency carrier searching or handover Mode 1. Operation Details This section describes how measurements are managed in Mode 1. As described earlier, the SCell is added in Mode 1 at the time of RRC Connection Reconfiguration (if not already added). Along with the SCell addition, the CA_InterF_A2 event is configured for PCell. This event is used to monitor PCell level and trigger further measurements. It should be defined higher than regular A2 measurements. When the CA_InterF_A2 trigger is reported, eNB configures CA_InterF_A1 (on PCell), CA_InterF_A3/A5, and InterF_A2 (on PCell). If UE reports CA_InterF_A1, other measurement triggers are removed and CA_InterF_A2 is again added.

If UE reports InterF_A2, eNB configures InterF_A1 and InterF_A3/A5 on UE and removes other measurements.

If UE reports CA_InterF_A3/A5 (for SCell FA), eNB performs a PCell switch in which the SCell FA becomes the new PCell and the previous PCell FA is added as the new SCell.

If UE reports InterF_A1, eNB removes the existing measurements and adds CA_InterF_A1 (on PCell), CA_InterF_A3/A5, and InterF_A2 (on PCell).

If UE reports InterF_A3/A5, a regular handover is performed.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

117

Chapter 2 Call Control

Mode 2. Operation Details Mode 2 operates similarly to Mode 1 except that A2 measurements related to SCell addition and release are also added.

Limitation PCell Frequency Switching does not apply to UEs having GBR bearer(s).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

118

Chapter 2 Call Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the CHG-CACELL-INFO command to configure CA_AVAILABLE_TYPE to DL_Only.

Key Parameters CHG-CACELL-INFO/RTRV-CACELL-INFO Parameter

Description

CA_AVAILABLE_TYPE

This parameter indicates whether to support carrier aggregation (CA).

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

Carrier Aggregation capable UEs (PCell)

CaCapaPCellUE

Number of CA capable UEs (PCell)

Carrier Aggregation Messagecount for Addition/Release (SCell)

SCellAddAtt

Scell Addition attempt count (SCell)

SCellAddSucc_RrcSig

Number of successes in addition to co-located SCell or successes in SCell addition by HO-in procedure (SCell)

SCellAddSucc_EventA4

Number of successes in SCell addition by Event A4 (SCell)

SCellAddSucc_EventA6

Number of successes in SCell addition (change) by Event A6 (SCell)

SCellAddSucc_RrcReset up

Number of successes in addition to SCell after RRC connection reestablishment procedures (SCell)

SCellAddFail_RrcSigTO

Number of fails in Scell addition by released calls by RRC Connection Reconfiguration T/O (SCell)

SCellAddFail_CaCapaCa c

Number of fails in SCell addition under Carrier Aggregation Capability CAC Procedure (SCell)

SCellAddFail_CpCcFail

Number of fails in Scell Addition under ECCB (Scell)

SCellAddFail_CpRrmFail

Number of fails in Scell Addition due to resource allocation failure (Scell)

SCellRel_RrcSig

Number of times that SCell Release is performed under the RRC connection reestablishment procedures (SCell)

SCellRel_HoOut

Number of times that SCell Release is performed under the HO Out procedures (SCell)

SCellRel_EventA2

Number of times that SCell Release is performed by Event A2 (SCell)

SCellRel_EventA6

Number of times that SCell Release (Change) is performed by Event A6 (SCell)

SCellRel_RrcResetup

Number of times that SCell Release is performed under the RRC connection reestablishment procedures (SCell)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

119

Chapter 2 Call Control Family Display Name

Carrier Aggregation Message count for Activation/Deactivation (SCell)

Air MAC Packet (PCell)

Type Name

Type Description

SCellRel_CaCac

Number of times that SCell Release is performed under the Carrier Aggregation CAC (SCell)

SCellAddCnt_Avg

The average number of SCell Added UEs.

SCellActivation

Count of activations (SCell)

SCellDeactivation_TO

Count of SCell deactivation occurrences by reason: When deactivation timer expires (SCell)

SCellDeactivation_Misma tch

Count of SCell deactivation occurrence by reason: When CA status of eNB and that of the UE are different (SCell)

CRNTIcollision

The cumulated number of Scell Activation fail due to C-RNTI collision (The C-RNTI of UE, who requests Scell activation to SCell, is already used in SCell)

SCellActUEAvg

The average number of Scell activated UE

AirMacULByte

The sum of the size of the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULByteCnt

AirMacULByte collection count

AirMacULTti

The sum of sections that have the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULThruAvg

Average size per second of the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacULEfctivThruAvg

Average size of the MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLByte

The sum of the size of the DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among the MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLByteCnt

AirMacDLByte collection count

AirMacDLTti

The sum of sections that have the MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLThruAvg

Average size per second of the DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among the MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLEfctivThruAvg

Average size of the MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULByteCurr

The most recently collected AirMacByteUl value

AirMacDLByteCurr

The most recently collected AirMacDLByte value

AirMacULThruMin

Minimum of the average size per second of the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacULThruMax

Maximum of the average size per second of the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacDLThruMin

Minimum value of average size per second of the DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among the MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

120

Chapter 2 Call Control Family Display Name

Air MAC Packet (SCell)

DL Wideband CQI (PCell)

Type Name

Type Description

AirMacDLThruMax

Maximum value of average size per second of the DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among the MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULByte

The sum of the size of the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULByteCnt

AirMacULByte collection count

AirMacULTti

The sum of sections that have the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacULThruAvg

Average size per second of the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH.

AirMacULEfctivThruAvg

Average size of the MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLByte

The sum of the size of the DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among the MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLByteCnt

AirMacDLByte collection count

AirMacDLTti

The sum of sections that have the MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLThruAvg

Average size per second of the DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among the MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLEfctivThruAvg

Average size of the MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULByteCurr

The most recently collected AirMacByteUl value

AirMacDLByteCurr

The most recently collected AirMacDLByte value

AirMacULThruMin

Minimum of the average size per second of the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacULThruMax

Maximum of the average size per second of the MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacDLThruMin

Minimum value of average size per second of the DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among the MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLThruMax

Maximum value of average size per second of the DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among the MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

DLReceivedCQI0

Number of receiving CQI 0 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI1

Number of receiving CQI 1 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI2

Number of receiving CQI 2 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

121

Chapter 2 Call Control Family Display Name

DL Wideband CQI (SCell)

Type Name

Type Description whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI3

Number of receiving CQI 3 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI4

Number of receiving CQI 4 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI5

Number of receiving CQI 5 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI6

Number of receiving CQI 6 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI7

Number of receiving CQI 7 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI8

Number of receiving CQI 8 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI9

Number of receiving CQI 9 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI10

Number of receiving CQI 10 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI11

Number of receiving CQI 11 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI12

Number of receiving CQI 12 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI13

Number of receiving CQI 13 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI14

Number of receiving CQI 14 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI15

Number of receiving CQI 15 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQIMin

The minimum value of DlReceivedCQI received from CA UE whose cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQIMax

The maximum value of DlReceivedCQI received from CA UE whose cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQIAvg

The average value of DlReceivedCQI received from CA UE whose cell is PCell

CQIErase

Number of times that CQI erase per layer/codeword is received from CA UE whose cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI0

Number of receiving CQI 0 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

122

Chapter 2 Call Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

DLReceivedCQI1

Number of receiving CQI 1 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI2

Number of receiving CQI 2 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI3

Number of receiving CQI 3 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI4

Number of receiving CQI 4 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI5

Number of receiving CQI 5 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI6

Number of receiving CQI 6 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI7

Number of receiving CQI 7 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI8

Number of receiving CQI 8 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI9

Number of receiving CQI 9 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI10

Number of receiving CQI 10 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI11

Number of receiving CQI 11 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI12

Number of receiving CQI 12 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI13

Number of receiving CQI 13 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI14

Number of receiving CQI 14 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI15

Number of receiving CQI 15 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQIMin

The minimum value of DlReceivedCQI transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQIMax

The maximum value of DlReceivedCQI transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQIAvg

The average value of DlReceivedCQI transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

CQIErase

Number of times that CQI erase per

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

123

Chapter 2 Call Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description layer/codeword is received from CA UE whose cell is SCell

CA_UE_PER_CC_NUM

DL_1FD_SCC

The average number of UEs that has one of FDD DL carrier to SCell.

DL_1TD_SCC

The average number of UEs that has one of TDD DL carrier to SCell.

DL_2FD_SCC

The average number of UEs that has two of FDD DL carriers to SCell.

DL_2TD_SCC

The average number of UEs that has two of TDD DL carriers to SCell.

DL_1FD_1TD_SCC

The average number of UEs that has one of FDD DL carrier and one of TDD DL carrier to SCell.

No_DlCaCapabilityUe

There is no CA capability corresponding to the supportedBandCombination

2CC_DlCaCapabilityUe

CA capability corresponding to the supportedBandCombination support 2 Component Carrier

3CC_DlCaCapabilityUe

CA capability corresponding to the supportedBandCombination support 3 Component Carrier

2CC_ScellAdditionTime

Total SCell Addition Time of 2 Component Carrier

3CC_ ScellAdditionTime

Total SCell Addition Time of 3 Component Carrier

CA Addtion and Activation Information (Pcell)

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.101 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception [2] 3GPP TS 36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [3] 3GPP TS 36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

124

Chapter 3

Load Control

LTE-SW2004, Blind Offloading to WCDMA INTRODUCTION Depending on the service provider‟s network environment, the intra-LTE load balancing functions such as load equalization, offloading to intra-group carriers, or offloading to inter-group carriers are initiated first and the blind offloading to inter-RAT (WCDMA) function is initiated if cell overload cannot be removed in LTE network. The following shows load balancing functions as the serving cell load increases:

BENEFITS This feature reduces the overload state of LTE cell by using WCDMA network. The bad QoE due to overload will be reduced.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency To enable the blind offloading to WCDMA function, operator must set the FA information of WCDMA. Limitation The BlindOffloadtoIRAT_Threshold (iratOffloadThreshold) should be set higher than intraGroupOffloadThreshold or interGroupOffloadingThreshold(k). Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

125

Chapter 3 Load Control

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Samsung intra-LTE LB is operating in the following procedure:

1 Cell load monitoring for a serving cell oIn case of cell load definition, refer to SW2001 Feature Description (FD). oIf cell load exceeds the iratOffloadThreshold, the blind offloading to WCDMA operation is triggered.

2 UE selection and redirection execution oAfter checking UE capability, select UEs that support N_LBMC_TARGET WCDMAs and perform redirection.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the CHG-TM-CNTR command to set IRAT_3G_OPERATION_MODE to BLIND_MODE.

To set UTRAN in top priority to select RAT for blind offloading as an additional option, execute the CHG-IRAT-MLB command to set IRAT_3G_OFFLOAD_PRIORITY to 3.

Key Parameters CHG-TM-CNTR/RTRV-TM-CNTR Parameter

Description

IRAT_3G_OPERATION_MODE

Set the IRAT MLB operating mode for UTRAN.

CHG-IRAT-MLB/RTRV-IRAT-MLB Parameter

Description

IRAT_3G_OFFLOAD_PRIORIT Y

Top priority configuration parameter for 3G as a basis to select RAT for a cell load reporting request

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

LB_REDIRECTION

LBRedirectiontoWCDMA

Count of trying to UTRAN MLB Redirection

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

126

Chapter 3 Load Control

[3] 3GPP 36.423: E-UTRAN; X2 application protocol (X2AP) [4] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

127

Chapter 3 Load Control

LTE-SW2020, Load Distribution over Backhaul Links INTRODUCTION When eNB is connected to a backhaul network with multiple Ethernet links, there are different ways to distribute load over the links depending on IP configuration. For example, when single IP address is used for two Ethernet links in the same subnet, link aggregation can be used for load balancing between two links. To forward a packet, one link is selected by a hashing algorithm based on 5 tuples of the packet. When one link fails, the other link carries all the packets. In this case, SCTP multi-homing for S1/X2 interface cannot be used because there is only one IP address available. The ECMP (Equal Cost Multi Path) is another way to achieve load balancing between two links that has two different IP addresses belonging to different subnet. In this case, however, it is not likely to evenly distribute load over the links because most packets will have the same source, destination IP, and port number. In this feature, application layer selects a link during call setup procedures based on the number of UEs per each link. The traffic from UE is carried over the same link. The SCTP multi-homing can be enabled at the same time and even load distribution is achieved by the number of UEs.

BENEFIT The load balancing is achieved between two links The operator can monitor all traffic of a specific UE on the same link

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency This feature can be enabled when eNB has two available Ethernet links. Limitation This feature is not working with IPsec or Virtual Routing enabled.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION In case of load balancing between backhaul links that are connected to eNB, assume that the backhaul network shall be configured to support the separated two links, and front-end switches (or routers) in different path shall be connected to each other to secure an emergency path in case of link failure.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

128

Chapter 3 Load Control

Load Balancing Between Backhaul Links Before eNB sends INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE message during the UE's call setup procedures, the eNB selects a link that has lower load by the number of UEs, and include the transport network layer address in the message. As a result, eNB will use the selected IP address as a source address of uplink GTP tunnel and as a destination address of downlink GTP tunnel for UE. Since load is distributed based on the number of UEs and cannot guarantee that actual amount of traffic is equalized between two links. The packets coming from and packets heading to the same UE are carried through the same link. Therefore, operator can monitor all the packets from/to one UE by tapping the one link. Note that signaling messages (S1, X2) follow SCTP rules. Link Failure When eNB detects a failure on one link, it sends GARP message through the other link so that the switches (or routers) can forward packets by using a live path. Otherwise, the packets would not be forwarded to eNB in downlink path. In case of uplink packets, eNB forwards them to the healthy link.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate When eNB equips two Ethernet links and both are active means, eNB starts to distribute calls over two links. When one link becomes not available, eNB will forward all the packets to the other available link. There is no handler that operator can enable or disable this feature

Key Parameters There are no related parameters.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

129

Chapter 3 Load Control

REFERENCE N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

130

Chapter 3 Load Control

LTE-SW2103, UL Congestion Prevention INTRODUCTION In a network with a limited backhaul bandwidth, the packets can be discarded at eNB or at an intermediate node due to small buffer size or rate mismatch. Specifically, the network congestion may occur when operator constrains UL backhaul bandwidth of eNB that is connected to a narrow bandwidth backhaul network. In this case, eNB reduces the overall amount of UL packets generated at UEs by throttling down UL resource allocation. In such scenario, eNB controls UL UE-AMBR (Aggregate Maximum Bit Rate) internally depending on the queue length of the outgoing network scheduler. If the number of packets in buffer increases over a threshold, eNB will decreases UL UE-AMBR of UEs. Consequently, the radio scheduler will reduce the amount of radio resources in proportion.

BENEFITS The operator can prevent UL packets from being discarded at eNB due to UL backhaul congestion

The delayed UL packet transmission can be one way to cause flow control at the application layer

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The eNB controls congestion toward UL by recalculating UE-AMBR parameter using adjustment factor (R) value if packets are discarded due to congestion in UL backhaul section. The detailed procedure is as follows. The figure below describes the overall functional architecture for UL congestion prevention. The eNB internally classifies UL packets into different queues. Packets from bearers with a specific QCI are sent to a specific queue. Usually, queues that serve GBR bearers have a higher priority and their packets are transmitted before the packets in the queues that serve Non-GBR bearers. If the number of packets in one of the queues for Non-GBR bearers increases over a threshold, eNB calculates Rate Adjustment Factor (R) and sends it to UL Scheduler.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

131

Chapter 3 Load Control

Packet Drop A packet drop occurs when the maximum volume of buffer controlled by eNB is finally exceeded after a gradual increase in the amount of packet data that eNB has transmitted in the direction of UL. To prevent packet drops, execute UL flow control function or UL congestion prevention function. In other words, periodically monitor the number of packets piled up in UL buffer of the eNB and, when UL traffic exceeds the threshold (Low_Threshold), reduce the number of packets that UE transmits to eNB by decreasing UE-AMBR value applied to UE by a regular amount. Parameter

Description

Low_Threshold

This parameter indicates the minimum volume of the buffer that can affect the Rate Adjust Factor.

High_Threshold

This parameter indicates volume of the buffer that minimizes the Rate Adjust Factor.

Buffer_Monitoring_Period

The interval at which the Rate Adjust Factor is calculated by measuring the number of packets in the buffer of eNB.

MIN_UE-AMBR

The minimum UE-AMBR that can be allocated to UE when congestion occurs.

Function_Enabler

The function that enables or disables (ON/OFF) UL congestion prevention function.

Response_Mode

This parameter determines whether the Response_Mode is linear or non-linear.

The UL flow control periodically monitors the size of packet accumulated in UL buffer of eNB. When UL traffic exceeds the threshold value (low_threshold), UL flow control reduces the amount of packet transmitted from UE to eNB by reducing the value of UE-AMBR, which is applied to UE.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

132

Chapter 3 Load Control

The operator can change the values of low_threshold and high_threshold in the network management.

The UL congestion prevention function can be turned ON or OFF by using system parameters.

eNB Control Function To control UL traffic load, eNB provides the following flow control functions:

The integral type eNB periodically measures the size of packet in the buffer of transport layer. If queues are classified by QCI types, measure the packet based on the queue of non-GBR QCI. If there are multiple queues of non-GBR QCI, measure the each queue respectively and use the largest value among the results. In this case, operator may use system parameters to configure the measurement period.

If queue length in the packet exceeds low_threshold value, the integral type eNB determines the value (R) of UE-AMBR adjustment factor according to the queue length. The R value is determined between 0 and 1 in decreasing linear or non-linear values as the queue length increases. If the queue length is less than the low_threshold value, R value is set to 1. If the queue length exceeds the high_threshold value, R value is set to 0. The operator may use system parameters to configure the values of high_threshold and low_threshold. The operator can use system parameters to configure the change rate of R value (linear or non-linear.)

The integral type eNB multiplies R value by each of UE-AMBRs to determine the effective UE-AMBR towards uplink, and allocates UL radio resources to each of UEs based on this value. In this case, UE-AMBR towards DL direction is not affected. The UL effective UE-AMBR should always be maintained above Min_UE-AMBR to ensure the basic service availability for UE. The operator may use system parameters to configure the Min_UEAMBR.

The integral type eNB provides parameters for operator to enable or disable the UL traffic control between UE and eNB.

Buffer Monitoring Monitors the queue length (Q_Length) periodically The intervals are from double digit number msec. 20 ms at the minimum Measures the Q_Length of queue with the largest buffered amount and relays the value to the rate feedback block. Based on Q_Length, the rate feedback block determines and relays the rate adjustment factor R to UL-Scheduler to calculate the modified UE-AMBR.

Linear Function The linear function determines the rate adjustment factor R based on the Q_Length as shown below: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

133

Chapter 3 Load Control

R=1 if Q_Length < Low_Threshold R=0 if Q_Length > High_Threshold If R value is different from the previous value, relays the value to UL scheduler to calculate the modified UE-AMBR. [Modified UE-AMBR = max(R x UE-AMBR, MIN_UE-AMBR)].

Non- Linear Function The Non-linear function determines the rate adjustment factor R based on Q_Length as shown below:

R=1 if Q_Length < Low_Threshold R=0 if Q_Length > High_Threshold

If R value is different from the previous value, relays the value to UL scheduler to calculate the modified UE-AMBR. (Modified UE-AMBR = max (R x UE-AMBR).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

134

Chapter 3 Load Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The eNB provides the scheduling functions to limit the volume of data transmitted from UE when there is a limitation on bandwidth of the uplink backhaul line.

If monitoring state is enabled, perform the queue monitoring to determine the occurrence of backhaul congestion.

The UL Congestion Prevention parameters can be activated by executing the CHG-BHCGT-PARA command.

Key Parameters CHG-BHCGT-PARA/RTRV-BHCGT-PARA Parameter

Description

DB-INDEX

Backhaul Congestion Monitoring Parameter Index

MONITORING-STATE

This parameter indicates to enable the queue monitoring, which is used to determine whether the backhaul is congested. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

HIGH_THRESHOLD

The high threshold of the queue length used to control the uplink traffic. It must be larger than the low threshold.

LOW_THRESHOLD

The low threshold of the queue length used to control the uplink traffic. It must be less than the high threshold.

MONITORING_PERIOD

The interval at which backhaul congestion is monitored in ms. The default is 100 (ms). The target queues are monitored every interval set in this parameter.

MIN_UE_AMBR

The UL Effective UE-AMBR must a larger than Minimum UE-AMBR to guarantee a basic service availability of UEs.

RESPONSE_MODE

This parameter indicates a method to calculate UE-AMBR Rate Adjustment Factor 0: Linear 1: Non-linear

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

135

Chapter 3 Load Control

LTE-SW2104, eNB Overload Protection INTRODUCTION This feature describes how eNB can be protected from being overloaded by limiting the number of calls during a given time period. Integrated eNB provides a function that can limit the maximum count of call connection requests (RRC Connection Request) per unit time.

BENEFIT This feature helps eNB from being overloaded by configuring the threshold settings.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Limitation The UE may experience a long setup time in case of congestion.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION This feature enables operator to configure the monitoring duration for eNB overload protection. The maximum number of request messages for each RRC establishment cause and PS paging is shown below:

The maximum number of highPriorityAccess calls The maximum number of mo-Signaling calls The maximum number of mo-Data calls The maximum number of delayTolerantAccess The maximum number of PS paging (if include paging priority IE, then eNB will not discard the paging message) Refer to RRC establishment causes in RRCConnectionRequest message. Emergency and mt-Access calls are not limited. EstablishmentCause ::= ENUMERATED { emergency, highPriorityAccess, mt-Access, moSignaling, mo-Data, delayTolerantAccess-v1020, spare2, spare1}

eNB Operation The eNB observes number of call request per RRC establishment cause and number of PS paging for the monitoring time, which is specified in the system parameter. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

136

Chapter 3 Load Control

If the count exceeds maximum number of call requests for establishment cause or PS paging message, then eNB will discard the call.

When the monitoring time expires, eNB initializes all counters for RRC establishment causes and PS paging messages. Then, eNB begins to count up during the next monitoring time period. When the counter reaches configured maximum limit, eNB discards any additional request messages.

Operation Procedure Establishment Cause Based Protection Procedure The maximum count of call connection requests per unit time can be set as a system parameter for each RRC establishment cause. However, if RRC establishment cause is an emergency and mt-Access, this number cannot be set. The integrated eNB monitors the number of call connection requests for each RRC establishment cause during the monitoring period set by the system parameter.

When RRC Connection Request message is received from UE, if the number of call connection requests has not exceeded the threshold corresponding to the RRC establishment cause, which is included in the RRC Connection Request message, the call connection request is accepted. If count exceeds the threshold, the call connection request is not accepted.

If the monitoring period set by the system parameter has expired, the integrated eNB initializes the count of call connection requests for each RRC establishment cause.

The RRC establishment cause can be used by the network to prioritise the connection establishment request from UE at the high load situation in the network. Paging Based Protection Procedure The maximum count of paging processes per unit time can be set as a system parameter.

The number of paging requests is monitored during the monitoring period set by the system parameter.

If the number of paging requests received from MME has not yet exceeded the threshold, the paging message is processed. If the number exceeds the threshold, further paging requests are ignored.

If include paging priority IE received from MME, then eNB will not discard the paging message.

If the monitoring period set by the system parameter has expired, the paging request count is initialized.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

137

Chapter 3 Load Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Oveload Protection(CALL): Change the overload protect control mode with CHG-OVLD-PTC command oProtectPerNormalCall: Number of Normal Call based Overload Protection (control 1) oProtectPerEstablishCause: Establish Cause based Overload Protection (control 2)

Overload Protection(psPaging): Change the psPaginglProtectUsage to USE with CHG-OVLD-PTC command

Key Parameters Parameter

Description

OVERLAOD_PROTECT_CT RL

Setting value for overload protect. 0: noUse 1:ProtectPerNormalCall 2:ProtectPerEstablishCause

PS_PAGING_PROTECT_U SAGE

Whether to execute psPaging protect function

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

DENIED_CALL

Denied_HighPriorityAc cess

Number of high priority access-type calls denied by the overload protection function

Denied_moSignaling

Number of mo signaling-type calls denied by the overload protection function

Denied_moData

Number of mo data-type calls denied by the overload protection function

Denied_DelayTolerant Access

Number of delay tolerant access calls denied by the overload protection function

Denied_Paging

Number of paging messages denied by the overload protection function

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

138

Chapter 3 Load Control

LTE-SW2108, Smart Congestion Mitigation INTRODUCTION Up to 3GPP Release 11, MMTel voice access is controlled by both Access Class Barring and Service Specific Access Control at the same time. As a result, operator cannot control MMTel voice access separated from data access. From the 3GPP Release 12, using Smart Congestion Mitigation, eNB can provide three bits in SIB2 to indicate whether MMTel voice, MMTel video, and SMS UEs shall skip the Access Class Barring check. In this method, operator can control MMTel voice access separated from data access and prioritize MMTel voice access over data access.

BENEFIT The operators can prioritize MMTel voice, MMTel video, and SMS access attempts over other data packet services.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency The UE should support Smart Congestion Mitigation Limitation Standardization of this feature is ongoing in 3GPP release 12, hence schedule and operation is subject to change.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION To allow UE to skip Access Class Barring for specific application such as mobile originating MMTELVoice, MMTELVideo, or SMS, eNB can broadcast 3 ACB skip indicators in SIB2 under system configuration. When UE tries to establish RRC connection for specific application, UE checks relevant ACB skip indicator and skips ACB and consider access to the cell as not barred if ACB skip indicator for relevant application is set. The following figure shows ACB skip operation for a mobile originating MMTELVoice:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

139

Chapter 3 Load Control

To use Smart Congestion Mitigation, operator can allow access to specific applications while keep blocking packet data service at the congestion situation as shown in the following figure:

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The Smart Congestion Mitigation is to configure Access Class Barring Skip indicator as per Service Specific Access Control.

Key Parameters RTRV-BAR-PARA/CHG-BAR-PARA Parameter

Description

acBarringSkipForMMTELvoice

This parameter indicates to enable/disable skipping of Access Class Barring (Mo-Sig, Mo-Data) procedure when MMTEL Voice is used.

acBarringSkipForMMTELvideo

This parameter indicates to enable/disable skipping of Access Class Barring (Mo-Sig, Mo-Data) procedure when MMTEL Video is used.

acBarringSkipForSMS

This parameter indicates to enable/disable skipping of Access Class Barring (Mo-Sig, Mo-Data) procedure when SMS is used.

Counters and KPIs There are no a related counters or KPIs. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

140

Chapter 3 Load Control

REFERENCE [1] TR 36.848 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Study on smart congestion mitigation

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

141

Chapter 4

Mobility Control

LTE-SW1002, Idle Mobility Support INTRODUCTION To support intra-LTE cell reselection, eNB broadcasts the System Information Block type 3 (SIB3), System Information Block type 4 (SIB4), and System Information Block type 5(SIB5). The UE shall monitor E-UTRAN BCCH during idle mode to retrieve these SIBs for the preparation of intra-LTE cell reselection. Then, UE makes measurements on neighbouring cells based on the criteria and performs cell reselection to intra-/ inter-frequency neighbouring cells when needed. The parameters for intra-LTE cell reselection broadcasted in SIB3, SIB4, and SIB5 are as follows:

SIB3 conveys the common information for intra-frequency, inter-frequency and/ or inter-RAT cell reselection.

SIB3 also conveys the specific information for intra-frequency cell reselection. SIB4 conveys the intra-frequency neighbouring cell related information, that is, intra-frequency neighbour cell list and blacklisted cells.

SIB5 conveys the specific information for inter-frequency cell reselection.

BENEFIT The operator can provide idle mobility to its subscribers within E-UTRAN. The LTE users in idle state can be moving within E-UTRAN.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION PLMN Selection When LTE UE is switched ON, it will start a process to find Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN). The PLMN may be selected either automatically or manually, depending on the device's configuration.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

142

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Based on the request from NAS layer of UE, if a required PLMN is already associated with LTE, UE shall scan LTE carriers based on UE stored information. The UE shall search for the strongest PLMN cell and tune to the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH to read SIB1(s), where PLMN information is delivered. The PLMN which is reported to NAS shall have its measured RSRP value. Once PLMN (high quality or otherwise) is selected, UE access stratum will be instructed to measure reference signal and read the PDSCH for SIB1. This process occurs again to initiate cell selection using the S-Criteria (based on Q_RX_LEV_MIN). At this stage if the S-criteria is not met, UE will go into limited service (for emergency calls) or will find an equivalent PLMN. The following figure shows the idle mode state procedure:

Selected PLMN available/unavailable: The UE scans all RF channels in EUTRAN band according to its capabilities to find available PLMNs.

Not camped: No suitable cell found. Camped normally: The UE obtains normal service and performs the following tasks: oSelect and monitor the PCH of the cell. oPerforms system information monitoring. oPerform necessary measurements for the cell reselection evaluation procedure. oExecute the cell reselection evaluation procedure.

Camped on any cell: The UE obtains limited service and periodically searches for a suitable cell in the selected PLMN, if UE supports.

Cell selection: The UE selects a suitable cell and the radio access mode based on idle mode measurements and cell selection criteria.

Cell reselection: If after cell reselection evaluation process a better cell is found, the cell reselection is performed. If no suitable cell is found, UE enters to the next state 'Any cell selection'.

Any cell selection: The UE searches an acceptable cell of any PLMN to camp on The following table shows the parameters for PLMN selection: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

143

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter Name

Description

Q_RX_LEV_MIN

Minimum required RX level in the cell (dBm) (SIB1)

PLMN

MCC and MNC (SIB1)

Cell Selection Initial Cell Selection The following figure shows initial cell selection procedures:

The UE scans all RF channels in E-UTRAN bands to its capability to find acceptable cells, which are not barred and measure RSRP value greater than or equal to -110 dBm. To read PLMN identity and decide the availability of the cell, UE shall detect Primary/Secondary synchronization signals (PSS/SSS) and decode cell specific reference signal (CRS) and read at least MIB and SIB1. PCID should not be overlapped between adjacent cells for successful detecting and decoding of the signals. The PLMN reading will be reported to NAS layer, and the search for PLMNs may be stopped on request of NAS. Once UE has selected the PLMN, the cell selection procedure shall be performed to select a suitable cell of that PLMN to camp on to access available services, as described in TS36.304. If UE has stored information of carrier frequencies and also (optionally) information on cell parameters from previously received measurement, UE can use this information to speed up the selection procedure. The suitable cell should satisfy that:

The cell is not barred The cell is part of the selected PLMN or the registered PLMN or a PLMN of an equivalent PLMN list

The cell is part of at least one TA that is nor port of the list of 'forbidden tracking areas for roaming'

The cell selection criterion S satisfies that Srxlev > 0 AND Squal > 0 Priorities between different frequencies or RATs provided to UE by system information or dedicated signaling are not used in the cell selection procedure.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

144

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Cell Barring The LTE E-UTRAN cells broadcast cell selection information through SIB1 and SIB2 (AC-Barring). SIB1 has two fields for cell status indication:

cellBarred cellReservedForOperatorUse cellBarred is common for all PLMNs and cellReservedForOperatorUse is specific per PLMN. When cell status is indicated as 'not barred' and 'not reserved' for operator use, all UEs shall treat this cell as candidate during the cell selection and cell reselection procedures. When cell status is indicated as 'not barred' and 'reserved' for operator use for any PLMN,

The UEs assigned to Access Class 11 or 15 operating in their HPLMN/EHPLMN shall treat this cell as candidate during the cell selection and reselection procedures if the field cellReservedForOperatorUse for that PLMN set to 'reserved'.

The UEs assigned to an Access Class in the range of 0 to 9, 12 to 14 shall behave as if the cell status is 'barred' in case the cell is 'reserved for operator use' for the registered PLMN or the selected PLMN. When cell status 'barred' is indicated or to be treated as if the cell status is 'barred', UE is not permitted to select/reselect this cell, not even for emergency calls. Cell Selection Criteria The cell selection is performed on the detected cell with RX signal and decoded MIB and SIBs. Cell selection criteria: Srxlev > 0 AND Squal > 0 Where, Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas - (Q_RX_LEV_MIN + Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET) Pcompensation, Squal = Qqualmeas - (Q_QUAL_MIN + Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET) The following table shows the parameters of cell selection criteria: Parameter Name

Description

Srxlev

Cell selection RX level value (dB)

Squal

Cell selection quality value (dB)

Qrxlevmeas

Measured cell RX level value (RSRP)

Qqualmeas

Measured cell quality value (RSRQ)

Q_RX_LEV_MIN

Minimum required RX level in the cell (dBm) (SIB1)

Q_QUAL_MIN

Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB) (SIB1)

Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET

Offset to the signalled Q_RX_LEV_MIN taken into account in the Srxlev evaluation as a result of a periodic search for a higher priority PLMN while camped normally in a VPLMN (SIB1)

Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET

Offset to the signalled Q_QUAL_MIN taken into account in the Squal

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

145

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter Name

Description evaluation as a result of a periodic search for a higher priority PLMN while camped normally in a VPLMN (SIB1)

Pcompensation

Max (PEMAX -PPowerClass, 0) (dB)

P_MAX

Maximum TX power level an UE may use when transmitting on the uplink in the cell (dBm) defined as P_MAX in [TS 36.101] (SIB1)

PPowerClass

Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm) according to the UE power class as defined in [TS 36.101]

Since Q_QUAL_MIN and Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET are not provided in network, devices will test Srxlev only. If q-QualMinWB (in SIB1/SIB3/SIB5) is present, UE shall, when performing RSRQ measurement, use a wider bandwidth.

Cell Reselection The following figure shows initial cell reselection procedures:

When a cell reselection condition is met, UE in idle mode shall attempt to detect, synchronize, and read system information of candidate frequencies. The UE shall only perform cell reselection evaluation for E-UTRAN frequencies and inter-RAT frequencies that are given in system information and for which UE has a priority provided. The cell reselection procedures are triggered when one of the following conditions is met:

1 The serving cell does not fulfill Srxlev > S_INTRA_SEARCH_P and Squal > S_INTRA_SEARCH_Q. In this case, UE performs intra-frequency cell reselection procedures.

2 The UE has E-UTRA frequencies or UTRA frequencies with a reselection priority higher than the reselection priority of the current E-UTRA frequency. In this case, UE performs inter-RAT cell reselection procedures. The UE shall search every layer of higher priority at least every Thigher_priority_search = (60 * Nlayers) seconds, where Nlayers is the total number of configured higher priority E-UTRA, UTRA carrier frequencies. (3GPP TS36.133 Section 4.2.2) Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

146

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

3 The service cell does not fulfil Srxlev > S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P and Squal > S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_Q. In this case, UE performs inter-RAT cell reselection procedures for E-UTRA inter-frequency or UTRA frequency with an equal or lower reselection priority than the reselection priority of the current E-UTRA frequency. Since RSRQ related parameters are not provided in network, devices will test Srxlev only. The device will use S_INTRA_SEARCH and S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH instead of S_INTRA_SEARCH_P and S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P respectively. The following table shows the parameters that trigger cell reselection procedures: Parameter Name

Description

Srxlev

Cell selection RX level value (in dB) measured by UE

Squal

Cell selection quality value (in dB) measured by UE

S_INTRA_SEARCH

This specifies the Srxlev threshold (in dB) for intra-frequency measurements. This parameter is used by Rel-8 device (SIB3).

S_INTRA_SEARCH_P

This specifies the Srxlev threshold (in dB) for intra-frequency measurements. This parameter is used by Rel-9 device (SIB3).

S_INTRA_SEARCH_Q

This specifies the Squal threshold (in dB) for intra-frequency measurements. This parameter is used by Rel-9 device (SIB3).

S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH

This specifies the Srxlev threshold (in dB) for E-UTRAN inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements. This parameter is used by Rel-8 device (SIB3).

S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P

This specifies the Srxlev threshold (in dB) for E-UTRAN inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements. This parameter is used by Rel-9 device (SIB3).

S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_Q

This specifies the Squal threshold (in dB) for E-UTRAN inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements. This parameter is used by Rel-9 device. (SIB3).

Q_RX_LEV_MIN

This specifies the minimum required Rx level in the cell in dBm (SIB3).

Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9

This specifies the minimum required quality level in the cell in dB. This parameter is used by Rel-9 device (SIB3).

Thresholds and Priority Design In network, cell reselection triggering thresholds and priority shall be configured. Dur to that, UEs can select LTE network as a primary network in the presence of an acceptable LTE signal. In network, RSRP is used as a measurement triggering criteria because RSRQ can vary even in the center of the serving cell from -3 dB to -10 dB depending on traffic load from the serving cell. S_INTRA_SEARCH shall be greater than S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH so that LTE capable UEs can select LTE frequency as long as it moves under LTE coverage. The following figure shows the thresholds for cell reselection:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

147

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The UE triggers measurement of intra-frequency when the RSRP signal strength from LTE serving cell decreases below the threshold calculated as follows:

RSRP Strength from Serving Cell =< S_INTRA_SEARCH + Q_RX_LEV_MIN + Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET + Pcompensation Where, Pcompensation is max (PEMAX -PPowerClass, 0) (dB). PEMAX is defined as PMAX in 3GPP TS36.101, and PPowerClass is 23 dBm as per 3GPP TS36.101. (118 dBm).Therefore, Pcompensation is usually assumed to be 0. The UE triggers measurement of UTRA frequency when the RSRP signal strength from LTE serving cell decreases below the threshold calculated as follows:

RSRP Strength from Serving Cell =< S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH + Q_RX_LEV_MIN + Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET + Pcompensation The UE will start measurements of LTE frequency when the measured RSRP is less than -64 dBm [Q_RX_LEV_MIN=-63(-126 dBm), Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET=0, S_INTRA_SEARCH=31(62 dB), Pcompensation=0], and start the measurements of UTRA frequency when the measured RSRP is less than -112 dBm [Q_RX_LEV_MIN=-63(-126 dBm), Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET=0, S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH=7(14 dB), Pcompensation=0). In order for UEs to select primarily LTE frequency when UEs end a CSFB call or when UEs come back into LTE coverage, LTE frequency priority must be greater than UTRA frequency. The priority of each frequency is broadcasted in SIB3 (E-UTRA frequency). Intra-Frequency Cell Reselection Intra-frequency cell reselection is performed when the signal strength from LTE serving cell is less than the threshold as described above. The cell reselection is performed on ranking basis of the current and neighboring cells. Cell Reselection Criteria:

Rs = Qmeas,s + Q_HYST Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

148

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Rn = Qmeas,n - Q_OFFSET_FREQ The following table shows the description of above mentioned parameters: Parameter Name

Description

Rs

Rs is for serving cell.

Rn

Rn is for neighbour cell.

Qmeas

RSRP measurement quantity used in cell reselections.

Q_HYST

This parameter (in dB) is to reduce Ping-Pong effects between serving and neighbor cells.(SIB3)

Q_OFFSET_FREQ

In case of intra-frequency: Equals to Qoffsets,n, if Qoffsets,n is valid, otherwise this equals to zero.

T_RESELECTION

This specifies the reselection timer value for EUTRAN (SIB3).

The UE shall perform ranking of all cells that fulfill the cell selection criterion S. The cells shall be ranked according to the R criteria specified above, deriving Qmeas,n and Qmeas,s and calculating the R values using averaged RSRP results. If a cell is ranked as the best cell, UE shall perform cell reselection to that corresponding cell. The UE shall reselect the new cell, only if the following conditions are met:

The new cell is better ranked than the serving cell during a time interval T_RESELECTION.

More than 1 second has elapsed since UE camped on the current serving cell. Initial Attach When UE camps on a suitable cell, if new cell does not belongs to at least tracking areas to which UE is registered previously, the UE will register to the network by sending a Tracking Area Update message. The following figure shows the initial attach procedures:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

149

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1~4) Step 2~4 completes RRC connection establishing of a SRB. The attach procedure starts with RRC connection establishment procedure. The Attach Request message included in RRCConnectionSetupComplete is transparently delivered to MME in INITIAL UE MESSAGE. 5~9) The eNB sends INITIAL UE MESSAGE to MME, then MME responds with INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST after selecting S-GW. 10~12) The eNB acquires UECapabilityInformation and reports it to MME. 13~14) The eNB sends the integrity-protected AS Security Mode Command message to UE. Then, UE starts control plane signalling integrity.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

150

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

15~16) The eNB sends RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to data radio bearer. After eNB receives CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message from MME, it creates a default radio bearer by sending RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to UE. When UE receives RRCConnectionReconfiguration message, it can transmit packets in uplink and eNB can deliver the packets toward S-GW. 17) The eNB sends Initial Context Setup Response message to MME and completes the establishment of S1 bearer. 18~19) The UE sends ULInformationTransfer message to eNB, which includes Attach Complete message. This message is transparently delivered to MME in UPLINK NAS TRANSPORT message. 20~21) The MME sends Modify Bearer Request message to S-GW, to provide downlink tunnel information of eNB. After S-GW receives the Modify Bearer Request message, it can transmit packets in downlink. If both DRB and SRB carry no packets in downlink and uplink for a certain time period, eNB releases the RRC connection and S1 bearer. The operator can configure INTERNAL_SIGNALING_INACTIVITY for a signalling bearer and INTERNAL_USER_INACTIVITY for a data bearer at eNB level. When both inactivity timers expire, eNB sends UE CONTEXT RELEASE message to MME and releases the S1 connection for UE. Also, this message shall indicate the cause value 'User Inactivity'. The following figure shows the connection release procedure by the inactivity timer triggered:

Combined EPS and IMSI Attach When supporting Combined EPS/IMSI Attach Request, MME selects IWF (MSC/VLR) based on TA and LA mapping and sends the location update request with new LAI, IMSI and MME name to IWF. On receiving the request of the respective VLR will create an association for SGs interworking with MME. In response, VLR will provide VLR TMSI to MME. The following figure shows the combined EPS/IMSI attach call flow: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

151

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The combined EPS/IMSI Attach procedures are: 1~5) The UE sends an Attach Request to MME with Attach Type as „Combined EPS/IMSI‟, UE capability as „CSFB‟ and data APN name. The APN name is depending on the subscriber type. The UE may include any of the Internet APN. 6) The MME sends authentication information request message to HSS. After receiving the Authentication Information Answer from HSS, MME and UE are authenticated each other with set of authentication messages between UE and MME. After the successful authentication, MME updates the subscriber location in HSS and gets the subscriber profile from HSS. 7~8)The MME sends Create Session Request message to S-GW for establishing the default bearer for UE. The S-GW forwards the session request message to PGW. The P-GW replies with the Create Session Response to MME. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

152

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

9~10) Since UE has requested for combined EPS/IMSI attach, after the default bearer establishment MME updates UE‟s location in 3G network by sending the location update message with new LAI, IMSI and MME name to IWF (MSC/VLR). After accepting the attach request by the network, default bearer will be established. IWF updates UE‟s CS location in HLR. 11~14) The eNB acquires UECapabilityInformation and reports it to MME. 15~16) The eNB sends the integrity-protected AS Security Mode Command message to UE. Then, UE starts control plane signalling integrity. 17~18) The eNB sends RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to data radio bearer. After eNB receives CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message from MME, it creates a default radio bearer by sending RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to UE. When UE receives RRCConnectionReconfiguration message, it can transmit packets in uplink and eNB can deliver the packets toward S-GW. 19) The eNB sends Initial Context Setup Response message to MME and completes the establishment of S1 bearer. 20~21) The UE sends ULInformationTransfer message to eNB, which includes Attach Complete message. This message is transparently delivered to MME in UPLINK NAS TRANSPORT message. 22~23) The MME sends Modify Bearer Request message to S-GW, to provide downlink tunnel information of eNB. After S-GW receives the Modify Bearer Request message, it can transmit packets in downlink. Combined EPS and IMSI Detach To detach the combined EPS/IMSI attached UE, the UE is required to be detached from both EPS and CS domain. The following figure shows the combined EPS/IMSI detach call flow:

The combined EPS/IMSI Detach procedures are: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

153

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1~2) The UE sends Detach Request to MME. 3) The MME sends Delete Session Request message to S-GW for deactivating the default bearer for UE. The S-GW forwards the Delete Session Request message to P-GW. 4) The IMSI Detach Indication message from MME to IWF (MSC/VLR) so as to remove the SGs association with regarding to UE IMSI. 5) The P-GW replies with Delete Session Response to MME. 6~8) The MME sends Detach Accept to UE and releases S1-MME signalling connection. Related SIB Messages SIB2 contains radio resource configuration information that is common for all UEs. The following table shows the SIB2 message: ac-BarringInfo

ac-BarringForEmergency ac-BarringForMO-Signalling (TAU, Attach/Detach message) ac-BarringforMO-Data (Service Request, Extended Service Request messages)

freqInfo

ul-CarrierFreq ul-Bandwidth additionalSpectrumEmission

radioResourceConfigCommonSIB

rach-config, bcch-config, pcch-config, prach-config, pdsch-config, pusch-config, and pucch-config UL-CyclicPrefixLength uplinkPowerControlCommon

ue-TimersAndConstants timeAlignmentTimerCommon (to control how long UE is considered uplink time aligned) mbsfn-SubframeConfigLit

SIB3 contains cell re-selection information common for intra-frequency, interfrequency and/ or inter-RAT cell re-selection. The following table shows the SIB3 message: cellReselectionInfoCommon

q-Hyst speedStateReselectionPars (Q-hysteresis scaling factor depending on UE speed)

cellReselectionServingFreqInfo

s-NonIntraSearch threshServingLow cellReselectionPriority

intraFreqCellReselectionInfo

q-RxLevMin P-max (maximum uplink tx power of UE for the intra-frequency neighbouring E-UTRA cells) s-IntraSearch allowedMeasBandwidth neighCellConfig (MBSFN and TDD related information) t-ReselectionEUTRA (cell reselection timer, it can be set per EUTRAN frequency)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

154

Chapter 4 Mobility Control t-ReselectionEUTRA-SF (speed dependent scale factor)

SIB4 contains neighbouring cell related information relevant only for intrafrequency cell re-selection. Also, it includes cells with specific re-selection parameters as well as blacklisted cells. The following table shows the SIB4 message: intraFreqNeighbCellList (List of intrafrequency neighbouring cells with specific cell re-selection parameters, up to 16)

physCellId q-OffsetCell (Qoffsets,n, the offset between the two cells)

intraFreqBlackCellList (List of blacklisted intra-frequency neighbouring cells, up to 16)

SIB5 contains information for inter-frequency cell re-selection. The following table shows the SIB5 message: InterFreqCarrierFreqInfo (list of frequency information up to 8)

dl-CarrierFreq q-RxLevMin p-Max t-ReselectionEUTRA t-ReselectionEUTRA-SF threshX-High (cell reselection to a cell on a higher priority EUTRAN frequency or inter-RAT frequency than the serving frequency if a cell of a higher priority RAT/ frequency fulfils Srxlev > ThreshX, HighP during a time interval TreselectionRAT) threshX-Low (cell reselection to a cell on a lower priority E-UTRAN frequency or inter-RAT frequency than the serving frequency if the serving cell fulfils Srxlev < ThreshServing, LowP and a cell of a lower priority RAT/ frequency fulfils Srxlev > ThreshX, LowP during a time interval TreselectionRAT) allowedMeasBandwidth presenceAntennaPort1 (to indicate whether all the neighbouring cells use Antenna Port 1) cellReselectionPriority neighCellConfig (MBSFN and TDD related information) q-OffsetFreq (Qoffsetfrequency, Frequency specific offset for equal priority E-UTRAN frequencies) interFreqNeighCellList (up to 16) physCellId q-OffsetCell (Qoffsets,n , the offset between the two cells) interFreqBlackCellList (up to 16)

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The Idle Mobility Support is a collective feature with which UE in Idle State (Mode) selects a network or a carrier. But, the following key parameters control the selection criteria of the cell which UE selects. Also, the settings of Command and Parameter can control the system information message of E-UTRAN. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

155

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Key Parameters RTRV-EUTRA-FA/CHG-EUTRA-FA Parameter

Description

PRIORITY

This is a parameter specifying the priority of EUTRA-FA during idle reselection or mobility control information. '7' is the highest priority. Ensure that not to set the same priority when configuring multiple EUTRA-FAs.

Q_RX_LEV_MIN

This parameter is minimum RX level required in a cell that is operating as EUTRA-FA and its unit is dBm.

T_RESELECTION

This parameter is the interval (timer) of reselection execution.

T_RESELECTION_SF_MED IUM

This parameter is the medium timer value of the reselection scaling factor.

T_RESELECTION_SF_HIG H

This parameter is the high timer value of the reselection scaling factor.

S_INTRA_SEARCH

This parameter is the threshold value for intra-frequency measurement.

S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH

This parameter is the threshold value for the inter-RAT and inter-frequency measurement.

THRESH_SERVING_LOW

This parameter is the low threshold for serving frequency upon reselection evaluation.

THRESH_X_HIGH

This parameter is the threshold value used by UE when reselecting the frequency with priority higher than the currently camped frequency.

THRESH_X_LOW

This parameter is the threshold value used when reselecting the low-priority frequency from the high-priority frequency.

Q-OFFSER-FREQ

This parameter is the frequency offset applied to the q-OffsetFreq of a SIB5 message.

S_INTRA_SEARCH_P

This parameter is the threshold-P value for the intra-frequency measurement of Rel-9.

S_INTRA_SEARCH_Q

This parameter is the threshold-Q value for the intra-frequency measurement of Rel-9.

S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_ P

This parameter is the threshold-P value for the inter-frequency measurement and Inter-RAT.

S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_ Q

This parameter is the threshold-Q value for the inter-frequency measurement and Inter-RAT.

Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9

This parameter is the qQualMin value for Rel-9.

THRESH_SERVING_LOW_ Q_REL9

This parameter is the threshServingLowQ value for Rel-9.

THRESH_XHIGH_Q_REL9

This parameter is the threshold value used by UE when reselecting the frequency with priority higher than the currently camped frequency in the Rel-9.

THRESH_XLOW_QREL9

This parameter is the threshold value used when reselecting the low-priority frequency from the high-priority frequency in the Rel-9.

RTRV-CELL-RSEL/CHG-CELL-RSEL Parameter

Description

Q_HYST

The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system.

Q_HYST_SFMEDIUM

This parameter is the value added when UE speed is medium among Qhyst values that are added to the current serving cell in the cell reselection criteria. To apply the change of this parameter, the SPEED_STATE_RESEL_PARAMS_USAG E should be changed to use in the

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

156

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description CHGMOBIL-STA beforehand.

Q_HYST_SFHIGH

This parameter is the value added when UE speed is high among Qhyst values that are added to the current serving cell in the cell reselection criteria. To apply the change of this parameter, the SPEED_STATE_RESEL_PARAMS_USAG E should be changed to use in the CHGMOBIL-STA beforehand.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.304 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

157

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1004, S1 Handover INTRODUCTION S1 handover is mobility control functionality between two adjacent eNBs using S1 interface with MME (inter-eNB handover via S1 interface). S1 handover is used when there is no available direct interface with target eNB, or target eNB belongs to another MME group.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers between cells in different eNBs.

Users in a connected state can be moving within E-UTRAN, with change of serving cell.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Limitation With Full Configuration, Hyper Frame Number (HFN) is reset for all bearers and lossless HO is not supported.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the S1 handover procedure in E-UTRAN (S1 handover with MME and S-GW relocation case):

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

158

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE sends MEASUREMENT REPORT including E-UTRAN measurements to the source eNB. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

159

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

2) The source eNB determines whether to perform S1-based handover into the target eNB. This decision can be initiated if there is no X2 connection to target eNB or inter-eNB handover of target eNB is configured to execute the S1 handover. Handover decision in case of PCI duplication: On reception of MR message, eNB checks whether PCI from MR exists in Neighbor NRT or not. If there are several NRs with same PCI (this case is called PCI duplication), then eNB requests UE for measurement with the purpose set to report CGI. After obtaining MR message including ECGI, eNB triggers Handover Preparation using NR of the reported ECGI. 3) The source eNB sends HANDOVER REQUIRED to source MME. The source eNB provides information about which bearer is used for data forwarding and whether direct forwarding is possible from source eNB to target eNB. 4)~6) The MME transmits the HANDOVER REQUEST message to target eNB. This message creates UE context which has bearer related information and security context in the target eNB. 7) The target eNB transmits the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message to MME 8)~10) If indirect forwarding is used, MME transmits the Create Indirect Data Forwarding Tunnel Request message to S-GW. The S-GW replies to MME with the Create Indirect Data Forwarding Tunnel Response message. 11) The source eNB receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from source MME. 12) The source eNB creates the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message using the Target to Source Transparent Container IE included in the HANDOVER COMMAND message and transmits it to UE. To transmit the PDCP status and the HFN status of the E-RABs of which the PDCP status must be preserved, source eNB transmits eNB/MME STATUS TRANSFER message to target eNB via MME. The source eNB must start forwarding downlink data to target eNB through the bearer, which is planned to be used for data forwarding. This can be either direct or indirect forwarding. The UE performs synchronization to target eNB and connects to target cell through RACH. The target eNB replies with UL allocation and timing advance. 13) After successful synchronization with the target cell, UE notifies the target cell that the handover procedure is complete using the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message. The downlink packet forwarded from source eNB can be transmitted to UE. The uplink packet can be transmitted to S-GW from UE through target eNB 14)~16) The target eNB sends a HANDOVER NOTIFY message to MME to inform that UE has changed cell. 17~18) The MME transmits the Modify Bearer Request message to S-GW per each PDN connection. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

160

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The downlink packet from S-GW is immediately transmitted to target eNB. 19) The S-GW transmits the Modify Bearer Response message to MME. To support packet re-arrangement in target eNB, S-GW transmits at least one „end marker‟ packets to the previous path as soon as the path is changed. 20) If any of the conditions listed in Section 5.3.3.0 of TS 23.401 (6) is met, UE starts the Tracking Area Update procedure. 21)~24) The source MME releases UE‟s resources that was used in the source eNB and the resources for data forwarding.

Full Configuration The full configuration option is used to support EUTRA handover to eNB of an earlier release. The target uses a full configuration and previous configuration is discarded by UE. This can lead to a change in RLC mode for a bearer and the operation for RLC AM is the same as that for RLC UM. HFN is reset for all bearers. Since source eNB may not be aware that target eNB is using full configuration, there is no difference in source eNB behaviour. The target eNB does not resend data that was attempted delivery to UE to prevent data duplication. The source eNB includes ue-ConfigRelease IE in HandoverPreparationInformation message, ue-ConfigRelease IE indicates the RRC protocol release used for UE specific dedicated configuration. If target eNB does not support the release of RRC protocol which source eNB used to configure UE, target eNB may be unable to comprehend UE configuration provided by source eNB. In this case, target eNB should use the full configuration option to reconfigure UE for Handover and Reestablishment. Full configuration option includes an initialization of the radio configuration, which makes the procedure independent of the configuration used in the source cell with the exception that the security algorithms are continued for the RRC re-establishment. In case of reconfigurations involving the full configuration option, the PDCP entities are newly established (SN and HFN do not continue) for all DRBs irrespective of the RLC mode. The UE deletes current configuration and applies new configuration based on the configuration provided by target eNB. Security configuration is retained and security algorithm is retained for re-establishment. SRBs are reconfigured. DRBs are released and re-setup using new configuration.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Select 1 event to use to activate S1 Handover. ACTIVE_STATE of CHG-EUTRA-A3CNF with PURPOSE A3PurposeIntraLteHandover set to active or ACTIVE_STATE of CHGEUTRA-A5CNF with PURPOSE A5PurposeIntraLteHandover set to active

A3 event is preferred. Set NO_HO of CHG-NBR-ENB to false. It is controlled by NBR eNB base. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

161

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Key Parameters CHG-EUTRA-A3CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A3CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

The purpose for using Event A3. It is currently used for intra-LTE handover and the SON ANR function. IntraLteHandover ReportStrongestCells IntraFrequencyLb CaInterFreq

ACTIVE_STATE

Whether to use Event A3. Inactive: Event A3 is not used. Active: Event A3 is used.

A3_OFFSET

RSRP threshold used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for Event A3.

TIME_TO_TRIGGER

timeToTrigger value for Event A3. The time-ToTrigger value is the period of time that must be met for UE to trigger a measurement report.

TRIGGER_QUANTITY

Quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a triggering condition for Event A3. Either RSRP or RSRQ is assigned.

CHG-EUTRA-A5CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A5CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

The purpose for using Event A5. Not in current use. The definition is made for later use. ci_A5PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra-LTE handover. ci_A5PurposeSpare_1: Reserved. ci_A5PurposeSpare_2: Reserved.

ACTIVE_STATE

Whether to use the Event A5. Inactive: Event A5 is not used. Active: Event A5 is used.

A5_THRESHOLD1_RSRP

RSRP threshold1 used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for Event A5.

A5_THRESHOLD2_RSRP

RSRP threshold2 used for triggering the EUTRA measurement report for Event A5.

TIME_TO_TRIGGER

timeToTrigger value for Event A5. The time-ToTrigger value is the period of time that must be met for the UE to trigger a measurement report.

TRIGGER_QUANTITY

This parameter is used to set up the TriggerQuantity of Event A5 during ReportConfigEutra configuration. The triggerQuantity can be set to rsrp/rsrq/followA2Event. The UE transmits Event A5 when RSRP or RSRQ meets a specific threshold according to triggerQuantity. If the triggerQuantity is RSRP, the A5_THRESHOLD_RSRP is used. If it is RSRQ, the A5_THRESHOLD_RSRQ is used. If the triggerQuantity is followA2Event, It will follow the triggerQuantity of the previously received A2 event with handover purpose. (it is noted that this configuration is only available if the A5 purpose is handover related case, that is, A5PurposeIntraLteHandover) This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. rsrp: The trigger quantity of this event is set RSRP. rsrq: The trigger quantity of this event is set RSRQ.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

162

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description followA2Event: The trigger quantity of this event follows the trigger quantity of the previously received A2 event.

CHG-NBR-ENB/RTRV-NBR-ENB/CRTE-NBR-ENB/DLT-NBR-ENB Parameter

Description

NO_X2

Whether to make X2 connection to neighbor eNB. False: X2 connection to neighbor eNB is made. True: X2 connection to neighbor eNB is not made.

NO_HO

Whether to perform handover to the neighbor eNB. False: Handover to neighbor eNB is performed. True: Handover to neighbor eNB is not performed.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

S1 Out Handover

InterS1OutAtt

The number of attempts for S1 handover in SeNB

InterS1OutPrepSucc

The number of successes for S1 handover preparation in SeNB

InterS1OutSucc

The number of successes for S1 handover execution in SeNB

InterS1OutPrepFail_CpC cFail

Preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by ECCB block during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1OutPrepFail_S1a pCuFail

Preparation fails due to S1AP specification cause during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1OutPrepFail_S1a pLinkFail

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1OutPrepFail_S1a pRpTo

Preparation fails due to S1AP relocprep timeout (not received) during the inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1OutPrepFail_S1a pSigFail

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1OutFail_CpCcTo

A call is released due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP) during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutFail_CpCcFail

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by ECCB block during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutFail_UpGtpFai l

A call is released due to the failure in the GTP block during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutFail_UpMacF ail

A call is released due to the failure in the MAC block during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutFail_UpPdcpF ail

A call is released due to the failure in the PDCP block during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutFail_UpRlcFai l

A call is released due to the failure in the RLC block during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutFail_RrcSigFa il

A call is released due to receiving RRC signaling during the inter S1 handover execution.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

163

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

S1 In Handover

Type Name

Type Description

InterS1OutFail_S1apCuF ail

A call is released due to the S1AP specification cause during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutFail_S1apLink Fail

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutFail_S1apRoT O

A call is released due to S1AP relocoverall timeout (not received) during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutFail_S1apSig Fail

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1OutCnt

S1 Handover Out collection count

InterS1OutCid

tcID of which collection is requested

InterS1InAtt

S1 handover attempt count in TeNB

InterS1InPrepSucc

S1 handover preparation success count in TeNB

InterS1InSucc

S1 handover execution success count in TeNB

InterS1InPrep_FailCpCc To

Preparation fails due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailCpCc Fail

Preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by ECCB block during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailUpGtp Fail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the GTP block during the inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailUpMa cFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the MAC block during the inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailUpPd cpFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the PDCP block during the inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailUpRlc Fail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the RLC block during the inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailCpBh CacFail

Preparation fails due to insufficient backhaulbased eNB resources during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailCpCa paCacFail

Preparation fails due to insufficient capacity-based eNB resources during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailCpQo sCacFail

Preparation fails due to insufficient QoS-based eNB resources during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailS1ap CuFail

Preparation fails due to S1AP specification cause during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailS1apL inkFail

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InPrep_FailS1ap SigFail

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during inter S1 handover preparation.

InterS1InFail_CpCcTo

A call is released due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP) during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_CpCcFail

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by ECCB block during the inter S1 handover execution.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

164

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Handover Time

MOBILITY (KPI)

Type Name

Type Description

InterS1InFail_UpGtpFail

A call is released due to the failure in the GTP block during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_UpMacFail

A call is released due to the failure in the MAC block during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_UpPdcpFai l

A call is released due to the failure in the PDCP block during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_UpRlcFail

A call is released due to the failure in the RLC block during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_RrcHcTo

A call is released due to HO command timeout (not received) during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_RrcSigFail

A call is released due to receiving RRC signaling during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_S1apCuFai l

A call is released due to the S1AP specification cause during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_S1apLinkF ail

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_S1apSigFa il

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the inter S1 handover execution.

InterS1InFail_S1apSigTo

A call is released due to S1AP signaling timeout (not received) during the inter S1 handover execution.

IntraHOTime

Time taken from transmitting the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to UE until after receiving the RRCConnection ReconfigurationComplete message from UE.

IntraHOTimeMax

Average maximum intra HO interrupt time

IntraHOTimeTot

Sum of Intra HO Interrupt time

IntraHOTimeCnt

Count of IntraHoTimeAvg collected

S1HOTime

Average S1 HO interrupt time

S1HOTimeMax

Average maximum S1 HO interrupt time

S1HOTimeTot

Sum of S1 HO interrupt time

S1HOTimeCnt

Count of S1HoTimeAvg collected

X2HOTime

Average X2 HO interrupt time

X2HOTimeMax

Average maximum X2 HO interrupt time

X2HOTimeTot

Sum of X2 HO Interrupt time

X2HOTimeCnt

Count of X2HoTimeAvg collected

HoTimeCnt

Count of HoTime collected

HoTimeCid

scID which collection is requested

EutranMobilityHOS1Out

HOIS1Out success rate of E-UTRAN mobility

sumHOS1Out_Att

Total S1 handover attempt count in SeNB

sumHOS1Out_Succ

Total S1 handover execution success count in SeNB

sumHOS1Out_PrepSucc

Total S1 handover preparation success count in SeNB

EutranMobilityHOS1In

HOS1In success rate of E-UTRAN mobility

sumHOS1In_Att

Total S1 handover attempt count in TeNB

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

165

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

sumHOS1In_Succ

Total S1 handover execution success count in SeNB

sumHOS1In_PrepSucc

Total S1 handover preparation success count in TeNB

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

166

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1005, X2 Handover INTRODUCTION X2 handover is a handover between two adjacent eNBs using X2 interface (inter eNB handover via X2 interface). X2 based handover is used when:

There is an available direct interface with the target eNB The target eNB belongs to the same MME group.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers between cells in different eNBs.

Users in a connected state can be moving within E-UTRAN, with change of serving cell.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Limitation With Full Configuration, HFN is reset for all bearers and lossless HO is not supported.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION When eNB receives a measurement report including Event A3 from UE, eNB triggers intra-LTE handover to the best cell indicated in the measurement report. Because handover target cell is decided by UE‟s measurement results for neighbouring cells. The eNB can transit from X2 handover to S1 handover with direct forwarding, when X2 setup fail (cause: 'Invalid MME Group ID'). The following figure shows the X2 handover procedure in E-UTRAN:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

167

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE sends MEASUREMENT REPORT including E-UTRAN measurements to the source eNB. 2) The source eNB determines whether to accept UE based on the MeasurementReport message and radio resource management information. Handover decision in case of PCI duplication: On reception of MR message, eNB checks whether PCI from MR exists in Neighbor NRT or not. If there are several NRs with same PCI (this case is called PCI duplication), then eNB requests UE for measurement with the purpose set to report CGI. After obtaining MR message including ECGI, eNB triggers Handover Preparation using NR of the reported ECGI. 3) The source eNB transmits the HANDOVER REQUEST message and the information necessary for handover to target eNB. 4) The target eNB performs admission control for the incoming handover request.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

168

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

If accepted, target eNB prepares the handover and creates the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including the mobilityControlInfo IE that communicates the source eNB to perform the handover. The target eNB includes the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message and transmits it to the source eNB. Bearer Setup list includes a list of tunnel information for receiving forwarded data if necessary. 5) The RRC CONNECTION RECONFIGURATION for handover is constructed by the serving eNB and is sent to UE. To send the uplink PDCP SN receiver status and the downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of the E-RABs of which the PDCP status must be preserved, the source eNB sends the SN STATUS TRANSFER message to target eNB. After receiving the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message that includes the mobilityControlInfo IE, UE performs synchronization with target eNB and connects to target eNB through the Random Access CHannel (RACH). The target cell replies with UL allocation and timing advance. 6) The UE performs the handover to target cell. After UE has successfully synchronized to target cell, it sends a RRC CONNECTION RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message to the target cell. 7) The target eNB sends a PATH SWITCH REQUEST message to MME to inform that UE has changed cell. 8)~10) The MME sends the Modify Bearer Request message to S-GW. The S-GW changes the downlink data path into the target eNB. The S-GW transmits at least one 'end marker' to source eNB through the previous path and releases the user plane resource for source eNB. 11) The S-GW transmits the Modify Bearer Response message to MME. 12) The MME returns the PATH SWITCH ACKNOWLEDGE message to target eNB. 13) The target eNB sends the UE CONTEXT RELEASE message to source eNB to notify handover has succeeded and to make source eNB release its resources. If source eNB receives the UE CONTEXT RELEASE message, it releases the radio resources and the control plane resources related to UE context. 14) If S-GW is relocated, MME releases UE‟s resource that is used in the source S-GW. [Enhancement] The full configuration option is used to support EUTRA handover to eNB of an earlier release. The target uses a full configuration and the previous configuration is discarded by UE. This can lead to a change in RLC mode for a bearer and the operation for RLC AM is the same as that for RLC UM. HFN is reset for all bearers. Since source eNB may not be aware that target eNB is using full configuration, there is no difference in source eNB behaviour. The target eNB does not resend data that was attempted delivery to UE to prevent data duplication.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

169

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The Source eNB includes ue-ConfigRelease IE in HandoverPreparationInformation message, ue-ConfigRelease IE indicates the RRC protocol release used for UE specific dedicated configuration. If target eNB does not support the release of RRC protocol which source eNB used to configure UE, target eNB may be unable to comprehend UE configuration provided by source eNB. In this case, target eNB should use the full configuration option to reconfigure UE for Handover and Re-establishment. Full configuration option includes an initialization of the radio configuration, which makes the procedure independent of the configuration used in the source cell with the exception that the security algorithms are continued for the RRC re-establishment. In case of reconfigurations involving the full configuration option, the PDCP entities are newly established (SN and HFN do not continue) for all DRBs irrespective of the RLC mode. The UE deletes current configuration and applies new configuration based on the configuration provided by target eNB. Security configuration is retained and security algorithm is retained for re-establishment. SRBs are reconfigured. DRBs are released and re-setup using new configuration. The general message flow is as follows:

1 The source eNB sends Handover Request message including ue-ConfigRelease IE.

2 The target eNB sets FullConfig IE to true if ue-ConfigRelease IE is higher than RRC Protocol release of target eNB.

3 The target eNB sends Handover Request Acknowledge message including FullConfig IE.

4 The source eNB forwards RRC Connection Reconfiguration message to UE. 5 The source eNB transmits RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message to Target eNB.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

170

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

6 The UE deletes current configuration of source eNB and applies new configuration provided by target eNB except security configuration.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Select 1 event to use to activate X2 Handover. ACTIVE_STATE of CHG-EUTRA-A3CNF with PURPOSE A3PurposeIntraLteHandover set to active or ACTIVE_STATE of CHGEUTRA-A5CNF with PURPOSE A5PurposeIntraLteHandover set to active

A3 event is preferred. Set NO_X2 of CHG-NBR-ENB to false. It is controlled by NBR eNB base. Key Parameters CHG-EUTRA-A3CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A3CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

The purpose for using Event A3. It is currently used for intra-LTE handover and the SON ANR function. ci_A3PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra-LTE handover. ci_A3PurposeReportStrongestCells ci_A3PurposeIntraFrequencyLb. ci_A3PurposeCaInterFreq ci_A3PurposeIntraFrequencyCre ci_A3PurposePeriodicMr

ACTIVE_STATE

Whether to use Event A3. Inactive: Event A3 is not used. Active: Event A3 is used.

A3_OFFSET

RSRP threshold used for triggering EUTRA measurement report for Event A3.

TIME_TO_TRIGGER

timeToTrigger value for Event A3. The time-ToTrigger value is the period of time that must be met for the UE to trigger a measurement report.

TRIGGER_QUANTITY

Quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a triggering condition for Event A3. Either RSRP or RSRQ is assigned.

CHG-EUTRA-A5CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A5CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

The purpose for using Event A5. Not in current use. The definition is made for later use. ci_A5PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra-LTE handover. ci_A5PurposeCaInterFreq: CaInterFreq. ci_A5PurposeMbms: InterFrequencyMbms. ci_A5PurposeArpHandover: ArpHandover. ci_A5PurposeOnDemandHO: OnDemandHandover. ci_A5PurposeInterFrequencySPID: InterFrequencySPID.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

171

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description ci_A5PurposeSpare_2: reserved.

ACTIVE_STATE

Whether to use the Event A5. Inactive: Event A5 is not used. Active: Event A5 is used.

A5_THRESHOLD1_RSRP

RSRP threshold1 used for triggering EUTRA measurement report for Event A5.

A5_THRESHOLD2_RSRP

RSRP threshold2 used for triggering EUTRA measurement report for Event A5.

TIME_TO_TRIGGER

timeToTrigger value for Event A5. The time-ToTrigger value is the period of time that must be met for the UE to trigger a measurement report.

TRIGGER_QUANTITY

Quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a triggering condition for Event A5. Either RSRP or RSRQ is assigned.

CHG-NBR-ENB/RTRV-NBR-ENB/CRTE-NBR-ENB/DLT-NBR-ENB Parameter

Description

NO_X2

Whether to make X2 connection to neighbor eNB. False: X2 connection to neighbor eNB is made. True: X2 connection to neighbor eNB is not made.

NO_HO

Whether to perform handover to neighbor eNB. False: Handover to neighbor eNB is performed. True: Handover to neighbor eNB is not performed.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

X2 Handover Out

InterX2OutAtt

Attempt count for X2 handover from SeNB.

InterX2OutPrepSucc

Success count for X2 handover preparation from SeNB.

InterX2OutSucc

Success count for X2 handover execution from SeNB.

InterX2OutPrepFail_CP_CC_FAIL

Preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by ECCB block during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2OutPrepFail_S1AP_LINK_FAIL

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2OutPrepFail_S1AP_SIG_FAIL

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2OutPrepFail_X2AP_CU_FAIL

Preparation fails due to X2AP specification cause during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2OutPrepFail_X2AP_LINK_FAIL

Preparation fails due to X2 SCTP link failure during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2OutPrepFail_X2AP_RP_TO

Preparation fails due to X2AP relocprep

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

172

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description timeout (not received) during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2OutPrepFail_X2AP_SIG_FAIL

Preparation fails due to receiving X2AP signaling during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2OutFail_CP_CC_TO

A call is released due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_CP_CC_FAIL

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_UP_GTP_FAIL

A call is released due to the failure in the GTP block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_UP_MAC_FAIL

A call is released due to the internal failure in the MAC block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_UP_PDCP_FAIL

A call is released due to the internal failure in the PDCP block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_UP_RLC_FAIL

A call is released due to the internal failure in the RLC block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_RRC_SIG_FAIL

A call is released due to receiving RRC signaling during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_S1AP_CU_FAIL

A call is released due to the S1AP specification cause during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_S1AP_LINK_FAIL

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_S1AP_SIG_FAIL

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_X2AP_CU_FAIL

A call is released due to the X2AP specification cause during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_X2AP_LINK_FAIL

A call is released due to the X2 SCTP link failure during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_X2AP_RO_TO

A call is released due to X2AP RelocOverall timeout (not received) during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutFail_X2AP_SIG_FAIL

A call is released due to receiving the X2AP signaling during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2OutCnt

X2 Handover Out collection count

InterX2OutCid

tcID of which collection is requested

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

173

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

X2 Handover In

InterX2InAtt

The number of attempts for X2 handover in TeNB

InterX2InPrepSucc

The number of successes for X2 handover preparation in TeNB

InterX2InSucc

The number of successes for X2 handover execution in TeNB

InterX2InPrepFail_CP_CC_TO

Preparation fails due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP) during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_CP_CC_FAIL

Preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by ECCB block during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_UP_GTP_FAIL

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the GTP block during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_UP_MAC_FAIL

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the MAC block during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_UP_PDCP_FAIL

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the PDCP block during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_UP_RLC_FAIL

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the RLC block during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_CP_BH_CAC_FAIL

Preparation fails due to insufficient backhaul-based eNB resources during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_CP_CAPA_CAC_FAIL

Preparation fails due to insufficient capacity-based eNB resources during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_CP_QOS_CAC_FAIL

Preparation fails due to insufficient QoSbased eNB resources during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_S1AP_LINK_FAIL

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_S1AP_SIG_FAIL

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_X2AP_CU_FAIL

Preparation fails due to X2AP specification cause during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_X2AP_LINK_FAIL

Preparation fails due to X2 SCTP link failure during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InPrepFail_X2AP_SIG_FAIL

Preparation fails due to receiving X2AP signaling during the inter X2 handover preparation.

InterX2InFail_CP_CC_TO

A call is released due to call control timeout

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

174

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP) during the inter X2 handover execution.

MOBILITY (KPI)

InterX2InFail_CP_CC_FAIL

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_UP_GTP_FAIL

A call is released due to the failure in the GTP block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_UP_MAC_FAIL

A call is released due to the internal failure in the MAC block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_UP_PDCP_FAIL

A call is released due to the internal failure in the PDCP block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_UP_RLC_FAIL

A call is released due to the internal failure in the RLC block during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_RRC_HC_TO

A call is released due to HO command timeout (not received) during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_RRC_SIG_FAIL

A call is released due to receiving RRC signaling during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_S1AP_CU_FAIL

A call is released due to the S1AP specification cause during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_S1AP_LINK_FAIL

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_S1AP_PATH_TO

A call is released due to S1AP path switch timeout (not received) during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_S1AP_SIG_FAIL

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_X2AP_CU_FAIL

A call is released due to the X2AP specification cause during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_X2AP_LINK_FAIL

A call is released due to the X2 SCTP link failure during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_X2AP_SIG_FAIL

A call is released due to receiving the X2AP signaling during the inter X2 handover execution.

InterX2InFail_X2AP_SIG_TO

A call is released due to X2AP signaling timeout (not received) during the inter X2 handover execution.

EutranMobilityHOX2Out

HOX2Out success rate of E-UTRAN mobility

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

175

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

sumHOX2Out_Att

Total X2 handover attempt count in SeNB

sumHOX2Out_Succ

Total X2 handover execution success count in SeNB

sumHOX2Out_PrepSucc

Total X2 handover preparation success count in SeNB

EutranMobilityHOX2In

HOX2In success rate of E-UTRAN mobility

sumHOX2In_Att

Total X2 handover attempt count in TeNB

sumHOX2In_Succ

Total X2 handover execution success count in TeNB

sumHOX2In_PrepSucc

Total X2 handover preparation success count in TeNB

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

176

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1202, PS Handover between LTE and UTRAN INTRODUCTION PS Handover between LTE and UTRAN provides the seamless data service over LTE and UTRAN coverage. In case of supporting outgoing inter-RAT handover to UTRAN, the serving eNB configures LTE and UTRAN measurements to UEs and determines PS handover to UTRAN based on the measurement report from UE. Two procedures, that is, PS handover from LTE to UTRAN and PS handover from UTRAN to LTE, are supported.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers over LTE and UTRAN coverage.

Users in connected state can move across E-UTRAN and UTRAN coverage, remaining in the connected state.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency UTRAN Device, EPC, and UTRAN shall support PS handover between EUTRAN and UTRAN

FEATURE DESCRIPTION When a user under LTE data services area and moves to UTRAN, eNB needs to transit the service to UTRAN using the PS handover procedure to provide seamless data services. To support seamless data service when UE moves from EUTRAN to UTRAN coverage, Samsung eNB supports PS handover to UTRAN under the following conditions:

Target UTRAN shall support PS handover UE shall support measurement reporting for UTRAN frequencies in E-UTRA connected mode

UE shall support handover to UTRAN UTRAN frequency shall be configured for PS handover purpose (Each UTRAN frequency group can be configured to support CS service, PS service or both).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

177

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The eNB determines PS handover to UTRAN based on UTRAN measurement report in UE. When eNB receives the relevant UE measurement results and PS handover towards UTRAN is possible, the source eNB initiates the inter-RAT PS handover procedures by sending a handover request to serving MME. According to the handover request from eNB, MME performs inter-RAT packet handover preparation procedures with UTRAN. In case the handover succeeded, the „handover command‟ provided by UTRAN will be sent to UE by source eNB. After this message is received by UE, UE moves on the UTRAN target cell. The following figure shows the overview of PS handover to UTRAN procedures:

In case of data user in connected mode, Samsung LTE system provides two types of methods for inter-RAT mobility to UTRAN, that is, PS redirection and PS handover. The operator can choose which method is preferred for the inter-RAT mobility based on their requirements. If forced redirection mode is chosen, interRAT PS redirection is always used for inter-RAT connected mode mobility to 3G (forced redirection option). On the other hand, if forced redirection mode is not chosen, inter-RAT PS handover is preferred to PS redirection. Though PS handover is preferred in the system setting, the serving eNB may perform PS redirection because some reasons, for example, UE not support UTRAN measurement/handover or no neighbor UTRAN cell is defined. If the inter-RAT PS handover is used, serving eNB configures Event A2 (Serving is worse than a threshold) measurement reporting to trigger UTRAN measurement. On reception of measurement report triggered by Event A2, Samsung eNB configures UTRAN measurement based on Event B2 (Serving becomes worse than threshold_1 and inter RAT neighbor becomes better than threshold_2) or Event B1 (Inter RAT neighbour becomes better than threshold) for UE. PS handover to UTRAN is triggered on reception of Event B2/B1 as coverage based trigger. In case of coverage based handover, UTRAN measurement based method is only used, that is, if there is no UE measurement for UTRAN target carrier/cell, PS handover is not triggered. In case of UEs which do not support UTRAN measurement or UTRAN handover, the serving eNB always performs PS redirection to move UE to UTRAN.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

178

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The following figure shows the call flow for PS handover from E-UTRAN to UTRAN procedure:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

179

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Before performing handover procedures, uplink and downlink data traffic of an LTE UE goes through eNB, S-GW, and P-GW. 1) The UE transmits a measurement report that includes UTRAN measurement. (Event B2 is triggered) 2) The source eNB determines the PS handover to the UTRAN.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

180

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

3) The source eNB requests PS handover to UTRAN by transmitting Handover Required to the source MME. 4)~5) The source MME sends Forward Relocation Request to the new SGSN, and SGSN sends Relocation Request to Target RNC. Then, radio access bearer is established between RNC and SGSN. 6) The RNC responds to new SGSN with Relocation Request Acknowledge containing target RAN TEID (DL) for RAB setup for DL traffic, and the target RNC is ready to receive forwarded downlink PDUs. 7) Forward Relocation Response with SGSN TEID (UL) is sent from new SGSN to old MME to receive the forwarded PDUs from source LTE network. 8) The MME sends Create Indirect Data Forwarding Tunnel Request to S-GW with target SGSN TEID (UL), S-GW becomes capable of forwarding downlink PDUs to target SGSN. 9) The S-GW sends the Create Indirect Data Forwarding Tunnel Response to MME with serving S-GW TEID (UL). 10) The source MME sends Handover Command to source eNB with S-GW TEID (UL). S1 bearer for uplink indirect forwarding between eNB and S-GW is established. 11) From this phase, downlink indirect forwarding from source eNB to target RNC is feasible. (Forwarding path: Source eNB  Source S-GW  Target SGSN  Target RNC) 12) After the indirect forwarding tunnels establishment, source eNB transmits the Mobility from EUTRA command to UE including the message sent by target UTRAN. 13)~14) The UE is switched to UTRAN target cell specified by eNB and transmits HO to UTRAN Complete message to UTRAN. Then, Target RNC notifies handover is completed by transmitting Relocation Complete to target SGSN. 15)~18) The Target SGSN processes the handover completion procedure with source MME. Then, Update PDP Context Request/Response procedures are performed, and Iu bearer tunnel is established. 19) The UE performs Routing Area Update procedure. Thereafter, UE continues data service in UTRAN. 20)~22) Upon the expiration of resource release timers, retained resources in eNB, MME, S-GW are released according the appropriate signaling procedures. After PS handover to UTRAN is completed, uplink and downlink data traffic of UE goes through RNC and P-GW. In case PS handover from UTRAN, handover decision is made by the source UTRAN. The target LTE eNB acquires the handover request in S1AP Handover Request message sent from MME. When PS handover from UTRAN is requested, target eNB performs admission control based on the received E-RAB QoS information. In case the handover request is allowed, target eNB allocates the required resources according to received E-RAB QoS information and reserves a C-RNTI and optionally a RACH preamble. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

181

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The following figure shows PS handover procedure from UTRAN:

1) The source RNC determines the PS handover to E-UTRAN. 2) The source RNC requests the PS handover by transmitting Relocation Required to source SGSN.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

182

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

3)~9) The handover preparation procedure is processed between source UTRAN and target E-UTRAN. Through this procedure, resources are allocated to support UE maintain data service in target E-UTRAN after PS handover. If data forwarding is possible, a tunnel for data forwarding is set up. 10) The source RNC receives Relocation Command from source SGSN. 11) The source RNC transmits the HO from UTRAN Command to UE as well as the HO command received from target E-UTRAN. 12) The UE is switched to E-UTRAN target cell specified by source RNC and transmits the RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete to E-UTRAN. 13) The target eNB notifies that handover is completed by transmitting Handover Notify to target MME. 14)~18) The target MME processes the handover completion procedure with source SGSN. 19) The UE performs the Tracking Area Update procedure. Thereafter, UE continues data service in E-UTRAN. 20)~23) The source SGSN releases the resources used in UTRAN after completing PS handover with the E-UTRAN. If a tunnel for data forwarding was set up, source SGSN and target MME release the data forwarding tunnel.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the UTRAN Frequency Information by executing the „CHG-UTRA-FA‟ command and A2 report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and B2 report configuration for the each UTRAN carrier. The handover target UTRAN cell need to be registered in the serving cell neighboring cell list.

Key Parameters CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information. N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information. EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.

DUPLEX_TYPE

This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier. FDD: Frequency Division Duplex. TDD: Time Division Duplex.

UARFCN_UL

This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

UARFCN_DL

This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

183

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description (ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to activate the measurement gap as default. LteHo: Used for Gap Activate. LteBlind: Used for Blind HO. IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO. IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO. Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation. CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure Config. Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity. Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests. CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation. InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr. InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: Event A2 is not used. Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the site, this is inactive.

CHG-UTRA-B2CNF/RTRV-UTRA-B2CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose to retrieve the B2 report configuration information used for interoperating with UTRAN. InterRatHandover: Used for handover to UTRAN. Srvcc: Used for SRVCC. InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with handover mobility option. OnDemandHandover: Enable the forced handover triggering by operator Spare_1: Reserved field. Spare_2: Reserved field.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether UTRA Event B2, which is triggered when Inter RAT neighbor becomes better than threshold, is enabled/disabled. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: UTRA Event B2 is not used. Active: UTRA Event B2 is used.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

184

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

CHG-NBR-UTRAN/RTRV-NBR-UTRAN/CRTE-NBR-UTRAN/DLT-NBRUTRAN Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates the validity of the Neighbor UTRAN. This parameter must be set accurately since it determines the RIM operation and Handover execution. N_EQUIP: The information is determined as invalid. EQUIP: The information is determined as valid.

RNC_ID

This parameter is RNC ID of UTRAN neighbor cell located near eNB.

C_ID

This parameter indicates the cell ID value of UTRAN neighboring cell. This data must be accurately entered to execute RIM process. The SI of UTRAN neighboring cell, obtained through the RIM process, is used during CSFB with 3G SIB operation.

LAC

This parameter indicates the Location Area Code (LAC) of UTRAN neighboring Cell. This information is used during RIM operation and Handover. Make sure that set the parameter accurately to ensure successful RIM operation and Handover.

RAC

This parameter indicates the routing area code of the neighboring UTRAN cell. This information is used during RIM procedures and Handover. The parameter must be set accurately because the information is used during RIM procedures and Handover.

MCC0 ~ MCC5[4]

This parameter is the PLMN list information (MCC) of a UTRAN neighbor cell located around the eNB, Enter 3-digit number whose each digit ranges from 0 to 9. This information is used during RIM operation and Handover. Make sure that set accurately to ensure successful RIM operation and Handover.

MNC0 ~ MNC5[4]

This parameter is the PLMN list information (MNC) of a UTRAN neighbor cell located around the eNB, Enter 3-digit or 2-digit number whose each digit ranges from 0 to 9. This information is used during RIM operation and Handover. Make sure that set accurately to ensure successful RIM operation and Handover.

DUPLEX_TYPE

This parameter is the duplex type information of a UTRAN neighbor cell located near eNB. The duplex Type of UTRAN Neighboring Cell must be entered accurately. FDD: Frequency Division Duplex. TDD: Time Division Duplex.

P_SCM_CODE

This parameter indicates the scramble code information of the neighboring UTRAN FDD cell. It is used during handover with the UTRAN. The parameter must be set accurately since it is used during the handover.

ARFCN_UL

This parameter indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) UL value of UTRAN neighboring cell. Values from 0 to 16,383 can be entered. This should be matched with exact value used by the actual UTRAN network.

ARFCN_DL

This parameter indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) DL value of UTRAN neighboring cell. Values from 0 to 16,383 can be entered. This should be matched with exact value used by the actual UTRAN network. Make sure that use the unique value compared to previously used value. If the physCellID and ARFCN DL are same, the system determines the entry is identical.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

Type Description 185

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

HO_INTER_RAT_UTRAN_O UT

RatUtranOutAtt

LTE to inter-RAT UTRAN handover attempt count.

RatUtranOutPrepSucc

LTE to inter-RAT UTRAN handover preparation success count

RatUtranOutSucc

LTE to inter-RAT UTRAN handover execution success count

RatUtranOutPrepFail_CpCcFail

Preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranOutPrepFail_S1apCuF ail

Preparation fails due to S1AP specification cause during UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranOutPrepFail_S1apLink Fail

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranOutPrepFail_S1apRpT o

Preparation fails due to S1AP relocprep timeout (not received) during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranOutPrepFail_S1apSigF ail

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranOutFail_CpCcTo

A call is released due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_CpCcFail

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from the ECMB or by the ECCB block during the UTRAN Handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_UpGtpFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the GTP block during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_UpMacFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the MAC block during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_UpPdcpFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the PDCP block during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_UpRlcFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the RLC block during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_RrcSigFail

A call is released due to receiving RRC signaling during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_S1apCuFail

A call is released due to the S1AP specification cause during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_S1apLinkFail

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_S1apRoTo

A call is released due to an S1AP

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

186

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description relocoverall timeout (not received) during the UTRAN Handover execution.

RatUtranOutFail_S1apSigFail

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the UTRAN handover execution.

Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

HO_INTER_RAT_UTRAN_I N

RatUtranInAtt

LTE to inter-RAT UTRAN handover attempt count

RatUtranInPrepSucc

LTE to inter-RAT UTRAN handover preparation success count

RatUtranInSucc

LTE to inter-RAT UTRAN handover execution success count

RatUtranInPrepFail_CpCcTo

Preparation fails due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_CpCcFail

Preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by ECCB block during UTRAN Handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_UpGtpFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the GTP block during the UTRAN Handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_UpMacFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the MAC block during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_UpPdcpFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the PDCP block during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_UpRlcFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the RLC block during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_CpBhCacF ail

Preparation fails due to insufficient backhaul-based eNB resources during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_CpCapaCa cFail

Preparation fails due to insufficient capacity-based eNB resources during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_CpQosCac Fail

Preparation fails due to insufficient QoSbased eNB resources during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_S1apCuFail

Preparation fails due to S1AP specification cause during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_S1apLinkFa il

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during the UTRAN handover preparation.

RatUtranInPrepFail_S1apSigFail

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during UTRAN Handover preparation.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

187

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

RatUtranInFail_CpCcTo

A call is released due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the UTRAN Handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_CpCcFail

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from the ECMB or by the ECCB block during UTRAN Handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_UpGtpFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the GTP block during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_UpMacFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the MAC block during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_UpPdcpFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the PDCP block during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_UpRlcFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the RLC block during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_RrcHcTo

A call is released due to HO command timeout (not received) during the UTRAN Handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_RrcSigFail

A call is released due to receiving RRC signaling during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_S1apCuFail

A call is released due to the S1AP specification cause during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_S1apLinkFail

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_S1apSigFail

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the UTRAN handover execution.

RatUtranInFail_S1apSigTo

A call is released due to S1AP signaling timeout (not received) during the UTRAN handover execution.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

188

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1204, Redirection to UTRAN without SI INTRODUCTION This is outbound mobility control functionality to UTRAN. When mobility event to UTRAN is occurred, eNB redirects UE towards UTRAN.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.

Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency UTRAN Device, EPC, and UTRAN should support this feature.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The operator needs to provide PS data service continuously even when LTE/3G dual mode UE enters 3G-only coverage area. As one of the methods to send the data UE to UTRAN, eNB initiates the redirection (release with redirect) procedures. This is indicated by the redirect carrier information in the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message. In case of redirection, triggering due to UE‟s mobility is supported even if no prior UE measurements have been performed on the target UTRAN cell and/or frequency. The following figure shows the Redirection to UTRAN without SI procedure:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

189

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

In case of data user in connected mode, Samsung LTE system provides two types of methods for inter-RAT mobility to UTRAN, that is, PS redirection and PS handover. The operator can choose which method is preferred for the inter-RAT mobility based on their requirements. If forced redirection mode is chosen, interRAT PS redirection is always used for inter-RAT connected mode mobility to 3G (forced redirection option). On the other hand, if forced redirection mode is not chosen, inter-RAT PS handover is preferred to PS redirection. Though PS handover is preferred in the system setting, the serving eNB may perform PS redirection because some reasons, for example, UE not support UTRAN measurement/handover or no neighbor UTRAN cell is defined. In case of UE which is candidate of PS redirection, the serving eNB configures Event A2 (Serving is worse than a threshold_0) measurement to trigger PS redirection. When the Event A2 measurement report from UE is received, PS redirection to a target UTRA carrier is performed. On triggering of PS redirection, the serving eNB redirects UE to the selected carrier by sending RRCConnectionRelease message, which includes redirectedCarrierInfoIE.

The following figure shows the call flow for Redirection to UTRAN without SI procedure:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

190

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Before redirection, uplink and downlink data traffic of LTE UE goes through eNB, S-GW, and P-GW.

1 As UE moves away from source eNB, then eNB determines the redirection to UTRAN (Event A2 is triggered).

2 The eNB transmits RRCConnectionRelease to UE. The message includes the target UTRA carrier frequency to which UE will be redirected. At this step, eNB releases both SRB and DRB.

3 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME to release UE specific S1 connection between eNB and S-GW.

4 The MME sends the Release Access Bearer Request to S-GW to release the S1U bearer.

5 The S-GW responses by sending the Release Access Bearer Response to MME after releasing eNB related information. Other elements of UE‟s S-GW contexts are not affected in S-GW, and S-GW starts buffering the downlink packets received for UE.

6 The MME sends UE Context Release Command to eNB to release the S1 signaling connection.

7 The eNB confirms the S1 Release by returning S1 UE Context Release Complete message to MME. With this, the signalling connection between MME and eNB for that UE is released.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

191

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

8 The UE is switched to UTRA carrier that is specified by eNB in the RRC Connection Release, and connects to UTRAN. The UE performs the Routing Area Update procedure. In this procedure, SGSN makes a bearer connection to the old P-GW (GGSN) for seamless IP mobility, and PS session can be continuously served in UTRAN with the same IP address of LTE. In case of detailed procedures for Routing Area Update, refer to the design document of Core Network. The source MME releases any retained RAN and S-GW resources when a certain timer expires. After the redirection is completed, data traffic of UE goes through RNC and P-GW if the direct tunnel is available. According to the characteristics of deployed site, the number of UTRA frequencies is configurable. Up to 6 different UTRA frequencies can be assigned per cell. Also, the purpose of each UTRA frequency can be configurable based on supported service as follows:

CS_ONLY(1): for CSFB (Redirection w/o SI, Redirection w/ SI, HO), SRVCC PS_ONLY(2): for PS mobility (Redirection w/o SI, Redirection w/ SI, HO) BOTH(0): for all cases If UE has been instructed to complete Redirection process with a target UARFCN and cannot find the target UARFCN, UE shall try to camp on any suitable cell based on Stored Information. If UE fails to camp on any suitable cell based on the Stored Information or UE has no Stored Information or it , then UE should execute a complete 3G band search before trying again to complete other RAT/band searches (that is, back to 4G). In more detail, if UE has not been able to find the target UARFCN and has to start the complete 3G band search then, during that 3G search, UE should execute a cell selection process & not a cell re-selection process. If cell selection is not achieved on 3G layer, UE could move from 3G to LTE during the subsequent cell selection phase on the basis of inter-RAT weighting (the preference for LTE UEs move to LTE layer).

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the UTRAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-UTRA-FA command and configure A2 report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind. If „interRatDataOption‟ in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to 'Data_BlindOnly', Blind Redirection is executed regardless UE‟s capabilities on Measurement for UTRAN and PS handover to UTRAN.

Key Parameters CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

192

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information. EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.

DUPLEX_TYPE

This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier. FDD: Frequency Division Duplex. TDD: Time Division Duplex.

UARFCN_UL

This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

UARFCN_DL

This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to activate the measurement gap as default. LteHo: Used for Gap Activate. LteBlind: Used for Blind HO. IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO. IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO. Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation. CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure Config. Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity. Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests. CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation. InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr. InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: Event A2 is not used. Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the site, this is inactive.

CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT Parameter

Description

INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION

This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS handover for Data Call. Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability. Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

193

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

PS_REDIR_UTRAN_OUT

PsRedirAttUtran

PS Redirection to Inter RAT UTRAN attempt count

PsRedirPrepSuccUtran

PS Redirection to Inter RAT UTRAN preparation success count

PsRedirSuccUtran

PS Redirection to Inter RAT UTRAN execution success count

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

194

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1205, Redirection to UTRAN with SI INTRODUCTION This is outbound mobility control functionality to UTRAN. When mobility event to UTRAN is occurred, eNB redirects UE towards UTRAN. If System Information (SI) of the neighboring cells in the selected carrier is available, SI of neighboring UTRAN cells is included in the message as well as the redirected UTRA carrier information.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.

Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency UTRAN Device, EPC, and UTRAN should support this feature.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION By using this feature, serving eNB can include system information of the target cell in the redirection message. So, the call setup delay in UTRAN can be reduced. The operator needs to provide PS data service continuously even when LTE/3G dual mode UE enters the 3G-only coverage area. As one of the methods to send the data UE to UTRAN, eNB initiates the redirection (release with redirect) procedures. This is indicated by the redirect carrier information in the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message. If UE supports the enhanced redirection to UTRAN and System Information (SI) of neighboring UTRAN cell is available, carry out Redirection with SI to reduce the call setup time is UTRAN. The following figure shows the PS redirection to UTRAN with SI procedures:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

195

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

In case of data user in connected mode, Samsung LTE system provides two types of methods for inter-RAT mobility to UTRAN, that is, PS redirection and PS handover. The operator can choose which method is preferred for the inter-RAT mobility based on their requirements. If forced redirection mode is chosen, interRAT PS redirection is always used for inter-RAT connected mode mobility to 3G (forced redirection option). On the other hand, if forced redirection mode is not chosen, inter-RAT PS handover is preferred to PS redirection. Though PS handover is preferred in the system setting, the serving eNB may perform PS redirection because some reasons, for example, UE not support UTRAN measurement/handover or no neighbor UTRAN cell is defined. In case of UE which is candidate of PS redirection, the serving eNB configures Event A2 (Serving is worse than a threshold_0) measurement to trigger PS redirection. When the Event A2 measurement report from UE is received, PS redirection to a target UTRA carrier is performed. On triggering of PS redirection, the serving eNB redirects UE to the selected carrier by sending RRCConnectionRelease message, which includes redirectedCarrierInfoIE. It system information of the neighboring cells in the selected carrier is available, the system information is included in RRCConnectionRelease message. Otherwise, redirected UTRA carrier information is only included in the message (Redirection to UTRAN without SI feature). To acquire system information from neighboring UTRAN cells, the serving eNB and neighboring UTRAN cells should support RIM procedures.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

196

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The following figure shows the call flow for redirection to UTRAN procedure:

Before redirection, uplink and downlink data traffic of LTE UE goes through eNB, S-GW, and P-GW.

1 As UE moves away from the source eNB, then eNB determines the redirection to UTRAN (Event A2 is triggered). Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

197

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

2 The eNB transmits RRCConnectionRelease to UE. The message includes the target UTRA carrier frequency which UE will be redirected. If SI (System Information) of the neighboring cells in the selected carrier is available, SI of neighboring UTRAN cells are included. At this step, eNB releases both SRB and DRB.

3 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME to release UE specific S1 connection between eNB and S-GW.

4 The MME sends the Release Access Bearer Request to S-GW to release the S1U bearer.

5 The S-GW responses by sending the Release Access Bearer Response to MME after releasing eNB related information. Other elements of UE‟s S-GW contexts are not affected in S-GW, and S-GW starts buffering the downlink packets received for UE.

6 The MME sends UE Context Release Command to eNB to release the S1 signaling connection.

7 The eNB confirms the S1 Release by returning S1 UE Context Release Complete message to MME. With this, the signalling connection between MME and eNB for that UE is released.

8 The UE is switched to UTRA carrier that is specified by eNB in the RRC Connection Release, and connects to UTRAN. The UE performs the Routing Area Update procedure. In this procedure, SGSN generally makes a bearer connection to the old P-GW (GGSN) for seamless IP mobility, and PS session can be continuously served in UTRAN with the same IP address of LTE. In case of detailed procedures for Routing Area Update, refer to the design document of Core Network. The source MME releases any retained RAN and S-GW resources when a certain timer expires. After the redirection is completed, data traffic of UE goes through RNC and P-GW if the direct tunnel is available. According to the characteristics of deployed site, the number of UTRA frequencies is configurable. Up to 6 different UTRA frequencies can be assigned per cell. Also, the purpose of each UTRA frequency can be configurable based on supported service as follows:

CS_ONLY(1): for CSFB (Redirection without SI, Redirection with SI, HO), SRVCC

PS_ONLY(2): for PS mobility (Redirection without SI, Redirection with SI, HO) BOTH(0): for all cases When reviewing UE behavior under a failure to reach the target RAT/frequency, the version of the document Samsung refers to the 3GPP specification 3GPP TS 36.304 is Rel-9 (9.11.0).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

198

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

If UE has been instructed to complete Redirection process with a target UARFCN and cannot find the target UARFCN, UE shall try to camp on any suitable cell based on Stored Information. If UE fails to camp on any suitable cell based on the Stored Information or UE has no Stored Information or it , then UE should execute a complete 3G band search before trying again to complete other RAT/band searches (that is, back to 4G).In more detail, if UE has not been able to find the target UARFCN and has to start the complete 3G band search then, during that 3G search, UE should execute a cell selection process & not a cell re-selection process. If cell selection is not achieved on 3G layer, UE could move from 3G to LTE during the subsequent cell selection phase on the basis of inter-RAT weighting (the preference for LTE UEs move to LTE layer).

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-UTRA-FA command and configure A2 report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.

If „interRatDataOption‟ in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to “Data_BlindOnly”, Blind Redirection is executed regardless UE‟s capabilities on Measurement for UTRAN and PS handover to UTRAN.

„isAllowedRim‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the CHG-HOOPT. This parameter configures the RIM procedure and „rimSupport‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the CHG-NBR-UTRAN command.

Key Parameters CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information. N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information. EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.

DUPLEX_TYPE

This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier. FDD: Frequency Division Duplex. TDD: Time Division Duplex.

UARFCN_UL

This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) value for UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

UARFCN_DL

This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

199

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to activate the measurement gap as default. LteHo: Used for Gap Activate. LteBlind: Used for Blind HO. IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO. IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO. Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation. CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure Config. Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity. Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests. CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation. InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr. InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: Event A2 is not used. Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the site, this is inactive.

CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT Parameter

Description

INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION

This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS handover for Data Call. Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability. Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.

CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT Parameter

Description

RIM_ENABLE

This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management (RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN). False: Does not perform the RIM function. True: Performs the RIM function.

CHG-NBR-UTRAN/RTRV-NBR-UTRAN/CRTE-NBR-UTRAN/DLT-NBRUTRAN Parameter

Description

RIM_SUPPORT

This parameter is whether the UTRAN neighbor cell supports the RIM. This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a neighbor UTRAN cell is supported. If it is set to False, then the RIM procedure is not executed. If it is set to True, then the RIM procedure is executed. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure execution is determined by the setting. False: RIM is not supported. True: RIM is supported.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

200

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

PS_REDIR_UTRAN_O UT

PsRedirAttUtran

PS Redirection to Inter RAT UTRAN attempt count

PsRedirPrepSuccUtr an

PS Redirection to Inter RAT UTRAN preparation success count

PsRedirSuccUtran

PS Redirection to Inter RAT UTRAN execution success count

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36. 413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

201

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1208, CSFB to UTRAN with Redirection with SI INTRODUCTION CS fallback, a function to provide voice services to LTE users before Voice over LTE (VoLTE) is introduced, makes transition to CS domain upon LTE user‟s outgoing/incoming call so that the user can get voice services. The function of CSFB to UTRAN is the transition of UE to UTRAN according to the CSFB procedure, in the event of CSFB outgoing/incoming. When eNB receives a S1 message where CSFB indicator is included from MME, it selects a target frequency and performs a procedure of redirection with system information. Then, UE starts voice call outgoing/incoming procedure in UTRAN.

BENEFIT The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS network (UTRAN).

Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS network (UTRAN).

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency UTRAN Device, EPC and UTRAN should support this feature.

RIM for SI tunneling shall be support by EPC and UTRAN.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION With the default LTE data network connection in operation, a mobile terminating (incoming) CS voice call triggers paging via LTE network to UE. This paging message initiates CSFB, as the device sends a NAS EXTENDED SERVICE REQUEST to the network to transition to 3G network. Once transitioned, the legacy call setup procedures are followed to setup the CS call. Mobile originating (outgoing) calls follow the same transition from LTE (PS) to 3G (CS), except for the paging step. In 3G networks, PS data sessions can also be established simultaneously for data services. After the voice call ends and UE returns to idle state or Cell_PCH state, the device should perform cell reselection procedures to reselect LTE cell. If UE has still PS session after the voice call ends, then UE remains in 3G cell. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

202

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

3G network coexists with LTE network residing between UE and core network. The MME serves users while in LTE access network, while for 3G SGSN serves users when utilizing data services and MSC (Mobile Switching Center) when utilizing voice services. To support CS Fallback signaling, MME connects to MSC with SGs interface. The SGs interface is used for the mobility management and paging procedures between EPS and CS domain. Also, it is used for the delivery of both mobile originating and mobile terminating SMS. The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:

In general, UE notifies to MME about the type of attach required during the attach procedure. In case “Attach Type” in the Attach request message is “Combined EPS/IMSI Attach”, combined CS and PS updates are executed. In case of Combined EPS/IMSI Attach there is a requirement to use SGs interface, between MME and MSC. To enable „CSFB to UTRAN based on Redirection with SI‟ feature, the parameter „INTER_RAT_CS_REDIRECTION‟ should be set as „True‟ by executing „CHGINTWO-OPT‟ command. This parameter is used for the selection of the interworking option per cell. Also, „RIM_ENABLE‟ parameter should be set as „TRUE‟ by executing the „CHG-HO-OPT‟. This parameter performs to enable the RIM procedure per eNB. The following figure shows redirection based CSFB to UTRAN procedures when UE is in idle mode:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

203

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE, in idle state, originates a voice call or receives a mobile terminated voice call. 2~5) Since UE is in idle state, it starts RRC connection establishment procedures with eNB to make a SRB connection. The UE sends NAS Extended Service Request message to MME, which is included in RRC Connection Setup Complete message. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

204

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

6) The MME sends eNB S1-AP Initial Context Setup Request message that includes CSFB indicator. 7) The eNB processes the AS security activation. 8) The eNB transmits S1-AP Initial Context Setup Response message to MME. At this step, eNB does not setup a DRB connection because UE is going to redirect to UTRAN. 9) The eNB sends RRC Connection Release message to UE. The message includes UTRA carrier frequency to which UE will be redirected, the cell reselection priority of the UTRA frequency, and system information of one or more cells on the redirected UTRA frequency. 10~14) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request message to MME to release S1 bearer connection between eNB and S-GW. S5 bearer between S-GW and P-GW is retained. If UE sends Routing Area Update message to SGSN, then SGSN will trigger RAU procedure with old MME. In this case, SGSN will make a bearer connection between itself and PGW and MME will remove the S5 bearer connection. Usually, CSFB UE sends Routing Area Update message because it changes the Routing Area, but, depending on UE implementation it may not trigger RAU procedure because it will go back to LTE network as soon as it ends the CSFB call. 15~17) The UE connects to UTRAN and sets up a CS session. Also, it performs UTRAN location update procedures. At this step, UE is not expected to set up a PS session because UE is in idle state. The following figure shows redirection based CSFB to UTRAN procedures when UE is in connected mode:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

205

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE, in connected state, originates a voice call or receives a mobile terminated voice call. 2~3) The UE sends NAS Extended Service Request message to MME. The eNB and UE already have both SRB and DRB because UE is in connected mode. 4) The MME sends eNB S1-AP UE Context Modification Request message that includes CSFB indicator. 5) The eNB transmits S1-AP UE Context Modification Response message to MME.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

206

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

6) The eNB sends RRC Connection Release message to UE. The message includes UTRA carrier frequency to which UE will be redirected, the cell reselection priority of UTRA frequency, and system information of one or more cells on the redirected UTRA frequency. At this step, eNB releases both SRB and DRB. 7~11) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request message to MME to release S1 bearer connection between eNB and S-GW. S5 bearer between S-GW and P-GW is retained but the state is changed to idle mode. If UE sets up a PS bearer in UTRAN, SGSN will make a bearer connection between SGSN and PGW (GGSN) for seamless IP mobility and MME will remove the S5 bearer connection. 12~14) The UE connects to UTRAN and sets up a CS session. Also, it performs UTRAN location update procedures. At this step, UE is expected to set up a PS session as well because there is an ongoing active bearer. The PS session can be continued in UTRAN with the same IP address. According to the characteristics of the deployed site, the number of UTRA frequencies is configurable. Up to 6 different UTRA frequencies can be assigned per cell. Also, the purpose of each UTRA frequency can be configurable based on supported service as follows:

CS_ONLY(1): for CSFB (Redirection w/o SI, Redirection w/ SI, HO), SRVCC PS_ONLY(2): for PS mobility (Redirection w/o SI, Redirection w/ SI, HO) BOTH(0): for all cases When reviewing UE behavior under a failure to reach the target RAT/frequency, the version of the document Samsung refers to the 3gpp specification 3GPP TS 36.304 is Rel-9 (9.11.0). If UE has been instructed to complete Redirection process with a target UARFCN and cannot find the target UARFCN, UE shall try to camp on any suitable cell based on Stored Information. If UE fails to camp on any suitable cell based on the Stored Information or UE has no Stored Information or it , then UE should execute a complete 3G band search before trying again to complete other RAT/band searches (that is, back to 4G). In more detail, if UE has not been able to find the target UARFCN and has to start the complete 3G band search then, during that 3G search, UE should execute a cell selection process & not a cell re-selection process. If cell selection is not achieved on 3G layer, UE could move from 3G to LTE during the subsequent cell selection phase on the basis of inter-RAT weighting (the preference for LTE UEs move to LTE layer).

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the UTRAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-UTRA-FA command.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

207

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

„isAllowedRim‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the CHG-HOOPT command. This parameter configures the RIM procedure and „rimSupport‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the CHG-NBRUTRAN command.

Key Parameters CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information. N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information. EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.

DUPLEX_TYPE

This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier. FDD: Frequency Division Duplex. TDD: Time Division Duplex.

UARFCN_UL

This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

UARFCN_DL

This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT Parameter

Description

RIM_ENABLE

This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management (RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN). False: Does not perform the RIM function. True: Performs the RIM function.

CHG-NBR-UTRAN/RTRV-NBR-UTRAN/CRTE-NBR-UTRAN/DLT-NBRUTRAN Parameter

Description

RIM_SUPPORT

This parameter is whether the UTRAN neighbor cell supports the RIM. This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a neighbor UTRAN cell is supported. If it is set to False, then the RIM procedure is not executed. If it is set to True, then the RIM procedure is executed. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure execution is determined by the setting. False: RIM is not supported. True: RIM is supported.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

CSFB_REDIR_UTRAN_OUT

CSFBRedirUtranAtt

CSFB with Redirection to inter-RAT UTRAN attempt count

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

208

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

CSFBRedirUtranPrepSucc

CSFB with Redirection to inter-RAT UTRAN preparation success count.

CSFBRedirUtranSucc

CSFB with Redirection to inter-RAT UTRAN execution success count.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2. [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification. [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP). [4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage 2.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

209

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1209, CSFB to UTRAN with PS Handover INTRODUCTION CS fallback, a function to provide voice services to LTE users before Voice over LTE (VoLTE) is introduced, makes transition to CS domain upon LTE user‟s outgoing/incoming call so that the user can get voice services. The function of CSFB to UTRAN is the transition of UE to UTRAN according to the CSFB procedure, in the event of CSFB outgoing/incoming. When eNB receives a S1 message where CSFB indicator is included from MME, it selects a target frequency and performs a procedure of PS handover. Then, UE starts voice call outgoing/incoming procedure in UTRAN.

BENEFIT The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS network (UTRAN).

Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS network (UTRAN).

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency UTRAN Device, EPC, and UTRAN should support this feature.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION With the default LTE data network connection in operation, a mobile terminating (incoming) CS voice call triggers paging via LTE network to UE. This paging message initiates CSFB, as the device sends a NAS EXTENDED SERVICE REQUEST to the network to transition to 3G network. Once transitioned, the legacy call setup procedures are followed to setup the CS call. If UE does not support PS handover to UTRAN, CSFB to UTRAN with redirection procedure is used. Mobile originating (outgoing) calls follow the same transition from LTE (PS) to 3G (CS), except for the paging step. In 3G networks, PS data sessions can also be established simultaneously for data services. After the voice call ends and UE returns to idle state or Cell_PCH state, the device should perform cell reselection procedures to reselect LTE cell. If UE has still PS session after the voice call ends, then UE remains in 3G cell.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

210

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

3G network coexists with LTE network residing between the UE and the core network. The MME serves users while in LTE access network, while for 3G SGSN serves users when utilizing data services and MSC (Mobile Switching Center) when utilizing voice services. To support CS Fallback signaling, MME connects to MSC with SGs interface. The SGs interface is used for the mobility management and paging procedures between EPS and CS domain. Also, it is used for the delivery of both mobile originating and mobile terminating SMS. The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:

In general, UE notifies to MME about the type of attach required during the attach procedure. In case “Attach Type” in the Attach request message is “Combined EPS/IMSI Attach”, combined CS and PS updates are executed. In case of Combined EPS/IMSI Attach there is a requirement to use SGs interface, between MME and MSC. To enable „CSFB to UTRAN with PS Handover‟ feature, the parameter „INTER_RAT_CS_REDIRECTION‟ should be set as „True‟ by executing the „CHG-INTWO-OPT‟ command. This parameter is used for the selection of the interworking option per cell. And „RIM_ENABLE‟ parameter should be set as „FALSE‟ by executing the „CHG-HO-OPT‟ command. This parameter performs to disable the RIM procedure per eNB. The following figure shows PS handover based CSFB to UTRAN procedures when UE is in idle mode:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

211

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE, in idle state, originates a voice call or receives a mobile terminated voice call. 2~5) Since UE is in idle state, it starts RRC connection establishment procedures with eNB to make a SRB connection. The UE sends NAS Extended Service Request message to MME, which is included in RRC Connection Setup Complete message. 6) The MME sends eNB S1-AP Initial Context Setup Request message that includes CSFB indicator. 7) The eNB processes the AS security activation. 8) The eNB transmits S1-AP Initial Context Setup Response message to MME. 9) The eNB provides the UTRAN measurement order to UE. (if available) 10) The handover preparation procedure between Source E-UTRAN and target UTRAN is processed. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

212

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

11) The eNB, including the HO command received from CSFB indicator and target UTRAN, transmits the Mobility from EUTRA Command to UE. 12) The UE switches over to UTRAN target cell designated by eNB and performs the rest of handover procedure. The following figure shows PS handover based CSFB to UTRAN procedures when UE is in connected mode:

1) The UE, in connected state, originates a voice call or receives a mobile terminated voice call. 2~3) The UE sends NAS Extended Service Request message to MME. The eNB and UE already have both SRB and DRB because UE is in connected mode. 4) The MME sends eNB S1-AP UE Context Modification Request message that includes CSFB indicator. 5) The eNB transmits S1-AP UE Context Modification Response message to MME. 6) The eNB provides the UTRAN measurement order to UE (if available). 7) The handover preparation procedure between Source E-UTRAN and target UTRAN is processed.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

213

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

8) The eNB, including the HO command received from CSFB indicator and target UTRAN, transmits the Mobility from EUTRA Command to UE. 9) The UE switches over to UTRAN target cell designated by eNB and performs the rest of handover procedure.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the UTRAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-UTRA-FA command and the UTRAN Periodic Measurement information for StrongestCell report purpose by executing the CHGUTRA-PRD command.

Key Parameters CHG-UTRA-FA/RTRV-UTRA-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether to use UTRAN carrier information. N_EQUIP: Does not use UTRAN carrier information. EQUIP: Uses UTRAN carrier information.

DUPLEX_TYPE

This parameter is the duplex mode information of UTRAN carrier. FDD: Frequency Division Duplex. TDD: Time Division Duplex.

UARFCN_UL

This parameter sets the Uplink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Uplink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

UARFCN_DL

This parameter sets the Downlink Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) value for the UTRA Frequency. It executes Data Rule Check (DRC) to ensure that the same Downlink ARFCN value based on the EQUIP state is not entered.

CHG-GERAN-PRD/RTRV-GERAN-PRD Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter represents the usage of the periodic report used for interoperating with the UTRAN. RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestCells: CS Fallback (CSFB): Used for the solicit measurement report while performing. StrongestCellsForSON: Used for the operation of SON. ReportCGI: Used for the acquisition of the CGI information. Mlb: Used for measurement report of MLB.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether to use UTRA periodic report. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: UTRA periodic report is not used.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

214

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description Active: UTRA periodic report is used.

MAX_REPORT_CELL

This parameter is the maximum number of cells included in the measurement report for UTRA periodic report. This information is the maximum number of Cells that can be included in a single message (that is, Measurement Report) when a device is reporting the measurement results. When applying the new value to the active UEs during the parameter change, it may cause system overload so the application of the changed parameter is done when a new connection request (Attach or Idle to Active) is received from a device.

REPORT_INTERVAL

This parameter is the interval of measurement reports for UTRA periodic report. This information is for setting the Measurement Report transmission interval when a device is reporting measurement results. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoide overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs.

REPORT_AMOUNT

This parameter is the periodic measurement report count when interoperating with the UTRAN. The reports are transmitted as many times as the specified count.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

CSFB_PSHO_UTRAN_OUT

CSFBPsHoUtranAtt

Attempt count for CSFB with inter-RAT UTRAN PS handover

CSFBPsHoUtranPrepSucc

Success count for CSFB with inter-RAT UTRAN PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoUtranSucc

Success count for CSFB with inter-RAT UTRAN PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranPrepFail_Cp CcFail

Preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoUtranPrepFail_S1a pCuFail

Preparation fails due to S1AP specification cause during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoUtranPrepFail_S1a pLinkFail

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoUtranPrepFail_S1a pRpTo

Preparation fails due to S1AP relocprep timeout (not received) during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoUtranPrepFail_S1a pSigFail

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_CpCcTo

A call is released due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_CpCcFai l

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from the ECMB or by the ECCB block during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_UpGtpF ail

A call is released due to a failure in the GTP block during the CSFB PS handover

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

215

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_UpMacF ail

A call is released due to a failure in the MAC block during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_UpPdcp Fail

A call is released due to a failure in the PDCP block during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_UpRlcFa il

A call is released due to a failure in the RLC block during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_RrcSigF ail

A call is released due to receiving an RRC signaling during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_S1apCu Fail

A call is released due to S1AP specification cause during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_S1apLin kFail

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_S1apRo To

A call is released due to an S1AP relocoverall timeout (not received) during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoUtranFail_S1apSig Fail

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the CSFB PS handover execution.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

216

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1301, Idle Mobility to GERAN INTRODUCTION To support from E-UTRAN to GERAN cell reselection, eNB broadcasts the System Information Block type 7 (SIB7). The UE shall monitor E-UTRAN BCCH during idle mode to retrieve the SIB7 for the preparation of cell reselection to GERAN. Then, UE makes measurements on the neighboring GERAN cells based on the criteria and performs cell reselection to GERAN when needed. The parameters for cell reselection to GERAN broadcasted in SIB7 are as follows:

GERAN carrier frequency group list Cell reselection priority per carrier frequency group GERAN neighboring cell information Threshold values for cell reselection criteria Cell reselection timer Parameters for speed dependent cell reselection

BENEFIT The operator can provide idle mobility to its subscribers to GERAN. Users in idle state can move to GERAN.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency GERAN supported Device, EPC, and GERAN should support this feature.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The eNB supports UE's idle mobility through its SIB broadcasting. In the idle mode, UE receives the SIB broadcast by the cell it has camped onto, and performs inter-RAT cell reselection to GERAN based on the cell reselection parameter contained in the SIBs. The SIBs are used to perform the following functionality:

The SIB1 provides information that is required in evaluating if UE is allowed to access a cell. The UE uses this for PLMN selection and cell selection. Also, SIB1 defines the scheduling of other system information. The UE acquires other SIBs of the cell using this information. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

217

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The SIB3 provides the common information required for intra-frequency, interfrequency and/or inter-RAT cell reselection. Also, it conveys the specific information for intra-frequency cell reselection.

The SIB7 provides information about GERAN frequencies and parameters for cell re-selection. The GERAN cell reselection parameters broadcasted via SIB7 are as follows:

GERAN carrier frequencies per GERAN carrier frequency group oA set of GERAN carrier frequencies can be provided in three ways (explicitListOfARFCNs, equallySpacedARFCNs, and variableBitMapOfARFCNs) as per 3GPP.

Cell reselection priority per GERAN carrier frequency group Cell reselection thresholds per GERAN carrier frequency group Cell reselection timer for GERAN cell reselection Cell reselection timer for speed dependant GERAN cell reselection oFor fast moving UE speed dependent GERAN cell reselection scaling factors are applied. If the number of reselections during the period TCRmax is greater than NCR_H high mobility is detected. If the number exceeds NCR_M and not NCR_H then medium mobility is detected. In the high/medium mobility states Qhyst and TreselectionRAT are multiplied by the Speed dependent scaling factor Qhyst and Treselection. The reselection to GERAN is performed if (Srxlev_GSM - Qrxlevmin in SIB7) > (Srxlev of LTE cell - Qrxlevmin in SIB3 + Qhyst in SIB3)

Cell Reselection Triggering and Measurement The inter-RAT cell reselection procedures are triggered when one of the following conditions is met:

The UE has E-UTRA frequencies or GERAN frequencies with a reselection priority higher than the reselection priority of the current E-UTRA frequency. In this case, UE performs inter-RAT cell reselection procedures. The UE searches every layer of higher priority at least every T_higher_priority_search=(60 * N_layers) seconds, where N_layers is the total number of configured higher priority E-UTRA carrier frequencies and is additionally increased by one if one more group of GERAN frequencies is configured as a higher priority (3GPP TS 36.133 Section 4.2.2).

The service cell does not fulfil S_rxlev > S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P and S_qual > S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_Q. In this case, UE performs inter-RAT cell reselection procedures for E-UTRA inter-frequency or GERAN frequency with an equal or lower reselection priority than the reselection priority of the current E-UTRA frequency. The priority of each frequency is broadcast in SIB3 (E-UTRA frequency) and SIB7 (GERAN frequency). Since RSRQ can vary even in the center of the serving cell from -3 dB to -10 dB depending on traffic load from the serving cell, devices will test S_rxlev only. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

218

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The UE triggers the measurement of GERAN frequency when RSRP signal strength from LTE serving cell decreases below the calculated threshold.

Cell Reselection Criteria from LTE to 2G Assuming that the priority of GERAN frequency is lower than E-UTRAN, cell reselection to a cell on a lower priority GERAN frequency than the serving frequency is performed according to GERAN cell reselection criteria shown in the following figure.

The UE reselects the GERAN cell when RSRP signal strength from LTE serving cell decreases to less than the threshold calculated and the signal strength of GERAN target cell increases to more than the calculated threshold (3GPP TS 36.304 Section 5.2.4.5).

Cell reselection from 2G to LTE The UE in idle mode may be connected to either LTE or GERAN network depending on the radio condition. The UE selects primary LTE frequency when UE ends a CSFB call or when UE comes back into LTE coverage in the presence of acceptable LTE signal. Cell reselection from GERAN to LTE is performed by UE, based on the system information provided by GERAN. The UE in GERAN monitors the broadcast channel from the GERAN serving cell during idle mode to retrieve System Information 2Quarter message for preparation of cell reselection to E-UTRAN. After cell reselection to E-UTRAN is completed, UE performs a Tracking Area update in E-UTRAN.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

219

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the SIB7_PERIOD in CHGSIB-INF and the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHGGERAN-FA command.

Key Parameters CHG-SIB-INF/RTRV-SIB-INF Parameter

Description

SIB7_PERIOD

This parameter is the transmission period for the system information block type 7 of the cell in eNB. The SIB7 contains information for IRAT cell reselection to GERAN. ms80: 80 ms. ms160: 160 ms. ms5120: 5120 ms. not_used: SIB7 is not transmitted.

CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The following ARFCNs are the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except starting ARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object (Start ARFCN).

GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ GERAN_ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object.

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

220

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.304 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode [4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

221

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1302, PS Handover between LTE and GERAN INTRODUCTION When a user under LTE data services area and moves to GERAN, eNB transits the service to GERAN using the PS handover procedure to provide seamless data services. The eNB determines PS handover to GERAN based on the GERAN measurement report in UE. When eNB receives the GERAN measurement results in UE, it selects the handover target cells from the results and processes the handover preparation procedure. Once the handover procedure is successful with GERAN, eNB requests UE handover to GERAN (PS handover). The UE makes handover to the target cell of GERAN specified by eNB, and receives data services from GERAN. When a user under data services moves from GERAN, eNB provides seamless data services using the PS handover procedure with GERAN. When eNB received a handover request from the MME, it determines whether to accept HO based on the Call Admission Control (CAC) of the HO. When HO acceptance is determined, eNB transmits an acknowledge message for the handover request to the MME, after assigned resources for that HO. After that, UE moves to LTE as per the direction from source GERAN, and after the PS handover from GERAN procedure succeeded, it continues data services in the LTE.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers between EUTRAN and GERAN.

Users in a connected state can move between E-UTRAN and GERAN, remaining in the connected state.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency GERAN supported Device, EPC, and GERAN shall support this feature based on 3GPP Rel-8. It needs inter operability test (IOT) with commercial UE which support PS Handover between LTE and GERAN.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

222

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

FEATURE DESCRIPTION To support seamless data service when UE moves from E-UTRAN to GERAN coverage, Samsung eNB supports PS handover to GERAN under the following conditions:

Target GERAN shall support PS handover UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2).

UE shall support handover to GERAN (FGI#9). GERAN frequencs shall be configured for PS handover oEach GERAN frequency group can be configured to support CS service, PS service, or both. oA set of GERAN frequencies can be provided in three ways (explicitListOfARFCNs, equallySpacedARFCNs, variableBitMapOfARFCNs) as per 3GPP. Once the above conditions are met, serving eNB sends measurement configuration including event A2 (Serving is worse than a threshold value) to trigger GERAN measurement. On reception of measurement report triggered by event A2, Samsung eNB configures GERAN measurement using event B1 or B2. The serving eNB also configures measurement gap for inter-RAT measurement, and UE performs GERAN measurement during the configured gap period. If measurement report for event B1 or B2 is received, the serving eNB starts handover preparation to the target cell. The following figure shows PS handover procedure to the GERAN:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

223

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE transmits measurement report including the GERAN measurement for GERAN frequencies. 2) The source eNB determines PS handover to the GERAN. 3) The source eNB requests PS handover to the GERAN by transmitting the Handover required to the source MME. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

224

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

4)~10) The handover preparation procedure between source E-UTRAN and target GERAN is processed. The resource allocation is made so that the UE can maintain data services at the target GERAN after PS handover through this procedure. When data forwarding is available, the tunnel setup for data forwarding is made. 11) The source eNB receives a handover command from the source MME. 12) The source eNB transmits mobility from E-UTRA command to UE, including the HO command received from the GERAN. 13) The UE makes transition to the GERAN target cell as per the direction from the eNB, and transmits XID response to the GERAN. 14) The target BSC informs handover completion by transmitting PS handover complete to target SGSN. It also transmits XID response to the target SGSN. 15)~21) The target SGSN processes handover completion procedure with the source MME. 22) The UE performs the Routing Area update. After that, it keeps data services in the GERAN. 23)~27) The source MME releases the resources used in E-UTRAN after complete PS handover with GERAN. When a tunnel for data forwarding is setup, the source MME and target SGSN release the data forwarding tunnel. In case PS handover from GERAN, handover decision is made by GERAN and eNB starts handover preparation, if it receives S1AP Handover Request message from MME. The following figure shows PS handover procedure from the GERAN:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

225

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The source BSC determines PS handover to the E-UTRAN. 2) The source BSC requests PS handover to the E-UTRAN, transmitting PS Handover required to source SGSN. 3)~ 9) The handover preparation procedure between source GERAN and target EUTRAN is processed. The resource allocation is made so that UE can maintain data services at the target E-UTRAN after PS handover through this procedure. When data forwarding is available, the tunnel setup for data forwarding is made. 10) The source BSC receives PS Handover required acknowledge from source SGSN.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

226

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

11) The source BSC transmits PS HO command to UE including HO command received from the target E-UTRAN. 12) The UE transits to the E-UTRAN target cell as per the direction from source BSC, and transmits the RRC connection reconfiguration complete to the EUTRAN. 13) The target eNB transmits the Handover notify to the target MME to notify that handover is completed. 14)~18) The target MME processes the handover completion procedure with source SGSN. 19) The source SGSN processes BSS packet flow release procedure with source BSC. 20) The UE performs the tracking area update procedure. After that, it keeps data services in the E-UTRAN. 21)~23) The source SGSN releases resources used in the GERAN after completing the PS handover with E-UTRAN. When a tunnel for data forwarding is setup, source SGSN and target MME release the data forwarding tunnel.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and A2 report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and B2 report configuration for the each GERAN carrier. The handover target GERAN cell needs to be registered in the serving cell neighboring cell list.

Key Parameters CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except startingARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of the GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)

GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ GERAN_ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

227

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to activate the measurement gap as default. LteHo: Used for Gap Activate. LteBlind: Used for Blind HO. IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO. IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO. Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation. CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure Config. Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity. Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests. CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation. InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr. InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: Event A2 is not used. Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the site, this is inactive.

CHG-GERAN-B2CNF/RTRV-GERAN-B2CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the usage of GERAN Event B2 report. It is used for interRAT Handover. InterRatHandover: In case of Inter-RAT handover. Srvcc: In case of SRVCC. InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with handover mobility option. OnDemandHandover: Enable the forced handover triggering by operator

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

228

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description Spare_1: Reserved. Spare_2: Reserved.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether the GERAN Event B2, which is triggered when Inter RAT neighbor becomes better than threshold, is enabled/disabled. This change will be applied to the UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: GERAN Event B2 is not used. Active: GERAN Event B2 is used.

CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBRGERAN Parameter

Description

STATUS

The validity of GERAN neighboring cell information. N_EQUIP: Invalid EQUIP: Valid

TARGET_CELL_ID

The ID of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB.

LAC

This parameter is the Location Area Code of GERAN neighbor cell located around eNB. The location area code of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB.

RAC

This parameter is the routing area code of GERAN neighbor cell located around eNB.

NETWORK_COLOUR_COD E

The network color code of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB. Codes are from 0 to 7. Ensure that not to enter previously entered information. If all three of the networkColourCode, baseStationColourCode, and ARFCN information match previously entered information, the system determines it to be a duplicated entry.

BASE_STATION_COLOUR _CODE

This parameter is the base station color code of GERAN neighbor cell located around eNB.

MCC [4]

The PLMN information (MCC) of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB. It is a threedigit number with each digit being from 0 to 9.

MNC [4]

The PLMN information (MNC) of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB. It is a threedigit or two-digit number with each digit being from 0 to 9.

ARFCN

This parameter is the ARFCN of the GERAN neighbor cell located around the eNB.

BAND_INDICATOR

The band indicator of GERAN neighboring cell to eNB. dcs1800: Indicates DCS 1800 band. pcs1900: Indicates PCS 1900 band.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

HO_INTER_RAT_GERAN_ OUT

RatGeranOutAtt

LTE to inter-RAT GERAN handover attempt count

RatGeranOutPrepSucc

LTE to inter-RAT GERAN handover preparation success count

RatGeranOutSucc

LTE to inter-RAT GERAN handover execution success count

RatGeranOutPrepFail_CpCcFail

Preparation fails due to reset

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

229

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by ECCB block during inter GERAN Handover preparation.

RatGeranOutPrepFail_S1apCuFail

Preparation fails due to S1AP specification cause during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranOutPrepFail_S1apLinkFail

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranOutPrepFail_S1apRpTo

Preparation fails due to S1AP relocprep timeout (not received) during the GERAN Handover preparation.

RatGeranOutPrepFail_S1apSigFail

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranOutFail_CpCcTo

A call is released due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_CpCcFail

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from the ECMB or by the ECCB block during the GERAN Handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_UpGtpFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the GTP block during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_UpMacFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the MAC block during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_UpPdcpFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the PDCP block during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_UpRlcFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the RLC block during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_RrcSigFail

A call is released due to receiving RRC signaling during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_S1apCuFail

A call is released due to the S1AP specification cause during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_S1apLinkFail

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_S1apRoTo

A call is released due to an S1AP relocoverall timeout (not received) during the GERAN Handover execution.

RatGeranOutFail_S1apSigFail

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the GERAN handover execution.

Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

HO_INTER_RAT_GERAN_I

RatGeranInAtt

LTE to inter-RAT GERAN handover

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

230

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name N

Type Name

Type Description attempt count

RatGeranInPrepSucc

LTE to inter-RAT GERAN handover preparation success count

RatGeranInSucc

LTE to inter-RAT GERAN handover execution success count

RatGeranInPrepFail_CpCcTo

Preparation fails due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_CpCcFail

Preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by ECCB block during GERAN Handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_UpGtpFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the GTP block during the GERAN Handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_UpMacFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the MAC block during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_UpPdcpFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the PDCP block during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_UpRlcFail

Preparation fails due to internal failure in the RLC block during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_CpBhCacFail

Preparation fails due to insufficient backhaul-based eNB resources during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_CpCapaCacFa il

Preparation fails due to insufficient capacity-based eNB resources during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_CpQosCacFail

Preparation fails due to insufficient QoS-based eNB resources during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_S1apCuFail

Preparation fails due to S1AP specification cause during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_S1apLinkFail

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during the GERAN handover preparation.

RatGeranInPrepFail_S1apSigFail

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during GERAN Handover preparation.

RatGeranInFail_CpCcTo

A call is released due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the GERAN Handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_CpCcFail

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from the ECMB or by the ECCB block during GERAN Handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_UpGtpFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the GTP block during the GERAN

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

231

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_UpMacFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the MAC block during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_UpPdcpFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the PDCP block during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_UpRlcFail

A call is released due to internal failure in the RLC block during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_RrcHcTo

A call is released due to HO command timeout (not received) during the GERAN Handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_RrcSigFail

A call is released due to receiving RRC signaling during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_S1apCuFail

A call is released due to the S1AP specification cause during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_S1apLinkFail

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_S1apSigFail

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the GERAN handover execution.

RatGeranInFail_S1apSigTo

A call is released due to S1AP signaling timeout (not received) during the GERAN handover execution.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

232

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1304, Cell Change Order to GERAN without NACC INTRODUCTION Cell Change Order to GERAN is another outbound mobility feature in addition to PS handover and redirection. Compared to PS handover, Cell Change Order does not prepare user session in the target GERAN. The eNB determines whether to perform the Cell Change Order to GERAN based on UE‟s measurement report. In addition, eNB specifies the carrier frequency and target cell for GERAN to which UE needs to move (without including system information of the target cell). Then, UE releases the connection to E-UTRAN and switches over to the target carrier frequency of GERAN specified by eNB to receive data service from GERAN.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency GERAN supported Device, EPC, and GERAN should support this feature.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Cell Change Order without NACC could be performed under the following conditions:

UE or target GERAN does not support PS handover UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2). oOptionally, measurement could be omitted via configuration

UE shall support cell change order procedure (FGI#10). System Information of the target cell is not provided (without NACC).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

233

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Once the above conditions are met, serving eNB sends measurement configuration including event A2 (Serving is worse than a threshold value) to trigger GERAN measurement. On reception of measurement report triggered by event A2, Samsung eNB configures GERAN measurement using event B1 or B2. The serving eNB also configures measurement gap for inter-RAT measurement, and UE performs GERAN measurement during the configured gap period. If measurement report for event B1 or B2 is received, the serving eNB starts Cell Change Order without NACC procedure The following figure shows the procedure to perform Cell Change Order without NACC to GERAN:

1 The eNB determines whether to switch the cell change order without NACC to GERAN.

2 The eNB specifies GERAN carrier frequency and target GERAN cell to which UE is to switch over and transmits the Mobility from EUTRA Command to UE.

3 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. 4 The MME transmits UE Context Release Command to eNB. 5 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Complete to MME. 6 The UE switches over to the target GERAN cell of GERAN carrier, which is designated by eNB to the Mobility from EUTRA Command and connects to GERAN. The procedures of GERAN location registration and GERAN call setup are performed. Then, UE keeps providing its service in the GERAN.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

234

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and configure A2 report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.

If „interRatDataOption‟ in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to “Data_BlindOnly”, Blind Redirection is executed regardless UE‟s capabilities on Measurement for GERAN and PS handover to GERAN.

The operator can put the high priority on CCO to GERAN without NACC by executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number priority has the higher priority.

If „blindCCOsupport‟ in CHG-GERAN-INTWO is set to “True”, Blind CCO is supported during interworking with GERRAN and Target GERAN cell for Blind CCO should be configured by executing the „CHG-GERAN-BLCCO‟ command.

Key Parameters CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except startingARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)

GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ GERAN_ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object.

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

235

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to activate the measurement gap as default. LteHo: Used for Gap Activate. LteBlind: Used for Blind HO. IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO. IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO. Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation. CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure Config. Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity. Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests. CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation. InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr. InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: Event A2 is not used. Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the site, this is inactive.

CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT Parameter

Description

INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTIO N

This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS handover for Data Call. Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability. Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.

CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO Parameter

Description

NORMAL_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

236

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_CCOSUPPORT

This parameter indicates whether to support blind Cell Change Order (CCO) during GERAN interworking. False: Blind CCO not supported. True: Blind CCO supported.

CHG-GERAN-BLCCO/RTRV-GERAN-BLCCO Parameter

Description

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

237

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

TARGET_GERAN_NBR_IDX

This parameter is the target GERAN neighbor cell index where the blind CCO will be performed for the relevant cell.- geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

CCO_GERAN_OUT

CcoGeranAtt

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN CCO attempt count

CcoGeranPrepSucc

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN CCO preparation success count

CcoGeranSucc

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN CCO execution success count

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

238

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1305, Cell Change Order to GERAN with NACC INTRODUCTION Cell Change Order to GERAN is another outbound mobility feature in addition to PS handover and redirection. Compared to PS handover, Cell Change Order does not prepare user session in the target GERAN. The eNB determines whether to perform the Cell Change Order to GERAN based on UE‟s measurement report. In addition, eNB specifies the carrier frequency and target cell for GERAN to which UE needs to move (including system information of the target cell). System information is exchanged using RIM procedure. Then, UE releases the connection to E-UTRAN and switches over to the target carrier frequency of GERAN specified by eNB to receive data service from GERAN.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency GERAN supported Device, EPC, and GERAN should support this feature.

RIM for SI tunneling shall be support EPC and GERAN. Limitation RIM based SI tunneling is only possible for eNB to acquire GERAN NACC information.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Cell Change Order with NACC could be performed under the following conditions.

UE or target GERAN does not support PS handover UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2). oOptionally, measurement could be omited via configuration

UE shall support cell change order procedure (FGI#10). Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

239

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

System Information of the target cell is provided (with NACC). The following figure shows the procedure to switch cell change order with NACC to GERAN:

1 The eNB determines whether to switch the cell change order with NACC to GERAN.

2 The eNB specifies GERAN carrier frequency and target GERAN cell to which UE is to switch over and, including the SI list of the target GERAN cell, transmits the Mobility from EUTRA Command to UE.

3 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. 4 The MME transmits UE Context Release Command to eNB. 5 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Complete to MME. 6 The UE switches over to the target GERAN cell of the GERAN carrier, which is designated by eNB to the Mobility from EUTRA Command and connects to GERAN. The procedures of GERAN location registration and GERAN call setup are performed. Then, UE keeps providing its service in the GERAN.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and configure A2 report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

240

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

If „interRatDataOption‟ in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to “Data_BlindOnly”, Blind Redirection is executed regardless UE‟s capabilities on Measurement for GERAN and PS handover to GERAN.

The operator can put the high priority on CCO to GERAN with NACC by executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number priority has the higher priority.

If „blindCCOsupport‟ in CHG-GERAN-INTWO is set to “True”, Blind CCO is supported during interworking with GERRAN and Target GERAN cell for Blind CCO should be configured by executing the „CHG-GERAN-BLCCO‟.

„isAllowedRim‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ using CHG-HO-OPT. This parameter configures the RIM procedure and „rimSupport‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the CHG-NBR-GERAN.

Key Parameters CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except startingARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of the GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)

GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ GERAN_ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of the GERAN FA object.

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes the number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

241

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to activate the measurement gap as default. LteHo: Used for Gap Activate. LteBlind: Used for Blind HO. IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO. IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO. Ca: Used for Carrier Aggregation. CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure Config. Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity. Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests. CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation. InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr. InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. This change will be applied to the UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: Event A2 is not used. Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the site, this is inactive.

CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT Parameter

Description

INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION

This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS handover for Data Call. Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability. Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.

CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO Parameter

Description

NORMAL_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

242

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_CCOSUPPORT

This parameter indicates whether to support blind Cell Change Order (CCO) during GERAN interworking. False: Blind CCO not supported. True: Blind CCO supported.

CHG-GERAN-BLCCO/RTRV-GERAN-BLCCO Parameter

Description

TARGET_GERAN_NBR_ID X

This parameter is the target GERAN neighbor cell index where the blind CCO will be performed for the relevant cell.- geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT Parameter

Description

RIM_ENABLE

This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

243

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description (RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN). False: Does not perform the RIM function. True: Performs the RIM function.

CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBRGERAN Parameter

Description

RIM_SUPPORT

This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a Neighbor GERAN Cell is supported. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure execution is determined by the setting. False: RIM is not supported. True: RIM is supported.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

CCO_GERAN_OUT

CcoGeranAtt

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN CCO attempt count

CcoGeranPrepSu cc

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN CCO preparation success count

CcoGeranSucc

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN CCO execution success count

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

244

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1306, Redirection to GERAN without SI INTRODUCTION The eNB ensures its seamless data service by switching to GERAN using the procedure of redirection without SI when a user providing LTE data service gets out of LTE area. The eNB determines whether to switch the redirection to GERAN based on UE‟s measurement report. When the redirection of GERAN is determined, eNB clears UE‟s RRC connection and specifies the carrier frequency of GERAN to which UE is to switch over (redirection without SI). The UE switches over to the target carrier frequency of GERAN, which is specified by eNB to receive data service from the GERAN.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency GERAN supported Device, EPC, and GERAN should support this feature.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the procedure to switch the redirection without SI to GERAN:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

245

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1 The eNB determines whether to switch the redirection to GERAN. 2 The eNB includes GERAN carrier frequency to which UE is to switch over and transmits the RRC Connection Release to UE.

3 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. 4 The MME transmits UE Context Release Command to eNB. 5 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Complete to MME. 6 The UE switch over to GERAN that eNB specifies to the RRC Connection Release, and connects to GERAN. Also, UE initiates GERAN location registration procedure. Then, UE is on standby in GERAN and continues to provide the service.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and configure A2 report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.

If „interRatDataOption‟ in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to “Data_BlindOnly”, Blind Redirection is executed regardless UE‟s capabilities on Measurement for GERAN and PS handover to GERAN.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

246

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The operator can put the high priority on Redirection to GREAN without SI by executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number priority has the higher priority.

Key Parameters CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except startingARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)

GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ GERAN_ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object.

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to activate the measurement gap as default. LteHo: Used for Gap Activate. LteBlind: Used for Blind HO. IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO. IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO. Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation. CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure Config.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

247

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity. Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests. CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation. InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr. InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. This change will be applied to the UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: Event A2 is not used. Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the site, this is inactive.

CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT Parameter

Description

INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION

This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS handover for Data Call. Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability. Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.

CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO Parameter

Description

NORMAL_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

248

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

BLIND_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

REDIR_GERAN_OUT

RedirGeranAtt

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN Redirection attempt count

RedirGeranPrepS ucc

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN Redirection preparation success count

RedirGeranSucc

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN Redirection execution success count

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

249

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1307, Redirection to GERAN with SI INTRODUCTION The eNB ensures its seamless data service by switching to GERAN using the procedure of redirection with SI when a user providing LTE data service gets out of LTE area. The eNB determines whether to perform the redirection to GERAN based on UE‟s measurement report. When the redirection of GERAN is determined, eNB clears UE‟s RRC connection, specifies the carrier frequency of GERAN to which UE is to switch over, and delivers GERAN cell list and the system information (SI) lists of each cell (redirection with SI). Finally, UE switches over to the target carrier frequency of GERAN specified by eNB to receive data service from GERAN. To expedite GERAN access, the RAN Information Management (RIM) interworking between eNB and GERAN is required to process the redirection with SI. The eNB obtains and stores SI lists of each cell from an adjacent GERAN through the RIM procedure. In addition, eNB use the SI lists of each cell when processing the redirection with SI.

BENEFIT The operator can provide connected mobility to its subscribers from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

Users in connected state can move from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency RIM for SI tunneling shall be support EPC and GERAN.

GERAN supported Device, EPC and GERAN should support this feature. Limitation RIM based SI tunneling is only possible for eNB to acquire GERAN SI.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the procedure to switch the redirection with SI to GERAN: RRC Connection Release message includes cellInfoList-r9 IE which contains SI of the target cells.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

250

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1 The eNB determines whether to switch the redirection to GERAN. 2 The eNB transmits the RRC Connection Release, including GERAN carrier frequency, GERAN list, and SI lists of each cell.

3 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. 4 The MME transmits UE Context Release Command to eNB. 5 The eNB transmits UE Context Release Complete to MME. 6 The UE switch over to GERAN that eNB specifies to the RRC Connection Release, and connects to the GERAN. Also, UE initiates GERAN location registration procedure. Then, UE is on standby in GERAN and continues to provide the service.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and configure A2 report configuration for ci_A2PurposeIRatHo and/or ci_A2PurposeIRatBlind.

If „interRatDataOption‟ in CHG-INTWO-OPT is set to “Data_BlindOnly”, Blind Redirection is executed regardless UE‟s capabilities on Measurement for GERAN and PS handover to GERAN.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

251

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The operator can put the high priority on Redirection to GERAN with SI (Enhanced Redirection) by executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number priority has the higher priority.

„isAllowedRim‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the CHG-HOOPT command. This parameter configures the RIM procedure and „rimSupport‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the CHG-NBRGERAN command.

Key Parameters CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except startingARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)

GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ GERAN_ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object.

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

CHG-EUTRA-A2CNF/RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNF Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to activate the measurement gap as default. LteHo: Used for Gap Activate. LteBlind: Used for Blind HO.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

252

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO. IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO. Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation. CaPeriodicMr: Used for Add Smart Carrier Aggregation Periodic Measure Config. Srvcc: Used for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity. Mdt: Used for Minimization of Drive Tests. CaInterFreq: Used for Inter Frequency Carrier Aggregation. InterFreqAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Frequency Anr. InterRatAnrTrigger: Used for Inter Rat Anr.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current active UEs. Inactive: Event A2 is not used. Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the site, this is inactive.

CHG-INTWO-OPT/RTRV-INTWO-OPT Parameter

Description

INTER_RAT_DATA_OPTION

This parameter indicates whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS handover for Data Call. Data_UeCapability: Redirection or handover according to UE Capability. Data_BlindOnly: Redirection is executed regardless of condition.

CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO Parameter

Description

NORMAL_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

253

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT Parameter

Description

RIM_ENABLE

This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management (RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN). False: Does not perform the RIM function. True: Performs the RIM function.

CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBRGERAN Parameter

Description

RIM_SUPPORT

This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a Neighbor GERAN Cell is supported. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure execution is determined by the setting. False: RIM is not supported. True: RIM is supported.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

254

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

REDIR_GERAN_OUT

RedirGeranAtt

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN Redirection attempt count

RedirGeranPrepSucc

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN Redirection preparation success count

RedirGeranSucc

LTE to Inter RAT GERAN Redirection execution success count

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; GPRS enhancements for E-UTRAN access

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

255

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1310, CSFB to GERAN with Redirection with SI INTRODUCTION CS fallback is the function to provide voice service to LTE users before the introduction of Voice over LTE (VoLTE), it switches UE over to CS domain to provide mobile originated/mobile terminated call. The CSFB to GERAN with Redirection with System Information (SI) function switches UE to GERAN by the redirection with SI procedure when sending or receiving the CSFB. When the S1 message including the CSFB indicator is received from MME, eNB clears UE‟s RRC connection, specifies the carrier frequency of GERAN to which UE is to switch over, and delivers GERAN cell list and the system information (SI) lists of each cell (redirection with SI). The UE switches over to the target carrier frequency of GERAN specified by eNB and initiates the voice call sending/receiving procedure. This function delivers GERAN carrier frequency together with the SI lists of each GERAN cell, which reduces the processing time taken after UE switches over to GERAN, resulting in contributing to the improvement of CSFB call quality. To provide system information, RAN Information Management (RIM) interworking between eNB and GERAN is necessary to process the CSFB to GERAN with Redirection with SI. The eNB obtains and stores SI lists of each cell from an adjacent GERAN through the RIM procedure. In addition, eNB use the SI lists of each cell when processing the CSFB to GERAN with Redirection with SI.

BENEFIT The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS network (GERAN)

Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS network (GERAN)

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency RIM for SI tunneling shall be support EPC and GERAN.

GERAN supported Device, EPC, and GERAN should support this feature. Limitation RIM based SI tunneling is only possible for eNB to acquire GERAN SI (Manual configuration in LSM is not available).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

256

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Regardless of UE movement, CSFB is triggered when there is mobile originating or mobile terminating call. To support CSFB service, 2G network coexists with LTE network where in MME serves users while in LTE access network, and SGSN serves users while in 2G access network. In 2G network, SGSN serves users when utilizing data services and MSC (Mobile Switching Center) when utilizing voice services. To support CS Fallback signaling, MME connects to MSC with SGs interface. The SGs interface is used for the mobility management and paging procedures between EPS and CS domain. Also, it is also used for the delivery of both mobile originating and terminating SMS. The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:

In general, UE notifies to MME about the type of attach required during the attach procedure. In case “Attach Type” in the Attach request message is “Combined EPS/IMSI Attach”, combined CS and PS updates are executed. In case of Combined EPS/IMSI Attach, there is a requirement to use SGs interface between MME and MSC. The following figure shows the procedure for performing CSFB with Redirection to GERAN with SI: RRC Connection Release includes cellInfoList-r9 IE to provide system information of target cells.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

257

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE initiates the CSFB procedure. If UE is in idle state, UE via RRC connection establishment procedure switches over to the connected state. The figure below shows the case when UE is in Active state. 2) The UE transmits the NAS EXTENDED SERVICE REQEUST, which is embedded in RRC UL Information Transfer message. 3) The eNB relays NAS message to MME using S1AP Uplink NAS Transport message 4) The MME transmits the S1AP initial Context setup Request message in which the CSFB indicator is included to eNB. In case UE is in idle state, eNB processes the AS security activation and the default bearer setup procedure. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

258

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

5) The eNB transmits the S1AP Context setup Response message to MME. 6) The eNB includes the GERAN carrier frequency to which UE is to switch over and transmits the RRC Connection Release to UE with system information of candidate cells. (Optionally, eNB may request measurement of GERAN before step 6) 7~11) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. The MME processes the S1 release procedure with eNB. 13) The UE switches over to GERAN carrier frequency provided in the RRC Connection Release by eNB and connects to GERAN carrier frequency. It initiates the GERAN location registration procedure. 14) If GERAN cannot provide simultaneous CS and PS service, UE requests GERAN to suspend the PS service. 15~16) The SGSN processes MME and bearers suspension procedure by UE‟s request. The MME suspends S-GW and PS bearers by the request from SGSN. 17) Then, UE performs CS call setup and continues providing the CS service. The following figure shows the call procedure for CSFB when UE is in Idle state:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

259

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

260

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The operator can put the high priority on CSFB to GERAN with Redirection with SI (Enhanced Redirection) by executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number priority has the higher priority.

„isAllowedRim‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the CHG-HOOPT command. This parameter configures the RIM procedure and „rimSupport‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing CHG-NBRGERAN command.

Key Parameters CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except startingARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)

GERAN_ARFCN1 ~ GERAN_ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object.

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO Parameter

Description

NORMAL_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

261

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT Parameter

Description

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

262

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

RIM_ENABLE

This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management (RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN). False: Does not perform the RIM function. True: Performs the RIM function.

CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBRGERAN Parameter

Description

RIM_SUPPORT

This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a Neighbor GERAN Cell is supported. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure execution is determined by the setting. False: RIM is not supported. True: RIM is supported.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

CSFB_REDIR_GERAN_OUT

CSFBGeranRedirAtt

Count of CSFB with Inter RAT GERAN Redirection attempts

CSFBGeranRedirPrepSucc

Count of CSFB with Inter RAT GERAN Redirection preparation successes

CSFBGeranRedirSucc

Count of CSFB with Inter RAT GERAN Redirection execution successes

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

263

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1311, CSFB to GERAN with CCO without NACC INTRODUCTION CS fallback is the function to provide voice service to LTE users before the introduction of Voice over LTE (VoLTE), it switches UE over to CS domain to provide mobile originated/mobile terminated call (Refer to SW1309). The CSFB to GERAN with Cell Change Order (CCO) without Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) function switches UE to GERAN by CCO without NACC procedure. When the S1 message including the CS FB indicator is received from MME, eNB provides the cell change order to UE and specifies carrier frequency and target cell of GERAN to which the CSFB indicator and UE are to switch over (CCO without NACC). The UE switches over to the target cell of GERAN specified by eNB and initiates the voice call sending/receiving procedure. Whether to use CCO or release with redirection could be configured by LSM.

BENEFIT The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS network (GERAN)

Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS network (GERAN)

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency GERAN supported Device, EPC, and GERAN shall support this feature.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The CSFB to GERAN with Cell Change Order (CCO) without Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) function switches UE to GERAN by CCO without NACC procedure. When S1 message including the CS FB indicator is received from MME, eNB provides the cell change order to UE and specifies carrier frequency and target cell in the GERAN to which the CSFB indicator and UE are to switch over (CCO without NACC). The UE switches over to the target cell of GERAN specified by eNB and initiates the voice call sending/receiving procedure. Whether to use CCO or release with redirection could be configured by LSM. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

264

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

CCO without NACC could be performed under the following conditions:

UE or target GERAN does not support PS handover UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2) oOptionally, measurement could be omitted via configuration

UE shall support cell change order procedure (FGI#10) System Information of the target cell is not provided (without NACC) The following figure shows the call flow for CSFB to GERAN with CCO without NACC:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

265

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE initiates CSFB procedure. If UE is in idle state, UE using the RRC connection establishment procedure switches over to the connected state. 2) The UE transmits NAS EXTENDED SERVICE REQEUSTembedded in RRC UL Information Transfer message. 3) The eNB relays NAS message to MME using S1AP Uplink NAS Transport message 4) The MME transmits the S1AP Initial Context setup Request message in which the CSFB indicator is included to eNB. In case of UE is in idle state, eNB processes the AS security activation and default bearer setup procedure. 5) The eNB transmits the S1AP Initial Context Setup Response message to MME. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

266

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

6) The eNB specifies GERAN carrier frequency and target GERAN cell to which UE is to switch over and transmits the Mobility from EUTRA command to UE. (The eNB may request measurement of GERAN before step 6. This measurement will increase total CSFB latency) 7~11) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. The MME processes the S1 release procedure with eNB. 13) The UE switches over to GERAN carrier frequency given by eNB and connects to GERAN. It initiates the GERAN location registration procedure. 14) If GERAN cannot provide simultaneous CS and PS service, UE requests GERAN to suspend the PS service. 15~16) The SGSN processes the bearers suspension procedure by UE‟s request. The MME suspends S-GW and PS bearers by the request from SGSN. 17) Then, UE performs CS call setup and continues to provide the CS service. The following figure shows the procedure for UE in idle state:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

267

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

268

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The operator can put the high priority on CSFB to GERAN with CCO without NACC by executing the CHG-GERAN-INTWO command for Normal type based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number priority has the higher priority.

If „blindCCOsupport‟ in CHG-GERAN-INTWO is set to “True”, Blind CCO is supported during interworking with GERRAN and Target GERAN cell for Blind CCO should be configured by executing the CHG-GERAN-BLCCO command.

Key Parameters CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except startingARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)

GERAN_ARFCN1~GERAN_ ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object.

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO Parameter

Description

NORMAL_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

269

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_CCOSUPPORT

This parameter indicates whether to support blind Cell Change Order(CCO) during GERAN interworking. False: Blind CCO not supported. True: Blind CCO supported.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

270

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

CHG-GERAN-BLCCO/RTRV-GERAN-BLCCO Parameter

Description

TARGET_GERAN_NBR_IDX

This parameter is the target GERAN neighbor cell index where the blind CCO will be performed for the relevant cell. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

CSFB_CCO_GERAN_OUT

CSFBGeranCcoAtt

CSFB with inter-RAT GERAN CCO attempt count

CSFBGeranCcoPr epSucc

CSFB with inter-RAT GERAN CCO preparation success count

CSFBGeranCcoSu cc

CSFB with inter-RAT GERAN CCO execution success count

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

271

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1312, CSFB to GERAN with CCO with NACC INTRODUCTION CS fallback is the function to provide voice service to LTE users before the introduction of Voice over LTE (VoLTE), it switches UE over to CS domain when LTE user sends or receives a voice call to let the user receives a voice service from the CS domain. The CSFB to GERAN with Cell Change Order (CCO) with Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) function switches UE to GERAN with CCO with NACC procedure. When the S1 message including the CSFB indicator is received from MME, eNB provides the cell change order to UE, specifies the carrier frequency and target cell of the GERAN to which UE is to switch over, and delivers the system information (SI) list of the target cell (CCO with NACC). The UE switches over to the target cell of GERAN specified by eNB and initiates the voice call sending/receiving procedure. The RAN information management (RIM) interworking between eNB and GERAN is required to process the CSFB to GERAN with CCO with NACC. The eNB obtains and stores SI lists of each cell from an adjacent GERAN through the RIM procedure. In addition, eNB use the SI lists of each cell when processing the CSFB to GERAN with CCO with NACC. Whether to use CCO or release with redirection could be configured by LSM.

BENEFIT The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS network (GERAN).

Users can make a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS network (GERAN).

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency GERAN supported Device, EPC, and GERAN shall support this feature.

RIM for SI tunneling shall be supported by EPC and GERAN. Limitation RIM based SI tunneling is only possible for ENB to acquire GERAN system information (Manual configuration in LSM is not available). Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

272

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Regardless of UE movement, CSFB is triggered when there is mobile originating or mobile terminating call. To support CSFB service, 2G network coexists with LTE network where in MME serves users while in LTE access network, and SGSN serves users while in 2G access network. In 2G network, SGSN serves users when utilizing data services and MSC (Mobile Switching Center) when utilizing voice services. To support CS Fallback signaling, MME connects to MSC with SGs interface. The SGs interface is used for the mobility management and paging procedures between EPS and CS domain. Also, it is used for the delivery of both mobile originating and terminating SMS. The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:

Cell Change Order with NACC could be performed under the following conditions:

UE or target GERAN does not support PS handover UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2). oOptionally, measurement could be omitted via configuration

UE shall support cell change order procedure (FGI#10). System Information of the target cell is provided (with NACC). The following figure shows the call flow for CSFB to GERAN with CCO with NACC: System information of the target cell shall be obtained by RIM procedure.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

273

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE initiates CSFB procedure. If UE is in idle state, UE using the RRC connection establishment procedure switches over to the connected state. 2) The UE transmits the NAS EXTENDED SERVICE REQEUSTembedded in RRC UL Information Transfer message. 3) The eNB relays NAS message to MME using S1AP Uplink NAS Transport message 4) The MME transmits the S1AP Initial Context setup Request message in which the CSFB indicator is included to eNB. In case of UE is in idle state, eNB processes the AS security activation and default bearer setup procedure. 5) The eNB transmits the S1AP Initial Context Setup Response message to MME. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

274

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

6) The eNB specifies GERAN carrier frequency and the target GERAN cell to which UE is to switch over and transmits the Mobility from EUTRA command to UE including the SI lists of the target GERAN cell. (The eNB may request measurement of GERAN before step 6. This measurement will increase total CSFB latency) 7~11) The eNB transmits UE Context Release Request to MME. The MME processes the S1 release procedure with eNB. 13) The UE switches over to GERAN carrier frequency given by eNB and connects to GERAN. It initiates the GERAN location registration procedure. 14) If the GERAN cannot provide simultaneous CS and PS service, UE requests GERAN to suspend the PS service. 15~16) The SGSN processes the bearers suspension procedure by UE‟s request. The MME suspends S-GW and PS by the request from SGSN. 17) Then, UE performs CS call setup and continues to provide the CS service The following figure shows the procedure for UE in idle state:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

275

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the „CHG-GERAN-FA‟ command.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

276

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The operator can put the high priority on CSFB to GERAN with CCO with NACC by using „CHG-GERAN-INTWO‟ command for Normal type based on UE measurement and Blind type without UE measurement. The lower number priority has the higher priority. If „blindCCOsupport‟ in „CHG-GERAN-INTWO‟ is set to “True”, Blind CCO is supported during interworking with GERRAN and Target GERAN cell for Blind CCO should be configured by executing the „CHG-GERAN-BLCCO‟ command. „isAllowedRim‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ using „CHG-HO-OPT‟. This parameter configures the RIM procedure and „rimSupport‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the „CHG-NBR-GERAN‟ command.

Key Parameters CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except startingARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)

GERAN_ARFCN1~GERAN_ ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object.

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

BAND_INDICATOR

The band indicator of GERAN FA object. dcs1800: Indicates DCS 1800 band. pcs1900: Indicates PCS 1900 band.

CHG-GERAN-INTWO/RTRV-GERAN-INTWO Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

277

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

NORMAL_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

NORMAL_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY0

This parameter indicates the first priority of blind type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY1

This parameter indicates the second priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY2

This parameter indicates the third priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

BLIND_PRIORITY3

This parameter indicates the fourth priority in the normal type GERAN interworking procedure. ccoWithNACC: CCO with NACC. ccoWithoutNACC: CCO without NACC. enhancedRedirection: Enhanced Redirection with SI. geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

278

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

BLIND_CCOSUPPORT

This parameter indicates whether to support blind Cell Change Order(CCO) during GERAN interworking. False: Blind CCO not supported. True: Blind CCO supported.

CHG-GERAN-BLCCO/RTRV-GERAN-BLCCO Parameter

Description

TARGET_GERAN_NBR_ID X

This parameter is the target GERAN neighbor cell index where the blind CCO will be performed for the relevant cell.- geranRedirecdtion: Redirection without SI.

CHG-HO-OPT/RTRV-HO-OPT Parameter

Description

RIM_ENABLE

This parameter indicates whether to support the RAN Information Management (RIM) function for Inter RAT (WCDMA, GEARN). False: Does not perform the RIM function. True: Performs the RIM function.

CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBRGERAN Parameter

Description

RIM_SUPPORT

This parameter indicates whether or not the RIM procedure of a Neighbor GERAN Cell is supported. It must be set accurately since the RIM procedure execution is determined by the setting. False: RIM is not supported. True: RIM is supported.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

CSFB_CCO_GERAN_OUT

CSFBGeranCcoAtt

CSFB with inter-RAT GERAN CCO attempt count

CSFBGeranCcoPre pSucc

CSFB with inter-RAT GERAN CCO preparation success count

CSFBGeranCcoSuc c

CSFB with inter-RAT GERAN CCO execution success count

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

279

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

[3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

280

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW1313, CSFB to GERAN with PS Handover INTRODUCTION CS fallback is the function to provide voice service to LTE users before the introduction of Voice over LTE (VoLTE), it switches over UE to CS domain when there is a voice call (mobile originated or mobile terminated) so that the user receive a voice service from CS domain. The CSFB to GERAN with PS handover function switches UE to GERAN by PS handover procedure. When the S1 message including the CSFB indicator is received from MME, eNB provides GERAN measurement order to UE. When GERAN measurement results are received from UE, eNB selects the handover target cell and processes the handover preparation procedure. If GERAN and handover preparation procedures are successfully completed, eNB instructs UE about handover to GERAN and delivers the CSFB indicator (PS handover). The UE performs handover to the target cell of GERAN specified by eNB and initiates the voice call setup procedure.

BENEFIT The operator can provide CS service to its subscribers by using legacy CS network (GERAN).

Users can do a CS call while staying in E-UTRAN, by transition to legacy CS network (GERAN).

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency GERAN supported Device, EPC, and GERAN shall support this feature based on 3GPP Rel.8. It needs IOT with commercial UE which support PS Handover between LTE and GERAN.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Regardless of UE movement, CSFB is triggered when there is mobile originating or mobile terminating call.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

281

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

To support CSFB service, 2G network coexists with LTE network where in MME serves users while in LTE access network, and SGSN serves users while in 2G access network. In 2G network, SGSN serves users when utilizing data services and MSC (Mobile Switching Center) when utilizing voice services. To support CS Fallback signaling, MME connects to MSC with SGs interface. The SGs interface is used for the mobility management and paging procedures between EPS and CS domain. Also, it is also used for the delivery of both mobile originating and terminating SMS. The following figure shows the architecture and interfaces for CSFB:

Samsung eNB can use PS handover for CSFB to GERAN under the following conditions:

Target GERAN shall support PS handover UE shall support measurement reporting for GERAN frequencies in E-UTRA connected mode (FGI#15 for B1, FGI#23 for B2).

UE shall support handover to GERAN (FGI#9). Depending on the configuration and UE capability, Redirection or Cell Change Order could be used for CSFB The following figure shows the procedure for CSFB with PS handover to GERAN for UE in active:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

282

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

1) The UE initiates CSFB procedure. If UE is in idle state, UE processes the connection establishment between eNB and RRC procedure to switch over to the connected state. 2~3) The UE transmits the NAS EXTENDED SERVICE REQEUST and eNB relays it. 4) The MME transmits the S1 request message in which the CSFB indicator is included to eNB. In case CSFB of UE is in idle state, eNB processes the AS security activation and default bearer setup procedure. 5) The eNB transmits the S1 response message to MME. 6) The eNB provides the GERAN measurement order to UE. (if available) 7) The handover preparation procedure between Source E-UTRAN and target GERAN is processed. 8) The eNB, including the HO command received from the CSFB indicator and target GERAN frequency, transmits the Mobility from EUTRA Command to UE. 9) The UE switches over to GERAN target cell designated by eNB and performs the rest of handover procedure The following figure shows the procedure for CSFB with PS handover to GERAN in case UE is in idle state: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

283

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To enable this feature, operator should configure the GERAN Frequency Information by executing the CHG-GERAN-FA command and the GERAN Periodic Measurement information for StrongestCell report purpose by using CHG-GERAN-PRD command. „psHoSupport‟ parameter should be set as „True‟ by executing the CHG-NBRGERAN command.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

284

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Key Parameters CHG-GERAN-FA/RTRV-GERAN-FA Parameter

Description

STATUS

This parameter indicates whether GERAN FA object is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

FOLLOWING_ARFCNS

The followingARFCNs is the choice option to select the remaining ARFCN values except startingARFCN. explicitList: used for explicitListOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 ~ geranArfcn31. equallySpaced: used for equallySpacedARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0, arfcnSpacing and numberOfFollowingARFCNs. variableBitMap: used for variableBitMapOfARFCNs. Set geranArfcn0 and variableBitMapOfARFCNs.

GERAN_ARFCN0

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object. (Start ARFCN)

GERAN_ARFCN1~GERAN_ ARFCN31

This parameter is the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) of GERAN FA object.

ARFCN_SPACING

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, arfcnSpacing becomes Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.

NUMBER_OF_FOLLOWING _ARFCNS

If followingARFCNs is set to equallySpaced, numberOfFollowingARFCNs becomes The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}, where s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

VARIABLE_BIT_MAP_OF_ ARFCNS [16]

If followingARFCNs is set to variableBitMap, variableBitMapOfARFCNs becomes Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1 and s is startingARFCN (geranArfcn0).

BAND_INDICATOR

The band indicator of the GERAN FA object. dcs1800: Indicates DCS 1800 band. pcs1900: Indicates PCS 1900 band.

CHG-GERAN-PRD/RTRV-GERAN-PRD Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

The purpose for using information on the GERAN periodic event report. StrongestCells: This purpose is used for ICIC. StrongestCellsForSON: This purpose is used for SON. ReportCGI: This purpose is used for CGI. Mlb: This purpose is used for MLB.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether to use the GERAN periodic event report. Inactive: The GERAN periodic event report is not used. Active: The GERAN periodic event report is used.

MAX_REPORT_CELL

The maximum number of cells to be included in a measurement report due to the GERAN periodic event report.

REPORT_INTERVAL

The interval of a measurement report of UE due to the GERAN periodic event

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

285

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description report.

REPORT_AMOUNT

The maximum number of measurement reports of UE due to the GERAN periodic event report.

CHG-NBR-GERAN/RTRV-NBR-GERAN/CRTE-NBR-GERAN/DLT-NBRGERAN Parameter

Description

PS_HO_SUPPORT

This parameter indicates whether to support the PS-HO of the given GERAN neighbor cell. False: PS-HO is not supported. True: PS-HO is supported.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

CSFB_PSHO_GERAN_OUT

CSFBPsHoGeranAtt

Attempt count for CSFB with interRAT GRAN PS handover

CSFBPsHoGeranPrepSucc

Preparation success count for CSFB with inter-RAT GRAN PS handover

CSFBPsHoGeranSucc

Count of CSFB with Inter RAT GERAN PS handover execution successes

CSFBPsHoGeranPrepFail_CpCcFail

Preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoGeranPrepFail_S1apCuFail

Preparation fails due to S1AP specification cause during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoGeranPrepFail_S1apLinkFail

Preparation fails due to S1 SCTP link failure during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoGeranPrepFail_S1apRpTo

Preparation fails due to S1AP relocprep timeout (not received) during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoGeranPrepFail_S1apSigFail

Preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling during the CSFB PS handover preparation.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_CpCcTo

A call is released due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, and GTP) during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_CpCcFail

A call is released due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from the ECMB or by the ECCB block during the CSFB PS

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

286

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_UpGtpFail

A call is released due to a failure in the GTP block during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_UpMacFail

A call is released due to a failure in the MAC block during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_UpPdcpFail

A call is released due to a failure in the PDCP block during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_UpRlcFail

A call is released due to a failure in the RLC block during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_RrcSigFail

A call is released due to receiving an RRC signaling during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_S1apCuFail

A call is released due to S1AP specification cause during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_S1apLinkFail

A call is released due to the S1 SCTP link failure during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_S1apRoTo

A call is released due to an S1AP relocoverall timeout (not received) during the CSFB PS handover execution.

CSFBPsHoGeranFail_S1aSigFail

A call is released due to receiving S1AP signaling during the CSFB PS handover execution.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Access Network (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [4] 3GPP TS23.272 Circuit Switched Fallback in Evolved Packet System; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

287

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW2011, Service based Intra-LTE Handover INTRODUCTION The UE can use a variety of services such as Voice over LTE, Web or FTP in LTE network. Because each service has different characteristics, it is necessary to use a different handover policy for each service. For example, in case of VoLTE in a multi-carrier environment, it is necessary to enable UE to handover to the carrier with good coverage. Services with a different QoS use a different QCI. In case of handover control for each service, eNB applies the handover policy set for each QCI. The service based intra-LTE handover function can be used in the multi-carrier environment. The eNB uses this function only to UE that supports multi-carrier.

BENEFIT To use a handover policy set for each QCI, a different handover policy can be applied for a different service.

The mobility quality of VoLTE can be improved.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency This function can be enabled in the multi-carrier environment. Limitation Up to 5 mobility profiles are allowed.

QCI 5 is determined according to the default mobility profile (Mobility Profile 0). The UE should support multi-carrier.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Operation Scenario The operator sets the parameters as per their requirement for service based intraLTE handover. Provisioning/Parameter Settings for service based Intra-LTE Appropriate mobility profile is allocated to each QCI. Mobility Profile 0 is the default configuration, which is allocated to the QCI that does not belong to Mobility Profiles 1-4. In case of QCI 5, Mobility Profile 0 is allocated instead of Mobility Profiles 1-4. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

288

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The following table shows an example of mobility profile allocation for each QCI: Mobility Profile #

Mobility Profile 0

Mobility Profile 1

Mobility Profile 2

Mobility Profile 3

Mobility Profile 4

QCIs allocated to each mobility group

Default configuration (Default value per QCI)

QCI 1

QCI 2, 3, 4

QCI 7, 8, 9

No allocated QCI

Mobility control related items are set for each mobility profile as follows:

Preferred target carrier frequencies for E-UTRAN (FDD or TDD) Handover triggering event Measurement configuration Blind redirection option The UE may have multiple QCIs belonging to different mobility profiles. In such cases, Mobility Profile of UE is determined by the mobility profile associated with highest priority QCI of that UE. If highest priority QCI is associated with default mobility profile, then service based handover scheme is disabled for that UE and existing handover scheme will be applied. The following table shows an example of Priority Allocation per QCI: QCI #

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Priority

9

2

4

3

5

1

6

7

8

9

The mobility profile for UE is determined based on the QCI of a bearer that is used by UE. Therefore, a different handover policy can be used per QCI. The operational scenario is as follows: The following figure is an example of service based intra-LTE handover:

For example, UE A and UE B have QCI 1 and QCI 9 respectively and mobility profile per QCI is set as shown in below table. That is, Mobility Profile 1 is allocated to UE A and Mobility Profile 2 is allocated to UE B. In this case, if a preferred carrier is set to Carrier A for Mobility Profile 1 and Carrier B for Mobility Profile 2, UE A handovers to Carrier A and UE B handovers to Carrier B as shown in above figure.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

289

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The following table shows an example of Mobility Profile Allocation per QCI that is Set in UE. UE

A

B

QCI

1

9

Mobility Profile

Mobility Profile 1

Mobility Profile 2

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Configure QCI Mobility Group ID to each QCI value by executing the CHG-QCIVAL command. If multiple bearers with different QCIs are configured for the same UE, then the QCI Mobility Group ID with highest priority QCI will be chosen. QCI Mobility Group specific handover parameters can be configured by RTRV/CHG EUTRA-FAQCI, RTRV/CHG-EUTRA-A1CNFQ, RTRV/CHGEUTRA-A2CNFQ, RTRV/CHG-EUTRA-A3CNFQ, RTRV/CHG-EUTRAA4CNFQ, RTRV/CHG-EUTRA-A5CNFQ. If specific QCI Mobility Group is going to use event A3 to handover to the specific FA, then use 1) CHG-EUTRA-FAQCI to set handover type to be A3 and 2) CHG-EUTRA-A3CNFQ to set the active status of the corresponding cell, handover purpose, qci group index, and FA index.

Key Parameters RTRV-QCI-VAL/CHG-QCI-VAL (QCI Mobility Group configuration) Parameter

Description

QCI

This parameter is the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The range is 0 - 255.The standard QCI defined in the standard document is 1 - 9. 0 and 10 - 255 can be used by the operator optionally. [Related Specifications] 3GPP TS 23.203 [Table 6.1.7] Standardized QoS characteristics.

STATUS

This parameter indicates the whether to use the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). EQUIP: eNB uses the relevant QCI. N_EQUIP: eNB does not use the relevant QCI.

PRIORITY

This parameter is the priority of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The range is 1 to 16, and 1 means the highest priority.

QCI_MOBILITY_GROUP_ID

This attribute defines the QCI Mobility Group ID of the QCI.

RTRV-EUTRA-FAQCI/CHG-EUTRA-FAQCI Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

The cell number to be changed.

FA_INDEX

EUTRA frequency index. Up to 8 FAs can be assigned per cell.

QCI_GROUP_INDEX

QCI Group index.

STATUS

Whether the EUTRA FA is valid. N_EQUIP: Invalid. EQUIP: Valid.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

290

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

OFFSET_FREQ

Frequency offset value applied to offsetFreq in RRC Connection Reconfiguration.

HANDOVER_TYPE

Handover Type per Carrier ci_HoEventA3 ci_HoEventA4 ci_HoEventA5

RTRV-EUTRA-A1CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A1CNFQ Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

QCI_GROUP_INDEX

QCI Group index.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A1 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. Inactive: Event A1 is not used. Active: Event A1 is used.

RTRV-EUTRA-A2CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A1CNFQ Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using the Event A2 per cell. It is used to activate the measurement gap as default. LteHo: Used for Gap Activate LteBlind: Used for Blind HO IRatHo: Used for IRAT HO IRatBlind: Used for IRAT Blind HO Ca: Used for Carrer Aggregation CaPeriodicMr Srvcc Mdt Spare_2: Reserved.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter indicates whether event A2 is enabled/disabled per target frequency. Inactive: Event A2 is not used. Active: Event A2 is used. If HO of the target frequency is not needed in the site, this is inactive. This change will be applied to UE from next RRC signaling procedure (for example, Attach or Idle to Active). To avoid overload, a new setting will not be updated to the current Active UEs.

RTRV-EUTRA-A3CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A3CNFQ Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

291

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A3 event. IntraLteHandover: Performs handover. ReportStrongestCells: Performs the ANR operation. IntraFrequencyLb Spare_2: Reserved. Not used at this moment.

QCI_GROUP_INDEX

QCI Group index.

FA_INDEX

The FA_INDEX is a parameter corresponding to the FA_INDEX of EUTRA-FA. The configuration conditions of A3 event (A3_OFFSET, TRIGGER_QUANTIY, and so on.) can be set differently per FA. To configure A3 event for a specific FA, the status of EUTRA-FA (FA_INDEX#n) must be EQUIP and the ACTIVE_STATE of EUTRA-A3CNF (FA_INDEX#n) must be Active.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A3 event. If this is set to Inactive, the A3 event is not configured.

RTRV-EUTRA-A4CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A4CNFQ Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A4 event. A4PurposeUntraLteHandover: handover is executed A4PurposeANR_Specific:the ANR operation is executed A4PurposeCA: SCELL is configured A4PurposeUnloading: the unloading operation is executed A4PurposeSpare_2: it is not used at this moment because it is reserved for future use.

QCI_GROUP_INDEX

QCI Group index.

FA_INDEX

The FA_INDEX is a parameter corresponding to the FA_INDEX of EUTRA-FA. The configuration conditions of A4 event (A4_THRESHOLD_RSRP, TRIGGER_QUANTIY, and so on.) can be set differently per FA. To configure A4 event for a specific FA, the status of EUTRA-FA (FA_INDEX#n) must be EQUIP and the ACTIVE_STATE of EUTRA-A4CNF (FA_INDEX#n) must be Active. The ANR_Specific/CA/Unloading is only used to configure FA_INDEX #0 and other values are ignored.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A4 event. If this is set to Inactive, the A4 event is not configured.

RTRV-EUTRA-A5CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A5CNFQ Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

292

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A5 event. IntraLteHandover: Intra-LTE handover. Spare_1: Reserved. Spare_2: Reserved.

QCI_GROUP_INDEX

QCI Group index.

FA_INDEX

The FA_INDEX is a parameter corresponding to the FA_INDEX of EUTRA-FA. The configuration conditions of A5 event (A5_THRESHOLD_RSRP1, TRIGGER_QUANTIY, and so on.) can be set differently per FA. To configure A5 event for a specific FA, the status of EUTRA-FA (FA_INDEX#n) must be EQUIP and the ACTIVE_STATE of EUTRA-A5CNF (FA_INDEX#n) must be Active.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A5 event. If this is set to Inactive, the A5 event is not configured.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

-

IntraEnbAtt

Intra eNB handover attempt count

IntraEnbPrepSucc

Intra eNB handover preparation success count

IntraEnbSucc

Intra eNB handover execution success count

IntraEnbPrepFail_CP_C C_TO

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP)

IntraEnbPrepFail_CP_C C_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block

IntraEnbPrepFail_UP_M AC_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to the failure in the MAC block

IntraEnbPrepFail_UP_R LC_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to the failure in the RLC block

IntraEnbPrepFail_RRC_ SIG_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to receiving RRC signaling

IntraEnbPrepFail_CP_B H_CAC_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to Backhaul QoS based CAC

IntraEnbPrepFail_CP_C APA_CAC_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to Capacity based CAC

IntraEnbPrepFail_CP_Q OS_CAC_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to Air QoS based CAC

IntraEnbPrepFail_S1AP _CU_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to the S1AP specification cause

IntraEnbPrepFail_S1AP _LINK_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to the S1 SCTP link failure

IntraEnbPrepFail_S1AP _SIG_FAIL

Intra eNB handover preparation fails due to receiving S1AP signaling

IntraEnbFail_CP_CC_T O

Intra eNB handover fails due to call control timeout in the protocol blocks (MAC, RLC, PDCP, GTP)

IntraEnbFail_CP_CC_F AIL

Intra eNB handover fails due to reset notification (eNB failure or block restart) from ECMB or by the ECCB block

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

293

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

IntraEnbFail_UP_GTP_ FAIL

Intra eNB handover fails due to the failure in the GTP block

IntraEnbFail_UP_MAC_ FAIL

Intra eNB handover fails due to the failure in the MAC block

IntraEnbFail_UP_RLC_ FAIL

Intra eNB handover fails due to the failure in the RLC block

IntraEnbFail_RRC_HC_ TO

Intra eNB handover fails due to HO preparation timeout (not received HO command)

IntraEnbFail_RRC_SIG_ FAIL

Intra eNB handover fails due to receiving RRC signaling

IntraEnbFail_S1AP_CU _FAIL

Intra eNB handover fails due to the S1AP specification cause

IntraEnbFail_S1AP_LIN K_FAIL

Intra eNB handover fails due to the S1 SCTP link failure

IntraEnbFail_S1AP_SIG _FAIL

Intra eNB handover fails due to receiving S1AP signaling

IntraHOTime

Time taken from transmitting the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to UE until after receiving the RRCConnectionReconfiguration Complete message from the UE.

IntraHOTimeMax

Average maximum intra HO interrupt time

IntraHOTimeTot

Sum of intra HO interrupt time

IntraHOTimeCnt

Count of IntraHOTime collected

REFERENCE N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

294

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

LTE-SW2014, SPID based Dedicated Priority INTRODUCTION The eNB supports dedicated signaling with Inter-Frequency/RAT cell reselection or handover priorities based on SPID (Subscriber Profile ID).

Specification based SPID support Operator specific SPID support

BENEFIT The operator can control idle mode camping RAT and carriers of UE based on absolute priorities determined by subscription information.

The operator can control service frequency of UE based on absolute priorities determined by subscription information.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency The operator specific values are required. Limitation The reference values, SPID=1~128, 254, 255 and 256 can be supported.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The SPID information is received from MME (Initial Context Setup Request/UE Context Modification/Downlink NAS Transport) or other eNB (Handover Setup Request). The eNB support to Inter-frequency handover or reselection priority based on dedicated priority each SPID.

SPID based Inter-frequency Handover When eNB receives UE's SPID, it checks whether SPID is set by the operator. If SPID is set, then eNB performs Inter-frequency handover for the highest prioritized frequency in the dedicated priority list. Related Operation When eNB receives UE's SPID, it selects frequencies should be UseFlag is set to use.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

295

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

The eNB performs measurement (A4, A5) using RRCConnectionReconfiguration procedure for the highest prioritized frequencies among selected frequencies.

The eNB sets Measurement Gap, which leads to search for Inter-frequency cell. When eNB receives MR by A4 (Neighbour cell signal strength only) or A5, it performs inter-frequency handover toward the searched frequency.

SPID based Inter-RAT Handover When eNB receives UE's SPID, it checks whether SPID is set by the operator. If the SPID is set and the highest prioritized frequency is Inter-RAT frequency, then eNB performs Inter-RAT handover to the chosen frequency. Related Operation When eNB receives UE's SPID, it selects frequencies should be UseFlag is set to use.

If the highest prioritized frequency is Inter-RAT frequency, eNB performs measurement (B1, B2) using RRCConnectionReconfiguration procedure on the highest prioritized inter-RAT frequency.

The eNB sets Measurement Gap, which leads to search for Inter-frequency cell. When eNB receives MR by B1 or B2, it performs inter-frequency handover toward the searched frequency.

If the frequencies of multiple RATs have the same highest priority, one target RAT is chosen according to the fixed order of LTE > UTRAN > GERAN.

SPID based Reselection Priority During RRC Connection Release occurrence, SPID setup of corresponding UE is verified by eNB. If the setup is complete, the corresponding dedicated priority list is transferred to UE by eNB. Related Operation When configuring RRC Connection Release to MS, verify if SPID (1~128, 254, 255, and 256) of MS is set.

Allow configuration of IdleModeMobilityControlInfo only for SPID set to MS with UseFlag on. At this point, only include RAT supported according to UE Radio Capability of MS in order to exclude non-supported RAT information.

If UseFlag is off for the SPID set for UE, configure IdleModeMobilityControlInfo according to Idle mode Load Balancing feature.

Transmit the configured RRC Connection Release message to MS. Specification SPID Range Values 1~128: Operator specific SPID values.

Values 129~256: Reference values Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

296

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Reference SPID Values The following table shows eNB local configuration in idle and connected mode for SPID = 256: Configuration Parameter

Value

Description

E-UTRAN Carriers Priority

High

The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all E-UTRAN carriers are higher than the priorities for all UTRAN and GERAN carriers

UTRAN Carriers Priority

Medium

The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all UTRAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all EUTRAN carriers and higher than the priorities for all GERAN carriers

GERAN Carriers Priority

Low

The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all GERAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all EUTRAN and UTRAN carriers

The following table shows eNB local configuration in idle and connected mode for SPID = 255: Configuration Parameter

Value

Description

UTRAN Carriers Priority

High

The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all UTRAN carriers are higher than the priorities for all GERAN and E-UTRAN carriers

GERAN Carriers Priority

Medium

The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all GERAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all UTRAN carriers and higher than the priorities for all E-UTRAN carriers

E-UTRAN Carriers Priority

Low

The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all E-UTRAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all UTRAN and GERAN carriers

The following table shows eNB local configuration in idle and connected mode for SPID = 254: Configuration Parameter

Value

Description

GERAN Carriers Priority

High

The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all GERAN carriers are higher than the priorities for all UTRAN and E-UTRAN carriers

UTRAN Carriers Priority

Medium

The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all UTRAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all GERAN carriers and higher than the priorities for all E-UTRAN carriers

E-UTRAN Carriers Priority

Low

The selection priorities for idle and connected mode of all E-UTRAN carriers are lower than the priorities for all GERAN and UTRAN carriers

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

297

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Set dedicated priority of the FA to the specific SPID by using the RTRV/CHGEUTRA-PRIOR command for EUTRAN FA,the RTRV/CHG-UTRA-PRIOR command for UTRAN FA, and the RTRV/CHG-GERAN-PRIOR command for GERAN FA.

If operator needs to create a UE with specific SPID to intra-LTE handover to FA with the highest dedicate priority using A4 or A5 measurement event,

aSet spidMobilityOption of the specific Cell/PLMN/FA/SPID with the highest dedicatedPriority value to 'handoverOnly' or 'both' by executing the CHGEUTRA-PRIOR command.

bSet spidMeasureOption of the corresponding Cell/PLMN/FA/SPID to 'hoEventA4' or 'hoEventA5' by executing the CHG-EUTRA-PRIOR command.

cSet activeState of the A4 or A5 event for the corresponding Cell/FA to be active using CHG-EUTRA-A4CNF command or CHG-EUTRA-A5CNF command with index A4purposeInterFrequencySPID or A5purposeInterFrequencySPID (if service based handover feature is applied, EUTRA-A4CNFQ or EUTRA-A5CNFQ with the relevant QCI Mobility Group ID has to be considered also.).

If operator needs to create a UE with specific SPID to inter-RAT handover to FA with the highest dedicate priority using B1 or B2 measurement event,

aSet spidMobilityOption of the specific Cell/PLMN/FA/SPID with the highest dedicatedPriority value to 'handoverOnly' or by executing the using CHGUTRA-PRIOR or CHG-GERAN-PRIOR command.

bSet spidMeasureOption of the corresponding Cell/PLMN/FA/SPID to 'hoEventB1' or 'hoEventB2' by executing the CHG-UTRA-PRIOR or CHG-GERAN-PRIOR command.

cSet activeState of the B1 or B2 event for the corresponding Cell/FA to be active using CHG-UTRA-B1CNF/CHG-UTRA-B2CNF or CHGGERAN-B1CNF/CHG-GERAN-B2CNF (if the service specific handover feature is applied, UTRA-B1CNFQ/UTRA-B2CNFQ or GERANB1CNFQ/GERAN-B2CNFQ with the relevant QCI Mobility Group ID has to be considered also.).

Key Parameters RTRV-EUTRA-PRIOR/CHG-EUTRA-PRIOR Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

298

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

PLMN_ID

PLMN index. It is mapping to MCC/MNC configured in plmnIdx of PLDEnbPlmnInfo.

FA_ID

This parameter is the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (EUTRA) frequency index. This parameter enters the FA value that each cell supports and it is mapped to the FA_INDEX parameter value in the RTRV-EUTRA-FA command.

SPID_INDEX

This parameter is the Subscriber Profile ID (SPID). This parameter is the index used to refer to the registration information of a subscriber.

SPID

This parameter is the Subscriber Profile ID (SPID) for Radio Access Terminal (RAT)/frequency priority value. The range of an entered value is 1 - 128 and a value between 129 and 253 cannot be entered.

USED_FLAG

This parameter shows whether the dedicated priority is used. no_use: Dedicated priority is not used. use: Dedicated priority is used.

DEDICATED_PRIORITY

This parameter is the dedicated priority value. Enter a dedicated priority value according to the FA_INDEX and SPID.

SPID_MOBILITY_OPTION

Define addtional operations based on the mobility setting of the parameter for SPID of the UE. reselectionOnly(0): When UE is released, send the dedicated priority per FA for SPID that the UE currently possesses among the FAs supported in UE Radio Capability through IdleModeMobilityControlInfo. However, A4 or A5 based inter-frequency handover based on SPID shall not be performed. handoverOnly(1): When the UE first receives SPID, if the FA configured to be the highest DEDICATED_PRIORITY for the SPID is different from the serving frequency of the UE but can be supported in UE Radio Capabiilty, attach A4 or A5 event to induce inter-frequency handover. In this case, idleModeMobilityControlInfo to be transmitted when UE is released shall be based on Idle Mode Load Balancing. both(2): When UE first receives SPID, if the FA configured to be the highest DEDICATED_PRIORITY for the SPID is different from the serving frequency of the UE but can be supported in UE Radio Capability, attach A4 or A5 event to induce inter-frequency handover. In addition, when UE is released, the dedicated priority per FA configured in SPID that UE currently possesses among the FAs that can be supported in UE Radio Capability shall be transitted through IdleModeMobilityControlInfo.

SPID_MEASURE_OPTION

If spidMobilityOption is handoverOnly or both, designate measurement event type to trigger inter-frequency handover. spidHoEventA4(0): measurement event type for inter-frequency handover triggering is EventA4. spidHoEventA5(1): measurement event type for inter-frequency handover triggering is EventA5.

RTRV-UTRA-PRIOR/CHG-UTRA-PRIOR Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter specifies the cell number to retrieve the periodic report config information used for interoperating with the UTRAN.

PLMN_INDEX

PLMN index. It is mapping to MCC/MNC configured in plmnIdx of PLDEnbPlmnInfo.

FA_ID

This parameter is the Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) frequency index. The operator can enter a FA value each cell supports and maximum 6

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

299

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description FAs can be entered. This parameter is mapped to the FA_INDEX parameter value included in the RTRV-UTRA-FA command.

SPID_INDEX

This parameter is the Subscriber Profile ID (SPID) index. This parameter is the index used to refer to the registration information of a subscriber.

SPID

Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority. SPID could not be setting 129~253.

USED_FLAG

Whether to use dedicatedPriority. CI_no_use: dedicatedPriority is not used. CI_use: dedicatedPriority is used.

DEDICATED_PRIORITY

Dedicated Priority Value for Frequency according SPID. According to 3GPP TS36.300, if spid is 255, dedicated priority is set to 7.

SPID_MOBILITY_OPTION

Define additional operations based on the mobility setting of the parameter for SPID of the UE. reselectionOnly(0): When UE is released, send the dedicated priority per FA for SPID that the UE currently possesses among the FAs supported in UE Radio Capability through IdleModeMobilityControlInfo. However, B1 or B2 based inter-RAT handover to UTRAN based on SPID shall not be performed. handoverOnly(1): When UE first receives SPID, if the FA configured to be the highest DEDICATED_PRIORITY for the SPID is different from the serving frequency of UE but can be supported in UE Radio Capability, attach B1 or B2 event to induce inter-RAT handover to UTRAN. In this case, idleModeMobilityControlInfo to be transmitted when UE is released shall be based on Idle Mode Load Balancing. both(2): When UE first receives SPID, if the FA configured to be the highest DEDICATED_PRIORITY for the SPID is different from the serving frequency of the UE but can be supported in UE Radio Capability, attach B1 or B2 event to induce inter-RAT handover to UTRAN. In addition, when UE is released, the dedicated priority per FA configured in SPID that UE currently possesses among the FAs that can be supported in UE Radio Capability shall be transmitted through IdleModeMobilityControlInfo.

SPID_MEASURE_OPTION_ INTER_RAT

If spidMobilityOption is handoverOnly or both, designate measurement event type to trigger inter-RAT handover to UTRAN. spidHoEventB1(0):measurement event type for inter-RAT handover to UTRAN triggering is EventB1. spidHoEventB2(1):measurement event type for inter-RAT handover to UTRAN triggering is EventB2.

RTRV-GERAN-PRIOR/CHG-GERAN-PRIOR Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

The cell number to be changed.

PLMN_INDEX

PLMN index. It is mapping to MCC/MNC configured in plmnIdx of PLDEnbPlmnInfo.

FA_INDEX

GERAN frequency index. Up to 6 FAs can be assigned per cell. It is mapping to PLDGeranFaPriorInfo.

SPID_INDEX

SPID index.

SPID

Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority. SPID could not be setting 129~253.

USED_FLAG

Whether to use dedicatedPriority. CI_no_use: dedicatedPriority is not used.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

300

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description CI_use: dedicatedPriority is used.

DEDICATED_PRIORITY

Dedicated Priority Value for Frequency according SPID. According to 3GPP TS36.300, if spid is 254, dedicated priority is set to 7.

SPID_MOBILITY_OPTION

Define additional operations based on the mobility setting of the parameter for SPID of the UE. reselectionOnly(0): When UE is released, send the dedicated priority per FA for SPID that the UE currently possesses among the FAs supported in UE Radio Capability through IdleModeMobilityControlInfo. However, B1 or B2 based inter-RAT handover to GERAN based on SPID shall not be performed. handoverOnly(1): When the UE first receives SPID, if the FA configured to be the highest DEDICATED_PRIORITY for the SPID is different from the serving frequency of the UE but can be supported in UE Radio Capability, attach B1 or B2 event to induce inter-RAT handover to GERAN. In this case, idleModeMobilityControlInfo to be transmitted when the UE is released shall be based on Idle Mode Load Balancing. both(2): When UE first receives SPID, if the FA configured to be the highest DEDICATED_PRIORITY for the SPID is different from the serving frequency of the UE but can be supported in UE Radio Capability, attach B1 or B2 event to induce inter-RAT handover to GERAN. In addition, when UE is released, the dedicated priority per FA configured in SPID that UE currently possesses among the FAs that can be supported in UE Radio Capability shall be transitted through IdleModeMobilityControlInfo.

SPID_MEASURE_OPTION_ INTER_RAT

If spidMobilityOption is handoverOnly or both, designate measurement event type to trigger inter-RAT handover to GERAN. spidHoEventB1(0): measurement event type for inter-RAT handover to GERAN triggering is EventB1. spidHoEventB2(1): measurement event type for inter-RAT handover to GERAN triggering is EventB2.

RTRV-EUTRA-A4CNF/CHG-EUTRA-A4CNF OR RTRV-EUTRAA4CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A4CNFQ Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A4. IntraLteHandover: handover is executed ANR_Specific: the ANR operation is executed CA: SCELL is configured Sendback: the Sendback operation is executed InterFrequencyLb: the Active Load Balancing operation is executed ArpHandover: Enable inter frequency handover function for UEs that have a specific ARP OnDemandHandover: Enable the forced handover triggering by operator InterFrequencySPID: inter-frequency handover is executed for specific SPID with handover mobility option.

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A4. If this is set to Inactive, the Event A4 is not configured.

RTRV-EUTRA-A5CNF/CHG-EUTRA-A5CNF OR RTRV-EUTRAA5CNFQ/CHG-EUTRA-A5CNFQ Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

301

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A5. IntraLteHandover: Used for Intra LTE Handover. CaInterFreq: Performs Inter frequency handover for Carrier Aggregation(CA) UE InterFrequencyMbms: Inter frequency handover to get MBMS service ArpHandover: Enable Inter frequency handover function for UEs that have a specific ARP OnDemandHandover: Enable the forced handover triggering by operator InterFrequencySPID: Inter frequency handover for the specific SPID with handover mobility option

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event A5. If this is set to Inactive, the Event A5 is not configured.

RTRV-UTRA-B1CNF/CHG-UTRA-B1CNF or RTRV-UTRA-B1CNFQ/CHGUTRA-B1CNFQ Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter specifies the use of the UTRAN Event B1 used for interoperating with the UTRAN. InterRatHandover: Used for handover to the UTRAN. (0) ANR_Specific: Used for the ANR operation with the UTRAN. (1) Srvcc: Used for the Srvcc with the UTRAN. (2) Mlb: Used for MLB. (3) InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with handover mobility option. (4)

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event B1. If this is set to Inactive, the Event B1 is not configured.

RTRV-UTRA-B2CNF/CHG-EUTRA-B2CNF or RTRV-EUTRA-B2CNFQ/CHGEUTRA-B2CNFQ Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the purpose to retrieve the B2 report configuration information used for interoperating with the UTRAN. InterRatHandover: Used for handover to the UTRAN. (0) Srvcc: Used for SRVCC. (1) InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with handover mobility option. (2)

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event B2. If this is set to Inactive, the Event B2 is not configured.

RTRV-GERAN-B1CNF/CHG-GERAN-B1CNF or RTRV-GERANB1CNFQ/CHG-GERAN-B1CNFQ Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the usage of information on the GERAN Event B1 report. It is used for inter-RAT Handover and SON ANR function. InterRatHandover: Used for InterRAT Handover (0)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

302

Chapter 4 Mobility Control Parameter

Description ANR_Specific: Used for SON ANR (1) Srvcc: Used for SRVCC (2) Mlb: For MLB. (3) InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with handover mobility option. (4)

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event B1. If this is set to Inactive, the Event B1 is not configured.

RTRV-GERAN-B2CNF/CHG-GERAN-B2CNF or RTRV-GERANB2CNFQ/CHG-GERAN-B2CNFQ Parameter

Description

PURPOSE

This parameter is the usage of the GERAN Event B2 report. It is used for interRAT Handover.(0) InterRatHandover: For Inter-RAT handover.(0) Srvcc: For SRVCC. (1) InterRatSPID: inter-RAT handover is executed for specific SPID with handover mobility option. (2)

ACTIVE_STATE

This parameter is the purpose of using Event B2. If this is set to Inactive, the Event B2 is not configured.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS36.304 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

303

Chapter 4 Mobility Control

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

304

Chapter 5

Radio Scheduler

LTE-ME1101, PDSCH Resource Allocation INTRODUCTION In SC-FDMA or OFDM system, the frequency-domain resource allocation information needs to be signaled to UE. Because the large number of resource blocks within the frequency band, the resource allocation is one of the largest fields in the downlink control information. In the case of SC-FDMA uplink, the allocated resource blocks need to be contiguous to guarantee single-carrier property. While the contiguous resource allocation can be signaled with the minimum of signaling bits, it also results in limiting the scheduling flexibility. In the case of OFDM, non-contiguous resource blocks can be allocated thus providing maximum scheduling flexibility. However, the signaling overhead also increases for non-contiguous resource block allocation. To provide various choices of scheduling performance and signaling overhead, multiple resource allocation types are defined. A contiguous resource allocation scheme is defined for both and the uplink and the downlink. As pointed out earlier, a contiguous resource allocation is necessary in the uplink due to single-carrier access. In downlink, contiguous resource allocation provides a low overhead alternative while limiting scheduling flexibility, In addition to contiguous resource allocation, two types of non-contiguous resource allocation using a bitmap-based signaling are defined for the downlink.

BENEFIT This feature enables to enhance flexibility in spreading the resources across the frequency domain to exploit frequency diversity.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Limitation Type 1 resource block allocations are not applicable to the 1.4 MHz channel bandwidth.

DCI formats 1, 2, and 2A always signal a type 0 resource block allocation when the channel bandwidth is 1.4 MHz.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION 3GPP LTE defines three downlink resource allocation types as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

305

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

Downlink Resource Allocation Type 0 A type 0 downlink resource block allocation can be signaled from eNB to UE using Downlink Control Information (DCI) format 1, 2, and 2A.

An allocation received during downlink subframe „n‟ defined the allocated Resource Blocks within the same downlink subframe.

A type 0 Resource Block allocation uses a bitmap to indicate which Resource Block Groups (RBGs) are allocated to UE. A single RBG is a set of consecutive Resource Blocks. The allocated RBG do not need to be contiguous.

The number of Resource Blocks within an RBG is predetermined and is a function of the channel bandwidth. The following table shows the RBG size as a function of the channel bandwidth: Parameters

Channel Bandwidth 1.4 MHz

3 MHz

5 MHz

10 MHz

15 MHz

20 MHz

Total Number of Resource Blocks

6

15

25

50

75

100

RBG Size (RB)

1

2

2

3

4

4

Number of complete RBG

6

7

12

16

18

25

Size of remaining RBG

-

1

1

2

3

-

Total Number of RBG

6

8

13

17

19

25

Size of bitmap (bits)

6

8

13

17

19

25

Each channel bandwidth includes a number of complete RBG. A partial RBG is also included if the total number of Resource Block is not a multiple of the RBG size.

The bitmap signaled using the Type 0 Resource Block allocation includes a single bit for each RBG. A value of 1 indicates that the RBG has been allocated to the UE. The following figure shows the RBG for channel bandwidth of 5MHz:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

306

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

Downlink Resource Allocation Type 1 A type 1 downlink Resource Block allocation can be signaled from eNB to UE using DCI format 1, 2, and 2A. An allocation received during downlink subframe „n‟ defined the allocated Resource Blocks within the same downlink subframe.

Type 1 resource block allocations are not applicable to the 1.4 MHz channel bandwidth.

Type 1 resource block allocations are divided into 3 sections: RBG subset number, Resource Block offset flag, and Resource Block bitmap.

The RBG sizes are the same as those specified for a Type 0 Resource Block allocation. The number of RBG subsets is equal to the RBG size. The following table shows the RBG size and number of RBG subsets for each channel bandwidth: Parameters

Channel Bandwidth 1.4 MHz

3 MHz

5 MHz

10 MHz

15 MHz

20 MHz

Total Number of Resource Blocks

N/A

15

25

50

75

100

RBG Size (RB)

N/A

2

2

3

4

4

Number of RBG subsets

N/A

2

2

3

4

4

RBG subset (bits)

N/A

1

1

2

2

2

Offset flag (bits)

N/A

1

1

1

1

1

bitmap (bits)

N/A

6

11

14

16

22

Total Bits

N/A

8

13

17

19

25

The number of bits used to signal the RBG subset is either 1 or 2 depending on the number of subsets. The resource blocks allocated to UE always belong to a single RBG subset.

The resource block offset flag indicates whether the subsequent Resource Block bitmap should be aligned with the bottom of the lowest Resource Block within the subset, or aligned with the top of the highest Resource Block within the subset. This offset is necessary because the bit map is not sufficiently large to include all Resource Blocks within the subset.

Downlink Resource Allocation Type 2 A type 2 downlink resource block allocation can be signaled from eNB to UE using DCI format 1A.

An allocation received during downlink subframe „n‟ defined the allocated resource blocks within the same downlink subframe.

The set of allocated virtual resource blocks are mapped onto the set of allocated physical resource blocks.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

307

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

Contiguous virtual resource blocks are contiguous both before and after mapping onto their physical resource blocks. In this case, the set of allocated physical resource blocks is the same as the set of allocated virtual resource blocks. In addition, the resource block allocation is the same in both time slots belonging to the subframe.

Contiguous allocations can range from a single virtual resource block to the complete set of virtual resource blocks spanning the entire channel bandwidth.

Contiguous virtual resource block allocation is signaled using Resource Indication Values (RIV). The calculation of the RIV is same as when calculating the RIV for type 0 uplink resource allocations.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The PDSCH resource allocation type is automatically determined by Samsung scheduler based on the DCI format and the traffic type and cannot be directly controlled by the operator.

Key Parameters There are no related parameters.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] Telefonica, Req20, „The Vendor‟s LTE solution shall support functionality to enquire UE capability and record number of UEs per eNodeB and per cell for each UE category‟, Telefonica RFP („12.04) [2] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

308

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

LTE-ME3203, Aperiodic CQI Reporting INTRODUCTION For the downlink data transmissions in an LTE network, the eNodeB typically selects the modulation scheme and code rate depending on a prediction of the downlink channel conditions. An important input to this selection process is the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) feedback transmitted by the UE in the uplink. CQI feedback is an indication of the data rate, which can be supported by the channel, considering the Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) and the characteristics of the UE receiver. The eNB supports two types of CQI reporting:

Periodic CQI is semi-statically configured by the eNB to be periodically transmitted on PUCCH.

Aperiodic CQI can be triggered on the PUSCH by a CSI request within DCI format 0 on PDCCH. It can also be triggered within random access response grant belonging to a random access response message on the PDSCH.

BENEFIT DL frequency selective scheduling to use sub-band CQI of all subbands. DL radio resource scheduling to serve the best resource allocation.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The aperiodic CQI is sent by PUSCH and be triggered by the CQI request field within UL grant. The eNB configures the following types of CQI reporting through the RRC signaling:

Wideband reporting UE-selected sub-band reporting Higher layer configured sub-band reporting In UE-selected sub-band reporting, the UE reports average CQI of M number of preferred sub-band in addition to wideband CQI. While it reports wideband CQI and sub-band CQI of all subbands in higher layer configured sub-band reporting. Because higher layer configured CQI reporting provides more information than UE-selected sub-band reporting, the Samsung eNB only operates higher layer configured CQI reporting. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

309

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

The eNB uses aperiodic CQI for frequency selective scheduling because sub-band information of periodic sub-band CQI is limited, as follows:

The UE reports only the selected sub-band CQI in bandwidth part. The UE does not transmit sub-band CQIs for the entire bandwidth simultaneously, which leads to longer reporting time. The eNB also uses aperiodic CQI in DL Carrier Aggregation. When the Carrier Aggregation feature is enabled, the use of two bits for CSI request is applicable. According to CSI request field, aperiodic CQI reporting is triggered for Pcell or Scell.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute CHG-CQI-REP to set CQI_REPORT_APERIODIC_SETUP to ci_Config_Setup for enabling aperiodic CQI report when DL Frequency Selective Scheduling (FSS) is enabled.

Execute CHG-CQI-REP to set CQI_REPORT_APERIODIC_SETUP_R10 to ci_Config_PcellScellSetup for enabling aperiodic CQI report when Carrier Aggregation feature is enabled.

Key Parameters RTRV-CQI-REP/CHG-CQI-REP Parameter

Description

CQI_REPORT_APERIODIC_SETUP

This parameter is set to enable or disable the use of aperiodic report mode. Release: Aperiodic report mode is disabled. Setup: Aperiodic report mode is enabled.

CQI_REPORT_APERIODIC_SETUP_R10

Config aperiodic report mode for Rel 10. 0: ci_Config_ReleaseAll 1: ci_Config_PcellSetup 2: ci_Config_ScellSetup 3: ci_Config_PcellScellSetup

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding [2] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

310

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

LTE-ME3206, Periodic Channel Status Reporting INTRODUCTION The principle of link adaptation is fundamental to the design of a radio interface, which is efficient for packet-switched data traffic. Unlike the early versions of Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), which is used fast closedloop power control to support circuit-switched services with a roughly constant data rate, link adaptation in High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) and LTE adjusts the transmitted information data rate (modulation scheme and channel coding rate) dynamically to match the prevailing radio channel capacity for each user. In case of downlink data transmissions in LTE, eNB typically selects the modulation scheme and code rate depending on a prediction of downlink channel conditions. An important input to this selection process is the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) feedback transmitted by UE in uplink. The CQI feedback is an indication of the data rate, which can be supported by the channel, taking into account the Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) and the characteristics of UE‟s receiver. In case of LTE uplink transmissions, the link adaptation process is similar to that for the downlink, with the selection of modulation and coding schemes also being under the control of eNB. An identical channel coding structure is used for uplink, while the modulation scheme may be selected between QPSK and 16QAM, and, for the highest category of UE, also 64QAM. The main difference from the downlink is that instead of basing the link adaptation on CQI feedback, eNB can directly make its own estimate of the supportable uplink data rate by channel sounding, for example using the Sounding Reference Signals (SRSs). A final important aspect of link adaptation is its use in conjunction with multi-user scheduling in time and frequency, which enables the radio transmission resources to be shared efficiently between users as the channel capacity to individual users varies. The CQI can therefore be used not only to adapt the modulation and coding rate to the channel conditions, but also for the optimization of the time/frequency selective scheduling and for inter-cell interference management.

BENEFIT Enable link adaptation from facilitating this feature Enable downlink radio resource scheduling to serve the best resource allocation

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency This feature can be enabled in case of uplink 64. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

311

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

FEATURE DESCRIPTION In cellular communication systems, the quality of signal received by UE depends on channel quality from serving cell, level of interference from other cells, and noise level. To optimize system capacity and coverage for a given transmission power, the transmitter should try to match the information data rate for each user to the variations in received signal quality. This is commonly referred to as link adaptation and is typically based on Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC). The degrees of freedom for the AMC consist of the modulation and coding schemes:

Modulation Scheme Low-order modulation (that is, few data bits per modulated symbol, for example, QPSK) is more robust and can tolerate higher levels of interference but provides a lower transmission bit rate. High-order modulation (that is, more bits per modulated symbol, for example, 64QAM) offers a higher bit rate but is more prone to errors due to its higher sensitivity to interference, noise and channel estimation errors; it is therefore useful only when the SINR is sufficiently high.

Code rate In case of given modulation, the code rate can be chosen depending on the radio link conditions: a lower code rate can be used in poor channel conditions and a higher code rate in the case of high SINR. The adaptation of the code rate is achieved by applying puncturing or repetition to the output of a mother code. A key issue in the design of AMC scheme for LTE was whether all Resource Blocks (RBs) allocated to one user in a subframe should use the same Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) or whether the MCS should be frequency dependent within each subframe. It was shown that in general only a small throughput improvement arises from a frequency-dependent MCS compared to RB-common MCS in the absence of transmission power control, and therefore the additional control signalling overhead associated with frequency-dependent MCS is not justified. Therefore in LTE the modulation and channel coding rates are constant over the allocated frequency resources for a given user, and time-domain channeldependent scheduling and AMC is supported instead. In addition, when multiple transport blocks are transmitted to one user in a given subframe using multistream Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO), each transport block can use an independent MCS.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

312

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

In LTE, UE can be configured to report CQIs to support eNB in selecting an appropriate MCS to use for downlink transmissions. The CQI reports are derived from downlink received signal quality, typically based on measurements of the downlink reference signals. It is important to note that, like HSDPA, the reported CQI is not a direct indication of SINR in LTE. Instead, UE reports the highest MCS that it can decode with a transport block error rate probability not exceeding 10%. Thus, the information received by eNB takes into account the characteristics of UE‟s receiver, and not just the prevailing radio channel quality. Hence, UE that is designed with advanced signal processing algorithms (for example, using interference cancellation techniques) can report a higher channel quality and, depending on the characteristics of the eNB‟s scheduler, can receive a higher data rate. The following table shows the list of modulation schemes and code rates which can be signalled by means of a CQI value:

The AMC can exploit UE feedback by assuming that the channel fading is sufficiently slow. This requires the channel coherence time to be at least as long as the time between UE‟s measurement of the downlink reference signals and subframe containing correspondingly-adapted downlink transmission on the Physical Downlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH). However, a trade-off exists between the amount of CQI information reported by UEs and accuracy with which the AMC can match the prevailing conditions. Frequent reporting of CQI in the time domain allows better matching to channel and interference variations, while fine resolution in the frequency domain allows better exploitation of frequencydomain scheduling. However, both lead to increased feedback overhead in the uplink. Therefore, eNB can configure both time-domain update rate and frequency-domain resolution of the CQI.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

313

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

CQI Feedback In case of CQI feedback, eNB employs periodic reporting of the CQI and UE will transmit the reports using the PUCCH. Only wideband and UE-selected sub-band feedback is possible for periodic CQI reporting, for all downlink (PDSCH) transmission modes. The type of periodic reporting is configured by eNB by RRC signalling. In case of wideband periodic CQI reporting, the period can be configured to {2, 5, 10, 16, 20, 32, 40, 64, 80, 160} ms or OFF, and UE reports one wideband CQI value for the whole system bandwidth. In case of „UE selected sub-band‟, the total number of sub-bands N is divided into J fractions called bandwidth parts. One CQI value is computed and reported for a single selected sub-band from each bandwidth part, along with the corresponding sub-band index. The value of J depends on the system bandwidth as summarized in below table. The following table shows the periodic CQI reporting with UE-selected sub-bands: sub-band size (k) and bandwidth parts (J) versus downlink system bandwidth. System Bandwidth (RBs)

Sub-band Size (k RBs)

Number of Bandwidth parts (J)

6-7

(Wideband CQI only)

1

8-10

4

1

11-26

4

2

27-63

6

3

64- 110

8

4

Multiple Antenna Transmission Case Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) A CQI index is defined by a channel coding rate value and modulation scheme (QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) as given in first table of description. In addition to 4-bit absolute CQI indices, three differential CQI values are defined to reduce the CQI signaling overhead. Note that UE always reports the wideband CQI even when UE-selected sub-band feedback is used for periodic reporting. This is because wideband CQI is required for setting the power levels for downlink control channels that are transmitted in a frequency diverse transmission format over the wideband to exploit frequency diversity. Precoding Matrix and Rank Indicator (PMI and RI) The MIMO transmission rank can be either one or two for the case of two-antenna ports requiring single-bit Rank Indicator (RI). The numbers of precoders for two antenna ports are four and two for rank-1 and rank-2 respectively. Therefore, Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) requires two bits for rank-1 and a single bit for rank-2. In case of four antenna ports, MIMO transmission rank can be one, two, three, or four requiring two bit rank indication. The number of precoders for each rank is 16 and therefore requires four bit PMI indication.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

314

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

Key Parameters RTRV-CQI-REP/CHG-CQI-REP Parameter

Description

TRANSMISSION_MODE

Transmission mode. ci_tm1: Single-antenna port (port 0), DCI format 1 or 1A is used. ci_tm2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1 or 1A is used. ci_tm3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2A or 1A is used. ci_tm4: Closed-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2 or 1A is used. ci_tm5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A is used. ci_tm6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding, DCI format 1B or 1A is used. ci_tm7: Single-antenna port (port 5), DCI format 1 or 1A is used. ci_tm8: Single-antenna port (port 7/port 8), DCI format 2B or 1A is used ci_tm9: UE specific RS based Transmission (Rel 10) ci_tm10: UE specific RS based Transmission (Rel 11)

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.212 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding [2] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

315

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

LTE-ME3307, UL Sub-frame Bundling INTRODUCTION When User Equipment (UE) is at the cell edge, it may undergo power shortage due to the transmission power limitation. To overcome the power shortage at cell edge, 3GPP LTE provides TTI bundling operation. When TTI bundling is configured by RRC, HARQ transmissions for a transport block are performed in consecutive TTIs without waiting for HARQ feedback. Each HARQ transmission depends on incremental redundancy. The eNB accumulates the received energy of all transmissions and sends HARQ feedback only one time after the last redundancy version of transport block is received. Therefore, TTI bundling operation reduces the number of required HARQ feedback messages and overhead resulting from uplink grant

BENEFIT Extending uplink cell coverage and helpful for applications such as VoIP

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency TTI bundling supportable UE Limitation In case of TDD, TTI bundling is only applicable to U/D config 0, 1, and 6. Others are not available because there is not enough UL subframes in 10ms radio frame (it should be equal to or greater than 4).

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The TTI bundling (or subframe bundling) is intended to improve the uplink coverage performance of VoLTE service, that improves air-interface performance in scenarios where coverage is limited by UE transmit power capability. To provide good quality of VoLTE service, both VoLTE packet error rate and latency are important factors. In case of UE in cell edge, however, bit error rate can be increased due to high path loss and limited UE transmission power. High bit error rate can increase both residual VoLTE packet error rate and latency due to HARQ retransmissions. The following figure shows the UL subframe bundling operation which can improve VoLTE service quality in the cell edge and extend the cell coverage.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

316

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

Concept of generating UL TTI bundles is illustrated in below figure. UL subframe bundling groups 4 consecutive uplink TTI to generate an effective TTI duration of 4 ms. To use a different Redundancy Version (RV), each duplicate is processed. The eNB receives with an Incremental Redundancy soft combining gain. The set of code words are modulated and mapped onto 4 consecutive uplink subframes. Transmissions belonging to each bundle size are sent without waiting for any HARQ acknowledgements. The same Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) and frequency bandwidth are used for all 4 TTI belonging to the bundle.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

317

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

When UL subframe bundling is used, the number of HARQ process is halved from 8 to 4. The timing of HARQ acknowledgement is based on the timing of last TTI within the bundle, that is, acknowledgement is sent 4 subframes after last TTI in the bundle. The retransmission delay is 16 subframes (16ms) when using UL subframe bundling, compared to the retransmisson delay of 8 subframes (8ms) when UL subframe bundling is not used.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

318

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

The UL subframe bundling lowers effective transmisson rate and improves the packet error rate. Latency is also reduced because waiting time for HARQ ACK/NACK is not required for the first four re-transmissions. Furthermore, signaling overhead is reduced for ACK/NACK transmissions. On the other hand, spectral efficiency can be degraded by applying UL subframe bundling feature. Whether or not to use UL subframe bundling is instructed by RRC message to each UE. In case of efficient operation of UL subframe bundling, the target UE selection is important because unnecessary UL subframe bundling assignment can degrade the spectral efficiency. If UL subframe bundling feature is enabled in eNB, the eNB checks channel conditions of UEs with on-going QCI 1 VoLTE bearer and choose some UEs in bad channel condition for UL subframe bundling. Samsung eNB selects UEs for UL subframe bundling by optimized criterion considering various channel condition related information, but no configurable parameter is provided.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The operator can activate or deactivate UL sub-frame bundling by setting the parameter TTI_BUNDLING in PLD to True (= 1) or False (= 0) respectively. This parameter means whether to use sub-frame bundling in the cell or not. Turn ON

TrchInfoFunc::TTI_BUNDLING = 1

Turn Off

TrchInfoFunc::TTI_BUNDLING = 0

Key Parameters RTRV-TRCH-INF/CHG-TRCH-INF Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

Indexing parameter

TTI_BUNDLING

This parameter is used to enable to use TTI bundling. False: TTI bundling is not used. True: TTI bundling is used.

MAX_HARQTX_BUNDLING

The maximum HARQ transmission count is subframe bundling mode.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.213 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures [2] 3GPP TS 36.321 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

319

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

LTE-ME3309, Resource allocation enhancement for SIB INTRODUCTION The system information is broadcasted using Master Information Block (MIB) and series of System Information Blocks (SIB). The resource elements used by MIB on the PBCH are fixed as central 72 subcarriers by 3GPP specification, but resource elements for SIB can be controlled by MAC scheduler. This feature provides the method for control the resource used for SIB. New resource allocation methods for SIB not only ensure reliable reception of SIBs but also reduce the overhead, which is caused by SIBs.

BENEFIT Resource overhead caused by SIBs can be adjusted in consideration of reliable reception of system information.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The system information consists of Master Information Block (MIB) and System Information Block (SIB). MIB is the only system information transferred using the BCH and PBCH. SIBs are transferred using the DL-SCH and PDSCH. SIB1 has its own RRC message whereas other SIBs except SIB1 are encapsulated within the more general System Information RRC message. UE start by reading the MIB and provides sufficient information to read SIB1. SIB1 provides scheduling information for the remaining SIB. A summary of the information included within the MIB and each of the SIB is provided in below table. System Information

Content

Master Information Block

Downlink channel bandwidth, PHICH configuration, and SFN

System Information Block 1

PLMN Id, tracking area code, cell selection parameters, frequency band, cell barring, and scheduling information for other SIB

System Information Block 2

Access class barring, RACH, BCCH, PCCH, PRACH, PDSCH, PUSCH, PUCCH parameters, UE timers and constants, and uplink carrier frequency

System Information Block 3

Cell reselection parameters

System Information Block 4

Intra-frequency neighbouring cell information for cell reselection

System Information Block 5

Inter-frequency neighbouring cell information for cell reselection

System Information Block 6

UMTS neighbouring cell information for cell reselection

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

320

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler System Information

Content

System Information Block 7

GERAN neighbouring cell information for cell reselection

System Information Block 8

CDMA2000 neighbouring cell information for cell reselection

System Information Block 9

Home eNB name

System Information Block 10

Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System primary notification

System Information Block 11

Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System secondary notification

System Information Block 12

Commercial Mobile Alert Service (CMAS) notification

System Information Block 13

MBMS Single Frequency Network(MBSFN) configuration information

The set of Resource Elements used by MIB on PBCH is standardized by 3GPP, so does not require any additional signaling, that is, PBCH occupies the central 72 subcarriers within the first 4 OFDMA symbols of the second slot of a radio frame. The same allocation is made for both FDD and TDD. On the other hand, the set of Resource Elements used by SIB on PDSCH is not standardized by 3GPP, so requires additional signaling to inform UE of where to look. The PDCCH is used to provide this additional signaling. The PDCCH includes a CRC, which is scrambled by System Information RNTI (SI-RNTI) if it includes resource allocation information relevant to SIB. The SI-RNTI has been standardized to have a single fixed value of FFFF. The eNB is responsible for scheduling Resource Blocks (RBs) used to transfer the SIB. The MIB and SIB1 are broadcast at a rate which is specified by 3GPP. The rate at which other SIBs are broadcast is implementation dependent. Downlink Control Information (DCI) format 1A and 1C can be used to signal PDSCH resource allocation for the SIB. DCI format 1A supports localized/distributed resource allocation and DCI format 1C supports distributed resource allocation. Samsung eNB allocates the SIB in localized manner, so DCI format 1A is used. When DCI format 1A is used to schedule resources for SIB, the modulation scheme is always QPSK (the modulation scheme specified within the MCS table is ignored). In addition, TBS index is set equal to the value of MCS bits rather than reading its value from MCS table. TPC Command is not used for power control but is used to identify the Transport Block Size (TBS). The most significant bit is ignored while the least significant bit indicates whether column 2 or column 3 should be selected from within the TBS table that is the number of allocated RBs should be assumed to be either 2 or 3 for the purposes of identifying the TBS. A value of 0 corresponds to 2 assumed RBs, while a value of 1 corresponds to 3 assumed RBs. In summary, MCS index in DCI format 1A represents TBS of SIB, and link adaptation is done by number of allocated RBs only. Samsung eNB supports to control number of allocated RBs for SIBs. To adjust the number of RBs for SIBs, two different cases are categorized according to the urgency of SIB reception: Normal and Exceptional case.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

321

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

Normal Case Normally UE reads system information in RRC Idle mode to acquire the parameters necessary to access the network. While UE read SIBs to access the network, UE does not need to acquire SIBs in urgent since SIBs are repeated periodically. SIB1 is repeated at a rate of 20ms by 3GPP specification, and other SIBs are repeated according to the periodicity indicated by SIB1 in the range of {80ms, 160ms, 320ms, 640ms, 1280ms, 2560ms, 5120ms}. In normal case, the less number of RBs can be used to allocate SIBs to reduce resource overhead and increase capacity.

Exceptional Case In certain cases, UE need to acquire SIBs immediately, that is, modification of System Information, ETWS, and CMAS. The UE in RRC connected should receive SIBs as fast as possible in case of SI modification since UE needs to communicate with eNB using new system information. If UE communicates with eNB using old system information, the communication will fail, and moreover transmission of UE causes interference to other UEs. In case of ETWS and CMAS, UE needs to receive quickly to response against disasters. Samsung eNBs control number of RBs for SIBs using two weight factors, BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR and BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR as follows:

Exceptional case: Number of SIB RBs = Default RBs x BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR/16

Normal case: Number of SIB RBs = Number of SIB RBs for Exceptional case/BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR In the above cases, defaults RBs are fixed number of RBs for SIB determined by its TBS. If BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR = 1, number of SIB RBs in Normal case becomes same as that in Exceptional case.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable. The operator can control number of RBs for SIB by related parameters. Key Parameter RTRV-MACCTRLCH-FUNC/CHG-MACCTRLCH-FUNC Parameter

Description

BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR

This parameter determines the number of RBs for BCCH in exceptional case, which is given by : The number of default RB x BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR/16.

BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR

This parameter determines the number of BCCH RBs in normal case in conjunction with BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR, which is given by : The number of default RB x

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

322

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler Parameter

Description BCCH_SCALING_FACTOR/BCCH_REDUCE_FACTOR/16.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.211 E-UTRA Physical Channels and Modulations [2] 3GPP TS 36.213 E-UTRA Physical Layer Procedures [3] 3GPP TS 36.331 E-UTRA Radio Resource Control (RRC) Protocol Specification

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

323

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

LTE-ME3503, CFI-based PUSCH adaptation INTRODUCTION The PUCCH resources are allocated in edge of the system bandwidth, and the number of PUCCH resources becomes overhead to reduce UL throughput. Among PUCCH resources, format 1a/1b resources for HARQ-ACK are mapped to CCEs in DL subframe. Because number of CCEs depends on CFI, the number of PDCCH symbols, the number of PUCCH resources for HARQ-ACK also depends on CFI. This feature enables UL scheduler allocates the number of PUSCH RBs according to the change of PUCCH HARQ-ACK resources by CFI change.

BENEFIT The UL peak throughput can be achieved while PDCCH symbols are flexibly changed.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency This feature is supported in TDD 20 MHz bandwidth only.

This feature is operated in PUCCH state 0 only.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The PUCCH is used to transfer Uplink Control Information (UCI). Number of PUCCH resources is sum of number of resources for format 1/1a/1b and that for format 2. The PUCCH format 1/1a/1b includes Scheduling Request (SR) and HARQ-ACK. HARQ-ACK can be seperated as Semi-Persistent Scheduling (SPS) and PDCCH based scheduling. The locations of each PUCCH resources are shown in below figure, where CQI is located in edge of system bandwidth. SPS HARQ-ACK and SR is located inside of CQI, where the number of SPS HARQ-ACK and SR is determined by higher-layer RRC parameter N(1)PUCCH. The position of HARQACK by PDCCH based scheduling is nearest to PUSCH region.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

324

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

The SR resources and SPS HARQ-ACK resources are allocated per UE dedicatedly, but HARQ-ACK resources according to PDCCH based scheduling are mapped to PDCCH CCE indices of the corresponding DL transmission. The PUCCH HARQ-ACK resource index is calculated as follows:

FDD: N(1)PUCCH + n_CCE TDD: N(1)PUCCH + (M-m-1) x N(p) + m x N(p+1) + n_CCE oN(1)PUCCH: number of resources reserved for SPS HARQ-ACK and SR. on_CCE: PDCCH CCE index of the corresponding DL transmission. In TDD, HARQ-ACKs for multiple DL subframes are bundled in one UL subframe, so PUCCH HARQ-ACK resources are multipled by number of bundled DL subframes. M is the number of DL bundled subframes and m is the subframe index where the PDCCH CCE index is mapped to HARQ-ACK. M is 2 for UL/DL Configuration 1 and 4 for UL/DL Configuration 2. The following figure shows HARQ-ACK resource allocation for TDD UL/DL Configuration #2:

In the above figure, the position of HARQ-ACK resource depends on CCE index and PDSCH subframe index, and can be separated by CFI. This means some HARQ-ACK resources are not used when the corresponding DL subframe uses small number of PDCCH symbols. Because positions of PUCCH HARQ-ACK resources are close to PUSCH region, unused RBs for PUCCH HARQ-ACK can be used for PUSCH transmission. Hence, UL throughput can be increased by restricting CFI and reduce HARQ-ACK resources, especially in TDD. Another way is to change maximum number of PUSCH RBs dynamically based on CFI as below figure. By flexibly changing number of PUSCH RBs, UL throughput can be maintained while adapting number of PDCCH symbol.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

325

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

When this function is enabled, Samsung eNB reduces frequency of changing PDCCH symbol because CFI increase makes PUSCH RBs be smaller, where PUSCH retransmission may be not transmitted. So, CFI increase needs to wait until all UL retransmission is transmitted. This function is only applied in PUCCH state 0 in TDD 20MHz by following reason:

The number of HARQ-ACK resources in TDD is much more than FDD. Hence, this function is more effective in TDD than in FDD.

The side effect of this function, the reduction of frequency of changing PDCCH symbol, may influence the number of PDCCH allocation failure in large number of UEs. This side effect can be reduced if there are a lot of CCEs per CFI as 20MHz BW.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The operator can activate of deactivate this feature by setting the parameter CFI_PUSCH_ALLOC_ENABLE in PLD. Turn ON

PuschConfIdle::CFI_PUSCH_ALLOC_ENABLE = 1

Turn OFF

PuschConfIdle::CFI_PUSCH_ALLOC_ENABLE = 0

Key Parameter RTRV-PUSCH-IDLE/CHG-PUSCH-IDLE Parameter

Description

CFI_PUSCH_ALLOC_ENAB LE

This parameter is used to enable this feature. 0: This feature is not used. 1: This feature is used.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

326

Chapter 5 Radio Scheduler

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.211 E-UTRA Physical Channels and Modulations [2] 3GPP TS 36.213 E-UTRA Physical Layer Procedures [3] 3GPP TS 36.331 E-UTRA Radio Resource Control (RRC) Protocol Specification

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

327

Chapter 6

Radio Transmission

LTE-ME0102, FDD 3MHz Bandwidth INTRODUCTION In the LTE system, total six channel bandwidths are standardized in 3GPP specification: 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz channel bandwidth. In this feature, it is described of 3 MHz channel bandwidth configuration, which is composed of total 15 resource block (RB). 1 RB is 180 kHz frequency spacing, and actually the bandwidth of 2.7 MHz is used for transmission except for guard bandwidth. Therefore, the spectral efficiency is 90% for 3 MHz channel bandwidth configuration.

BENEFIT The operator can support LTE service with channel bandwidth of 3 MHz.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION 3GPP has specified a set of six channel bandwidths, ranging from 1.4 MHz to 20 MHz. These are presented in the following table: Parameter

Channel Bandwidth 1.4 MHz

3 MHz

5 MHz

10 MHz

15 MHz

20 MHz

Number of Resource Blocks

6

15

25

50

75

100

Number of Subcarriers

72

180

300

600

900

1200

The following figure shows the definition of Channel Bandwidth and Transmission Bandwidth Configuration for one E UTRA carrier:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

328

Chapter 6 Radio Transmission

A Resource Block (RB) represents the basic unit of resource for LTE airinterface. The eNB scheduler allocates RBs to UE when allowing data transfer.

The subcarriers belong to Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) technology in downlink, and Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) technology in uplink.

There are 12 subcarriers per RB so the number of subcarriers equals 12 x number of RBs.

Each subcarrier occupies 15 kHz so the total subcarrier bandwidth equals 15 kHz x number of subcarriers.

The downlink subcarrier bandwidth includes an additional 15 kHz to accommodate a null subcarrier at the center of all other subcarriers. The null subcarrier provides 15 kHz of empty spectrum within which noting is transmitted.

The total subcarrier bandwidth is less than the channel bandwidth to allow for the roll-off of emissions and to provide some guard band.

The larger channel bandwidths provide support for the higher throughputs. Smaller channel bandwidths provide support for lower throughputs but are easier to accommodate within existing spectrum allocations.

3GPP also specifies a subcarrier spacing of 7.5 kHz (in addition to the subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz). The subcarrier spacing of 7.5 kHz is only used in cells which are dedicated to Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services (MBMS). There are 24 rather than 12 carriers per RB when using 7.5 kHz subcarrier spacing so the total bandwidth of a RB remains the same. The following figure shows a time-frequency resource structure in 3 MHz channel bandwidth LTE system:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

329

Chapter 6 Radio Transmission

The time-frequency resources are subdivided according to the following structure:

The largest unit of time is the 10 ms radio frame, which is further subdivided into ten 1 ms subframes, each of which is split into two 0.5 ms slots.

Each slot comprises seven OFDM symbols in the case of the normal cyclic prefix length, or six if the extended cyclic prefix is configured in the cell. In frequency domain, resources are grouped in units of 12 subcarriers (thus occupying a total of 180 kHz), such that one unit of 12 subcarriers for duration of one slot is termed a Resource Block (RB). The smallest unit of resource is Resource Element (RE), which consists of one subcarrier for duration of one OFDM symbol. Thus, a RB is comprised of 84 resource elements in the case of normal cyclic prefix length.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the RTRV-CELL-IDLE command to retrieve both DL_BANDWIDTH and UL_BANDWIDTH used by an operating cell.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

330

Chapter 6 Radio Transmission

Key Parameters RTRV-CELL-IDLE Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system.

PHY_CELL_ID

This parameter is the Physical cell ID. It is used to allow the UE to identify the cell in a radio section, and to recover the cell specific reference signal. It should be allocated to avoid conflict between neighbor cells.

CELL_TYPE

This parameter is the type that is operating the cell: macroCell: Operates many normal cells. openCell: Operates a single normal cell. hybridCell: Operates CSG cells as well as normal cells. csgCell: Operates only Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) cells.

DUPLEX_TYPE

This parameter is the communication method that is used while operating the cell: FDD: Frequency Division Duplex. TDD: Time Division Duplex.

DL_ANT_COUNT

This parameter is the number of Tx antennas used by an operating cell.

UL_ANT_COUNT

This parameter is the number of Rx antennas used by an operating cell.

EARFCN_DL

This parameter is the downlink absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) used in the evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (EUTRAN) system of an operating cell. The center frequency must be changed to E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number (EARFCN). [Related Specifications] Refer to 3GPP TS 36.101, 5.7.3.

EARFCN_UL

This parameter is the Uplink ARFCN used in the E-UTRAN system of an operating cell. The center frequency must be changed to EARFCN. [Related Specifications] Refer to 3GPP TS 36.101, 5.7.3.

DL_BANDWIDTH

This parameter is the downlink bandwidth used by an operating cell: 1.4MHz: 1.4 MHz bandwidth that uses 6 Physical RBs. 3MHz: 3 MHz bandwidth that uses 15 physical RBs. 5MHz: 5 MHz bandwidth that uses 25 physical RBs. 10MHz: 10 MHz bandwidth that uses 50 physical RBs. 15MHz: 15 MHz bandwidth that uses 75 physical RBs. 20MHz: 20 MHz Bandwidth that uses 100 physical RBs.

UL_BANDWIDTH

This parameter is the uplink bandwidth used by an operating cell. 1.4MHz: 1.4 MHz bandwidth that uses 6 Physical RBs. 3MHz: 3 MHz bandwidth that uses 15 physical RBs. 5MHz: 5 MHz bandwidth that uses 25 physical RBs. 10MHz: 10 MHz bandwidth that uses 50 physical RBs. 15MHz: 15 MHz bandwidth that uses 75 physical RBs. 20MHz: 20 MHz Bandwidth that uses 100 physical RBs.

FREQUENCY_BAND_INDICAT OR

This parameter is the frequency band indicator information, which is about where the frequency of an operating cell is located. This information is broadcasted to the UE through SIB 1.

GROUP_ID

This parameter is the Group ID of the carrier where the cell belongs.

FORCED_MODE

This parameter indicates whether to change the configuration regardless of the cell status. False: Set the value considering the cell status. True: Set the value without considering the cell status.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

331

Chapter 6 Radio Transmission Parameter

Description

DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT

This parameter is the number of downlink CRS ports that are supported by the system.

Counters and KPIs There is no related counter and KPI.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.101: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception [2] 3GPP TS 36.104: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) radio transmission and reception [3] 3GPP TS 36.211: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation [4] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

332

Chapter 6 Radio Transmission

LTE-ME0201, Frame Structure Type 1 (FDD) INTRODUCTION The frame structure considers only the time domain. 3GPP TS 36.211 specifies frame structure 'Type 1' and 'Type2'. Frame structure type 1 is applicable to FDD (both full and half duplex), whereas frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD. In both cases, radio frames are numbered using their System Frame Number (SFN). The transmission resource consists of a consecutive radio frame. Each radio frame is composed of 10 subframes with 1ms length and each subframe is composed of two slots, that is, totally radio frame is a composition of 20 slots indexed 0 to 19. Each slot has duration of 0.5 ms. Downlink and uplink transmission of a radio frame is divided in frequency domain.

BENEFIT The operator can support FDD-LTE service.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency FDD Only

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The Frame structure type 1 is applicable to half duplex FDD. The following figure shows the frame structure type 1:

The smallest one is called a slot, which is of length Tslot = 0.5 ms.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

333

Chapter 6 Radio Transmission

Two consecutive slots are defined as a subframe of length one ms, and 20 slots, numbered from 0 to 19, constitute a radio frame of 10ms. Channel-dependent scheduling and link adaptation operate on a subframe level. Therefore, the suframe duration corresponds to the minimum downlink TTI, which is of one ms duration, compared to a 2 ms TTI for the HSPA and a minimum 10 ms TTI for the UMTS. A shorter TTI for fast link adaptation and is able to reduce delay and better exploit the time varying channel through channel dependent scheduling. Each slot consists of a number of OFDM symbols including CPs. CP is a kind of guard interval to combat inter-OFDM-symbol interference, which should be larger than the channel delay spread. Therefore, the length of CP depends on the environment where the network operates, and it should not be too large as it brings a bandwidth and power penalty. With a subcarrier spacing Δf = 15 kHz, the OFDM symbol time is 1/Δf ≈ 66.7 us. The LTE defines two different CP lengths:

Normal CP Extended CP A normal CP and an extended CP correspond to seven and six OFDM symbols per slot, respectively. The extended CP is for multicell multicast/broadcast and very large cell scenarios with large delay spread at a price of bandwidth efficiency, with length 16.7 us. The normal CP is suitable for urban environment and high data rate applications. Note that the normal CP lengths are different for the first and subsequent OFDM symbols, which is to fill the entire slot of 0.5 ms. For example, with 10 MHz bandwidth, the sampling time is 1/(15000x1024) s and the number of CP samples for the extended CP is 256, which provides the required CP length of 256/(15000x1024)≈1.67 us. In case of 7.5 kHz subcarrier spacing, there is only a single CP length, corresponding to three OFDM symbols per slot. The typical parameters for frame structure are as follows: Parameter

Transmission bandwidth [MHz] 1.4

3

5

10

15

20

Occupied bandwidth [MHz]

1.08

2.7

4.5

9.0

13.5

18.0

Guard band [MHz]

0.32

0.3

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

Sampling frequency [MHz]

1.92

3.84

7.68

15.36

23.04

30.72

FFT size

128

256

512

1024

1536

2048

Number of occupied subcarriers

72

180

300

600

900

1200

Number of resource blocks

6

15

25

50

75

100

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The separate activate procedure is not necessary for this feature.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

334

Chapter 6 Radio Transmission

Key Parameters There is no related parameter.

Counters and KPIs There is no counter or KPI.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation [2] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

335

Chapter 7

Services

LTE-SV0303, OTDOA INTRODUCTION In the Observed Time Difference of Arrival (OTDOA) positioning method, UE makes an observation of the arrival time difference of Reference Signal (RS) from two or more eNBs. Then, the position of UE can be calculated based on the known position of eNBs and the time differences. The time difference between the RS from the serving cell and the neighbor cells are called Reference Signal Time Difference (RSTD). To measure the RS from (probably far away) neighbor cells, a special positioning signal is defined in Release 9 and called Positioning Reference Signal (PRS). PRS was introduced to improve the „hearability‟ of neighboring cells within completing measurements for the downlink OTDOA positioning method. 3GPP recognized that the hearability of the existing cell-specific reference signals was not sufficient to support the OTDOA positioning method. Therefore, hearability can be challenging as a result of neighboring cells being co-channel with the serving cell, especially at locations where the serving cell signal strength is high. In case of E-SMLC, UE provide RSTD information through the LPP protocol layer and eNB provides PRS and base station information through the LPPa protocol layer. Then, E-SMLC makes a final decision on the position of UE. The MME transparently relays LPP and LPPa layer information to E-SMLC.

BENEFIT The operator can provide an OTDOA-based location service. End users can get more accurate location-based services such as maps and navigations.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency UE that support OTDOA based on 3GPP Release 9 or later version.

MME to support LPPa protocol E-SMLC to support OTDOA eNB that support PRS Precise synchronization between eNBs is required for better accuracy (GPS synchronization is recommended)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

336

Chapter 7 Services

Limitation Air interface throughput is impacted due to PRS broadcasting as there is no PDSCH data in the subframe where PRS located.

In rural areas, there are fewer measureable cells which may impact accuracy. PRS subframe configuration needs to be manually planned to ensure no overlapping with PBCH, SIBs, Paging, and Measurement Gap scheduling.

No SON Functionality is available to support automatic PRS configuration, PRS configurations will have to be manually planned and configured.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The OTDOA positioning method makes use of Reference Signal Time Difference (RSTD) measurements from UE. The RSTD quantifies the subframe timing difference between a reference cell and a neighboring cell. The accuracy of the positioning calculation is improved if UE can provide RSTD measurements from an increased number of cells. RSTD is measured in units of Ts (1/30720 ms) and is reported to the Enhanced Serving Mobile Location Center (E-SMLC) where the location calculation is completed. E-SMLC is a network element within the operator's infra network. The UE receives an LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) Provide Assistance Data message from E-SMLC. This message is packaged by MME as a NAS message before being packaged by eNB as an RRC message. The Provide Assistance Data message includes both the reference and neighboring cells information. The reference cell does not have to be the current serving cell for UE. The PRS are able to coexist with both the cell specific reference signals and the physical layer control information at the start of each subframe (PCFICH, PHICH, and PDCCH). Also, PRS occupies an increased number of resource elements within a subframe relative to the cell specific reference signals to help improve RSTD measurement accuracy. The sequence used to generate the positioning reference signal is a function of the physical cell identity (PCI) and the cyclic prefix duration (normal or extended). The PRS are broadcasted using antenna port 6. They are not mapped onto resource elements allocated to the PBCH, Primary synchronization signal nor secondary synchronization signal. The PRS are only defined for 15 kHz subcarrier spacing. They are not supported for 7.5 kHz subcarrier spacing used by Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services (MBMS). Below figure shows examples of PRS for normal cyclic prefix. There is a dependency upon the number of antenna ports used for the cell specific reference signal. Additional symbols are used by the cell specific reference signal when broadcast from four antenna ports. The following figure is Mapping of positioning reference signals (normal cyclic prefix):

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

337

Chapter 7 Services

The PRS configuration parameters include PRS Bandwidth, PRS Configuration Index, Number of Consecutive Downlink Subframes, and PRS Muting Configuration.

PRS Bandwidth: The bandwidth that PRS occupied. The PRS bandwidth is signalled to UE with a value of 6, 15, 25, 50, 75, or 100 resource blocks. The positioning reference signal bandwidth is always centered on middle of the channel bandwidth. The PRS configuration index is used to define both a periodicity and subframe offset for the timing of the positioning reference signal. The look-up table presented below is used to link the configuration index to the periodicity and subframe offset. Below table is Positioning Reference Signal subframe configuration.

PRS Configuration Index: The PRS Configuration Index (IPRS) defines the periodicity (TPRS) and subframe offset (ΔPRS) for timing of the PRS.

The following table shows the relation among these parameters:

Number of Consecutive Downlink Subframes: The number of consecutive downlink subframes defines the number of subframes during which the positioning reference signal is broadcast within each positioning reference signal period. The number of consecutive downlink subframes can be configured with values of 1, 2, 4, or 6 subframes.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

338

Chapter 7 Services

PRS Muting Configuration: PRS muting Configuration consist of 2, 4, 8, or 16 bits map sequence. The periodicity of the muting pattern is defined by the length of the bits map. The PRS positioning occasion will not exist in the subframe if the corresponding bit is set to 0. Based on 3GPP 36.211, PRS is not transmitted in RE allocated to PBCH, PSS, and SSS and UE only uses PRS except resources allocated to PBCH, PSS, and PSS, SSS. PBCH and synchronization signal are transmitted in subframe #0 and bandwidth (6RB), where the corresponding resources are allocated due to this, can transmit PRS to only 38% (FDD) or 50% (TDD) among total REs available for PRS allocation. Therefore, when configuring PRS configuration index in PLD in Samsung‟s systems, it is suggested to operate without transmitting PRS in subframe #0. To allocate PDSCH and PRS to the same RB, it needs to puncture PDSCH in RE to where PRS is transmitted, and this can cause performance decrease of PDSCH reception and PRS reception of neighbor cell. Therefore, Samsung does not transmit PDSCH in RBs where PRS is allocated. In case of Paging and SIB1 transmitted to a fixed subframe, it is assumed that there is no PRS when UE decodes the corresponding traffic and if this is not the case, PRS is received. Therefore, if one of either Paging/SIB1 or PRS needs to puncture the other, the reception performance of Paging/SIB1 or PRS decreases. Thus, it is suggested to service providers to operate without transmitting PRS in subframe (= 5, 9) to where Paging/SIB1 is transmitted, when setting up PRS configuration index. The eNB interworks with E-SMLC with LPPa interface. OTDOA Information Exchange procedure is used to allow the E-SMLC request eNB to transferOTDOA information to the E-SMLC. The procedure consists of the following messages:

OTDOA Information Request/Response/Failure After eNB receives the OTDOA information request message from E-SMLC, the OTDOA information transfer function performs according to reception of the requested information and it performs as follows. oIf it received OTDOA cell information: It transmits the OTDOA INFORMATION RESPONSE message including the ODTOA cell information. oIf it fails to receive OTDOA cell information: It transmits OTDOA INFORMATION FAILURE message including the cause (value) of the failure. Followings are OTDOA Cell Information:

PCI Cell ID TAC EARFCN PRS Bandwidth PRS Configuration Index CP Length Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

339

Chapter 7 Services

Number of DL Frames Number of Antenna Ports SFN Initialization Time E-UTRAN Access Point Position PRS Muting Configuration To implement RSTD measurement, UE need some assistance date send from ESMLC via LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) interface. The UE receives an LPP Provide Assistance Data message from the E-SMLC. This message is packaged by MME as a NAS message before being packaged by eNB as an RRC message. The Provide Assistance Data message includes information regarding both the reference and neighboring cells. The content of the reference cell information is presented in below table. Similar information is also provided for each of the neighboring cells. Information Element physCellId cellGlobalId earfcnRef antennaPortConfig cpLength prsInfo

prs-Bandwidth prs-ConfigurationIndex numDL-Frames prs-MutingInfo

After receive the OTDOA assistance data, UE shall start RSTD measurement and report the measurement results to E-SMLC through LPP interface where the location calculation is completed.

Measurement Gap Exclusion To ensure UE can perform RSTD measurement, measurement gap shall not be schedule in the subframes where PRS located, otherwise RSTD measurement can fail when UE are doing inter-FA/RAT measurement. The eNB support excluding specified measurement gap offsets and the exact excluded gap offset is configurable (gap pattern 0: 0~39; gap pattern 1: 0~79) to ensure all UE to receive PRS. The excluded offset can be one offset or combination of several offsets. The measurement gap offset exclusion can be enable/disabled (ON/OFF). The operator can configure the starting offset and rang of consecutive gap offset. Starting gap offset range is 0~39 or 0~79 considering of gap pattern, while rang of consecutive gap offset number can be 1~15. For example, if starting offset set to 0 and offset range set to 15, then gap offset 0~14 are excluded.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

340

Chapter 7 Services

Inter-frequency RSTD Measurement Support In OTDOA positioning method, especially in inter frequency cell deployment, ESMLC may request UE to perform inter frequency RSTD measurement to improve the accuracy by obtaining more RSTD measurement results. This feature enables eNB to configure to start or stop the requested measurement gap sent from UE by a new introduced Release 10 RRC procedure 'Inter-frequency RSTD measurement indication', 'Inter-frequency RSTD measurement indication'. After eNB receive the requested measurement gap from UE, eNB may start to configure the gap as UE requested or ignore the gap configuration if the requested gap is not acceptable in the system based on operator's configuration. Currently, three options are provided for operator to control eNB's action when receive UE's 'inter-frequency RSTD measurement indication' message:

Ignore: The eNB ignore UE's request, the measurement gap will not be assigned to UE. The purpose of this option is to limit the impact to current UE's performance as measurement gap may have bad impact to the performance.

Accept: The eNB always accept UE's request. The purpose of this option is to ensure UE to receive inter-frequency RSTD measurement for better accuracy of LCS.

Measurement Gap Algorithms based: In this option, if UE's requested measurement gap offset can be accepted by the current measurement gap allocation algorithms then the gap will be allocated to UE, if UE's requested measurement gap offset cannot be accepted by the current measurement gap allocation algorithms then the requested gap will be ignored.

Operator Configurable PRS Power Boosting This feature supports PRS power boosting with respect average max power. To ensure good RSTD measurement performance, PRS power is configured a little bit bigger power. The configurable range is from 0dB to 7.75dB by 0.5 dB step.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate In case of activate OTDOA function, the OTDOA_ENABLE parameter value must be set to '1(True)' (executing the CHG-POS-CONF command).

In case of activate measurement gap exclusion function, the MEAS_GAP_OFFSET_EXCLUDED parameter value must be set to 'True' (executing the CHG-POS-CONF command).

In case of activate PRS power boost function, the PRS_POWER_BOOST_OFFSET parameter value must be set greater than '0' (executing the CHG-POS-CONF command).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

341

Chapter 7 Services

In case of activate Inter-Frequency RSTD measurement gap assignment function, the RSTD_MEAS_GAP_OPTION parameter value must be set to 'AlwaysAccept' or 'ByAlgorithm' (executing the CHG-MSGAP-INF command).

Key Parameters RTRV-POS-CONF/CHG-POS-CONF Parameter

Description

OTDOA_ENABLE

If the otdoaEnable value is set to 1 (ON) to execute OTDOA included in the UE Positioning function, eNB transmits a PRS signal and UE transmits related configuration, and so on to eNB. If the otdoaEnable value is set to 0 (OFF), eNB does not transmit PRS but transmits the information of the cell.

PRS_BANDWIDTH

The positioning reference signal (PRS) bandwidth value. If operator enters this value, eNB forwards the value to the MAC layer. Transmission bandwidth of PRS. Values from 0 to 5 are mapped with prsBw6_1.4 MH, prsBw6_1.4 MHz, prsBw15_3 MHz, prsBw25_5 MHz, prsBw50_10 MHz,

MEAS_GAP_OFFSET_EXC LUDED

This attribute represents that measurement gap offset exclusion function is activated or deactivated.

For Inter-Frequency RSTD measurement gap assignment function, RTRV-MSGAP-INF/CHG-MSGAP-INF Parameter

Description

RSTD_MEAS_GAP_OPTIO N

This parameter indicates the methods how to allocate MeasurementGap when eNB receives an InterFreqRSTDMeasurementIndication from UE.

For PRS power boost function. RTRV-POS-CONF/CHG-POS-CONF Parameter

Description

PRS_POWER_BOOST_OF FSET

This parameter is the PRS power boosting offset value. When operator enters the value, eNB transmits the value to the MAC layer.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.455 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); LTE Positioning Protocol A (LPPa)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

342

Chapter 7 Services

[3] 3GPP TS 36.211 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation [4] 3GPP TS 36.305 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN); Stage 2 functional specification of User Equipment (UE) positioning in E-UTRAN [5] 3GPP TS 36.355 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) [6] 3GPP TS 36.133 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Requirements for support of radio resource management

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

343

Chapter 7 Services

LTE-SV0404, VoLTE Quality Enhancement INTRODUCTION The VoLTE traffic is characterised by periodic, small sized packets. Generally QCI=1, RLC UM mode guaranteed bit rate (GBR) bearers are used for carrying VoLTE traffic. The VoLTE quality enhancement functions are enabled based on QCI of the bearer UE is having. The user perceived quality of VoLTE service is determined by several parameters like packet delay/jitter and packet loss. Samsung implements the below mentioned functions to enhance the user observed quality of VoLTE service:

VoLTE-aware UL grant Configuration of Target BLER for VoLTE Conservative RB Allocation for VoLTE Reduction of UL packet loss at source eNB during handover Reduction of DL packet loss at source eNB during handover VoLTE related counters

BENEFIT The voice quality reduction related to RTP loss and delay, which are used as VoLTE service quality indicators by operator, is enhanced.

The operator can recognize VoLTE related counters. User experienced VoLTE service is enhanced by reducing packet loss or preventing silence period during VoLTE session calls.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION DL cell throughput will be impacted due to conservative RB allocation for VoLTE user HARQ re-transmissions.

UL cell throughput will be impacted due to VoLTE-aware UL grant in case of SID period of a VoLTE session.

Downlink packet mirroring might cause duplicate packets to be delivered to application layer (RTP).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

344

Chapter 7 Services

FEATURE DESCRIPTION VoLTE-aware UL Grant The VoLTE service is characterised by small sized periodic packets, for example, about 60byte packets every 20ms. The UE needs to send buffer status report (BSR) MAC control element to eNB to obtain uplink grant for sending these small sized data packets. Since VoLTE traffic is periodic in nature, UE periodically sends BSR to eNB. There could be scenarios where UE has data available for transmission but the network‟s view of UE state is otherwise. Below are two such cases:

1 The UE transmits BSR along with VoLTE packet and this MAC PDU fails to receive at eNB even after maximum HARQ re-transmission attempts.

2 The UE transmits a non-zero BSR after transmission of a zero BSR. The BSR can be received at eNB in reverse order if the zero BSR transmitted encounters more HARQ re-transmissions. Both of these scenarios would result in no UL grant allocation for UE and hence no data transmission for hundreds of milliseconds. This causes silence periods during VoLTE call. The VoLTE-aware UL grant function allocates dummy UL grants to UE even if the uplink buffer status of UE is calculated as zero. UL scheduler allocates uplink grant based on the recent non-zero BSR of UE, when

32 milliseconds after the point when the internal buffer occupancy of UE is calculated as zero.

32 milliseconds after receiving zero BSR from UE This may reduce the overall UL resource, but enhances VoLTE service quality in poor uplink radio coverage scenarios.

Configuration of Target BLER for VoLTE Unlike the non-GBR bearer services which demands high spectral efficiency due to throughput oriented characteristics, VoLTE bearer requires low spectral efficiency. Due to this, VoLTE demands very less throughput, but VoLTE bearer is delay sensitive. So, VoLTE Quality Enhancement function sets the target BLER lower than the conventional services to reduce downlink and uplink packets transmission error rate. Since the throughput requirements are low for VoLTE service, MCS is allocated conservatively to improve HARQ error rate and to meet the target BLER. UE Type

UL Target BLER

DL Target BLER

VoLTE

2.7 %

2.5 %

Non VoLTE

10 %

10 %

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

345

Chapter 7 Services

Conservative RB Allocation for VoLTE To prevent VoLTE service quality deterioration in a poor radio condition, VoLTE Quality Enhancement function allocates downlink resources conservatively to reduce HARQ error rate and BLER. If the initial transmission and first re-transmission of a VoLTE MAC PDU fails, then DL scheduler allocates 8 times more resource blocks than the initial transmission for second re-transmission onwards. If the increased resource block count is greater than maximum PDSCH RB allocation limit, then maximum possible RBs are allocated. In case of increased RB allocation, MCS is still maintained same as previous transmission and hence code-rate of this retransmission reduces considerably. Reduced code rate helps to improve HARQ error rate.

[Reduction of UL Packet Loss at Source eNB during Handover] During Handover procedure, eNB RLC performs RLC Re-establishment as soon as RRC layer creates and sends 'Handover Command' message to lower layer. Hence, RLC buffer is flushed, stops timers and resets RLC state variables. Any UL packets that arrive at eNB after the moment will be lost. Practically, Handover command may take a while to reach to UE via HARQ/ARQ retransmissions. In this case, UE will keep sending UL packets over the air until it receives Handover command and these packets will be lost at eNB. To prevent this packet loss during handover, eNB does not perform RLC Reestablishment when 'Handover command' is sent to UE.

In case of UL, the packet remaining in the RLC re-ordering buffer is not discarded after transmitting HO command, but the packet from MAC is assembled and transmitted to S-GW.

In case of DL, the packet remaining in the RLC buffer is not discarded but transmitted to UE. This function helps to reduce the chance of packet loss of VoLTE service during Handover.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

346

Chapter 7 Services

Reduction of DL Packet Loss at Source eNB during Handover During Handover, the loss of VoLTE packets degrades VoLTE quality. As QCI1 bearers are serviced by RLC UM mode in general, DL VoLTE packets that are yet not transmitted over the air and waiting to be scheduled in RLC buffer will be flushed when 'Handover command' is sent to UE. So, to further reduce DL packet loss during handover, eNB mirrors one DL VoLTE packet (QCI 1) in PDCP layer. During handover, source eNB forwards the mirrored VoLTE packets to target eNB. Once received the packets, target eNB send this packet to UE to minimize packet loss. The detailed feature operation can be described as:

When eNB receives VoLTE packet from S-GW, the packet is copied and saved in mirroring buffer in the PDCP layer before processing RoHC and ciphering functions.

Original VoLTE packet is transmitted to RLC after processing RoHC and ciphering functions.

Mirroring buffer saves one VoLTE packet. If mirroring buffer already contains a packet, the older packet is deleted and new packet is received.

If Handover command (RRC connection reconfiguration) is transmitted from the source eNB, the packet saved to that point is transmitted to the target eNB.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

347

Chapter 7 Services

VoLTE Related Counters VoLTE Related Counter

Description

VoLTE call drop rate

Statistics on the rate of dropped VoLTE calls among all VoLTE calls

VoLTE intra/S1/X2 handover success rate

Statistics on the rate of VoLTE calls with intra/S1/X2 handover success among VoLTE calls with intra/S1/X2 handover attempt respectively

VoLTE handover latency time

Statistics on the Min/Max/Avg latency time collected from target eNodeB during handover

VoLTE quality defect rate for DL/UL VoLTE bearer

Statistics on the rate of DL/UL VoLTE bearers respectively with at least one occurrence of packet interval greater than threshold (for example, 1 s) among all VoLTE bearers

HARQ failure rate for DL/UL VoLTE bearer

Statistics on the rate of VoLTE packets with HARQ failure among all VoLTE packets for DL/UL VoLTE bearers respectively

CQI for DL VoLTE bearer

Statistics on the CQI report information for DL VoLTE bearers

Distribution of SINR for UL VoLTE bearer

Statistics on the SINR distribution regarding to the before and after Outer-loop compensation for UL VoLTE bearers

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is basically activated and cannot be deactivated by operator.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

348

Chapter 7 Services

Key Parameters There are no related parameters.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

VoLTE Quality Defect

VoLTE_UlQualityDefect

The number of QCI #1 bearers which has NO RTP Interval during specific amount of time for UL VoLTE Packet.

VoLTE_DlQualityDefect

The number of QCI #1 bearers which has NO RTP Interval during specific amount of time for DL VoLTE Packet.

VoLTE_IntraEnbAtt

Intra handover attempt count

VoLTE_IntraEnbPrepSucc

Successful intra handover preparation count

VoLTE_IntraEnbSucc

Successful intra handover execution count

VoLTE_InterX2OutAtt

X2 handover attempt count

VoLTE_InterX2OutPrepSucc

Successful X2 handover preparation count

VoLTE_InterX2OutSucc

Successful X2 handover execution count

VoLTE_InterS1OutAtt

S1 handover attempt count

VoLTE_InterS1OutPrepSucc

Successful S1 handover preparation count

VoLTE_InterS1OutSucc

Successful S1 handover execution count

VoLTE_IntraHoTime_Avg

When Intra eNB Handover is completed, this statistic is collected.

VoLTE_IntraHoTime_Min

This counter is updated when VoLTE_IntraHoTime_Avg is collected and it is low than previous maximum value.

VoLTE_IntraHoTime_Max

This counter is updated when VoLTE_IntraHoTime_Avg is collected and it is greater than previous maximum value.

VoLTE_IntraHoTime_Cnt

This counter is cumulated when VoLTE_IntraHoTime_Avg is collected

VoLTE_IntraHoTime_Tot

This counter is cumulated when VoLTE_IntraHoTime_Avg is collected

VoLTE_X2HoTime_Avg

When X2 Handover is completed, this statistic is collected.

VoLTE_X2HoTime_Min

This counter is updated when VoLTE_X2HoTime_Avg is collected and it is greater than previous maximum value.

VoLTE_X2HoTime_Max

This counter is cumulated when VoLTE_X2HoTime_Avg is collected

VoLTE_X2HoTime_Cnt

This counter is cumulated when VoLTE_X2HoTime_Avg is collected

VoLTE_X2HoTime_Tot

This counter is cumulated when VoLTE_X2HoTime_Avg is collected

VoLTE_S1HoTime_Avg

When S1 Handover is completed, this statistic is collected.

VoLTE_S1HoTime_Min

This counter is updated when VoLTE_S1HoTime_Avg is collected and it is greater than previous maximum

VoLTE Handover

VoLTE Ho Time

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

349

Chapter 7 Services Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description value.

VoLTE Quality

VoLTE_S1HoTime_Max

This counter is cumulated when VoLTE_S1HoTime_Avg is collected

VoLTE_S1HoTime_Cnt

This counter is cumulated when VoLTE_S1HoTime_Avg is collected

VoLTE_S1HoTime_Tot

This counter is cumulated when VoLTE_S1HoTime_Avg is collected

VoLTE_DropRate

The number of VoLTE Drop rate

VoLTE_UlQualityDefectRate

The number of UL Quality Defect rate

VoLTE_DlQualityDefectRate

The number of DL Quality Defect rate

VoLTE_IntraHoSuccessRate

The number of VoLTE HO Intra Success rate

VoLTE_X2HoSuccessRate

The number of VoLTE HO X2 Success rate

VoLTE_S1HoSuccessRate

The number of VoLTE HO S1 Success rate

REFERENCE N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

350

Chapter 7 Services

LTE-SV0503, Multicell and Multicast Coordination (MCE) INTRODUCTION Multicell and Multicast Coordination Entity (MCE) is an eMBMS entity that controls eMBMS sessions requested by MME. Also, it allocates radio resources in time domain and schedules eMBMS sessions. In addition, it aligns the opening of eMBMS radio channel among cells that belong to the same MBSFN Area. Samsung MCE is provided as an external server. The advantages of centralized MCE architecture are as follows:

SCTP offloading from MME eMBMS service restoration when eNB restarts or fails Large MBSFN areas MCE is an essential entity for eMBMS service. This feature covers following basic and advanced MCE functions:

M2 and M3 interface eMBMS session start and stop based on MBMS Service Area 1:1 Active and Standby redundancy eMBMS session restoration when eNB restarts or fails Inter-MCE scheduling coordination Multiple PLMN supported for RAN sharing In case of resource allocation and MBMS bearer scheduling, refer to LTE-SV0504 eMBMS Resource Allocation. In addition to MCE, eMBMS related network entities include eNB, MME, MBMS GW, and BMSC in the mobile network.

BENEFIT The operator can provide eMBMS service and increase radio resource utilization. Wide MBSFN area is provided that minimizes eMBMS interference between cells.

Continuous eMBMS service is provided even in case when eNB fails and restarts. Resilient MCE system is provided by 1:1 active and standby redundancy

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

351

Chapter 7 Services

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency MME that supports 3GPP Release 11 M3 interfaces

Samsung eNB that supports 3GPP Release 11 M2 interface Release 9 and later UE that supports eMBMS MBMS-GW and BMSC are required for eMBMS service Limitation 256 MBSFN Areas

3000 eNBs and 9000 cells per MCE blade Simultaneous session processing of 10 per 1 second 256 Sessions per MCE (One Blade) Related Features LTE-SV0501 eMBMS Basic Function

LTE-SV0504 eMBMS Resource Allocation LTE-SV0511 eMBMS QoS LTE-SV0513 eMBMS Service Continuity LTE-SV0515 eMBMS Session Monitoring

FEATURE DESCRIPTION M2 Interface Management According to 3GPP TS36.443 V11.3.0, MCE and eNB setup M2 connection and support following procedures.

M2 SETUP procedures to make M2 connection M2 RESET procedures ENB CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedures to update application level eNB configuration data

MCE CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedures to update application level MCE configuration data

ERROR INDICATION procedures M3 Interface Management According to 3GPP TS36.444 V11.6.0, MCE and MME setup M3 connection and support following procedures.

M3 SETUP procedures to make M3 connection Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

352

Chapter 7 Services

M3 RESET procedures MCE CONFIUGRATION UPDATE procedures to update application level MCE configuration data MCE can make multiple M3 connections with different MMEs.

MBMS Session Management According to 3GPP TS36.443 V11.3.0 and 3GPP TS36.444 V11.6.0, MCE supports MBMS session control functions.

MBMS SESSION START and STOP procedures initiated by MME MBMS SESSION UPDATE procedure initiated by MME On receiving M3 MBMS SESSION START message from MME, MCE sends M2 MBMS SESSION START message to eNBs that belong to MBSFN Areas that support the MBMS Service Area ID, which is specified in the M3 MBMS SESSION START message. MCE does not use PLMN ID of TMGI in the message when it decides target eNBs or MBSFN Areas. This means that MBMS SESSION START message can be sent to eNBs even though eNBs does not support PLMN ID of TMGI in the message. If eNB does not support PLMN ID, it should reject the session request. This is to support eMBMS service in RAN sharing network. The session duration parameter in MBMS SESSION START REQUEST message decides the session duration. When it expires, MCE releases the MBMS Session unless it is updated by MBMS SESSION UPDATE REQUEST message.

MCE Redundancy Samsung MCE provides active and standby redundancy. When an active server fails, the standby server takes over the role without any service impact. Following figure shows an example configuration of MCE. Maximum 5 active and standby pairs are equipped in a single chassis (HS23). Active and standby servers share the same IP interface so that the active and standby architecture is transparent to eNB or MME. Active server periodically backups data to standby server. When active server fails (SW or HW fails or board reset), the standby server will take over the role in a few seconds. After switchover, MCE makes SCTP setup with all of the eNBs, and MCE also makes SCTP setup with MME. However, these switchover procedures have no impact on ongoing eMBMS data sessions.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

353

Chapter 7 Services

Inter-MCE Scheduling Coordination When a big city or nation-wide area is covered by multiple MCEs, they need to broadcast synchronized eMBMS data over the entire area. For example, there are two MCEs that cover two disjoint areas respectively. Even though eNBs in two disjoint areas broadcast the same eMBMS service, there could be severe interference in the border area if they are not synchronized. The interference can be removed if eNBs broadcast the same eMBMS data in the same physical location of the frequency at the same time. In case of inter-MCE scheduling coordination, the MCEs must be configured so that they have the same MBMS Service Area ID with the same physical resource configuration such as RFAP and RFAP offset. In addition, for the MBMS Service Area, they shall receive eMBMS data from the same BMSC. In the figure below, the first two MBSFN areas have the same MBMS Service Area and the same physical resource allocation. The coordinated MBMS Service Area must span over the same frequency and over eNBs that are SFN synchronized. MBSFN Area ID and MBSFN Synchronization Area ID can be different between two MCEs while MBMS Service Area and RFAP and RFAP Offset must be the same. The eNBs in the MBMS Service Areas will be able to transmit synchronized eMBMS data for the same eMBMS session. Each MCE may have its own MBMS Service Area independently of the other MCEs (MBSFN Areas 2 to 256 in the example).

In case of MBMS Service Area that needs to be synchronized over multiple MCEs, operator shall configure following system parameters the same over the MCEs.

MBMS Service Area ID Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

354

Chapter 7 Services

RFAP RFAP Offset MSP MCS Level(Signalling and Data) The number eMBMS sufbrames per radio frame Configuration of MBSFN Areas that corresponds to the MBMS Service Area. Refer to Information included in MBMS Scheduling Information(3GPP TS36.443 V10.1.0 9.1.7)

Information included in MCCH related BCCH Configuration Item (3GPP TS36.443 V10.1.0 9.2.1.13), excluding MBSFN Area ID and Cell Information List. In addition, following requirements must be met.

The MCEs shall be connected to the same BMSC. The same MBMS Service Area must be configured over the same frequency, the same PLMN

All eNBs in the same MBMS Service must be SFN synchronized. The MBSFN Areas that serve the MBMS Service Area must not support other MBMS Service Areas that cover local regions. Following is overall procedures to apply the coordinated scheduling information to MCEs and eNBs.

1 LSM shall provide coordinated scheduling information to the concerned MCEs 2 Upon receiving the M2 setup request from eNB, the MCE shall provide MCCH configuration information for the cluster MBSFN area

3 Upon receiving the M2 setup response from MCE, eNB shall schedule MCCH by given configurations

4 Upon receiving the M3 session start message for the specific MBMS service area from MME, MCE shall schedule PMCH/MCH by the coordinated scheduling information

5 Upon receiving the M2 MBMS SCHEDULING INFORMATION message for the specific MBSFN area, eNB MAC shall schedule PMCH/MCH by the given information

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The relevant MCE PLD is set as follows:

CHG-MBMSENB-CONF: eNB-MCC/MNC, eNB IP address, and so on, eMBMS status  The indexes increases to 3000

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

355

Chapter 7 Services

CHG-MBSFN-MAPPINGINFO: Set the MBSFN area. (To set the MBSFN area, set the MBMS Service Area Id and the MBMS Synchronisation Area Id.)

Key Parameters CHG-MBMSENB-CONF/RTRV- MBMSENB-CONF Parameter

Description

ENB_INDEX

Index of eNB. The value entered when registering the MBMS eNB is used.

STATUS

The validity of the MBMS eNB information.

ENB_MNC[4]

The PLMN information (MCC) that represents the MBMS eNB. It is a three-digit number with each digit being from 0 to 9.

ENB_MNC[4]

The PLMN information (MNC) that represents the MBMS eNB. It is a three-digit or two-digit number with each digit being from 0 to 9.

ENB_IP_V4

Enter the IP address of the MBMS eNB in the IP version 4 format.

ENB_IP_V6[16]

Enter the IP address of the MBMS eNB in the IP version 6 format.

SECONDARY_ENB_IP_V4

Enter the secondary IP address of the MBMS eNB in the IP version 4 format.

SECONDARY_ENB_IP_V6[ 16]

Enter the secondary IP address of the MBMS eNB in the IP version 6 format.

CHG-MBSFN-MAPPINGINFO/RTRV-MBSFN-MAPPINGINFO Parameter

Description

MBSFN_AREA_ID

Index for change and retrieve MBSFN area id.

STATUS

Status of MBSFN Mapping Info

MBSFN_SYNC_AREA_ID

MBSFN SYNC AREA ID

MBMS_SERVICE_AREA_ID ..[ ]

MBSFN Service AREA ID

Counters and KPIs MBMS_M2_SETUP: M2 SessionStart, SessionStop MBMS_SESSION_SETUP: M3 SessionStart, SessionStop Family Name

Counter Name

Description

MBMS_M2_SETUP

M2ConnEstabAtt

Count of M2 setup attempts transmitted by the eNB

M2ConnEstabSucc

Count of M2 setup successes transmitted by the MCE

M2ConnEstabFail_M2AP_C U_FAIL

M2 setup failure count. A failure is due to the specified cause in specification.

M2ConnEstabFail_M2AP_LI NK_FAIL

M2 setup failure count. A failure is due to SCTP link failure.

SessionStartAtt

Count of M2 MBMS session start request attempts transmitted by MCE.

SessionStartSucc

Count of M2 MBMS session start response successes received by the MCE.

SessionStartFail_CP_CC_FA

Count of Failure of 'M2 MBMS Session Start'. The failure is caused by the MCE restart or

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

356

Chapter 7 Services Family Name

MBMS_SESSION_SETUP

Counter Name IL

Description MCE disability.

SessionStartFail_CP_CAPA_ CAC_FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M2 MBMS Session Start' because of resource based CAC by MCE.

SessionStartFail_M2AP_CU_ FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M2 MBMS Session Start' because of the cause specified in TS36.443.

SessionStartFail_M2AP_LIN K_FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M2 MBMS Session Start' because of M2 SCTP Link failure.

SessionStopAtt

Count of M2 MBMS session stop request attempts transmitted by MCE.

SessionStopSucc

Count of M2 MBMS session stop response successes received by the MCE.

SessionStopFail_CP_CC_FA IL

Count of Failure of 'M2 MBMS Session Stop'. The failure is caused by the MCE restart or MCE disability.

SessionStopFail_M2AP_LIN K_FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M2 MBMS Session Stop' because of M2 SCTP Link failure.

SessionStartFail_M2_OTHE R_REASONS

Count of Failure of 'M2 MBMS Session Stop'. The failure is caused by an exceptional case not specified above reason.

SessionStartAtt

Count of 'M3 MBMS Session Start' received by MCE

SessionStartSucc

Count of 'M3 MBMS Session Start Response' transmitted by MCE

SessionStartFail_CP_CAPA_ CAC_FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M3 MBMS Session Start' because of resource based CAC by MCE.

SessionStartFail_M3AP_CU_ FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M3 MBMS Session Start' because of the cause specified in TS36.444.

SessionStartFail_M3AP_LIN K_FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M3 MBMS Session Start' because of M3 SCTP Link failure.

SessionStopAtt

Count of 'M3 MBMS Session Stop' received by MCE

SessionStopSucc

Count of 'M3 MBMS Session Stop Response' transmitted by MCE

SessionStopFail_CP_CC_FA IL

Count of Failure of 'M3 MBMS Session Stop'. The failure is caused by the MCE restart or MCE disability.

SessionStopFail_M3AP_LIN K_FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M3 MBMS Session Stop' because of M3 SCTP Link failure.

REFERENCE N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

357

Chapter 7 Services

LTE-SV0504, eMBMS Resource Allocation INTRODUCTION MCE performs an eMBMS scheduler role allocating eMBMS radio resource to each MBMS session. The eMBMS scheduling is performed for each MBSFN area. The eNB transmits eMBMS data according to the scheduling information provided by MCE. In addition, MCE performs MBMS session admission control functionality, where MCE checks the capacity of MBSFN area, MCE, eNB, and cell to decide whether it accepts the call or not. In addition, MCE maintains allocated resources and makes an admission decision based on GBR requested in MBMS Session Start Request from BMSC.

BENEFIT This feature facilitates efficient radio resource allocation with the statistical multiplexing of the logical channels into a given physical subframe.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency UE should support eMBMS service.

eNB and MCE are required to support eMBMS service. Limitation Up to 15 PMCHs can be supported in one MBSFN Area

Up to 256 MBSFN Areas

FEATURE DESCRIPTION eMBMS Channels The channels used in LTE eMBMS are largely classified into a logical channel, a transport channel, and a physical channel and they are mapped with each channel as shown below:

Logical channel: MCCH, MTCH Transport channel: MCH Physical channel: PMCH

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

358

Chapter 7 Services

eMBMS Radio Resource Allocation The allocation of the resource of MBMS consists of largely common subframe allocation, session admission control, and MCH scheduling part including MTCH multiplexing part. Below is the procedure flow explaining the resource allocation in the MCE. In the following flow, Step 1 corresponds to the common subframe allocation while Steps 2 and 3 the session administration control for PMCH and MTCH, respectively: The common subframe allocation and the session admission are the unique functions of the MCE and MTCH multiplexing and MCH scheduling are the functions of the eNB MAC scheduler, which are not included in the procedure flow. (The step 1 in below figure assumed MTCH multiplexing feature not currently supported)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

359

Chapter 7 Services

The MCE performs resource allocation based on the existing MBSFN area, PMCH, MTCH, and more after receiving the MBMS session start request message from the BMSC. If the resource allocated for eMBMS is not sufficient, MCE transmits MBMS session start failure message to MME. In Step 0, MCE selects on which MBSFN area a new channel will be added based on the service ID included to MBMS session start request message. Depending on the service, channels may be added to multiple MBSFN areas. Step 1 is calculating the number of all physical radio frames available in CSAP in the MBSFN areas decided in Step 0

Calculates the data rate encoded to the signaling MCS required for PMCH Calculates the number of all subframes to be encoded only with the data MCS excluding the data volume encoded to MCS

Calculates the estimated radio resource volume required by a new channel by referring to RLC header and MCS level applied to QCI in addition to GBR required by the new channel. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

360

Chapter 7 Services

Step 2 is deciding a PMCH. By considering the QCI information, the PMCH supporting the QCI as same as the requested session is decided and if there is no PMCH in the same QCI, a new PMCH is created. Check whether the GBR required by a new channel may be satisfied in consideration of the resource volume used by the PMCH. (If the remaining capacity in the existing PMCH is enough, MTCH may be simply added.) If there is a conventional PMCH supporting the same QCI but the capacity is not sufficient, allocate a new MTCH by adding eMBMS subframe to the existing PMCH after increasing capacity of PMCH in a method for changing the interval. If PMCH configuration is changed, no influence over the conventional session must exist and if there is any overlapped MBSFN area, the conflict with their PMCHs must not occur. In Step 3, to add a new channel (MTCH) to the selected MBSFN area, if the session required by a new channel exceeds the maximum number of MTCHs, the session is rejected. By referring to the radio resource allocated to use for eMBMS, do not use more than the number. If the resource is insufficient, reject the request. The resource available by eMBMS is set by the administrator. In case of precise resource allocation computation, beginning of this release the resource allocation computation take into account of the MAC/RLC overhead.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is enabled when eNB and MCE support eMBMS service. Resource is allocated according to the PLD of REL_MBMS_SCHEDULING_INFO. Some parameters can be changed by executing the CHG-MBMSSCH-INF command. However, it is desirable to change such PLD values after fully being aware of the role of each parameter. For example, CSAP, RFAP, and offset are connected with one another and if the overlapped MBSFN area is allowed, it will follow the eMBMS Radio Resource Algorithm. Therefore, PLD provides only the function of reading set values - according to the algorithm - instead of settable values. Only for the session whose QCI has the same value, multiplexing MTCH to PMCH is possible. Also, refer to the feature eMBMS QoS for data MCS mapping depending on QCI. Multiple MBSFN functions as functions of supporting up to 8 MBSFN areas in a cell may configure PLDEnbMbsfnAreaInfo per MBSFN area of a cell.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

361

Chapter 7 Services

In addition, MCE may be configurable to allow the cell to operate as MBSFN reserved cell for a specific MBSFN area, and this may be configurable through CHG-MBMS-CELLINFO.

Key Parameters The following parameters are related to eMBMS resource allocation: Parameters

Description

MBSFN_AREA_ID

mbsfnAreaId for change and retrieve

STATUS

Status of MBMS Scheduling Info

SUBFRAME_ALLOC_TYPE

Subframe Allocation Type

MAX_SUBFRAME_NUM

Max Subframe Number

MCH_SCHEDULING_PERIOD

MCH Scheduling Period

CSAP

Common Subframe Allocation Period

RFAP

Radio Frame Allocation Period

OFFSET

Radio Frame Allocation Offset

Counters and KPI There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

362

Chapter 7 Services

LTE-SV0514, Adaptive Delay Reduction for eMBMS INTRODUCTION Due to MCCH modification period, for example 512 ms or 1024 ms, defined in the 3GPP standard, data transmission of an MBMS session can be delayed at random longer than 5.12 second. This delay occurs in eMBMS sessions only because eMBMS data transmission needs to be synchronized among eNBs unlike unicast traffic. This delay results in poor Quality of Experience of eMBMS UEs because there is a large time gap between video on device and live scene in the stadium. In case of PTT over eMBMS, unbearable delay from mouth to ear may occur. This feature reduces the delay by discarding data packets buffered at eNBs, which results in pulling up the time from the perspective of UE. This feature can be enabled for live broadcasting or PTT over eMBMS.

BENEFIT In live broadcasting service, the time gap between the video played in device and the live scene in the stadium is eliminated and the UE can watch the synchronized video in the stadium.

In voice service such as Push-To-Talk, the voice messages can be delivered without unnecessary delay at eNB.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency This feature can be enabled in Samsung MCE and eNB. Limitation Note that If MCE does not get DELAY INFORMATION from an eNB that is located farthest away from BMSC then the eNB might not transmit MBMS data for the delay reduction session due to the excessive time shifting.

Note that eNB might not transmit MBMS data that arrives at eNB too late. Time shift can occur only when the synchronization sequence length of session is less than 1.5 seconds. Otherwise, eNB discards MBMS packets during the first 5 seconds but MCE and eNB cannot reduce the delay due to the insufficient synchronization sequence learning time.

Adaptive Delay Reduction (ADR) feature must be enabled when all the eNBs connected to the MCE supports ADR feature.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

363

Chapter 7 Services

There can be eMBMS interference in border area when two or more MCEs setup ADR session for the same eMBMS session, even though they coordinate resource allocation through LSM, such as RFAP.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Basic Concept When MBMS session is started, BMSC transmits MBMS data unit periodically according to specified synchronization sequence. If the data to be transmitted does not exist, since void packet, without user data, along with timestamp are transmitted, eNB could receive timestamp increasing packet successively. eNB transmits packet at the calculated time according to timestamp + offset base. If the packet is empty, data will not be transmitted for the corresponding time period. Therefore, from the moment of first timestamp binding to corresponding SFN, all the packets in the session will have same delay until the end of the session. During packet transmission in the session, to prevent delay, eNB will discard buffered packets and will transmit recently arrived packet. This is similar to eliminating front of movie film, to make earlier showing time. All eNB must be synchronized between transmitting data, so MCE makes decision of the moment of packet discard, the moment of packet transmission starting and send notice to all broadcasting target eNBs. Adaptive Delay Reduction function is performed through gap control between SFN (eNB transmits according to SFN) and timestamp, which is specified in the MBMS data packet. For example, as seen in the figure below, if the offset value is 512, then arrived packet (with timestamp value = 6) near SFN=512 will be transmitted on SFN=518. Then 60 ms packet delay happens. If the offset value is changed to 508, the packet (with timestamp=6) will be transmitted on SFN=514. As a result, delays can be reduced by 40 ms.

Call procedure between eNB, MCE, BMSC are as follows: Steps 4)~5) is executed for the MBMS session configured as Minimum_Time_To_MBMS_Data_Tansfer=0.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

364

Chapter 7 Services

BMSC Functionality BMSC transmits MBMS data after SESSION START message transmission to MCE after the time specified on Minimum_Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer. During Minimum_Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer time, all eNBs belonging to MBMS Service Area perform session configuration, radio resource configuration, multicast joining to prepare MBMS data transmission. For Adaptive Delay Reduction feature, BMSC needs to provide following functions.

When transmitting SESSION START message, BMSC sets up “Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer = 0” for the live streaming session in order to minimize the delay. Then, after sending SESSION START, BMSC transmits MBMS data packet or empty packet (Type 0).

Synchronization Sequence Length of session, subject to delay reduction, must be less than 1.5 second. If Synchronization Sequence Length is greater than 1.5 second, the value of “Minimum_Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer” must not set as “zero”. If this session is assigned as the session subject to delay reduction, even though initially transmitted MBMS packet will be lost, time is not shifted. MBMS data sent during initial session will be lost when time is shifted. This loss will occur for approximately 5 seconds, until MCE completes the delay reduction procedure following the start message transmission. The packets received by eNB after that will not be lost due to time shift function. However, packets arriving late by backhaul network delay will be discarded according to normal eMBMS operation.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

365

Chapter 7 Services

MCE Functionality MCE performs Adaptive Delay Reduction function for the session configured as “Time_to_MBMS_Data_Transfer = 0”. After receiving SESSION START REQUEST message from MME, the procedures of SESSION START REQUEST and SCHEDULING INFORMATION message transmission to the target eNB will be performed the same way as for normal eMBMS session. For the Adaptive Delay Reduction enabled session, the eNB will be notified that the corresponding session is delay reduction session through SESSION START message. Afterwards, based on received “DELAY TIME INFORMATION (SessionID, Offset, and Synchronization Sequence Length)” from each eNB, MCE detects eNB which was most delayed receiving MBMS data, and time shift value is determined according to the late eNB. MCE transmits the final offset value to all eNBs to make time shift. Time shift is applied the same way even when eNB is restarted.

eNB Functionality For the delay reduction function enabled session, the eNB will discard MBMS data upon receiving SESSION START REQUEST message until receiving TIME SHIFT REQUEST. The synchronization sequence length can be acquired through synchronization sequence learning for the corresponding session. eNB transmits “the value of synchronization sequence length”, “the value of SFN (Offset) when zero timestamp received” and “Session ID (MCE-MBMS-M2AP-ID)” to MCE through the DELAY TIME INFORMATION message. When eNB receives TIME SHIFT REQUEST message, eNB modifies timestamp of each packets to make radio transmission time shift.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the command CHG-MBMSDELAY-INF to configure 'ADAPTIVE_DELAY_REDUCTION_USE' as to 'On' or 'Off'.

Execute the command RTRV-MBMSDELAY-INF to retrieve the existing configuration settings.

Key Parameters There are no prerequisite parameters except activating/deactivating parameters for this feature. CHG-ENBPDCP-INF/RTRV-ENBPDCP-INF Parameter

Description

DB_INDEX

index of this tuple

ADAPTIVE_DELAY_REDUC

This parameter represents On/Off of the Adaptive Delay Reduction functionality.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

366

Chapter 7 Services Parameter TION_USE

Description

Counters and KPIs Family Name 'MBMS_ENB_SYNC' has two counters related to this feature (LTESV0514). Family Display name

Type

Description

DroppedSyncPduCount_ADR

Integer Range:0~2147483647

The cumulated number of SYNC PDU discarded by the Adaptive Delay Reduction functionality.

DroppedSyncPduByte_ADR

Integer Range:0~2147483647

The cumulated bytes of SYNC PDU discarded by the Adaptive Delay Reduction functionality.

REFERENCE N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

367

Chapter 7 Services

LTE-SV0515, eMBMS Session Monitoring INTRODUCTION Unlike unicast sessions, a MBMS session must be kept very long time period, and there is no feedback from UEs whether they receives MBMS data successfully or not. Therefore, a service monitoring tool is required for operator to monitor whether MBMS data is normally broadcast or not. In this feature, operator can monitor each session based on TMGI. Provided information includes the total number of transmitted and received packets, discarded packets, delayed packets, radio usage rate, and a plurality of configuration information. The operator can check each cell and eNB whether they normally provide eMBMS service or not. Due to hardware resource limitation, LSM provides a limited number of sessions that operator can monitor at the same time.

BENEFIT The operator can monitor eMBMS session and check the status and quality of eMBMS service.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency This feature can be enabled with Samsung eNB, MCE, and LSM. Limitation The operator can monitor up to 20 sessions at the same time. However, a cell provides the session monitoring information of up to 16 sessions.

The information is updated every 2.56 seconds Even in case of the same session, the displayed information may be different at a monitoring moment between different cells or between eNB and MBMSGW/BMSC because of different delays between them. In addition, statistics from RLC and GTP layers cannot be exactly matched at a specific moment because of packets in traversal or different time sources used.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

368

Chapter 7 Services

FEATURE DESCRIPTION A. eMBMS Session Monitoring This feature checks service quality and normality of the service operation status for each session from BMSC that transmits eMBMS data to eNB that broadcasts eMBMS data via MBMS GW. The operator can check the information listed on the table below by selecting a specific cell and session (TMGI) through LSM. Also, they can check the information for up to 20 cells or 20 sessions at the same time. The corresponding information is automatically updated in every 2.56 seconds. When a session that meets the condition is created, the information is automatically displayed on the window.

Input: List of ECGI, List of TMGI Output: Listed below the information table The following information is provided per Cell: TMGI. Number

Items

Level

Description

Collection Entity

1

Start Time

Per TMGI

The time that eNB has opened MTCH channel of the session (TMGI)

Call Controller (eNB)

2

MBSFN Synchronization Area ID

Per TMGI

MBSFN synchronization area ID of the specified cell

Call Controller (eNB)

3

MBMS Service Area ID

Per TMGI

MBMS service area ID of the specified TMGI

Call Controller (eNB)

4

MBSFN Area ID

Per TMGI

MBSFN area ID of the specified cell

Call Controller (eNB)

5

PMCH

Per TMGI

PMCH ID that corresponds to the specified TMGI

Call Controller (eNB)

6

MTCH

Per TMGI

MTCH ID that corresponds to the specified TMGI

Call Controller (eNB)

7

Data MCS Level

Per TMGI

Data MCS level of the PMCH where the specified TMGI belongs to

Call Controller (eNB)

8

Singnalling MCS Level

Per TMGI

Signaling MCS level of the PMCH where the specified TMGI belongs to

Call Controller (eNB)

9

RX Packets (Type 0)

Per TMGI

The total number of Type 0 packets that eNB has received from MBMS after a session started of the specified TMGI

SYNC Handler (eNB)

10

RX Packets (Type 1)

Per TMGI

The total number of Type 1 packets that eNB has received from MBMS after a session started of the specified TMGI

SYNC Handler (eNB)

11

RX Packets (Type 3)

Per TMGI

The total number of Type 3 packets that eNB has received from MBMS after a session started of the specified TMGI

SYNC Handler (eNB)

12

TX Packets

Per TMGI

The total number of packets that SYNC Handler has transmitted to each cell of the corresponding eNB after a session started of the specified TMGI

SYNC Handler (eNB)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

369

Chapter 7 Services Number

Items

Level

Description

Collection Entity

13

Discarded Packets (Empty)

Per TMGI

The total number of packets including summary packet that have been discarded by SYNC Handler, after a session started of the specified TMGI

SYNC Handler (eNB)

14

Discarded Packets (Lost)

Per TMGI

The total number of the discarded packets due to some packets that has not been received among the packets that SYNC Handler has received within the synchronization sequence after a session started of the specified TMGI

SYNC Handler (eNB)

15

Discarded Packets (Others)

Per TMGI

The total number of packets that have been discarded by SYNC Handler for reasons other than empty and lost after a session started of the specified TMGI. For instance, when Multicast packets are received while the RLC is not ready.

SYNC Handler (eNB)

16

RX SSEQ

Per TMGI

The total number of synchronization sequences that SYNC Handler has received after a session started of the specified TMGI

SYNC Handler (eNB)

17

TX SSEQ

Per TMGI

The total number of synchronization sequences that SYNC Handler has transmitted to each cell after a session started of the specified TMGI

SYNC Handler (eNB)

18

Discarded SSEQ

Per TMGI

The total number of synchronization sequences that have been discarded by SYNC Handler after a session started of the specified TMGI

SYNC Handler (eNB)

19

Delayed RX SSEQ

Per TMGI

After a session started of the specified TMGI, the packets that belong to the next synchronization sequence will be received. The total numbers of synchronization sequences that have been transmitted to each cell after all delayed packets of the previous synchronization sequence are received.

SYNC Handler (eNB)

20

RX Packets (RLC)

Per TMGI

The total number of packets that RLC has received after a session started of the specified TMGI

RLC(eNB)

21

TX Packets (RLC)

Per TMGI

The total number of packets that have been transmitted by RLC after a session started of the specified TMGI

RLC(eNB)

22

Control Packets

Per TMGI

The total number of packets that have been discarded in RLC due to no payload, after a session started of the specified TMGI. For example, Type0 or Type3 packets.

RLC(eNB)

23

Discarded Packets (Late Arrival)

Per TMGI

The total number of packets that have been discarded in RLC due to late arrival after a session started of the specified TMGI (Control packets excluded)

RLC(eNB)

23-1

Discarded Packets

Per TMGI

The number of packets that have been

RLC(eNB)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

370

Chapter 7 Services Number

Items (Insufficient Radio Resource)

Level

Description discarded without being transmitted due to the lack of radio resources for a session of the specified TMGI.

Collection Entity

24

Discarded Packets (Others)

Per TMGI

The total number of packets that have been discarded in RLC for the reasons other than empty, late arrival, lack of radio resources after a session started of the specified TMGI. (Control packets excluded)

RLC(eNB)

25

Throughput (Total Bytes x 8/Period)

Per TMGI

Calculates the throughput by counting the total bytes that have been transmitted from RLC for the Period (collecting period: 2.56 seconds). The unit is Kbps.

RLC(eNB)

26

Buffer Usage

Per Cell

The entire buffer usage for eMBMS in a specified cell at the moment of collecting statistic information Number of Occupied Buffers/Total Buffers x 100

RLC(eNB)

27

PRB Usage

Per PMCH

The amount of PRB usage used in PMCH among the total radio resources assigned to PMCH, where TMGI belongs to the statistics information during collecting period Number of PRBs used for the PMCH/Number of PRBs Configured for the PMCH

MAC(eNB)

B. eMBMS Session Summary Log If an eMBMS session is terminated normally or abnormally, eNB collects information for the session from each cell and transmits it to LSM. The LSM saves this information for a certain period of time and discard it automatically. If traffic volume is too large between eNB and LSM, the operator can remove the normal termination cases. eMBMS Session Summary Log information includes all the counting information for eMBMS Session Monitoring on the above tables and the following information is collected additionally. eMBMS session can last up to 19 days according to its standard. However, eNB closes the Session Summary Log periodically and reports it to LSM. Number

Items

Level

1~27 28

End Time

Per TMGI

Description

Collection Entity

Refer to 1~27 in A. eMBMS Session Monitoring

-

Session Stop Time of the Specified TMGI

Call Controller (eNB)

C. eMBMS Service Status Report The operator can identify the current eMBMS service area through LSM.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

371

Chapter 7 Services

The operator can check MBSFN area list that supports each MBMS service area and they can retrieve the following information of each MBSFN area.

Input: MCE, MBSFN Area ID Output: Refer to the following table The following information is provided per MBSFN area. Number

Items

Level

Description

Collection Entity

1

Total Number of eMBMS eNBs

Per MBSFN Area

The total number of eNBs registered to MCE through M2 Setup among the eNBs included in MBSFN area of the specified MCE.

MCE

2

Total Number of eMBMS Cells

Per MBSFN Aera

The total number of cells that were set to provide eMBMS service to eNB through M2 Setup Response among the eNBs included in MBSFN area of the specified MCE.

MCE

3

Total Number of Reserved Cells

Per MBSFN Area

The total number of cells that were notified as reserved cells to eNB through M2 Setup Response among the eNBs included in MBSFN area of the specified MCE.

MCE

4

Subframe Allocation

Per MBSFN Area

Subframes that were set for eMBMS in MBSFN area of the specified MCE (SIB2 information).

MCE

5

RFAP

Per MBSFN Area

Radio Frame Allocation Pattern that was set for eMBMS in MBSFN area of the specified MCE.

MCE

6

Number of PMCHs

Per MBSFN Area

The total number of the PMCHs that is providing service in MBSFN area (Up to 15).

MCE

7

PMCH Resources

Per PMCH, Per MBSFN Area

Resources assigned to the PMCH among the eMBMS Subframe resources assigned to MBSFN area

MCE

8

Number of MTCHs

Per PMCH, Per MBSFN Area

The total number of MTCHs provided in MBSFN area per PMCH.

MCE

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the RTRV-SSL-CTRL command to retrieve the existing configuration settings for Session Summary Log (SSL).

Execute the CHG-SSL-CTRL command to configure the settings for Session Summary Log (SSL).

Execute the RTRV-MCERSC-STS command to retrieve the resource status of Multi-cell/multicast Coordination Entity (MCE).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

372

Chapter 7 Services

Key Parameters CHG-SSL-CTRL/RTRV-SSL-CTRL Parameter

Description

DB_INDEX

Index of this relation

MBMS_SSL_CREATE_CONDITION

Deciding value how to apply Session Summary Log(SSL)

RTRV-MCERSC-STS Parameter

Description

MBSFN_AREA_ID

Index of Multimedia Broadcast Single Frequency Network or Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) area.

TOT_ENBS

Total number of eNBs that have connected with MCE through M2 interface.

TOT_CELLS

Total number of eMBMS service cells that have connected with MCE through M2 interface except reserved cell.

TOT_REV_CELLS

Total number of reserved cells that have still connected with MCE through M2 interface in MBSFN area.

RFAP

Radio frame allocation period for MBSFN area.

SUBFRAME_ALLOC[12]

MBSFN subframe configuration (subframe allocation: one frame item) in SIB2.

NUM_PMCH

Total number of Physical Multicast Channels (PMCHs) allocated for eMBMS.

SF_ALLOC_END

Ratio of the subframe resources allocated by MBSFN area and used actually in PMCH.

N_MTCH_P0

Total number of MTCHs per 0-th PMCH provided by MBSFN area.

N_MTCH_P14

Total number of MTCHs per 14-th PMCH provided by MBSFN area.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

373

Chapter 7 Services

LTE-SV0517, eMBMS Service Restoration INTRODUCTION eMBMS service restoration is to recover eMBMS sessions when eNB or MCE or MME fails. When MME fails, eMBMS session context will move to another MME. The MCE shall be able to re-associate the existing eMBMS sessions with the new MME that requests MBMS Session Start Request message with 'Reestablishment Indication' flag. When MCE restarts, it will perform M3 Setup and send M3 Reset message to MME. The MME will send original eMBMS Session Start message to recover the sessions. In case of M3 link failure, MCE deletes all the related eMBMS sessions and tries to make M3 Setup repeatedly. Once the M3 setup is completed, MCE will send M3 Reset message to MME. MCE can be connected to multiple MMEs (up to 16). However, MCE expects that the same MME controls the same MBMS sessions, which means that the MCE rejects any duplicate MBMS Session Start Request message from other MME without 'Re-establishment Indication' flag.

BENEFIT This feature enables MBMS service to continue even in case of MME failure, or MCE failure, or M3 path failure.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency MME that support 3GPP Rel-12 Limitation Max 16 MMEs supported

FEATURE DESCRIPTION eMBMS Service Restoration When eNB Fails The MCE shall not delete MBMS session information in the event of STCP keep alive message failure. When eNB reboots, MCE transmits all the MBMS session information as soon as eNB and MCE setup M2 connection. Sine eNBs in the same MBSFN area including the rebooted eNB use the synchronized SFN and the same timestamp offset value for each MBMS session, the rebooted eNB can keep the restored MBMS sessions synchronized with neighbor eNBs. The following figure shows eNB failure case of the centralized MCE: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

374

Chapter 7 Services

From eNB's respect, it shall be treated as normal M2 setup, since it cannot differentiate from normal start to recovered session. MCE shall not flag any nonstandard information to eNB.

MME Restoration Support The MME requests eMBMS Session Start Request message, and eMBMS session is associated with MME. In case of MME failure, another MME can send eMBMS Session Start Request message with 'Session Re-establishment Indication' flag when the primary MME fails. Then, MCE will re-associate eMBMS Session to the secondary MME that requests session re-establishment.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

375

Chapter 7 Services

The MBMS Session Start Request message with 'Re-establishment indication' flag may differ from the existing one. In this case, MCE shall send MBMS Session Update message to all eNBs of the corresponding MBMS Service Area.

MCE Restoration When MCE restarts or it detects a failure in M3 link, it will make M3 setup and sends M3 Reset message to MME. Then, MME will send MBMS Session Start message to MCE. In case of M3 link failure, MCE will release all eMBMS sessions that it has managed.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is basically enabled and operator cannot disable. Dependency with other feature, limitation and prerequisite: RTRV-MCECONNPARA/CHG-MCECONN-PARA :: MME_FAILOVER_TIMER.

Key Parameters There are no related parameters.

Counters and KPIs eMBMS MCE session-related statistics have the following items (The operator can retrieve them by MME index.). Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

376

Chapter 7 Services

Node restoration-related parts cannot be checked but operator can observe that the MBMS_SESSION_SETUP statistics of the other MME index are increasing. MBMS_SESSION_SETUP: SessionStartAtt, SessionStartSucc, and so on. Family Name

Counter Name

Description

MBMS_SESSION_SETUP

SessionStartAtt

Count of M3 Session Start attempts transmitted by MME

SessionStartSucc

Count of M3 Session Start successes transmitted by MCE

SessionStartFail_CP_CAPA_CAC_F AIL

M3 Session Start failure count. A failure is due to the CAC by MCE.

SessionStartFail_M3AP_CU_FAIL

M3 Session Start failure count. A failure is due to the specified cause in specification TS36.444.

SessionStartFail_M3AP_LINK_FAIL

M3 Session Start failure count. A failure is due to SCTP link failure.

SessionStopAtt

Count of M3 MBMS Session Stop received by the MCE.

SessionStopSucc

Count of M3 MBMS Session Stop successes transmitted by MCE.

SessionStopFail_CP_CC_FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M3 MBMS Session Stop' This failure is due to reception of RESET during 'Session Strop' procedure or block restart and so on.

SessionStopFail_M3AP_LINK_FAIL

Count of Failure of 'M3 MBMS Session Stop' This failure is due to SCTP link failure.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS23.007

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

377

Chapter 7 Services

LTE-SV1100, TCP Optimization INTRODUCTION TCP optimization feature is introduced to reduce the congestion occurring at eNB. The TCP optimization feature provides PDCP PDU discard functionality at eNB in Downlink as per QCI level. By discarding downlink packets at eNB, based on the discard timer timeout, the TCP optimization feature provides an active queue management function which may accelerate the congestion detection and control mechanism at TCP senders during the time of congestion at eNB.

The backhaul data rate is high whereas the air interface throughput is very low (that is, air interface throughput is low due to bad RF conditions and high BLER rate) of the users. In such a scenario, packets are not getting scheduled at the rate they are arriving. As a consequence of delayed scheduling, the effects are seen as high TCP RTT latencies and higher than normal Packet Delay statistics. This would cause high congestion at eNBs and result in in situations like the TCP sender doing a retransmission (due to timeout) of a packet which was not even transmitted on air.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

378

Chapter 7 Services

By discarding downlink packets at eNB whose discard timer has expired there are two advantages.

1 By dropping all the packets which are, in a sense, „expired downlink packets‟ for that QCI. Also by discarding older data packets at eNB, operator can control what to drop rather than blindly dropping all incoming packets in case of a full buffer.

2 By dropping aged downlink packets at eNB for non GBR bearers, there is a possibility of detecting congestion earlier than dropping incoming new packets. By detecting congestion the TCP senders adapt their sending rate, thereby controlling congestion.

BENEFIT The operator can prevent long queuing delay at eNB. Users can experience improved end-user performance in terms of reduced TCP round-trip time in congestion situation.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The TCP optimization is implemented for Acknowledged Mode Data (AMD) PDU in PDCP/RLC layer of eNB. The eNB monitors age of the queued up packets. When age of a packet exceeds the discard timer value, then such a packet is discarded. If the value of discard timer value is Infinity for QCI, packet discard operation does not occur for that QCI. If the discard timer value is set to a non-Infinity value, packets that are older than discard timer will be discarded. The unit of the discard timer is in milliseconds. Effect on TCP Congestion Control due to DISCARD TIMER timeout: After the downlink packets are discarded at eNB, at the affected TCP sender (s), the congestion window will be reduced.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

379

Chapter 7 Services

The TCP application can detect packet loss and adapt its data rate to the available rate.

If a packet is discarded at eNB, it becomes a signal of light congestion for the TCP sender

If there are many packet discarded at the eNB, it is a signal of serious congestion. The congestion window is reduced when a missing packet(s) is detected, thereby adapting the available rate by reducing the congestion window size. In case of more information on Congestion Control at TCP, refer to TCP Congestion Control RFC 2581 and RFC 5681

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the CHG-PDCP-INF command to configure discard timer. Execute the RTRV-PDCP-INF command to retrieve the existing configuration settings.

Key Parameters The existing CHG-PDCP-INF command will be used Parameter

Description

DISCARD_TIMER

The parameter is a queue management parameter which indicates the maximum age a packet can be held in the RLC queues at per QCI level. Packets older than DISCARD_TIMER will be discarded at the RLC

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

DL PDCP PDU discard rate

PdcpPduDiscardRateDL

Discard rate of PDCP PDUs This counter displays the ratio of packets that are

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

380

Chapter 7 Services Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description discarded due to DISCARD_TIMER_DL expiry and the total packets in the buffer over a period of 10seconds. The units are in ppm (x 10^6).

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.323 'Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) specification'

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

381

Chapter 8

RAN Sharing

LTE-SW5001, Multi-PLMN Support INTRODUCTION Multiple-PLMN support allows provide LTE service to subscribers of multiple operators in a cell concurrently. For Multiple-PLMN support, eNB broadcasts multiple PLMN IDs which are sharing a cell in system information and supports UE associated signaling with a UE and an appropriated core network based on the PLMN which UE has selected. In RAN sharing, operators have their own dedicated carrier. The Multi-PLMN Support feature allows serving only one available PLMN ID to the subscribers of the dedicated carrier. The PLMN ID served in the cell is either primary or secondary PLMN, which depends on operator's ownership of the dedicated carrier. The primary PLMN ID is included in the broadcasted PLMN list to support successful ANR operation. It is marked as reserved for operator use to avoid access from primary PLMN subscribers when the carrier is only available for secondary PLMN. The Multiple Operator Core Network (MOCN) has the RAN structure where multiple partner operators share one spectrum. Whereas, in MORAN structure, each partner operator uses dedicated frequency, however, shares same eNB. In general, one host operator manages the RAN in the MOCN or MORAN structure, and other partner operators provide services for users through the RAN. The host operator can check the data usage through the statistical information. However, partner operators cannot access this data without host operator's help. This feature provides a function to collect data usage by PLMN ID in the eNB for each partner operator. The collected data is transmitted to the LSM. The provider can check the data used by the partner operators.

BENEFIT Multiple operators can share eNB in MORAN architecture. Operator can reduce CAPEX and OPEX by sharing site, eNB and backhaul network with partners.

Host operator can figure out how much data is consumed by each partner operator.

The data usage can be utilized for the purpose of settlement among partner operators.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

382

Chapter 8 RAN Sharing

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Required Network Elements: For usage reporting function, in addition to eNB, the LSM should support this feature.

Related Radio Technology: E-UTRAN (LTE) Others: Each partner operator must have their own dedicated carrier for Multiple Operator Radio Access Network (MORAN). Limitation The feature supports a maximum of six dedicated carriers per eNB.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The eNB provides the following functions for this feature:



Broadcast multiple PLMN IDs, up to six, in SIB.

Routing of signaling for call control based on the selected PLMN ID by UE. Inter-PLMN handover support in shared network. Radio resource sharing in shared cell. In a shared cell, the eNB broadcasts the supporting PLMN ID list, up to six, through SIB1. The first PLMN ID broadcasted to SIB 1 must be set to the same as the PLMN ID of the global eNB ID. The first listed PLMN must be the same as the primary PLMN of eNB. The supporting PLMN ID list per cell is configured by the system parameter. The UE reads the PLMN IDs, and selects one based on its selection process. When the UE is expected to make RRC connection with eNB, the selected PLMN ID is included in the RRC Connection Setup Complete message. The eNB uses this PLMN ID to select the core network, and to transfer the Initial UE message. Figure below depicts the signaling procedures of eNB.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

383

Chapter 8 RAN Sharing

Multiple Operator Support with Dedicated Carriers In MORAN architecture, operators do not have to share spectrum. One possible scenario is that operators have its own dedicated carrier and do not share with others. The Multi-PLMN Support feature enable operator to share eNB with its own dedicated carrier. Figure below shows an eNB sharing scenario with dedicated carrier between operator A and B. While the operator A is the owner or manager of the shared eNB and the operator B shares the eNB with a dedicated carrier. In the dedicated carrier cells of each operator, only one PLMN ID is available, which provide services to the subscribers of the carrier owner. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

384

Chapter 8 RAN Sharing

Definitions used to describe the relation between PLMN ID and the dedicated carrier owner.

Owner PLMN: The operator‟s PLMN ID that is the eNB owner or manager of the eNB.

Sharing PLNM: The operator‟s PLMN ID that shares eNB with a dedicated carrier with eNB owner operator. The rules for PLMN broadcasting in the dedicated carrier cells are as follows:

In the dedicated carrier cells of eNB owner or manager: oOnly PLMN ID of owner PLMN is broadcasted in SIB1 as the primary PLMN.

In the dedicated carrier cells that shares eNB with owner operator: oTwo PLMN IDs shall be broadcasted in SIB1 (owner PLMN + sharing PLMN). Owner PLMN ID shall be the primary PLMN and sharing PLMN ID shall be the secondary PLMN. oOwner PLMN, that is primary PLMN in SIB1, shall set to 'reserved for operator' to prevent provide services to owner PLMN‟s subscribers in sharing PLMN operator‟s dedicated carrier. The reason for including PLMN ID of owner PLMN in sharing PLMN carrier is to enable SON related operation, for example ANR, and packets forwarding issue in the shared eNB. This feature supports up to 6 operators dedicated carriers MOCN sharing operation.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

385

Chapter 8 RAN Sharing

Network Management for RAN Sharing In the RAN sharing structure, such as MOCN or MORAN, the host operator is responsible for RAN management. The host operator manages the fault, configuration, administration, performance, and statistics of the RAN shared with partner operators through the LSM. The partner operators control the RAN through the host operator rather than changing the system parameter by directly accessing to the RAN. The statistical information is stored periodically in the LSM and managed by the PLMN ID. Through the north bound interface, the LSM can forward the operator specific and common statistics to each operator's OSS respectively, as shown in figure below.

EMS Clients for Partners RAN is controlled and maintained by one operator. Other partners monitor or query the network or usage information. Access level from an EMS client to the main EMS can be changed according to the agreement between the host operator and partners. Figure below depicts the relationship of main and client EMSs.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

386

Chapter 8 RAN Sharing

Statistics Collected per PLMN The information collected in the eNB by the PLMN ID is outlined in table below. This statistics can be changed for a specific operator SW PKG, or for a Single RAN SW PKG. For example, in SSR3.0, Bearers and Data usage categories were excluded. Category

Items

Classification Level

Comments

PRB Usage

DL PRB Usage

Per PLMN/Cell

Average number of PRBs allocated to each PLMN during a certain time period.

Per PLMN/Cell

Average and peak number of RRC_Connected users during a certain time period.

Per PLMN/Cell/QCI

Average and peak number of bearers during a certain timer period.

Per PLMN/Cell/QCI Per PLMN/Cell

Total number of bytes delivered to or from UE. Uncompressed packets are measured at PDCP/RLC/MAC layer.

Per PLMN/Cell

DL/UL RRC/S1/X2 messages.

UL PRB Usage Active UEs

Average number of active UEs Maximum number of active UEs

Bearers

Average number of Bearers Maximum number of Bearers

Data Usage

Total number of Bytes (DL) Total number of Bytes (UL) Total number of Bytes (DL) Total number of Bytes (UL)

Signaling Messages

Total number of signaling messages (DL) Total number of signaling messages (DL) (UL)

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To add additional PLMN ID broadcasted to the specific cell, do the following:

1 Execute RTRV/CHG-ENBPLMN-INFO to configure additional PLMN ID (=MCC + MNC) to the unused PLMN_IDX.

2 Execute RTRV/CHG-CELLPLMN-INFO to set PLMN_USAGE of the newly specified PLMN ID with the specific cell and the corresponding PLMN_IDX.

Key Parameters RTRV-ENBPLMN-INFO/CHG-ENBPLMN-INFO Parameter

Description

PLMN_IDX

The plmn index to be changed or retrieved. PLMN ID coreresponding to the selected plmnIdx is mapped to the PLMN ID which is retrieved or changed by command RTRV/CHG-ENBPLMN-INFO with the same plmnIdx number.

MCC[4]

Mobile Country Code (MCC) that comprises Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

387

Chapter 8 RAN Sharing Parameter

Description

MNC[4]

Mobile Network Code (MNC) that comprises Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN).

MCC/MNC of the PLMN_IDX = 0 is representative PLMN ID of the system operator, and cannot be changed by CHG-ENBPLMN-INFO. RTRV-CELLPLMN-INFO/CHG-CELLPLMN-INFO Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

This parameter is the number of cells.This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are supported.

PLMN_IDX

The plmn index to be changed or retrieved. PLMN ID coreresponding to the selected plmnIdx is mapped to the PLMN ID, which is retrieved or changed by command RTRV/CHG-ENBPLMN-INFO with the same plmnIdx number.

PLMN_USAGE

When cell is operated, determine whether to use the value of PLMN corresponding plmnIdx. use: The value of PLMN corresponding plmnIdx can be serviced. no_use: The value of PLMN corresponding plmnIdx not be serviced.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

RRC Connection number (PLMN)

ConnNo_PLMN

The average value of the number of RRC connections periodically collected.

ConnMax_PLMN

The maximum value of ConnNo_PLMN.

UsageNbr_PLMN

Average E-RAB count per unit time.

UsageNbrMax_PLMN

Maximum E-RAB count per unit time.

UsageNbr_QCI_x

Average E-RAB count per unit time (QCIx).

UsageNbrMax_QCI_x

Maximum E-RAB count per unit time (QCIx).

S-GW UL/DL packets (PLMN)

ByteUleNBQCI_QCIx

Bytes of user of QCI (x) data sent from the eNB to the S-GW.

ByteDleNBQCI_QCIx

Bytes of user of QCI (x) data sent from the S-GW to the eNB.

DL/UL Total PRB Usage (PLMN)

TotPrbDl_PLMN

Total PRB Usage for PDSCH/PDCCH transmission per PLMN.

TotPrbDlMin_PLMN

TotPrbDl_PLMN minimum.

TotPrbDlMax_PLMN

TotPrbDl_PLMN maximum.

TotGbrPrbDl_PLMN

Total PRB usage for downlink GBR traffic transmission per PLMN.

TotGbrPrbDlMin_PLMN

TotGbrPrbDl_PLMN minimum.

TotGbrPrbDlMax_PLMN

TotGbrPrbDl_PLMN maximum.

TotNGbrPrbDl_PLMN

Total PRB usage for downlink non-GBR traffic transmission per PLMN.

TotNGbrPrbDlMin_PLMN

TotNGbrPrbDl_PLMN minimum.

TotNGbrPrbDlMax_PLMN

TotNGbrPrbDl_PLMN maximum.

E-RAB Simultaneous Number (PLMN)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

388

Chapter 8 RAN Sharing Family Display Name

DL/UL Total PRB Usage (PLMN)

PROTOCOL_MSG

Type Name

Type Description

TotPrbUl_PLMN

Total PRB usage for PUSCH transmission per PLMN.

TotPrbUlMin_PLMN

TotPrbUl_PLMN minimum.

TotPrbUlMax_PLMN

TotPrbUl_PLMN maximum.

TotGbrPrbUl_PLMN

Total PRB usage for uplink GBR traffic transmission per PLMN.

TotGbrPrbUlMin_PLMN

TotGbrPrbUl_PLMN minimum.

TotGbrPrbUlMax_PLMN

TotGbrPrbUl_PLMN maximum.

TotNGbrPrbUl_PLMN

Total PRB usage for uplink non-GBR traffic transmission per PLMN.

TotNGbrPrbUlMin_PLMN

TotNGbrPrbUl_PLMN minimum.

TotNGbrPrbUlMax_PLMN

TotNGbrPrbUl_PLMN maximum.

RrcMsgSnd

Sent the number of times in the RRC protocol Msg eNB.

RrcMsgRcv

The number received in the RRC protocol Msg eNB.

S1MsgSnd

Sent the number of times in the S1AP protocol Msg eNB.

S1MsgRcv

The number received in the S1AP protocol Msg eNB.

X2MsgSnd

Sent the number of times in the X2AP protocol Msg eNB.

X2MsgRcv

The number received in the X2AP protocol Msg eNB.

If the operator does not use RAN sharing feature, some family of the statistics listed above can be removed.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.331 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification [3] 3GPP TS23.251 Network Sharing; Architecture and functional description

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

389

Chapter 9 SON

Chapter 9

SON

LTE-SO0201, Intra-LTE ANR INTRODUCTION Samsung automatic neighbor relation (ANR) automatically configures and manages the intra-LTE neighbor relation table (NRT), and it aims to maintain the optimal NRT reflecting changes in the communication environment during the system operation. Stable UE mobility of Samsung LTE cells is guaranteed by optimized NRT management. UE mobility is guaranteed as follows according to UE connection status.

1 RRC_CONNECTED: Guarantees stable intra-LTE HO of UE while connected to the cell.

2 RRC_IDLE: Guarantees stable execution of cell selection/reselection of UE while the cell is disconnected. Samsung ANR provides the following functions depending on the SON phase:

1 Self-configuration phase oInitial NRT auto-configuration through O&M: Create an initial NRT by using the location information of active cells during eNB or cell growing procedure.

2 Self-optimization phase oFinds and adds new neighbor cells during HO execution due to UE mobility. iAdds new neighbor cells to the NRT based on UE or LSM. iiEstablishes bi-directional NR relations by adding the serving cell to the NRT of a new neighbor cell with the help of the LSM. iiiSets the automatic X2 interface between the serving cell and the new neighbor cell. oFinds and adds neighbor cells based on ANR specific event iPerforms ANR measurement by configuring ANR specific event with the UE selected among the ones which initially attach or perform handover to this cell. iiIf the best neighbor cell included in the measurement report (MR) message triggered by ANR specific event is unknown, adds this cell to NRT based on the UE or LSM. iiiEstablishes bi-directional NR relations by adding the serving cell to the NRT of a new neighbor cell with the help of the LSM. ivConfigures the X2 interface automatically between a serving cell and new neighbor cell. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

390

Chapter 9 SON

oANR control function per carrier/operator iPrevents adding a new neighbor cell of a specific carrier to NRT by controlling the ANR measurement by carrier. iiPrevents the X2 interface from being configured with the neighbor eNB, which belongs to a specific operator by controlling X2 configuration by operator. iiiPrevents adding a new neighbor cell, which belongs to a specific operator by controlling neighbor cell addition function per operator. oAutomatic NRT management function iNR ranking calculation: The NR ranking is calculated using the number of MR messages received for HO. iiNRT size management: The number of NRs in NRT should be managed so that it does not exceed the pre-defined maximum size. Guarantees the minimal number of effective neighbor cells per carrier if attempting to add a new NR, when the NRT is full. iiiUnnecessary NR removal: When the number of MR messages received for NR is reduced due to UE not reporting them any longer, this function removes the NR based on the specific threshold, which enables for the NRT to include only valid NRs. ivManagement of NR causing HO performance degradation: If the number of HO success for NR is extremely low in spite of considerable number of HO attempts, this function removes the NR or manages it as HO blacklist based on the two respective thresholds for HO success and attempts. vInvalid NR management: If the number of successive HO failure for an NR is larger than a threshold, this function removes the NR or manages it as HO blacklist. viHO blacklist management: This function manages the NRs causing HO performance degradation or invalid NRs as HO blacklist. oAutomatic X2-NRT management function iX2 NR ranking calculation: X2 NR ranking is calculated using the number of HO attempts. iiX2-NRT size management: The number of X2 NRs in X2-NRT should be managed so that it does not exceed the pre-defined maximum size. eNB considers the number X2 NRs to be guaranteed per band indicator iiiUnnecessary X2 NR blacklisting: If ratio of handover attempt to an X2 NR is lower than predefined threshold, this function disconnects X2 link with the unnecessary X2 NR. ivX2 link restoring: If ratio of S1 handover attempt to an X2 NR is larger than predefined threshold, this function restores the X2 link with the X2 NR. oConfigures the neighbor cell lists used in measurement configurations Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

391

Chapter 9 SON

Configures the best neighbor cell list, which includes a maximum of 32 cells for each carriers‟ measurement configuration in the order of descending ranking, for the purpose of joint optimization with Samsung MRO function.

BENEFIT The operator can reduce CAPEX and OPEX costs for configuring and managing the NRT of LTE cells.

The system performance indicators such as HO success rate and call drop rate are optimized by configuring NRT optimized for coverage and air status of each LTE cell. This guarantees reliable mobility of UEs in the RRC_IDLE mode and the RRC_CONNECTED mode.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency UE ECGI acquiring function support: For UE-based NR addition, UE should support the E-UTRAN cell global identifier (ECGI) acquiring function.

LSM-based NR addition function support: The operator should set LSM-based NR addition flag to True.

In order to use the X2 setup on/off per PLMN function, operator should purchase license key of LTE-SW5012 Operator Specific Feature Activation feature. Limitation:

Bi-directional NR addition is possible only when the new neighbor cell belongs to the same LSM as the serving cell. Bi-directional NR relations cannot be established with the neighbor cells that are located in a different LSM or that belong to a different vendor.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Architecture Samsung ANR function operates in eNB and LSM. The overall architecture is shown in the following figure:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

392

Chapter 9 SON

As shown in figure above, Samsung ANR function is executed at eNB SON Agent and at the LSM SON Manager. The operation of each entity in this architecture is described below.

1 LSM SON Manager: NRT Management Function aCreates initial NRT bPerforms LSM-based NR addition cEstablishes bi-directional NR relationship based on LSM 2 eNB SON Agent: NR Detection Function aReceives the measurement report message for HO from the call processor bReceives the measurement report message for periodic ANR from the call processor

cAcquires ECGI and X2 TNL address from the Call Processor SON Agent: NR Add Function aAdds a neighbor cell by using the ECGI information bAdds a neighbor eNB by using the X2 TNL address information. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

393

Chapter 9 SON

If the configuration of X2 interface with a specific operator is not allowed, configure as NoX2 = True.

SON Agent: NR Removal Function aDeletes the NR by receiving the information on deletion of the NR from the Call Processor (Served Cells to Delete IE in the X2 ENB CONFIGURATION message).

bRemoves unnecessary NR. cManagement of the NR that causes HO performance degradation. dManagement of the invalid NR. SON Agent: NR Ranking Function aCalculates the ranking of NR by using the number of received MR messages. bSends the NR ranking information to the Call Processor in order to create the neighbor cell list for measurement configuration.

SON Agent: NRT Management Function aDecides whether to perform NR addition/retrieval/attribute value update/deletion.

bLSM SON Manager: Synchronizes NRT management function with the NRT. cManages the NRT size so that it does not exceed the specified threshold (maxNRTSize). Guarantees the minimal number of effective neighbor cells per carrier if attempting to add a new NR when the NRT is full.

Intra-LTE ANR Function Self-Configuration Phase-Initial NRT Auto-configuration Samsung LSM provides eNB or cell grow window with a SON option box. If the “Initial NRT Generation” option in the box is checked, an initial NRT is generated using the cells‟ location information. This information is entered in LSM after the software download to the cell has completed. Samsung LSM SON property window includes the following parameters, which are used to generate the initial NRT.

1 NRT.type: Decides the initial NRT creation method 2 NRT.multiple: A multiple for multiplying R counts (used in initial NRT creation) and an average distance to the cells

3 NRT.limitDistance: The maximum distance to the neighbor cell that can be included in the initial NRT Samsung LSM provides the following Initial NRT generation methods.

1 NRT.type = average aCreation method: Includes neighbor cells up to NRT.size per carrier in the NRT within the radius of max{NRT Multiple × Ravg, NRT.limitDistance} Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

394

Chapter 9 SON

iRavg: The average distance of R Count of cells within the NRT.limitDistance. R Count: The number of cells to be used for the Ravg calculation iiNRT.size: The number of the initial NRT configurations

2 NRT.type = distance aCreation method: Includes NRT.size neighbor cells within the radius of NRT.limitDistance in the NRT.

3 NRT Type = minimum aCreation method: Creates an initial NRT in the same way as NRT.type = average, but the distance to the closest cell among the cells remaining within NRT.limitDistance is used instead of Ravg. Self-Optimization Phase-Automatic NRT Management In the Self-optimization phase, Samsung ANR function provides the following features: Finds and Adds New Neighbor Cells during HO Execution due to UE Mobility Samsung NR addition function is triggered by an event where new neighbor cells are found during the HO execution due to the UE mobility. In order to add the cell to the NRT, if an ECGI can be acquired from UE, the UE-based NR addition is executed; if an ECGI cannot be acquired, the LSM-based NR addition is performed. The ECGI can be acquired from UE when the UE does not currently use a GBR service, supports ECGI acquiring function as UE feature, and the serving cell uses discontinuous reception (DRX).

1 The UE-based NR addition procedure uses the following steps: aThe UE performs measurements according to the measurement configuration transmitted by the serving cell.

bThe UE transmits the measurement report message to the serving cell. cThe serving cell detects the PCI (Unknown PCI) of the new cell that does not exist in its own NRT, and then it transmits the reportCGI configuration requesting UE to acquire the ECGI. iIf the ANR measurement for the carrier of a new cell is not allowed, the neighbor cell is not added (that is, the procedure is terminated). Setting parameter: ANR_ALLOW (Command: CHG-EUTRA-FA) ANR_ALLOW: If the parameter is set to „no use,‟ the ANR measurement is not allowed. iiCommands for DRX operation setting: CHG-DRX-INFO QCI: QCI index (1~9) used in UE-based NR adding function DRX_CONFIG_SETUP: ci_Config_reportCGI ON_DURATION_TIMER_REPORT_CGI: ci_onDurationTimer_psf10

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

395

Chapter 9 SON

DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER_ REPORT_CGI: ci_drx_InactivityTimer_psf10 DRX_RETRANSMISSION_TIMER_ REPORT_CGI: ci_drx_RetransmissionTimer_sf16 LONG_DRXCYCLE_START_OFFSET_TYPE_REPORT_CGI: ci_sf2560_chosen iiiTo handle the exception case of DRX operation, SON Agent runs the EUTRA_REPORT_CGI_MR_TO_WAIT timer. If UE cannot acquire the ECGI/CGI within the time, SON Agent terminates the DRX operation to return the normal state of service.

dThe UE reads ECGI of new cell corresponding to the Unknown PCI in the DRX period.

eThe UE transmits measurement report message including the acquired ECGI to the serving cell.

fThe serving eNB checks whether PLMN ID in MR message is registered in SonAnrPlmnBlackListInfo PLD. iIn case that the PLMN ID is registered in SonAnrPlmnBlackListInfo PLD and its usedFlag = use, If EUTRA_BLOCK_FLAG = True, serving eNB terminates ANR operation. If EUTRA_BLOCK_FLAG = False, serving eNB performs step g. iiIn case that the PLMN ID is not registered in SonAnrPlmnBlackListInfo PLD or the PLMN ID is registered and its usedFlag = no_use, Serving eNB performs step g

gThe serving eNB acquires IP address (X2 TNL address) of the new eNB from MME.

hThe serving cell adds the new cell to its NRT. iThe serving eNB reports to LSM that the new cell added to its NRT. jThe LSM adds the serving cell to the new cell's NRT (Bi-directional NR adding).

kThe serving eNB and new eNB determine whether to establish X2 connection as follows (This function can be used if operator purchases the license key of LTE-SW5012). iIf the configuration of the X2 interface for the PLMN of the new eNB is allowed, serving eNB sends X2 Setup Request to the new eNB. iiIf the configuration of the X2 interface for the PLMN of the new eNB is not allowed, set NoX2 = True for the neighbor eNB X2 interface configuring command by PLMN: CHG-PLMNANR-ENB ANR_TARGET_MCC: MCC of Neighbor eNB ANR_TARGET_MNC: MNC of Neighbor eNB

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

396

Chapter 9 SON

USE_NBR_NO_X2: In case of use, set NoX2 = True for the neighbor eNB with PLMN. The following figure illustrates the UE-based NR addition procedure:

2 The LSM-based NR addition procedure uses the following steps: aThe UE performs measurements based on the measurement configuration sent by the serving cell.

bThe UE transmits measurement report message to the serving cell. cAfter serving cell detects a PCI of a new cell which does not exist in its NRT (Unknown PCI), it reports to LSM that unknown PCI is detected, since acquiring ECGI from UE is not available. iIf ANR measurement for the carrier of a new cell is not allowed, the neighbor cell is not added (the unknown PCI detection is not reported to LSM). Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

397

Chapter 9 SON

dThe LSM finds the nearest cell which corresponds to the serving eNB and unknown PCI, and adds new cell to the serving cell‟s NRT without consideration of the new cell's PLMN.

eThe LSM adds the serving cell to the new cell‟s NRT (bi-directional NR adding).

fThe serving eNB and new eNB set the X2 connection. iIf configuration of the X2 interface for PLMN of the new eNB is not allowed, set NoX2 = True for the neighbor eNB. The following figure illustrates the LSM-based NR addition procedure:

Finds and Adds New Neighbor Cells Based on the ANR specific-event and Renewal of NR Info.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

398

Chapter 9 SON

If a large volume of new cells are deployed to the network rapidly, neighbor cells should be included in the NRT. As a result, reliable UE mobility can be supported. In this scenario, Samsung ANR performs the additional NR adding function that periodically finds and adds new neighbor cells. With this function, the optimum NRT achievement rate is improved and reliable network operation is available. The cycle of the function is set by date/hour/minute/performing duration and through this cyclical operation and activation/deactivation flag, the operator can control overheads which occur at eNB and UE. The LTE cell decides which UEs will perform the function among the ones who initially attach or enter the cell due to a handover according to the UE search rate set by each cell (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_TOTAL). Then, LTE cell decides which selected UE measures among the LTE intra-frequency (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTRA_FREQ), the LTE inter-frequency (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTER_FREQ), and the UTRAN carriers (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_UTRAN). For example, if LTE network has two carriers and UTRAN network has a few carriers, assume that UE search rates are configured as ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_TOTAL = 5%, ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTRA_FREQ = 40%, ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTER_FREQ = 40%, and ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_UTRAN = 20%. Then, 2% of UEs for the LTE intrafrequency, 2% of UEs for the LTE inter-frequency, and 1% of UEs for the UTRAN carriers will perform measurement for this function. Samsung periodic ANR operation procedure uses the following steps:

1 To start the function, LTE cell selects the target UE among the ones which initially attach or perform handover and the target carrier, and then sends the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message to the target UE including the ANR measurement configuration with target carrier to the target UE.

aThe function checks whether UE supports intra/inter-frequency ANR operation based on the FeatureGroupIndicators IE included in the UEEUTRA-Capability IE iIntra-frequency ANR support: 17th bit = 1 iiInter-frequency ANR support: 18th bit = 1 & 25th bit = 1

bTarget UE selection iGenerates three random number (N1,N2,N3) ranging from 0 to 1 iiIf N1 < ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_TOTAL, LTE cell selects UE

cTarget carrier selection iAccording to UE Capability, the method to select the target carrier for ANR is as follows: If UE supports LTE intra/inter-frequency ANR and the UTRAN ANR operation, sets the intervals for LTE intra-frequency (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTRA_FREQ: y1), the LTE interfrequency (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTER_FREQ:y2), and the UTRAN carriers (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_UTRAN:y3). In this case, the intervals are separated into 3 parts:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

399

Chapter 9 SON

If UE supports only LTE intra/inter-frequency ANR operation, sets the intervals for LTE intra-frequency (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTRA_FREQ: y1), the LTE interfrequency (ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTER_FREQ:y2). In this case, the intervals are separated into 2 parts: Selects one among intra-frequency ANR, inter-frequency ANR, and UTRAN ANR according to the random value N2. iiWhen LTE intra-frequency ANR is selected, the UE performs periodical measurement for intra-frequency. iiiWhen LTE inter-frequency ANR is selected and there are more than 1 inter-carrier, sets the interval for each UE-supportable inter-carrier with the ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE in the ascending order of the carrier index x_{k}: ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE set to k^{th} inter-carrier index the interval for k^{th} carrier a) Minimum value in the interval: is 0)

(if k = 0, the value

b) Maximum value in the interval: After selecting one among UE-supportable LTE inter-carriers according to the random value N3, UE performs periodical measurement for the target inter-frequency.

dANR measurement configuration setting iIf the selected carrier is intra-frequency - ReportConfigEUTRA: configures ANR specific A3 event iiIf the selected carrier is inter-frequency - If A2 event is used for inter-frequency ANR a) ReportConfigEUTRA: configures ANR specific A2 event - If A2 event is not used for inter-frequency ANR or the eNB receives MR message due to ANR specific A2 event a) MeasObjectEUTRA: Sets the target carrier b) ReportConfigEUTRA: configures ANR specific A4 event c) Configures measurementGap

2 The UE transmits measurement report message to serving cell corresponding to the ANR measurement configuration.

3 The serving cell perceives that PCI of the best neighbor cell in the message is a new cell which is not in its NRT, and performs UE-based or LSM-based NR addition.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

400

Chapter 9 SON

aIf the ANR measurement for the carrier of a new cell is not allowed, the neighbor cell is not added (The detail on the unknown PCI detection is not reported to LSM)

bPlease refer to the c~j of Section Finds and Adds New Neighbor Cells during HO Execution due to UE Mobility for the detail operation of the next procedure.

4 The serving cell runs NR information update procedure based on Validity Check Flag, if PCI of best neighbor cell existed in NRT is reported.

aIf the value of Validity Check Flag is True, nothing occurs. bIf the value of Validity Check Flag is False, serving cell sends RRCConnectionReconfiguration to UE for ECGI/CGI acquisition. Then, the serving cell updates NRT, if it is necessary. The UE-based NR addition following the periodic NR adding function is shown below:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

401

Chapter 9 SON

Automatic NRT management function Samsung periodic NRT management procedure uses the following steps:

1 The serving cell collects statistics number of MR messages received for the HO to neighbor cells included in the NRT.

2 When calculate the NR ranking arrives, the serving cell calculates ranking of the NRs included in NRT based on the collected statistics.

3 The serving cell considers the NR with a low number of MR messages for HO as unnecessary and removes it from the NRT.

4 The serving cell considers the NR with an extremely low HO success rate as a HO performance degradation causing NR and then, the serving cell removes it from the NRT or manages it as HO blacklist. In addition, if a NR satisfies the predefined condition by analyzing HO preparation failure cause, Samsung ANR removes the invalid NR from the NRT or manages it as HO blacklist.

1) NR Ranking Calculation The NR ranking reflects the validity or importance of NR included in the NRT. Samsung eNB defines the NR ranking‟s attribute as having the higher ranking when more MR messages are received as the HO for the NR is triggered. The NR ranking is performed as follows:

1 The NR ranking calculation is performed at a specified interval. 2 The NR related to ranking calculation must be included in NRT at least beyond the ranking calculation interval.

3 The ranking value used between the ranking calculation intervals uses the ranking value calculated in the previous interval. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

402

Chapter 9 SON

The following figure illustrates the NR ranking operation with an example:

The NR ranking is calculated based on statistics. To compare the rankings of NRs, the period for collecting the statistics should be same among the NRs. In the previous figure, New NR (NR j) is added at 16:00, the statistics for NR is collected only for 11 hours. On the other hand, the statistics for NR previously added (NR i) is collected for 24 hours. Since the comparison of the ranking between NR i and NR j is imbalanced, we distinguish the ranking calculation method for these two NRs. The NR Ranking is calculated as follows:

1 The currentRank value for the NR i which is in the NRT for more than one NR ranking calculation period as follows: currentRank_{i}(k) = (1-ω)·previousRank_{i}(k) + ω·NMR_{i}(k) ok: current ranking calculation time oω: IIR filter coefficient that gives some weights to the previous rank value and the current statistics opreviousRank_{i}(k): The rank value calculated in the last period oNMR_{i}(k): The number of MR message received for the Cell i, which is collected from the previous ranking calculation point k-1 to point k

2 The currentRank value for the NR j which is in the NRT for less than a NR ranking calculation period as follows: oFrom the NR ranking calculation point k, currentRank_{j}(k) = -1 Maintain the value at-1 until the NR Ranking calculation period. oAt the next ranking calculation point k+1, currentRank_{j}(k+1) = NMR_{j}(k+1) If the number of MR messages received for NR j is 0, NMR_{j}(k+1) is set to 0. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

403

Chapter 9 SON

At k+2 (next ranking calculation time after k+1), the rank value of NR j is calculated as the same way as NR i which is explained above. 2) NRT Size Management The maxNRTSize presents maximum number of NRs that can be included in the Intra-LTE NRT. NRT size management is performed as follows:

1 maxNRTSize: Unless a service provider requests for a separate value, default value is set as 256.

2 Intra-LTE NRT is managed so that no more NRs than the maxNRTSize could be included. When the attempt of adding a new NR occurs, in the situation where the existing number of NRs is as many as maxNRTSize in Intra-LTE NRT, the following operations are performed depending on the ANR setting mode.

1 ANR setting mode = sonAutoApply or sonManualApply oReason for new NR addition attempt

aNR addition by UE-based ANR function bNR addition by LSM-based ANR function cNR addition by LSM-based bi-directional addition function dManual addition by the operator oOperation procedure

aIn case of carriers which NRs as HO attribute (T) are larger than minNRTSizeCarrier (i) iParameter for setting the minimal number of effective neighbors by carrier: minNRTSizeCarrier (Command: CHG-EUTRA-FA) If the maxNRTSize change attempting value is larger than the value adding the sum of minNRTSizeCarrier (i) for all carriers and the number of NR belonging to the HO blacklist, it changes. maxNRTSize: Maximum size for a NRT (Command: CHG-SONANR)

bAmong NRs as CurrentRank ≠ -1 & HO attribute (T) set as carriers for IntraLTE NRT, The NR whose CurrentRank = -1 is excluded from the list of removal since it existed less than the NR ranking interval in NRT.

cThe lowest ranking NR with the remove attribute (T) is deleted and a new NR is added.

2 ANR setting mode = sonFuncOff oReason for new NR addition attempt

aNR addition by LSM-based bi-directional addition function bManual addition by the operator oOperation procedure Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

404

Chapter 9 SON

aIn case of “NR addition by LSM-based bi-directional addition function”: Same as the operating procedure (1)

bIn case of “Manual addition by the operator”: the New NR is not added The following figure shows the ranking based NR removal function used to manage the NRT size:

3) Unnecessary NR Removal When the network is stabilized through the network optimization, this function removes NRs which cannot receive MR messages among the NRs included when the network was initially created, so that only valid NRs could be included in the NRT. The operator can control this function‟s ON/OFF state, and at the NR ranking calculation point k, the serving cell removes the NR i which meets the following conditions.

aANR operation mode = sonAutoApply or sonManualApply & bnrDelFlag = True & nrDelFlag: ON/OFF control flag that determines the operational status.

cCumulatedMRi (k) ≤ thNumMrNrDel & CumulatedMRi(k): The number of MR messages received for NR i during thTimeNrDel period at the NR ranking calculation point k. thNumMrNrDel: The threshold value to decide unnecessary NR.

disRemoveAllowed = True for NR i The following figure shows the statistics based NR removal function used to delete unnecessary NRs:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

405

Chapter 9 SON

4) Management of NR causing HO performance degradation If a new cell located nearby has the same PCI as the PCI of a distant NR, which is included in the NRT at the initial network formation and UE transmits a measurement report message for HO while moving to the new cell. Due to this, the serving cell wrongly recognizes the PCI in the message as belonging to the distant NR. Therefore, UE fails the HO execution. The following figure illustrates the management scenario of the NR causing HO performance degradation:

In the previous figure, UE moves toward the neighbor cell (ECGI = 1002) and transmits the measurement report message including PCI = 20 by HO triggering to the serving cell (ECGI = 1000). The serving cell completes HO preparation using the NR (ECGI = 1001) included in the NRT, and then transmits the HO command message received from the NR. However, UE is moved to the new cell (ECGI = 1002), thus HO execution fails. As shown the figure above, Samsung ANR removes the HO performance degradation causing NR from the NRT or manages it as HO blacklist. The operator can control this function‟s ON/OFF state, and at the NR ranking calculation point k, the serving cell removes the NR i from the NRT or manages it as HO blacklist which meets the following conditions. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

406

Chapter 9 SON

aANR operation mode = sonAutoApply or sonManualApply & bwrongNrDelFlag = True & wrongNrDelFlag: ON/OFF control flag that determines the operational status.

cCumulatedNHOAtti (k) ≥ thHoAttNrDel & CumulatedNHOAtti (k): The number of HO preparation successes collected for NR i during thTimeNrDel at the NR ranking calculation point k. thHoAttNrDel: The threshold value of HO attempts to decide HO performance degradation causing NR.

dCumulatedNHOSuci (k) ≤ thHoSucNrDel & CumulatedNHOSuci (k): The number of HO success collected for NR i during thTimeNrDel period at the NR ranking calculation point k. thHoSucNrDel: The threshold value of the number of HO success to decide HO performance degradation causing NR.

eisRemoveAllowed = True for NR i 5) Management of invalid NR

1 Determination of invalid NR which causes HO preparation failure aServing cell removes the invalid NR from the NRT or manages it as HO blacklist if the number of successive HO preparation failures is larger than the predefined threshold. The threshold can be configured by operator for each HO preparation failure cause.

bIn order to use this function, following parameter configuration is required. ianrEnable = Auto or Manual iinbrDelCauseFlag = True iiiThreshold > 0 per Cause The following table shows S1 HO preparation failure causes. Causes

Meaning

Handover Failure In Target EPC/eNB Or Target System

The handover failed due to a failure in target EPC/eNB or target system.

TS1RELOCprep Expiry

Handover Preparation procedure is cancelled when timer TS1RELOCprep expires.

Cell not available

The concerned cell is not available.

Unknown Target ID

Handover rejected because the target ID is not known to the EPC.

Unknown PLMN

The MME does not identify any PLMN provided by the eNB.

The following table shows X2 HO preparation failure causes Causes

Meaning

TRELOCprep Expiry

Handover Preparation procedure is cancelled when timer TRELOCprep expires.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

407

Chapter 9 SON Causes

Meaning

Cell not available

The concerned cell is not available.

6) HO blacklist management

1 NR can be managed as HO blacklist if the NR is determined as the invalid NR or the NR causing HO performance degradation.

2 Serving cell performs validation check for the NR managed as HO blacklist by acquiring ECGI of the NR through reportCGI once during ranking period.

3 NRs can be changed from HO blacklist to the HO whitelist for the following cases

aA. ECGI information of the NR is changed by reportCGI operation. bB. The value of hand-in statistics for the HO blacklist NR is larger than thHandIn4Black2White.

cC. Operator changes the HO attribute of the NR from HO blacklist to HO whitelist. Automatic X2-NRT Management Function 1) X2 NR Priority (ranking) Calculation The X2 NR ranking (priority) means the validity or significance of the X2 NR included in X2 NRT. Samsung Intra-LTE ANR function defines that the X2 NR ranking attribution has higher ranking as the more number of S1/X2 HO triggering for X2 NR increases. X2 NR ranking is operated in the method shown below:

1 The X2 NR ranking calculation is performed after cell NR ranking. 2 The X2 ranking value used between the ranking calculation intervals uses the ranking value calculated in the previous interval. X2 NR ranking uses S1/X2 HO statistics and is calculated as shown below:

1 Collecting HOIn (i) statistics for X2 NR i in X2 NRT oReceive HANDOVER REQUEST (S1/X2). oIndex eNB i corresponding to the top ECGI in Last Visited Cell Information IE included in UE History Information IE. oIncrease HOInS1 (i) or HOInX2 (i) by HO triggering type. oHOIn(i) = HOInS1 (i) + HOInX2 (i)

2 Collecting HOOut(i) statistics for X2 NR i in X2 NRT oTransmit HANDOVER REQUIRED (S1) or HANDOVER REQUEST (X2). oIncrease HOOutS1 (i) or HOOutX2(i) for eNB i as target of HO. oHOOut(i) = HOOutS1 (i) + HOOutX2 (i)

3 Calculating the currentX2Rank value by X2 NR as follows: currentX 2Ranki (k )  (1  )  previousX 2Ranki (k )    tempCurrentX 2Ranki (k )

k: X2 NR ranking calculation time Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

408

Chapter 9 SON

ω: IIR filtering coefficient previousX2Ranki(k): X2 rank value calculated in the previous interval tempCurrentX2Ranti(k) = HOOutRatei(k)+ HOInRatei(k)

HOOutRate(i) 

HOOut(i) I

max(1,  HOOut(i)) i 1

HOInRate(i ) 

HOinS1(i )  HOinX 2(i ) I

max( 1,  HOinS1(i )  HOinX 2(i )) i 1

I: Total number of X2 NRs in X2 NRT HOOut(i): S1/X2 HO-Out attempt count to neighbor eNB i at this interval HOInS1(i)/HOInX2(i): S1/X2 HO-Out attempt count collected to neighbor eNB i at this interval

4 Setting the currentX2Rank value for the new X2 NR j which existed within the NR ranking calculation period in X2 NRT

currentX 2Rank j (k )  defaultVal ueX 2 defaultValueX2: configurable system parameter 2) X2-NRT Size Management The maxX2NRTSize means the maximum number of X2 NRs, which can be included in the Intra-LTE X2 NRT, and is operated as the following:

1 maxX2NRTSize: Different initial value can be set per service provider. 2 The eNB does not include X2 NRs more than X2 NRT hard limit in Intra-LTE X2-NRT. Also, it manages the number of X2 NRs included in the Intra-LTE X2-NRT not to exceed the maxX2NRTSize every ranking period.

3 If the operator configures the X2GuaranteedBandInfo to maintain minimum number of X2 Links for a specific band indicator, the eNB performs X2 NR deletion function for X2-NRT size management by considering the value of the parameters in X2GuaranteedBandInfo. When an attempt occurs to add a new X2 NR, in the situation where there exist X2 NRs as many as maxX2NRTSize in Intra-LTE X2 NRT, eNB allows X2 NR addition until X2-NRT hard limit size and does not add the new X2 NR when there exist X2 NRs as many as X2-NRT hard limit. The eNB manages the number of X2 NRs included in the Intra-LTE X2-NRT not to exceed the maxX2NRTSize every ranking period through following operation.

1 Include in X2-NRT in order of X2 ranking among X2 NRs as noRemove = True. 2 In the order of index of band indicator in X2GuaranteedBandInfo, includes the X2 NRs which supports the band indicator in the X2-NRT from the order of higher X2 ranking until the number of X2 NR reaches minX2NrtSize.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

409

Chapter 9 SON

oIf the number of X2 NRs in X2-NRT is larger or equal to maxX2NRTSize at step (2), omit step (3). oThrough the steps (1) and (2), the number of X2 NRs can be larger than maxX2NrtSize.

3 Includes X2 NR in the X2-NRT from the order of higher X2 ranking until the number of X2 NR reaches maxX2NrtSize. X2-NRT Size Management operation is shown in the following figure:

3) Unnecessary X2 NR blacklisting In order to reduce X2 signaling load caused by invalid X2 NR, if ratio of handover attempt to an X2 NR is lower than predefined threshold, this function disconnects the X2 link with the unnecessary X2 NR. The operator can control this function‟s ON/OFF state. At the X2 NR ranking calculation point k, the serving eNB disconnects X2 Link by changing the attribute of noX2 of X2 NR i which meets the following conditions from False to True.

1 sonX2MgmtEnable = Auto & 2 nrX2BlackEnable = Auto & 3

& oavg.tempCurrentX2Rank_{i}(k): The average occurrence ratio of handover to X2 NR i during thTimeNrDel at the X2 NR ranking calculation point k

oweightThX2Black: weight factor for determining the threshold for judging the X2 NR as an invalid X2 NR oN_{NBR-eNB}: the number of X2 NRs which exist in X2-NRT more than thTimeNrDel

4 noRemove = False for X2 NR i Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

410

Chapter 9 SON

The following figure shows the statistics based X2 NR removal function.

4) X2 Link restoring eNB restores the X2 Link of the X2 NR by changing the attribute of noX2 from True to False if the currentX2Rank is larger than the predefined threshold at X2 NR ranking calculation point. The operator can control this function‟s ON/OFF state. At the X2 NR ranking calculation point k, the serving eNB restores X2 Link by changing the attribute of noX2 of X2 NR i which meets the following conditions from True to False.

1 sonX2MgmtEnable = Auto & 2 nrX2ReEnable = Auto & 3

& oweightThX2Black: weight factor for determining the threshold for judging the X2 NR as an X2 NR to be restored oN_{NBR-eNB}: the number of X2 NRs which exist in X2-NRT more than ranking calculation period (rankPeriod)

4 noRemove = False for X2 NR i Creates Neighbor Cell Lists for Measurement Configuration The LTE cell can transmit to UE the measurement configurations of a maximum of 32 frequencies and information of a maximum of 32 neighbor cells for each configuration (cell individual offset). Cell individual offset is a parameter which optimizes and improves each NR‟s HO performance in Samsung MRO function. For the purpose of joint optimization with Samsung MRO function, Samsung ANR function configures a maximum of 32 neighbor cell lists for each frequency‟s measurement configuration in the order of ranking. HO performance can be improved, when the cell individual offset value optimized for each neighbor cell is transmitted to UE in the order of the nearest coverage with the serving cell. The procedure for this operation is as follows.

1 NRs with isHOAllowed = True & isRemoveAllowed = False are configured in the neighbor cell list in the order of ranking.

2 (If it is not filled) NRs with isHOAllowed = True & isRemoveAllowed = True are configured in the neighbor cell list in the order of ranking. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

411

Chapter 9 SON

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Pre-condition The UE must support Intra-LTE ANR capability (that is, the UE capability & related feature group indicator bits are set to 1).

The UE has no GBR bearer (for example, QCI=1). Feature Activation & Action The related system parameters are configured as follows: oThe ANR_ENABLE value must be set to Manual or Auto. oTo enable periodic Scheduled ANR functionality, the NR_ADD_EVENT value must be set to anrMrBased or bothMrBased. oThe ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_TOTAL value must greater than 0. oFor Intra-Frequency periodic ANR functionality, the ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTRA_FREQ value must greater than 0. oFor Inter-Frequency periodic ANR functionality, the ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE_INTER_FREQ value must greater than 0. oThe concerned E-UTRA FA‟s ANR_UE_SEARCH_RATE value must greater than 0. oThe DRX_CONFIG_SETUP value must be set to Drx_Config_Setup or Drx_Config_reportCGI.

1 The eNB chooses UE for Scheduled ANR by ANR UE selection rules. 2 In case Intra-LTE ANR UE is selected, eNB configures ANR specific measurement configuration for UE (at this time, measurement duration timer is started in the eNB).

3 The UE transmits the measurement report to the eNB based on ANR specific measurement configuration.

4 When eNB receives non-neighbor E-UTRA cell from UE, it requests cell global identity to the UE (using reportCGI configuration).

5 If eNB successfully obtains the non-neighbor E-UTRA cell‟s CGI from UE, it registers the new E-UTRA cell into the own neighbor DB.

6 The eNB removes ANR specific measurement configuration for Scheduled ANR from the UE when the measurement duration timer is expired. (For mobility based Intra-LTE ANR) In case of the UE receives handover related measurement report from the UE, the eNB perform from 4) to 5) steps. Deactivation The ANR_ENABLE value must be set to OFF.

To disable Scheduled ANR functionality, the NR_ADD_EVENT value must be set to hoMrBased. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

412

Chapter 9 SON

Key Parameters This table describes SON property for NRT auto-configuration in LSM. Parameters for Initial NRT auto-configuration Parameters

Description

R Count

The number of neighbor cells used to calculate the inter-site distance for Initial NRT, PCI, and RSI auto-configuration.

NRT Type

Criteria for determining the effective distance used to generate the initial NRT. It can be set to minimum, average, or distance. Distance: Use of NRT Limit Distance as effective radius Average: Use of R multiplied by NRT Multiple as effective radius where R is the distance obtained by averaging the inter-site distance with the neighbor cells in the nearest order (The number of neighbor cells is R Count). Minimum: Use of R multiplied by NRT Multiple as the effective radius where R is the distance with nearest neighbor cell.

NRT Size

The number of neighbor cells that can be included in the initial NRT.

NRT Multiple

The coefficient which is multiplied to either the average distance of the cells as many as R Count or the distance of the nearest neighbor cell.

NRT Limit Distance

The maximum distance to the neighbor cell that can be included in the Initial NRT.

The operator can set the operation mode of Samsung ANR function to automatic/manual/deactivate or retrieve the mode through the following commands and parameter. Parameters for the operation mode control CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL Parameters

Description

ANR_ENABLE

The Intra-LTE Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) operation is controlled in 3 modes. Off (0): The Intra-LTE ANR function is not performed (X2-based NR deletion and NR ranking calculation is performed). Manual (1): Operator approval is required for NR deletion. Other ANR functions are performed automatically. Auto (2): All ANR functions are performed automatically.

The operator can configure or view method to manage X2 interface by using the following commands and parameters. Parameters for X2 interface management CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB Parameters

Description

SON_X2_MGMT_ENABLE

The flag controlling whether the automatic X2 interface management function is performed or not. Off (0): The automatic X2 interface management function is not performed. Auto (1): The automatic X2 interface management function is performed (X2 ranking calculation and the size management of X2 Neighbor

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

413

Chapter 9 SON Parameters

Description Relation Table (NRT)).

NR_X2_BLACK_ENABLE

The flag controlling whether the automatic X2 interface blacklisting function is performed or not. (Prerequisite: SON_X2_MGMT_ENABLE = Auto) Off (0): The automatic X2 interface blacklisting function is not performed. Auto (1): The automatic X2 interface blacklisting function is performed.

NR_X2_RE_ENABLE

The flag controlling whether the automatic X2 interface restore function is performed or not. (Prerequisite: SON_X2_MGMT_ENABLE = Auto) Off (0): The automatic X2 interface restoring function is not performed. Auto (1): The automatic X2 interface restoring function is performed.

Counters and KPIs Counters related to the Samsung ANR function are as follows: Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

HO

IntraEnbPrepSucc

The number of Intra-eNB handover preparation success to intra-eNB neighbor cell

IntraEnbSucc

The number of Intra-eNB handover execution success to intra-eNB neighbor cell

InterX2OutPrepSucc

The number of X2 HO preparation success to inter-eNB neighbor cell

InterX2OutSucc

The number of X2 HO execution success to inter-eNB neighbor cell

InterS1OutPrepSucc

The number of S1 HO preparation success to inter-eNB neighbor cell

InterS1OutSucc

The number of S1 HO execution success to inter-eNB neighbor cell

KPIs related to Samsung ANR function are as follows: KPI Name

Description

EutranMobilityHOIntra

Intra-eNB handover success rate of E-UTRAN mobility

EutranMobilityHOX2Out

X2 handover success rate of E-UTRAN mobility

EutranMobilityHOS1Out

S1 handover success rate of E-UTRAN mobility

CallDropRatio

Call drop rate

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 10). [2] 3GPP TS 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 10). [3] 3GPP TS 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions. [4] 3GPP TS 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

414

Chapter 9 SON

[5] 3GPP TS 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases. [6] 3GPP TS 36.413: E-UTRAN; S1 Application Protocol (Release 10). [7] 3GPP TS 36.423: E-UTRAN; X2 Application Protocol (Release 10).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

415

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO0301, PCI AutoConfiguration INTRODUCTION Samsung PCI optimization provides functions such as auto PCI configuration for initial PCI allocation during network installation, PCI collision, confusion detection, and auto PCI optimization for PCI reallocation. There are 504 PCIs in the LTE system. PCIs consist of the formula (1) using 168 unique physical layer cell identity groups, N_{ID}^{(1)} and 3 physical layer identities within the physical layer cell identity group, N_{ID}^{(2)} N_{ID}^{Cell}=3*N_{ID}^{(1)}+ N_{ID}^{(2)}…………………(1) N_{ID}^{(2)} is related to cell-specific reference signal location pattern. N_{ID}^{(1)} is a sequence number which is used N_{ID}^{Cell} with N_{ID}^{(2)} PCIs are used in synchronization and reference signal generation, which are involved in cell selection, handover and channel estimation procedures. According to 3GPP specification there are 504 unique physical-layer cell identities. The physical-layer cell identities are grouped into 168 unique physical-layer cellidentity groups, each group containing three unique identities. Samsung PCI optimization policy is as follows:

PCI allocated should satisfy the collision-free and confusion-free condition. PCI allocated should reduce inter-RS (cell-specific reference signal) interference. PCI reallocation can be performed based on either location or Neighbor Relation Table method.

PCI of the newest cell to be enabled in the network should be changed, when its collision occurs. (Newly grow cell should have the higher ECGI number).

BENEFIT With Samsung PCI optimization, the operator can reduce CAPEX/OPEX required for network installation and expansion.

Samsung PCI optimization guarantees the end users have improved mobility between cells.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Application of the PCI optimization requires location information of the cell where the PCI allocation is required. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

416

Chapter 9 SON

Limitation The location based PCI reallocation method of the PCI optimization might cause a PCI collision and confusion with a cell that does not use the same EMS.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Samsung PCI optimization operates in eNB's SON agent and EMS's SON manager. The overall structure is as follows:

The operation of each entity in this architecture is as follows: LSM SON Manager: PCI Management Function

Create initial PCI Performs a PCI reallocation upon receiving the PCI collision/confusion notify information message.

PCI reallocation cell selection Transmits a new PCI to the eNB of the cell whose PCI is changed. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

417

Chapter 9 SON

Transmit timer triggering notify information to eNB which has smaller ECGI. eNB: SON Agent SON Agent: PCI Management Function oTransmits a notify information message to the LSM and stores it in the DB when PCI collision/confusion is determined. oTimer running for waiting PCI reconfiguration when LSM trigger timer oWhen timer expires, transmit a new PCI allocation message to the LSM.

SON Agent: PCI collision/confusion Detection Function oDetects PCI collision/confusion using the X2_SETUP_REQUEST and eNB_CONFIGURATION_UPDATE messages received from the call processor. oDetects a PCI collision/confusion using the ECGI information received from the neighbor detection function.

PCI Auto-configuration The PCI auto-configuration function is performed in LSM. It aims to allocate PCIs based on the distance between cells to avoid PCI collision/confusion. Selects the reference distance from the cells that allocates PCI, and then allocates PCIs, assuring that all cells belonging to the same LSM within the reference distance avoid PCI collision/confusion. The following picture shows a brief overview of the PCI configuration.

There are two kinds of considering situation to avoid when PCI auto configuration is performed.

PCI collision oDefinition: where two cells with adjacent coverage use the same FA and PCI. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

418

Chapter 9 SON

oProblem: handover ambiguity occurs because UE existing on the border between the two cells cannot distinguish the serving cell from the neighbor cell. oThe following figure shows PCI collision:

PCI confusion oDefinition: where two cells adjacent to the coverage of the serving cell (cell B) use the same FA and PCI. oProblem: handover ambiguity occurs because the cell B is cannot distinguish which is the target cell. oThe following figure shows PCI confusion:

The PCI auto-configuration involves the following operations:

1 The LSM receives latitude/longitude coordinates of the installed cell from the operator or the GPS during eNB installation.

2 The LSM calculates the reference distance (D) (Refer to 2.2.1). 3 N_{ID}^{(2)} is allocated first for the PCI allocation cell. For the cell existing at the same location, ensure N_{ID}^{(2)} is not in neighborhoods with it by using its cell number.

4 Select PCIs other than the ones used by all cells that use the same LSM within the reference distance from the PCI allocation cell. If the cells within the reference distance (D) use all allocable PCIs, select PCIs by using the maximum reuse distance. Maximum reuse distance means the maximum distance between cells which the same PCI can be reused within D. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

419

Chapter 9 SON

Distance Calculation for PCI Auto-configuration PCIs are collected within the reference distance (D) to avoid PCI conflicts and D is calculated as follows:

D = MAX(R*R_Multi, LimiDist). R = Inter-site distance. R_multi = [0, 4]. LimitDist = [0, 100] km. The cells within reference distance (D) will be considered for new installed cell‟s PCI auto configuration. LSM calculate reference distance (D) with above 3 parameters R, R_multi, and LimitDist. The following is explanation of parameters for PCI auto-configuration:

R means basically Inter-site distance, but Inter-site distance from a cell to another cell can have all different value. So, Samsung support 3 different kinds of Inter-site distance R calculation mode. Inter-site distance R is calculated based on the selection below. ominimum: using R as distance of the nearest neighbour cell odistance: criteria of fixed distance oaverage: using R as average distance with cell inside LimitDist Operator can change the inter-site distance mode value in LSM SON Property GUI PCI Type menu.

R_multi is a scaling parameter for expansion Inter-site distance R. Operator can adjust the number of cells inside the distance D with R_multi. Operator can change R_multi value in LSM SON Property GUI PCI multiple menu.

LimitDist means minimum of the effective Distance D when allocating PCI. Even through dense deployment area, each cell should consider minimum distance LimitDist for PCI auto-configuration. Operator can change LimitDist value in LSM SON Property GUI PCI LimitDist menu.

PCI Optimization PCI Collision/Confusion Detection The PCI collision/confusion detection function is performed in SON agent of eNB. There is a list of PCI collision/confusion detection occurrence situation & prerequisite as below. When PCI collision/confusion is detected, SON agent reports to SON manager of LSM on the occurrence of PCI conflict and the 2TierNRT creation.

PCI conflicts detection occurrence oPCI change by operator oNew neighbor cell enrolled by ANR operation and Manually added neighbor Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

420

Chapter 9 SON

oX2 message information (FA, PCI, and ECGI) from neighbor eNB

Pre-requisite oNeighbor relation Table o2Tier Neighbor relation Table A pre-requisite for PCI confusion is that each cell creates and maintains its NRT for handover. A serving cell is only aware of its immediate neighbor cell (that is, NRT) and not its neighbor to neighbor PCI number (that is, 2TierNRT). PCI confusion occurs as a result of 2TierNRT PCI clash hence, a cell also needs to create a list of neighbor to neighbor cell PCI value, to detect PCI confusion. When a cell receive a X2 message from its immediate neighbor cell, it updates 2TierNRT PCI values, which is used for PCI confusion detection and deny PCI list, for new PCI allocation. The figure below shows more details about PCI Collision/Confusion Detection:

PCI Reallocation Cell Selection The PCI conflict always occurs in pair, PCI reallocation should change only one PCI. When LSM receives PCI conflict report from eNB, it determines one cell to change PCI based on ECGI. LSM selects the cell having higher ECGI between two cells contained in PCI conflict report. Also, it tries to change the PCI of the selected cell. In addition, instructs the cell with lower ECGI to start the timer for triggering the request for a new PCI. If the cell with a higher ECGI successfully changes its PCI, then eNB managing the cell sends its neighbor eNBs X2 message which informs the change of the PCI. If eNB managing the cell with a lower ECGI receives this X2 message, the cell recognizes the resolution of PCI conflict and then cancels the timer operation. Otherwise, the timer will be expired and the cell with a lower ECGI will recognize that PCI conflict is not resolved. Then, the cell with a lower ECGI requests LSM to reallocate a new PCI. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

421

Chapter 9 SON

PCI Reallocation Upon receiving the report of PCI conflict, SON manager of LSM selects the target cell for PCI reallocation. PCI reallocation procedures are performed once its cell is selected.

NRT based PCI reallocation (default) The NRT based PCI reallocation method is as follows: o2TierNRT PCI number is reported from eNB. oStep1) Delete the PCIs in the 2TierNRT from the PCI pool. oStep2) Reconfigure new PCI by PCI auto-configuration procedure in the same way self-configuration phase. PCI Collision Detection Based on UE Mobility The PCI collision detection function based on UE mobility focuses on the resolution of PCI conflict between neighboring eNBs when UE moves from one cell coverage to other one. By using this function, PCI collision can be detected even though there is no neighbor relation between two adjacent cells. UE cannot successfully perform HO: RLF occurs due to RF degradation and UE tries to synchronize with the target cell again. UE requests RRC Connection Reestablishment to the target cell but the request is rejected, because the target cell does not have UE Context.

PCI collision detection occurrence oThe UE moves from the serving cell to the target cell oThe UE experiences RLF event oThe UE tries RRC Re-establishment (RRE) procedure in the target cell oThe eNB of the target cell can detect PCI that can be potentially involved in the PCI collision

Condition for PCI collision detection There are three defined conditions that control PCI collision detection: oCondition 1: PCI in UE-Identity and PCI of the cell that receives Reestablishment request from UE are the same. oCondition 2: C-RNTI in UE-Identity has already existed in the cell that receives Re-establishment request from UE oCondition 3: Short MAC-I in UE-Identity is not identical to Short MAC-I that is calculated by the target cell oPCI collision is detected if condition 1 is satisfied and condition 2 is not satisfied, or all three conditions are satisfied at the same time.

Pre-requisite SON Manager at EMS differentiates PCI conflict message and PCI collision notification The following figure shows Samsung femto PCI collision detection based on UE mobility:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

422

Chapter 9 SON

Once SON Manager at LSM receives the notification of the PCI collision from eNB, it selects the cell for PCI reallocation based on obtained ECGI information. PCI reallocation procedure is the same as described previously. To exclude the redundancy of notification of PCI collision, LSM saves PCI collision event and waits until PCI reconfiguration time period starts. In this case, LSM begins to resolve PCI collision one by one during PCI reconfiguration period. If another timer that relates to PCI confusion event is running, LSM turns off the timer.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Pre-condition The PCI optimization function is activated in the LSM. Feature Activation & Action To activate this feature, PCID_ENABLE (system parameter) value must be set to Auto or Manual.

1 The eNB monitors X2 Setup Request, X2 Setup Response, and X2 eNB Configuration messages.

2 The eNB delivers PCI conflict information to the LSM when the PCI collision or confusion is detected.

3 If the new PCI is reassigned from the LSM, the eNB applies the new PCI to the system.

(SLR4.5.0) To activate PCI collision detection based on UE mobility information feature, PCI_COLLISION_DETECT_FLAG (system parameter) value must be set to True.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

423

Chapter 9 SON

Feature Deactivation To deactivate this feature, PCID_ENABLE (system parameter) value must be set to OFF.

(SLR4.5.0) To deactivate PCI collision detection based on UE mobility information feature, PCI_COLLISION_DETECT_FLAG (system parameter) value must be set to False.

Key Parameters The following tables show SON property for NRT auto-configuration in LSM: SON property setting for PCI Auto-configuration Parameters

Description

R Count

Number of neighbor cells used to calculate the inter-site distance for initial NRT, PCI, RSI auto-configuration

PCI Type

Criteria for determining the effective distance used to generate the initial PCI. It can be set to minimum, average, or distance. Distance: Use of PCI Limit Distance as effective radius Average: Use of R multiplied by PCI Multiple as effective radius where R is the distance obtained by averaging the inter-site distance with the neighbor cells in the nearest order (The number of neighbor cells is R Count). Minimum: Use of R multiplied by PCI Multiple as the effective radius where R is the distance with nearest neighbor cell.

PCI Multiple

The coefficient which is multiplied to either the average distance of the cells as many as R Count or the distance of the nearest neighbor cell.

PCI Limit Distance

The minimum distance to the neighbor cell that can be included in the Initial PCI.

Pico PCI White List

Set Pico PCI White List Can set up to 10 ranges. In case of entering none or space: allocated Pico PCI of that range Can set as number or number-number. (ex:0-100,150-200,300)

Macro PCI White List

Set Macro PCI White List Can set up to 10 ranges. In case of entering none or space: allocated Macro PCI of that range Can set as number or number-number. (ex:0-100,150-200,300)

The operator can set the operation mode of the Samsung PCI Auto-configuration function to automatic/manual/deactivate or retrieve the mode through the following commands and parameter. CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB Parameters

Description

PCID_ENABLE

Controls SON PCID operation at 3 stages. Off (0): Performs X2 monitoring. Manual (1): After initial PCI auto configuration, X2 monitoring and PCI collision/confusion detection are performed, the PCID in which collision/confusion was detected can be reallocated manually. Auto (2): After initial PCI auto configuration, X2 monitoring and PCI collision/confusion detection are performed, the PCID in which

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

424

Chapter 9 SON Parameters

Description collision/confusion was detected is reallocated automatically by the LSM SON manager.

PCI_COLLISION_DETECT_F LAG

This parameter controls the UE based PCI collision detection function. False (0): The PCI collision detection function and related notification message is not performed. True (1): The PCI collision detection function and related notification is performed.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9) [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9) [3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions [4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements [5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases [6] 3GPP 32.521: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Policy Network Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Requirements [7] 3GPP 32.522: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Policy Network Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Information Service (IS) [8] 3GPP 32.541: E-UTRAN; OAM Requirements for Self Healing Use Cases

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

425

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO0401, RACH Optimization INTRODUCTION Random Access Channel (RACH) of LTE system is the uplink channel defined in the 3GPP specifications. Depending on the purpose, RACH is classified into two types, the contention based method and the non-contention based method. The contention based method is used for the initial network connection of User Equipment (UE) and the non-contention-based method is used for the connection to the target cell during UE's handover. The actual information transmitted to RACH includes the Zadoff Chu (ZC) sequence whose total length is 839. The LTE System has total 838 ZC sequences (root sequences) for RACH and one ZC sequence can be reused by cyclic shifting. The UE transmits one sequence that is Random Access Preamble (RAP) through Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) that is the physical channel of RACH to connect initially to the network or attempt a connection to the target cell. Each cell of LTE System configures a RAP set with total 64 consecutive RAPs. As UE selects and uses any RAPs in this RAP set, the number of root sequences used in a cell is determined by the reuse number of one root sequence. A cell can use RAPs by dividing the 64 RAPs into preambles for random access and the dedicated preambles for handover. PRACH resource allocation in LTE System is determined by the PRACH configuration index and freq-offset. The PRACH configuration index indicates its allocation interval and the location of the subframe where it is transmitted. The PRACH freq-offset indicates the location of the physical resource block where it is allocated. The PRACH configuration index is used to determine the reuse number of root sequence. Each RACH resource parameter value can be determined with various combinations by HighSpeedFlag, Zero Correlation Zone Configuration (ZCZC), and Random Access Preamble format. Samsung RACH optimization method aims to minimize UE access delay and maximize UL capacity using various RACH resources. Also, its optimization function is placed in the eNB and EMS respectively. It collects RACH-related statistics, changes parameters using accumulated statistics, and detects RSI collision in eNB. It initially allocates RSI, reallocates RSI during operation, and changing some of RACH parameters in EMS. The configuration function of Samsung RACH optimization automatically determines RSI of the newly installed or grown cell. It sets the reference distance based on location of the installed cell to minimize RSI reuse within the reference distance. The optimization performs below functions: RSI collision detection and reallocation during the operation of the network, optimization of the number of dedicated preambles through the collection of RACH-related statistics, and optimization of the RACH time resources and optimization of the RACH transmission power of UE.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

426

Chapter 9 SON

BENEFIT The operator can reduce previously spent CAPEX and OPEX cost for configuring and managing the RSI and PRACH parameters of LTE cells.

Minimize UE access delay and maximize UL capacity

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Self Configuration oApplication of the RSI configuration requires location information of the cell where the RSI allocation is required.

Self Optimization oApplication of the RACH optimization needs 3GPP Rel.9 UE support including RACH- report in UE information message. Limitation Self Configuration oThe location based RSI allocation method might cause a RSI collision with a cell that does not use the same EMS.

Self Optimization oRSI allocation method might cause RSI reallocation failure when X2 connection is unable between eNBs.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Samsung RACH optimization operates in eNB's SON agent and EMS's SON manager. The overall structure is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

427

Chapter 9 SON

The architecture above shows, Samsung RO functions is executed at eNB‟s SON agent and EMS‟s SON Manager. The operation of each entity in this architecture is as follows: EMS SON Manager: RSI Management Function

Create initial RSI Performs a RSI reallocation upon receiving the RSI collision/confusion notify information message.

RSI reallocation cell selection Transmits a new RSI to the eNB of the cell whose RSI has been changed. eNB: SON Agent RO Statistic Management oIt periodically collects and accumulates the RO-related statistics information from UE and eNB. oIt receives changed RO-related parameters and transmits to the Radio Resource Control (RRC) block. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

428

Chapter 9 SON

RO Parameter Control Function oIt changes RO parameters at every RACH parameter decision interval based on accumulated RACH statistics.

RSI Collision Detection Function oIt detects RSI collision through the ENB_CONFIGURATION_UPDATE message received from the call processor.

Self-Configuration Procedure RSI Auto-configuration Samsung RSI auto-configuration is performed in EMS. Subsequently, it aims to allocate RSI that minimizes RS range overlap based on the input distances between cells. The RSI Auto-configuration function operates based on the distances from the cell that requires RSI allocation to other currently operating cells that use the same EMS. The closest cell among those is selected to configure the virtual neighbor. After that, the used root sequence set is calculated using the union of the virtual neighbor and the root sequence that the virtual neighbor is using. RSI is allocated by selecting an available RS range among RS in the whole root sequence pool excluding the used root Sequence set.

RSI auto configuration involves the following operation:

1 When installing a cell, EMS receives the latitude and longitude coordinates of the installed cell through the operator or GPS.

2 The operator inputs the parameters related to RO of SON Property window of EMS.

3 The distances to the currently operating cells that use the same FA among the cells within the already input NRT distance threshold are calculated, and in order of proximity, the NMax_virtual_NRT numbers of cells are selected to configure the virtual NRT. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

429

Chapter 9 SON

4 Used Root Sequence set is configured by collecting root sequences that are used by cells in Virtual NRT.

5 An available RS set is configured in the whole RS pool by excluding the used root sequence set.

6 RSI is allocated by selecting an allocable RS range among the available RS set. At this point, if there is no RS range among the available RS set that satisfies the consecutive RS, eNB includes RS range which is used in the farthest cell into the available RS set, and allocates RSI by selecting an allocable RS range among the available RS set. The eNB repeats step 6) until an RSI can be allocated to the growing cell. As mentioned in document, each cell should use continuous 64 PRACH preambles. PRACH preamble can be reuse based cyclic shift value which defined in 3GPP 36.211 table 5.7.2-2 as below: oN_{CS} for preamble generation (preamble formats 0-3) ZeroCorrelationZoneConfig

N_{CS} value Unrestricted Set

Restricted Set

0

0

15

1

13

18

2

15

22

3

18

26

4

22

32

5

26

38

6

32

46

7

38

55

8

46

68

9

59

82

10

76

100

11

93

128

12

119

158

13

167

202

14

279

237

15

419

-

oN_{CS} represents the number of cyclic shift oHigh speed flag(Boolean) : 0 then use Unrestricted set, 1 then use Restricted set oRoot sequence index : initial root sequence index oExample) if, ZCZC=9, high speed flag=0 Then, the number of reusable preamble with one root sequence is calculated as

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

430

Chapter 9 SON

Floor (838/59) = 14, Floor (total number of root sequence/cyclic shift value) So, one root sequence is reusable 14times oAs mentioned above one cell needs to have 64 continuous preamble. So, the number of required root sequence for one cell is calculated as Ceil (64/14) = 5, ceil (number of preamble for one cell/number of reusable preamble) oTherefore, 5 root sequence is required. oEMS figures out with above procedures.

7 Generate occupied root sequence index subset based on the all cells that use the same EMS within the reference distance.

8 Select RSI which has minimum number of root sequence index range out of unoccupied root sequence index set. PRACH Position Allocation The location of PRACH in an LTE system is determined by the PRACH configuration index along the time axis of the UL frame and by the PRACH frequency offset value along the frequency axis of the UL frame. When PRACHs that use 6RBs are at the same location in a heterogeneous network environment, interference between the PRACHs of macrocell and femtocell, and RSI collision may occur. Samsung RO function prevents interference of PRACH and RSI collision in heterogeneous networks by separating the frequency location of PRACH according to eNB type. The following figure shows PRACH separation on heterogeneous LTE network:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

431

Chapter 9 SON

Self Optimization The self-optimization function of Samsung RACH Optimization is divided into the event triggering operation and the periodic operation that is based on the statistics information collected during operation. The event triggering RO operation performs required operations when one of the following events is occurred during network operation: i) neighbor relation change, ii) change in root sequence of neighbor cell, iii) activation of RS collision detection and RSI reallocation function (from OFF to ON). The statistics based periodic RO operation controls PRACH InitialReceivedTargetPower, the number of dedicated preambles, and so on. according to periodically obtained RACH-related statistics. RSI Conflict Detection and Reallocation RS Collision Detection RS collision refers to a situation where two cells in neighbor relation use the same FA and RS. In this case, as UE of the two cells selects one preamble in an overlapping RS range and then transmits the PRACH preamble to attempt the initial connection to the network, the probability of contention increases. Therefore, it can degrade the performance of the initial network connection. The RS collision detection function is performed by SON Agent of eNB if RS collision detection and corresponding RSI reallocation function is activated. The RS collision detection function is performed for the following cases: oFor the case of two cells with Inter-eNB neighbor relation: The function operates when cell configuration change message is received through X2 interface. oFor the case of Intra-eNB neighbor cell: The function operates when eNB Configuration update of itself is performed. The SON Agent reports the occurrence of RS collision to SON manager of EMS when RS collision is detected.

RSI reallocation The SON manager of EMS receives RS collision reports and selects target cells for RS reallocation. The selection procedure is as follows: o(Case 1) In case that the function is already activated, a cell that has a bigger ECGI is selected as RSI reallocation cell based on the ECGIs of RS collision target cells. o(Case 2) In case that the status of RS collision detection and RSI reallocation function for a cell is changed from inactive (OFF) to active (ON), the cell is selected as RSI reallocation cell.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

432

Chapter 9 SON

Then, SON manager in EMS requests the selected cell to report the neighbor relation list. Meanwhile, for (Case 1), EMS transmits a timer triggering message to a cell with a smaller ECGI, and the cell receiving the message operates timer. If timer of the cell with a smaller ECGI has expired, the cell considers that RSI reallocation to the cell with a bigger ECGI has failed and requests the RSI reallocation again. At this point, if a RSI change message is received from the cell with a bigger ECGI after the timer has started running, timer of the cell with a smaller ECGI will be stopped. For (Case 2) where the status of RS collision detection and RSI reallocation function for a cell is changed from inactive (OFF) to active (ON), the operation of timer is not performed. The cell that received the NR list request transmits the NR list to EMS. Then, EMS configures used root sequence set by collecting root sequence used by neighbor cells in the NR list. When using the used root sequence set, EMS allocates RSI in the same way for the self-configuration procedure. If no RSI for reallocation is available, EMS does not reallocate RSI.

Periodic RACH Optimization There are two aspects of RACH optimization that is number of dedicated preamble and Initial ReceivedTargetPower. The following figure shows a procedural of RACH optimization:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

433

Chapter 9 SON

Dedi_Pre_Fail_Radio = Failure ratio of dedicated preamble allocation Avg_Pre_Sent_Num_Ratio = Average Number of Num of Preamble Sent Det_Cont_Ratio = Ratio of contention detected Thx_up/dn: threshold which is configurable in EMS Dedicated Preamble vs. Contention Preamble Adjustment An optimal number of dedicated preambles dictate new subscriber accessibility and HO latency. Using HO statistics, RO control function controls the number of dedicated preamble dynamically. For example - in a lightly loaded cell with low mobility activity, RO control function will split the available preambles to allow for more contention preambles. In a cell with lot of mobility activity and nearcapacity user count, RO control function will split the available preambles to have more dedicated preambles. The following figure shows the general flow of contention vs. dedicated preamble split:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

434

Chapter 9 SON

RO statistics management keeps statistics of dedicated preamble usage and computes a probability of dedicated preamble assignment failure based on DedicatedPreambles-AssignFail OM. If the configured probability, PROB_DEDICATED_INCREASE, exceeds configured threshold, DEDICATED_INCREASE, dedicated preambles are increased. In a similar fashion-if configured probability-PROB_DEDICATED_DECREASE falls below a configured threshold of DEDICATED_DECREASE, dedicated preambles are decreased. The following figure shows the general flow of dedicated vs. contention preamble split:

PRACH Channel Configuration for RACH Optimization 3GPP spec allows for several configurations that signal the configuration of PRACH channel-via SystemInformationBlockType2. Since PRACH is a common uplink control channel, it is wasteful to allocate RACH region in all sub-frames. eNB can choose to declare the location of subframe and the periodicity of PRACH based on prachConfigIndex. The following figure shows the mapping of prachConfigIndex to physical location of PRACH region: Parameter

Allowed Values

powerRampingStep (dB)

0, 2, 4, 6,

preambleInitialReceivedTargePower (dBm)

-120, -118, -116, -114, -112, -110, -108, -106, -104, -102, -100, 98, -96, -94, -92, -90

prachConfigIndex

Refer to the table below

The following table shows the PrachConfigindex to RACH region mapping:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

435

Chapter 9 SON

As an example, PRACH configuration Index of 0 means UE should use Preamble format 0 and transmit the preamble in even system frame numbers on subframe number 1. This translates to PRACH location in 1st subframe in every 20 milliseconds. PRACH configuration also includes power related parameters. eNB performs statistical analysis of RACH related OMs and optimizes RACH configuration based on performance. The following figure provides an overview of optimization algorithm:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

436

Chapter 9 SON

RO statistics management receives RACH statistics related number of preambles sent and contention detected. eNB sends ULInformationTransferRequest message with rach-ReportReq set to TRUE. If numberOfPreamblesSent is greater than a configured threshold, eNB checks for contentionDetected flag and computes contention detection probability if available. Based on the RACH statistics, PRACH related parameters are adjusted as follows:

> if contention detection probability-PROB_CONTENTION_INCREASE is greater than a configured threshold value, CONTENTION_INCREASE, then eNB configures opportunity (or PRACH density) related parameters, prachConfigIndex, to allow more PRACH opportunities. [This is a scenario where UEs are not able to capture PRACH channel due to less opportunities, which is causing a lot of preamble collision.]

> if contention detection probability-PROB_CONTENTION_INCREASE is less than the configured threshold value, CONTENTION_INCREASE, then eNB increases preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower which allows for higher initial power while sending first RACH preamble. [This is a scenario where UEs are not able to capture PRACH channel due to inadequate preamble power. Thus, it takes more retries-while slowly increasing power, to get RACH response] If numberOfPreamblesSent AND contention detection probability fall below their respective configured thresholds, PRACH density and power parameters are lowered.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Pre-condition The RACH optimization function is activated in the EMS.

The UE supports RACH report functionality (that is, UE Information procedure). Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

437

Chapter 9 SON

The X2 messages include PRACH Configuration information. Feature Activation & Action To activate RACH optimization feature, RACH_OPT_ENABLE value must be set to Auto.

To activate RS conflict detection and RSI reallocation feature, RSI_CONFLICT_ENABLE value must be set to Auto.

1 For RACH optimization, eNB requests RACH report information to UE that is connected to the serving (that is, Attach or Idle-to-Active cases) or target cell (for example, Handover case).

2 The eNB successfully performs UE Information procedure with UE and then controls related counters using received RACH report information.

3 For RS collision detection and RSI reallocation, eNB monitors the X2 Setup Request, X2 Setup Response, and X2 eNB Configuration Update messages.

4 The eNB checks if RS collision occurs using the received RACH configuration information.

5 If RS collision is detected, eNB reports RS conflict message to the EMS. 6 If new RSI is reallocated from the EMS, eNB adapts new RSI value to the system. Deactivation To deactivate RACH optimization feature, RACH_OPT_ENABLE value must be set to OFF.

To deactivate RS collision detection and RSI reallocation feature, RSI_CONFLICT_ENABLE value must be set to OFF.

Key Parameters The following table describes SON property for RSI auto-configuration in LSM. SON property window for RSI auto-configuration Parameters

Description

R Count

Number of Cell to use for calculating average of NRT, PCI, RSI.

RSI Type

Criteria of the effective radius when allocating RSI. Can set to minimum, average or distance. minimum: using R as distance with nearest neighbor cell. distance: criteria of fixed distance. average: use of R multiplied by RSI Multiple as effective radius where R is the distance obtained by averaging the inter-site distance with the neighbor cells in the nearest order (The number of neighbor cells is R Count).

RSI Multiple

Expansion range of calculating the effective distance when allocating RSI.

RSI Limit Distance

Minimum of the effective radius when allocating RSI.

The operator can set the operation mode of Samsung RACH Optimization function to activate/deactivate the mode through the following commands and parameter. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

438

Chapter 9 SON

CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL Parameters

Description

RACH_OPT_ENABLE

The parameter is used to control the RACH Optimization operation in three modes. Off (0): RO function is disabled, except X2 interface monitoring Manual (1): RO related parameters are change by operator’s confirmation. Auto (2): All RO related parameters are change automatically

RSI_CONFLICT_ENABLE

RSI reallocation function Enable/Disable

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

Random Access Preambles

HighSpeedMonitoring

The number of UEs which are monitored for moving speed

NoOfHighSpeed

The number of high speed UEs which are monitored

DedicatedPreambles

The number of detected dedicated preambles.

DedicatedPreamblesA ssignFail

The number of failures to get dedicated preamble allocation after requesting the dedicated preamble from RRC to MAC

RandomlySelectedPre amblesLow

The number of the preambles belonging to Group A among the detected contention based preambles

RandomlySelectedPre amblesHigh

The number of the preambles belonging to Group B among the detected contention based preambles

RACHUsage

Average number of detected preambles Calculate when reporting the statistics information: Sum (RACHUsageTot)/sum (RACHUsageCnt)

Preamblesent1

The cumulative number of times when the numberOfPreamblesSent value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE is 1

Preamblesent2

The cumulative number of times when the numberOfPreamblesSent value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE is 2.

Preamblesent3

The cumulative number of times when the numberOfPreamblesSent value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE is 3.

Preamblesent4

The cumulative number of times when the numberOfPreamblesSent value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE is 4.

Preamblesent5

The cumulative number of times when the numberOfPreamblesSent value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE is 5.

Preamblesent6

The cumulative number of times when the numberOfPreamblesSent value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE is 6.

Preamblesent7

The cumulative number of times when the

RACH Usage

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

439

Chapter 9 SON Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description numberOfPreamblesSent value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE is 7.

Preamblesent8

The cumulative number of times when the numberOfPreamblesSent value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE is 8.

Preamblesent9

The cumulative number of times when the numberOfPreamblesSent value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE is 9 or more.

RachContention

This counter collects the contentionDetected value in the rachReport information of the RRC UE information response message received from the UE.

RachReportsRcvNum

The cumulative number of times when the rachReport information is received in the RRC UE information response message received from the UE.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9) [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9) [3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions [4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON); Concepts and requirements [5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; Concepts and requirements [6] 3GPP 32.521: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Policy Network Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Requirements [7] 3GPP 32.522: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Policy Network Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Information Service (IS) [8] 3GPP 32.541: E-UTRAN; Self-Organizing Networks (SON); Self-healing concepts and requirements

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

440

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO0602, Cell Outage Compensation INTRODUCTION Samsung Cell Outage Compensation (COC) adjusts the transmission power of RRH automatically, if the outage occurs for a specific cell during the operation of LTE system to compensate a cell outage area. Also, this consists of cell outage detection, cell outage compensation, and cell outage clear functions.

1 Cell outage detection oThe eNB detects the occurrence of cell outage and if the cell outage occurred, it reports cell outage to the EMS.

2 Cell outage compensation oIf the EMS receives report on the cell outage from eNB, it selects a cell to participate in the COC to compensate the cell outage and determines the transmission power of RRH of the cell. The cell to participate in COC is excluded from the Coverage and Capacity Optimization (CCO). oThe EMS transmits to eNB the transmission power of RRH of the cell to participate in COC as determined above. oThe eNB applies the received transmission power of RRH.

3 Cell outage clear oIf the cell outage is released, eNB reports it to the EMS. oIf the EMS receives report on the release of the cell outage, it sets the transmission power of RRH of the outage cell. As a result, the cell to participate in the COC before cell outage as the transmission power value and transmits it to eNB. At the time, the outage cell and the cell to participate in COC are included against as targets for CCO. oThe eNB applies the received transmission power of RRH. The transmission power of RRH of each cell may be controlled by CCO function and COC function. To prevent conflicts between the two functions, COC function has the higher priority than CCO function. Accordingly, if both CCO function and COC function are operated, the transmission power of RRH is adjusted as follows:

If a specific cell is participating in COC, in other words, if the cell uses the maximum transmission power to compensate the outage area, the transmission power of RRH of the cell is not adjusted by CCO function.

If the specific cell does not participate in COC, the transmission power of RRH of the cell may be adjusted by CCO function.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

441

Chapter 9 SON

BENEFIT Operator can reduce operational cost by automatic cell outage detection and compensation functions.

After cell outage occurs, users in cell outage area can be in service in a short time.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency:

This feature supports only Macro and Outdoor Pico systems. Limitations:

In case that Tx power of the COC candidate cell is set to maximum value, its Tx power value is not changed anymore when outage of its neighbor cell is detected.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Network Structure The network architecture for COC in LTE system is as shown below. The main network entities (NEs) in the network architecture include eNBs and EMS. The connection between EMS and eNB represents a management interface. Also, eNBs and EMS exchange information for the performance of COC through the management interfaces. The following figure is Network architecture for COC in LTE system:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

442

Chapter 9 SON

The main NEs for the operation of COC are as follows:

1 eNB oDetects a cell outage oReports occurrence of the cell outage to the EMS. oReceives transmission power by RRH of the cell to participate in the COC to compensate the cell outage from the EMS. Applies transmission power of RRH of the cell. Delivers information on the changed transmission power of the RRH through SIB2. oIf the cell outage becomes clear, reports it to the EMS. oReceives transmission power by RRH before the occurrence of COC of the outage cell and the cell participating in COC from the EMS. Applies transmission power of RRH of the cell. Delivers information on the changed transmission power of the RRH through SIB2.

2 EMS oReceives the occurrence of a cell outage from eNB. oDetermines a cell to participate in COC. Saves the information on the outage cell and the cell to participate in COC. oExcludes the cell to participate in COC from the operation of CCO. Determines transmission power of the cell to participate in COC. Delivers transmission power of the cell to participate in COC to eNB. Receives the cell outage clear from eNB. (Check the status of eNB cell regularly.) If the cell outage becomes clear, includes the cell to participate in COC in the targets for COC. Delivers the transmission power by RRH before the occurrence of COC of the outage cell and the cell participating in COC.

COC Operation Procedure The operation procedure of Samsung COC is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

443

Chapter 9 SON

1 The eNB detects occurrence of the cell outage. 2 The eNB delivers the CELL_OUTAGE_DETECTION message including the information on the outage cell to the EMS.

3 The EMS selects a cell to participate in COC among the neighbor cells of the outage cell.

4 The EMS stores the information on the outage cell and the cell to participate in COC (for example, eNB ID, cell ID, and transmission power of RRH before the occurrence of the cell outage).

5 The EMS excludes the cell to participate in COC from the operation of CCO. 6 The EMS determines transmission power of RRH of the cell to participate in COC.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

444

Chapter 9 SON

7 The EMS delivers the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message including the transmission power by RRH for the cell to participate in COC managed by eNB to the eNB including the cell to participate in COC.

8 The eNB sets the transmission power of the RRH depending on the transmission power of the cell to participate in COC included in the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message.

9 The eNB delivers the information on the changed transmission power of the RRH through SIB2.

10 The EMS checks status of the cell regularly until it receives the CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message from eNB or status of the outage cell is enabled.

11 The eNB performs cell outage recovery. 12 The eNB delivers the CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message including the information on the cell to the EMS, if the cell outage is relieved.

13 The EMS checks whether it receives the CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message or status of the outage cell is enabled.

14 The EMS includes a cell whose outage is released to participate in COC in the target for CCO.

15 The EMS delivers the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message including the transmission power by RRH before outage occurrence of the cell relating to COC managed by the eNB to the eNB including the COC-related cell (the cell whose outage is relieved and the cell to participate in COC).

16 The eNB sets the transmission power of the RRH depending on the transmission power of the COC-related cell by RRH to the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message.

17 The eNB delivers the information on the changed transmission power of the RRH through SIB2.

COC Algorithm (Sub1) Cell Outage Detection The eNB detects the occurrence of the cell outage for the cell outage detection function and reports it to the EMS.

1 Detecting the occurrence of a cell outage Samsung COC function defines an outage cell as follows: oIf status of the cell is maintained as being disabled during a specific period of time (DisableDuration) If status of the cell is disabled due to the lock by operator, the cell is not considered as an outage cell.

2 Reporting the occurrence of the cell outage to the EMS If the cell managing by eNB is decided as an outage cell, the eNB reports the CELL_OUTAGE_ DETECTION message to the EMS. The CELL_OUTAGE_DETECTION message includes followings: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

445

Chapter 9 SON

oOutageeNBID: The ID of eNB transmitting the CELL_OUTAGE_DETECTION message oOutageCellID: The ID of the cell where the outage occurs oTxPdBm: The transmission power of RRH of the cell where the outage occurs (Sub2) Cell Outage Compensation When the EMS receives the CELL_OUTAGE_DETECTION message from eNB, it performs the following procedure:

1 Selecting the cell to participate in COC and saving the relevant information 2 Excluding the cell to participate in COC from the operation of CCO 3 Determining the transmission power of the RRH of the cell to participate in COC

4 Delivering and applying the transmission power of the RRH of the cell to participate in COC

5 Checking status of the outage cell regularly The detail for the aforementioned procedure is as follows:

(Sub2) Selecting a cell to participate in COC and determining the transmission power of the RRH (Procedures from 1 to 3) The EMS checks the outage cell from the CELL_OUTAGE_DETECTION message transmitted by eNB, and checks the value of FrequencyRange (=Intra-Frequency or Inter-Frequency) of SON Property. In case that FrequencyRange=Intra-Frequency, cells satisfying all the following conditions are selected to participate in COC for the outage cell: oAmong neighbor cells in outage cell‟s NRT, neighbor cell using the same frequency with the outage cell oCells set to participate in COC oIf the handover attempt count to the cell during a day exceeds zero In case that FrequencyRange=Inter-Frequency, cells satisfying all the following conditions are selected to participate in COC for the outage cell: oAll the neighbor cells in outage cell‟s NRT oCells set to participate in COC oIf the handover attempt count to the cell during a day exceeds zero The EMS saves eNB ID, cell ID, and the current transmission power of the RRH for the outage cell and the selected cells to participate in COC through the aforementioned conditions. After excluding the cells to participate in COC from the CCO operation, the EMS sets the transmission power of the RRH of the cell to the transmission power to the maximum.

(Sub2) Delivering and applying the transmission power of the RRH of the cell to participate in COC (Procedure 4)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

446

Chapter 9 SON

The EMS delivers to eNB that manages the cells to participate in COC transmission power of the RRH of the pre-determined cells to participate in COC through the COC_COMP_RRH_RX_POWER_RECONFIG message. The COC_COMP_RRH_RX_POWER_RECONFIG message includes the eNB ID, ID of the cell to participate in COC, the RRH index of the cell, and the transmission power value of the RRH. The eNB that receives the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message sets the transmission power of the RRH of the cell managed by the eNB to the transmission power value in COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG. After changing the power transmission of the RRH, eNB delivers to UE the information on the changed power transmission of the RRH through SIB2.

(Sub2) Checking status of the outage cell (Procedure 5) After sending the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message, the EMS checks status of the outage cell regularly until the following conditions are satisfied: oReceiving the CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message from eNB which manages the outage cell oChecking that status of the outage cell is enabled by checking the status of the cell regularly (Sub1) Cell Outage Clear When the EMS receives the CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message from eNB or checks whether status of the outage cell is enabled, the following operation is performed:

1 Detecting and reporting cell outage clear 2 Including the cells to participate in COC in the cells for CCO 3 Determining the transmission power of the RRH of the COC-related cells (the outage cell and cells to participate in COC) before occurrence of the cell outage

4 Delivering and setting the transmission power of the RRH of the COC-related cells The detail for the aforementioned procedure is as follows:

(Sub2) Detecting and reporting cell outage clear (Procedure 1) aIn case of detecting cell outage clear by reporting to eNB If status of the outage cell is changed from disabled to enabled, the eNB decides the outage of the cell is cleared and reports the CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message to the EMS. The CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message includes the cell ID information of the cell whose outrage is released.

bIn case of detecting the release of cell outage through checking the status of the cell of EMS periodically The EMS checks status of outage cell regularly and if status of outage cell is changed to enabled, the EMS decides the status as cell outage clear. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

447

Chapter 9 SON

(Sub2) Recovering the transmission power of the COC-related cell (Procedure from 2 to 3) When the EMS checks the release of the cell outage (whether the status of the cell is enabled by receiving the CELL_OUTAGE_CLEAR message from the eNB or through the regular checkup of the EMS), the EMS includes the cell to participate in COC again in the cell for CCO. After that, the EMS determines the transmission power of the RRH of the COC-related cells (an outage cell which is released and a cell to participate in COC) as the saved value when the cell outage compensation operation is performed.

(Sub2) Delivering and setting the transmission power of the RRH of the COCrelated cell (Procedure 4) The EMS transmits transmission power value of the RRH pre-determined to eNB through the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message. The COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message includes the eNB ID, IDs of the cells to participate in COC, the RRH index of the cell, and the transmission power value of the RRH. The eNB that receives the COC_COMP_RRH_TX_POWER_RECONFIG message sets the transmission power of the RRH of the COC-related cell as the transmission power before the occurrence of the cell outage included in the message. After that, eNB delivers the information on the changed transmission power of the RRH through SIB2.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The operator sets the COC operation to auto or manual of the SON_COC_FUNC_ENABLE value of eNB to operate the COC to activate the COC operation. In addition, the operator sets the SON_CCO_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value of the cell to change the transmission power to auto through the COC operation. Provided, however, that the SON_COC_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value cannot be applied as auto for the cell in the eNB whose SON_COC_FUNC_ENABLE is Off. The CCO operation-related parameter settings are as follows:

FrequencyRange: Frequency range considered when selecting cells to participate in COC

DISABLE_DURATION: Waiting time to decide as cell outage Key Parameters The operator may set frequency range considered when selecting cells to participate in COC by using FrequencyRange of SON Property. Parameters

Description

FrequencyRange

Frequency range which will be considered when selecting cells to participate in COC

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

448

Chapter 9 SON

The operator may change and retrieve the operating mode, either automatic or release, in Samsung COC by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB Parameters

Description

SON_COC_FUNC_ENABLE

In SON, determines the enable of the cell outage compensation (COC) SON. Off: Turn off the function. Manual: Turn on the function. The operator applies the COC result after checking it. Auto: Turn on the function. Apply the COC result automatically.

The operator may change and retrieve the Tx power changing mode of each cell by COC, either automatic or release, by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL Parameters

Description

SON_COC_PWR_CTRL_ENA BLE

In SON, determines the enable of the transmission power changing function by the cell outage compensation (COC) algorithm. Off: Turn off the function. Auto: Parameters may be changed by an algorithm.

Counters and KPIs Samsung COC function uses the following statistical information. Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

HO_INTRA

IntraEnbSucc

The number of Intra-eNB handover execution success to intra-eNB neighbor cell

HO_X2_OUT

InterX2OutAtt

The number of X2 HO execution attempt to inter-eNB neighbor cell

HO_S1_OUT

InterS1OutAttempt

The number of S1 HO execution attempt to inter-eNB neighbor cell

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9) [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9) [3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions [4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements [5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

449

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO0702, Coverage and Capacity Optimization INTRODUCTION Samsung CCO has the purpose of optimizing the coverage. Also, it is used as a function of adjusting the transmission power of the RRH automatically to optimize the coverage during the operation of LTE system. Samsung CCO consists of three detailed functions as follows:

1 Detecting the occurrence of a coverage hole oDetermines a coverage hole based on the information on the RLF report from UE.

2 Collecting information oCollects and reports the coverage holes, UE in and out and hand-out-related statistics

3 Coverage optimization oDetermines and sets the transmission power of the RRH based on the information on the collected network status.

BENEFIT To reduce the optimization costs during the operation by adjusting the transmission power of the RRH depending on the network status

To guarantee less call drop and seamless service by adjusting the transmission power of the RRH depending on the network status

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency:

RLF report from UE supported: To collect the RF environment information upon the occurrence of the RLF of the UE, the UE must support the RLF report function.

This feature supports only Macro and Outdoor Pico systems. Limitations:

The transmission power of the RRH for the cells to participate in COC determined by COC is impossible to be adjusted.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

450

Chapter 9 SON

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Architecture The figure below shows Samsung CCO-related network architecture and the main network entities include eNBs and the EMS:

The main functions of eNBs and EMS are as follows:

1 eNB oDetects a coverage hole. oCollects information to adjust the transmission power of the RRH (coverage hole, UE in and out and hand-out-related statistics). oReports collected information to the EMS. oReceives transmission power of RRHs from the EMS. oApplies transmission power of the RRH. oDelivers information on changed transmission power of the RRH through SIB2.

2 EMS oCollects information to adjust the transmission power of the RRH from the eNB (coverage hole, UE in and out, and hand-out-related statistics). oDecides transmission power of the RRH based on the received information. oDelivers transmission power by RRH to eNB.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

451

Chapter 9 SON

CCO Function CCO Operation Flow The whole operating flow of Samsung CCO is as follows:

1 The EMS delivers the CCO-related PLD to eNB. 2 The eNB detects a coverage hole based on the RLF report from the terminal. 3 The eNB collects information on the coverage hole-related statistics to detect the coverage hole during the Report period.

4 The eNB collects statistics related to UE in to and UE out from the cell managed by itself during the Report period.

5 The eNB collects statistics related to the hand-out count to the neighbor cell among the cells managed by it during the Report period.

6 The eNB delivers to EMS statistics relating to the collected coverage holes, UE in and out and hand-out during the Report period.

7 The EMS decides transmission power of the RRH considering the network status based on the information collected from eNB (coverage hole-related statistics) at every CCO period.

8 The EMS delivers decided transmission power of the RRH to eNB.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

452

Chapter 9 SON

9 The eNB changes cell configuration information based on the received transmission power of the RRH and delivers the information on the changed transmission power of the RRH to UE through SIB2.

CCO Algorithm Samsung CCO has the purpose of optimizing the coverage. Also, it is used as a function of adjusting the transmission power of the RRH automatically to optimize the coverage during the operation of LTE system. Samsung CCO operates as follows:

1 Detecting a coverage hole oDetermining a coverage hole based on the information on the RLF report from UE

2 Collecting and reporting information oCollecting and reporting the coverage holes, UE In/Out and hand-out-related statistics

3 Deciding the transmission power of the RRH oDeciding transmission power of the RRH based on the information on the collected network status

4 Configuring the transmission power of the RRH oApplying transmission power of the RRH decided to the RRH oChanging and delivering to UE the system parameters depending on the decided transmission power of the RRH Detailed explanation on the detailed operations of each algorithm is as follows:

(Sub2) Detecting a coverage hole When the RLF is generated by using the RLF report information (serving RSRP, serving RSRQ or neighbor RSRP) from UE, the eNB determines the occurrence of the coverage hole if the predicted SINR is less than the SINR threshold.

(Sub2) Collecting and reporting coverage hole statistics When a coverage hole is detected during the CCO period, eNB calculates the difference of the transmission power of the serving cell or neighbor cell. Also, the both cells are having the same frequency with serving cell to remove the coverage hole and collect the coverage hole-related statistics (count of calculating difference of transmission power, and sum of the difference of the transmission power). Besides, eNB collects the statistics relating to UE in to, or UE out from, the cell managed by it during the Report period. The eNB reports to the EMS the statistics relating to the collected coverage holes, UE in-and-out and hand-out during the Report period.

Deciding the transmission power of the RRH

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

453

Chapter 9 SON

The EMS calculates the transmission power of the cell in every CCO period to remove the coverage hole by using the statistical information relating to the coverage hole, UE in-and-out and hand-out received from eNBs (count of calculating difference of transmission power, and sum of the difference of the transmission power) which are collected during CCO period as follows:

aEMS calculates each cell‟s count of calculating difference of transmission power and the count of UE in-and-out based on the statistical information from eNB. For the count of calculating difference of transmission power and the count of UE in-and-out, only the information that are collected by neighbor cell with the same cell type (macro cell or pico cell).

bEMS calculates the ratio of the coverage hole for the current transmission power of the cell by using the count of calculating difference of transmission power and the count of UE in-and-out as shown below, and calculates average coverage hole ratio based on IIR filtering. Coverage hole ratio = count of calculating difference of transmission power/UE in and out count The above average coverage hole ratio for the transmission power of the cell represents the degree of the occurrence of the coverage hole based on the transmission power of the cell.

cEMS calculates sum of the difference of transmission power and the count of calculating difference of transmission power by using the information on the statistics from eNB. For the calculation of each cell‟s sum of the difference of transmission power and the count of calculating difference of transmission power, only the information collected by neighbor cell with the same cell type (macro cell or pico cell) is considered.

dEMS calculates the candidate transmission power for each cell to remove the coverage hole by using the sum of the difference of transmission power and the count of calculating difference of transmission power as follows: Candidate transmission power = current transmission power + (the sum of the difference of the transmission power/count of calculating difference of transmission power)

eEMS decides the transmission power of each cell by using the average coverage hole ratio within the scope of [candidate transmission power and current transmission power] of the cell in a direction to removing the coverage hole. However, the collected statistical information for the cell whose UE in-and-out count is less than UE in-and-out count threshold is saved and the transmission power is maintained as it is. Additionally, to prevent the coverage hole area from being increased by reducing the transmission power of the cell and the neighbor cell, if there is a neighbor cell whose hand-out account exceeds the hand-out threshold and whose state of transmission power is reduced for the cell whose transmission power is determined to be reduced through the aforementioned course, the transmission power is prohibited from being reduced and the current transmission power is maintained.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

454

Chapter 9 SON

(Sub2) Configuring the transmission power of the RRH EMS delivers the decided transmission power of the RRH of the cell to eNB. The eNB configures the RRH transmission power of the cell with that of the cell received from the EMS. Also, it transmits information on the changed RRH transmission power of the cell to UE through SIB2.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The operator sets the CCO operation to „auto‟ or „manual' of the SON_CCO_FUNC_ENABLE value of eNB to operate the CCO to activate the CCO operation. In addition, the operator sets the SON_CCO_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value of the cell to change the transmission power to „auto‟ through the CCO operation. However, the SON_CCO_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value cannot be applied as „auto‟ for the cell in the eNB whose SON_CCO_FUNC_ENABLE is „OFF‟. The CCO operation-related parameter settings are as follows:

POWER_RANGE: Scope of adjusting the transmission power POWER_STEP_SIZE: Step size used to calculate the difference of the transmission power

COVERAGE_HOLE_SINR: SINR threshold corresponding to the coverage hole UE_IN_OUT_THRESHOLD: UE in-and-out count threshold COVERAGE_HOLE_RATIO_EXPIRE_TIME: Average coverage hole ratio maintaining time

Key Parameters The operator may change and retrieve the operating mode, either automatic or release, in Samsung CCO by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB Parameters

Description

SON_CCO_FUNC_ENABLE

In SON, determines the enable of the CCO (coverage & capacity optimization) SON. Off: Turn off the function Auto: The changed parameter is automatically applied to operation when the parameter is changed by the algorithm.

The operator may change and retrieve the Tx power changing mode of each cell by CCO, either automatic or release, by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

455

Chapter 9 SON Parameters

Description

SON_CCO_PWR_CTRL_ENA BLE

In SON, decide enable of the transmission power changing function by CCO. Off: Turn off the function Auto: Parameters may be changed by an algorithm.

Counters and KPIs Samsung CCO function uses the following statistical information. Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

HO_INTRA

IntraEnbSucc

The number of Intra-eNB handover execution success to intraeNB neighbor cell

HO_X2_OUT

InterX2OutAtt

The number of X2 HO execution attempt to inter-eNB neighbor cell

HO_S1_OUT

InterS1OutAttempt

The number of S1 HO execution attempt to inter-eNB neighbor cell

HO_X2_IN

InterX2InSucc

The number of X2 HO execution success from inter-eNB neighbor cell to own eNB cell

HO_S1_IN

InterS1InSucc

The number of S1 HO execution success from inter-eNB neighbor cell to own eNB cell

RRC_REESTAB

ConnReEstabSucc

The number of success of RRC_REESTAB

MRO_RLF

TooLateHoRlfBeforeT riggering

RLF occurrence count by too late HO before HO triggering

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9) [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9) [3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions [4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements [5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

456

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO0802, Cell On/Off in Multi-carrier Sites INTRODUCTION This feature supports macro cell on/off function in multi-carrier environment. By switching off unnecessary cells, the power consumption can be reduced. Moreover, RU transmission power can be saved when all cells in the RU are switched off. To minimize service impact to UEs, this feature should be operated in the environment that multi-carriers are overlapped in a co-located site. Two types of cell on/off mechanisms can be supported: Predefined Time schedule based (SSR4.0/SLR5.0) and Traffic load based (next PKG).

BENEFIT Power consumption can be reduced by switching off unnecessary cells.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Limitation Multi cells need to be overlapped in a co-located site

The energy saving effect can be different according to HW configuration

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Architecture The architecture of Cell on/off function is as follow.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

457

Chapter 9 SON

Operators can configure policies for Cell on/off function using EMS. The function operates according to the configured policies. The role of each blocks participating in this function is as follow.

1 EMS EMS provides GUI for configuring policies for operator and transfers the configured policies to eNB.

2 Call block Call block executes Cell on/off function according to operator configured policies. It will release calls in the cell at cell switch off condition and transfer the result of cell switch off to neighbor cells. Moreover, cell activation can be executed when traffic load is over threshold.

3 OAM OAM block transfers Tx on/off message to RU according to the result of this function and HW configuration.

4 RU RU executes Tx on/off according to message from OAM block.

Operation The concept of cell off operation is as follow.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

458

Chapter 9 SON

Cell switch off operation can be executed only for the cells that are co-located in a same site. The target cell to switch off will release existing call by forced handover. When all calls are released in the cell, the cell will be switched off and the cell is managed as dormant cell. Pre-defined Time Schedule based ES Time schedule based function operates cell switch on/off according to the time schedule configured by operator. The policies that need to be configured by operator are as follow.

Function on/off per cell Co-located cell list per cell Time schedule for on/off per cell Traffic load threshold for cell switch off or cell activation Whether to execute forced handover and timer configuration Operation Flow for Cell on/off Overall operation flow for pre-defined time schedule based Cell on/off is as follow.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

459

Chapter 9 SON

Steps

Description

1

Policies configured by operator are transferred to eNB.

2

Cells monitor periodically for the scheduled time.

3

At the scheduled time, the cell checks whether the traffic load threshold is configured by operator.

4

If traffic load threshold is configured by operator, the cell compares traffic load with the threshold. If traffic load is less than threshold, the next process will be executed. Else, execute the comparison at the next period.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

460

Chapter 9 SON Steps

Description

5

The cell should block new calls.

6

Check whether all calls in the cell are released. If some calls are remained and the forced handover option is configured by operator, the forced handover function is executed. If any call remains after the Timer expires, the all calls are released.

7

If all calls are released in the cell, the cell will be switched off. When the cell becomes dormant cell, it transfers eNB Configuration Update message to neighbor cells to inform cell switch off.

8

RU Tx off will be executed if all cells in the RU are switched off.

9

Execute cell switch on when the scheduled time ends. When the cell switches on, it transfers eNB Configuration Update message to some of neighbor cells to inform cell switch on.

10

RU Tx on will be executed if RU Tx off is executed by this function.

Operation Flow for Cell activation Cell can activate dormant cells when traffic load is high by Cell Activation message. Operation flow for cell activation is as follow.

Steps

Description

1

If traffic load threshold is configured by operator, the cell compares traffic load with the threshold.

2

If traffic load is higher than threshold, the cell transfers Cell Activation message to some of neighbor dormant cells. Else, execute the comparison at the next period.

3

Dormant cells executes cell switch on when they receive Cell Activation message.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

461

Chapter 9 SON

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Use the command CHG-GRCREL-CONF to set esCellOffMode to ScheduleBased. Operator can disable this feature by setting the parameter to Off.

If you want to use forced handover for faster graceful cell off, use the command CHG-GRCREL-CONF to set esCellOffMode to withForcedHo.

If you want to use timer based release for active calls, use the command CHGGRCREL-CONF to set esCellOffTimerEnable to On.

Use the command CHG-GRCREL-CONF to set esCellOffTimer, when you want to reconfigure timer for timer based release.

If FA priority of the cell is set to 7, the cell is not off although esCellOffMode of a cell is set to ScheduleBased.

Key Parameters RTRV-EUTRA-FA/CHG-EUTRA-FA Parameter

Description

PRIORITY_FOR_ES_CELL_ON_OFF

This is priority for FA of cell on target. The cells of FA allocated priority 7 is excluded in candidate cell off.

RTRV-SONFN-ENB/CHG-SONFN-ENB Parameter

Description

CELL_OFF_LOAD_THRESHOLD

This is a threshold parameter for triggering cell off. A cell load is lower than this threshold for triggering cell off.

CELL_ACT_LOAD_THRESHOLD

This is a threshold parameter for activating cell on. It is lower than this threshold for triggering cell off. When a cell load is bigger than this threshold, the cell activates NBR dormant cells.

RTRV-SONFN-CELL/CHG-SONFN-CELL Parameter

Description

ES_CELL_ON_OFF_ENABLE

This parameter indicates whether to enable the ES Cell On/Off. There are three modes (Off, ScheduleBased, TrafficBased). If the parameter is Off, this cell is excluded Cell On/Off.

RTRV-GRCREL-CONF/CHG-GRCREL-CONF Parameter

Description

ES_CELL_OFF_MODE

This parameter is used to set cell-off for energy saving operation mode when estate, and esModeType (of CellEnergySavingStatus) is transited to enable and cell off. There are normal and withForcedHo that triggers On-Demand

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

462

Chapter 9 SON Parameter

Description Forced HO at transition to cell-off.

ES_CELL_OFF_TIMER_ENAB LE

This parameter is used to enable or disable timer operation. If you set this parameter to ON, the timer is triggered at transition to set cell-off for energy saving. And then, it make eNB forcibly release remained active calls in the cell under cell-off for energy saving, when timer is expired.

ES_CELL_OFF_TIMER

This parameter is used to set timer duration in esCellOffTimer.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

ODHO_X2_OUT

OnDemandHoOutAtt

The count of handover attempt by Ondemand HO triggering

OnDemandHoOutSucc

The count of handover success by Ondemand HO triggering

OnDemandHoInAtt

The count of hand-in attempt by Ondemand HO triggering

OnDemandHoInSucc

The count of hand-in success by Ondemand HO triggering

RedirectionToLTEByOnDemand Ho

The count of redirection to LTE by Ondemand HO triggering

RedirectionToWCDMAByOnDe mandHo

The count of redirection to WCDMA by On-demand HO triggering.

RedirectionToGERANByOnDem andHo

The count of redirection to GERAN by On-demand HO triggering

RedirectionToHRPDByOnDema ndHo

The count of redirection to HRPD by Ondemand HO triggering

CcoToGERANByOnDemandHo

The count of CCO to GERAN by Ondemand HO triggering

ReleaseCntByTimer

The count of release by timer expiration

ODHO_X2_IN

ODHO_REDIRECTION

TIMER_RELEASE

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS 36.423 (Rel.11) [2] 3GPP TS 32.551 (Rel.11) [3] 3GPP TS 36.300 (Rel.12)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

463

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO0804, DL MIMO TX Branch On/Off INTRODUCTION The Energy Saving (ES) function controls the Downlink (DL) Transmitter (Tx) Branch to lower the power consumption of the eNB. The purpose of Samsung ES is to reduce the operator‟s OPEX and carbon dioxide emission by saving power consumption of the eNB without any coverage or QoS loss during the eNB operation. The technology for DL Tx Branch On/Off ES disables some transmission branches of the RU with two or more downlink transmitting branches and lower power consumption by transmitting the downlink data only through the other enabled branches. At the time, the branch means the combination of PA modules connected with transmission and reception antennas. The technology can be applied to the LTE system to which two or more transmission antennas are employed and Samsung eNB with the ES function controls the power amplifier (PA) and Tx antenna of the radio unit (RU) and the modem of the digital unit (DU) during the operation of the system to lower power consumption. The Samsung eNB always operates in the Normal Mode if the Samsung ES function is not active; The Samsung eNB operates in either of the Saving Mode or Normal Mode otherwise. When the Samsung eNB works in the Saving Mode, the serving DL traffic is limited to a level lower than a certain level. The following is an example of the operation of the Saving Mode and the Normal Mode in case of the RU with two Tx branches:

Normal Mode oTx branch 0 (Tx antenna-0 and the related PA module): enabled oTx branch 1 (Tx antenna-1 and the related PA module): enabled oAvailable RB allocation: 100% of system BW

Saving Mode oTx branch 0 (Tx antenna-0 and the related PA module): enabled oTx branch 1 (Tx antenna-1 and the related PA module): disabled oAvailable RB allocation: about half of system BW The Samsung eNB that supports the ES function provides the following three ES executing options:

ES Function OFF Manual Apply (Pre-defined time schedule based ES) Auto Apply (Traffic analysis based ES) Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

464

Chapter 9 SON

The system operator may not operate the ES function OFF or run the ES function ON in the following two ways:

The system operator may configure the time of the eNB working in the Saving Mode by day and the eNB works in the Saving Mode according to the schedule.

The eNB decides the operation mode by itself. The eNB predicts DL traffic usage at an interval and decides whether it works in the Saving Mode or the Normal Mode by using it.

BENEFIT Reduction of OPEX without coverage/QoS loss.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Channel card with Samsung Baseband Modem 8200 or later. Limitation RU with 2 or more independently controllable Tx branches (antennas and power amplifiers).

For SLR3.1, exactly 2 Tx branches and 2 CRS system. Disabling Energy saving function is needed for under 5MHz systems. oSamsung systems use at least 18RBs for SIB oRB should be restricted to 50% when operating in Energy saving mode oFor under 5MHz bandwidth, available RB will be under 18 RBs at Energy saving mode oIn this case, Energy saving mode cannot be operated or SIB cannot be transferred to UE.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Architecture The following figure shows the structure of the Samsung ES function. The EMS and eNB have blocks related to the ES function.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

465

Chapter 9 SON

The role of the ES-related function of the EMS SON-manager is to support the system operator to set ES function-related settings using the PLD and to transmit the settings to the eNB OAM. The setup information transmitted to the eNB OAM by the SON-manager is largely divided into the following three.

Enable/disable settings of the ES function Automatic apply (traffic analysis/prediction)-related parameter settings Manual apply (pre-defined schedule based ES)-related parameter settings The EMS SON-manager also receives reports on the operation status of the eNB‟s ES function. Function blocks for the implementation of the ES in the eNB are the SON-agent, OAM, MODEM, scheduler and RU.

1 The eNB SON-agent determines the eNB‟s operating mode based on the timevarying traffic information collected during the system operation and allows the MODEM, scheduler and the RU to perform operations set by each operating mode. To do this, the SON-agent consists of the following function blocks.

2 The eNB OAM collects PM statistics information and provides it to the SONAgent. Also, the OAM performs as a bridge of information transfer between the EMS SON-manager and the eNB SON-agent.

3 When the eNB SON-agent decides the eNB operating mode, the eNB scheduler block limits the number of scheduled RBs or releases the limitation of the number according to the decided eNB operating mode. In addition, the scheduler delivers the operating mode decided in the modem.

4 The modem creates an appropriate signal by Tx branch depending on the received operating mode from the scheduler.

5 The eNB RU control module is a module in the transceiver of the RU and performs the role of actually implementing the Saving mode-related commands by communicating with the Saving mode management module of the SON-agent. In other words, it enables or disables some Tx branches. (Disable or Enable).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

466

Chapter 9 SON

Operation The following figure describes overall procedure of Samsung ES function described in this document.

The SON-agent ES block of the eNB performs the following operations every one hour.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

467

Chapter 9 SON

1 Analyzes the traffic load for D days from the past to the present. (Analyze traffic load)

2 Predicts the traffic load required for the upcoming 1 hour based on this information. (Predict traffic load)

3 Determines the mode to perform for the upcoming 1 hour based on the traffic analysis and prediction. (Determine whether to enter the Saving Mode or not)

4 Enables the eNB to perform the determined operations. If the eNB was decided to operate the Saving Mode during the interval (i) as a time segment at the unit of every one coming hour, the SON-agent of the eNB checks whether the failure of the eNB occurred every refresh period of the PM statistical data (5 or 15 minutes) or the observed DL traffic was rapidly increased. Based on the result, the eNB temporarily suspends the operation of the Saving Mode during the shorter length of the time segment Interval (i, p) and returns to the Normal Mode. Traffic Prediction The traffic load for the upcoming 1 hour is predicted as the larger value of the following two metrics.

Time series average of the traffic load at the same hour for past D days Weighted moving average of the traffic load for the recent M hours Determination of Execution Mode The Samsung ES function determines the operation mode for the upcoming 1 hour every hour on the hour. The eNB operates in the Saving Mode for 1 hour if the traffic load predicted should be below the threshold defined by Samsung ES functionality. The threshold is defined in below table. Provided, however, that the value may be changed depending on SLR version and the provided providers. Mode

Threshold

Restriction for RB Allocation

DL Tx Branch

(Predicted Traffic) Normal

Above 24 %

No restriction

All branches are enabled

ES

Below 24 %

Up to 48 %

Some branches are disabled

Test for Stopping of Saving Mode Operation The Samsung ES function checks whether to continue the Saving Mode operation every time it acquires the statistics related to the retransmission of DL data. If any of the following three conditions is satisfied, the eNB operates temporarily in the Normal Mode regardless of the current execution mode.

The ratio of the number of the 4th retransmission to the sum of the number of initial, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th transmission is higher than 1% (Possible to be changed).

The block error rate of the 4th retransmission is larger than 10% (Possible to be changed).

The RLF ratio is larger than 1% (Possible to be changed).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

468

Chapter 9 SON

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Execute the command RTRV/CHG-SONFN-CELL to retrieve/change the operation mode and information of the Self-Organizing Network (SON) function for each Cell.

Execute the command RTRV/CHG-ES-SCHED to retrieve/change the schedule information of the Self-Organizing Network (SON) Energy Saving (ES) function.

Execute the command RTRV/CHG-ES-COM to retrieve/change the ES Mode Common information of the Self-Organizing Network (SON) Energy Saving (ES) function.

Key Parameters CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL Parameter

Description

ENERGY_SAVINGS_ENABLE

Controls SON Energy Saving in 3 modes. Off: The Energy Saving functions except for traffic analysis is disabled. Manual: The Energy Saving function in accordance with the schedule set by the operator is enabled. Auto: The Energy Saving functions based on the information obtained from traffic analysis is enabled.

CHG-ES-SCHED/RTRV-ES-SCHED Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum number of cells supported by the system.

WEEK_DAY

The day for which the Energy Saving function is operated according to the schedule.

HOUR

This parameter is the activation time (h) of the energy saving feature according to the schedule.

ES_STATE

This setting is required for enabling the energy saving feature using the schedule. Inactive: The energy saving feature does not run. Active: The energy saving feature runs based on the schedule.

SCHEDULED_ES_MODE

ES Mode type in which the Energy Saving function is operated during one hour according to the schedule.

CHG-ES-COM/RTRV-ES-COM Parameter

Description

DATA_VALIDITY

This parameter is the number of days of traffic analysis to be used in calculating the estimates for determining Energy Saving (ES) mode. For traffic estimation, the average traffic load statistics are calculated for the specified time over the last 15 days or the last 30 days as determined by this

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

469

Chapter 9 SON Parameter

Description parameter.

MOVING_AVERAGE_VALIDIT Y

This parameter determines how many hours of data are used for calculating the traffic estimates. When this parameter value is determined, it is weighted with the MOVING_AVERAGE_WEIGHT parameter for calculating the traffic estimates.

MOVING_AVERAGE_WEIGH T

This parameter is the weight of the recent hours to apply moving average for calculating the traffic estimates. When the number of hours (h) of data to use is determined by the MOVING_AVERAGE_VALIDITY parameter, this parameter value is used as weights for data of each hour for calculation. Also, the first weight of this parameter indicates the most recent hour. If MOVING_AVERAGE_VALIDITY is 2 hours and this parameter is 50,50,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0, it means that a weighting of 50% is applied to the last 2 hours.

RE_TX_THRESHOLD

This parameter is the 4th Re Tx (third retransmission count of PDSCH HARQ) threshold value for determining system abnormality. The unit used is %. This refers to the ratio of the 4th value over the sum of the 1st through 4th values of the no. of DL transmission values in the statistics item DLHARQ status. If the no. of DL transmission value exceeds the major alarm threshold value, it is deemed as a system abnormality. Before starting the Self-Organizing Network (SON) Energy Saving (ES) feature, it must be determined whether the current system status is normal. Therefore, if the system is in abnormal status, the energy saving mode is disabled and the normal mode is enabled. The energy saving feature remains disabled until the system abnormality is resolved.

BLER_THRESHOLD

This parameter is the 4th Re Tx BLER (PDSCH BLER for the third HARQ retransmission) threshold value for determining system abnormality. The unit used is %. This means the BLER for the 4th transmission among the DL residual BLER values of the statistics item DL-HARQ status. If the DL residual BLER value exceeds the major alarm threshold value, it is deemed as a system abnormality. Before starting the Self-Organizing Network (SON) Energy Saving (ES) feature, it must be determined whether the current system status is normal. Therefore, if the system is in abnormal status, the energy saving mode is disabled and the normal mode is enabled. The energy saving feature remains disabled until the system abnormality is resolved.

RLF_THRESHOLD

RLF Threshold for system abnormality.

ALLOCATION_REDUCTION_ FACTOR

Allocation Reduction Factor for Traffic Abnormality

AUTO_ES_MODE

ES Mode when Energy Saving is operated by Auto Apply.

RTRV-ES-TYPE Parameter

Description

ES_MODE_INDEX

This parameter is the index used for saving the information of each Energy Saving (ES) mode.

ES_MODE_TYPE

This parameter is the Energy Saving (ES) mode to be activated when the traffic load estimate is lower than ES_MODE_ENTERING_THRESHOLD and ES_MODE_LEAVING_THRESHOLD. Normal: Runs on Normal Mode Voltage and RB count. Mode(#): Runs with variable voltage and RB count according to the mode. The higher the mode, the less voltage and RB count are used to save energy.

ES_MODE_PREDICTION_TH RESHOLD

ES Mode Prediction Threshold

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

470

Chapter 9 SON Parameter

Description

ES_MODE_RB_ALLOCATION _THRESHOLD

ES Mode RB Allocation Threshold

Counters and KPIs The eNB SON agent predicts the traffic for each cell during the specified time interval by using the following PM statistic data items. Counter

Description

DL PRB Usage

PRB usage of Downlink DTCH traffic

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9) [2] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions [3] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases [4] 3GPP 32.541: E-UTRAN; OAM Requirements for Self Healing Use Cases

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

471

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO0901, Minimization Drive Test Optimization INTRODUCTION Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) is a standardized mechanism to collect the network performance measurements from the commercial UEs with possibly the location information. The collected UE measurement results can be utilized for various purposes, for example, network parameter optimization, coverage hole detection, and so on. Operator can save the cost for network optimization by using MDT feature. Samsung MDT supports two modes of operations, that is, Immediate MDT and Logged MDT. Immediate MDT is targeted on the UEs in Active mode while Logged MDT is performed by the UEs in Idle mode.

BENEFIT Operator can save the cost for collecting the network performance measurement data.

 End-used service quality can be enhanced thanks to efficient network optimization conducted by using MDT data

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency For Signaling-based MDT, the core network entities shall support the corresponding functions.

For Management-based MDT, RAN EMS shall support the corresponding functions.

For Logged MDT, UE shall support the corresponding functions (Rel.10 or later). Limitation Rel.11 MDT functions are not supported.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Optimization of radio network performance is very important task for mobile operators. Conventionally, operators conduct drive test to collect the radio measurement, and parameter optimization is performed based on the gathered information. Mobile operators have spent a lot of time and money for conventional drive test and network optimization. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

472

Chapter 9 SON

Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) feature is introduced in 3GPP Rel.10 to provide more cost-efficient method to measure and optimize the network performance. Since the mobile devices exist over whole network areas, MDT procedure utilizes UE's measurement capability to acquire the information of network. Through the standardized MDT procedures, operators order some UEs to measure the network performance, and collect the measured data in the server which is called Trace Collection Entity (TCE) in 3GPP specification. Then, the collected information can used for many purposes including coverage hole detection, capacity optimization, and so on. By using this feature, the operator can reduce the cost for gathering the measurement data and optimizing the network parameters. Furthermore, MDT can be more efficient method than the conventional drive test for some areas where the conventional drive test is not very efficient, for example, in-building environment. MDT Configuration parameters may be delivered to the target UE and measurement data can be collected by the UE itself during idle state (Logged MDT), or MDT data collection can be done at the serving eNB by reusing the existing RRM procedures while the target UE stays in connected state (Immediate MDT). There are two types of methods to configure and manage MDT, which are Signaling-based MDT and Management-based MDT.

Signaling based MDT: Used to collect the measurement data of a specific UE based on IMSI or IMEI SV. The MDT configuration message is sent from MME to eNB.

Management based MDT: Used to collect the measurement data in a specific area. The MDT configuration message is sent directly from RAN OAM server to (set of) cells without specifying target UEs. Some UEs in the area are chosen by eNB for MDT operations. Because MDT management reuses the existing Trace architecture, the two methods have almost same architecture as Signaling-based and Management-based Trace methods, respectively. The following table summarizes the differences of Signaling and Managementbased MDTs. Signaling-based MDT

Management-based MDT

Configuration path

(Core) OAM  HSS  MME  eNB

(RAN) OAM  eNB

Reusing trace procedures

Signaling based trace, for example, Call Trace

Management based trace, for example, Cell Traffic Trace

Target of configuration

Specific subscriber (IMSI) or equipment (IMEI, IMEI SV)

Specific area, for example, cells, TAs

Target UE selection

Target UE selection by OAM

Target UE selection by eNB

User consent checking

User consent checking of the specific UE can be done by HSS before delivering the configuration message.

User consent checking is done by eNB at UE selection based on the saved UE context

Session continuity on cell change

MDT parameter transfer during handover

No MDT session continuity on cell change (Only user consent information can be transferred)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

473

Chapter 9 SON Supported MDTs

Both Logged and Immediate MDT

Both Logged and Immediate MDT

In Signaling-based MDT, a specific UE is chosen by OAM based on IMSI or IMEI SV. The configuration message including the corresponding MDT parameters is sent to HSS for checking the user consent. If subscription data of the user allows MDT, the HSS sends MDT activation message to serving MME of the UE, and the MME sends it to the serving eNB. In Management-based MDT, a specific area is chosen for measurement data collection with MDT parameters. The eNBs in the area choose some UEs and data collection is done based on the received configuration. The user consent for MDT is saved in UE context generally during UE attach, and hence the serving eNB can choose only the UEs which allow Management based MDT data collection. The following figure shows concepts for Signaling and Management-based MDT configuration.

For UE selection in Management-based MDT, Samsung MDT provides the following options to restrict the scope of chosen users.

UE capability option: 1) All UEs, 2) Rel. 10 or later UEs only, 3) Rel. 10 or later + standalone GNSS capable UEs only. Operator may want to collect only the measurement data with high accuracy.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

474

Chapter 9 SON

UE pickup rate: The probability that a UE is chosen for MDT operation when the UE satisfies all the requirements for UE selection. Operator may not want to get measurement data from all the UEs who satisfy the requirements due to large overhead. In the RAN‟s configuration and operation aspects, there are two types of MDT, which are Immediate and Logged MDT. Data collection for Immediate MDT is performed for the connected UEs by eNB, while Logged MDT data collection is performed by each UE itself during idle mode. Immediate and Logged MDT can be configured by both Signaling-based and Management-based MDT configuration procedures. In Immediate MDT, the following types of measurement data can be collected while the UE is in connected mode.

M1: RSRP and RSRQ measurement by UE M2: Power Headroom (PH) measurement by UE M3: Uplink Received Interference Power of the connected cell (Rel.11) M4: DL/UL Data Volume of the UE per QCI (Rel.11) M6: Collecting all the event-triggered measurement reports configured for RRM purpose (Rel.11) For collecting data for M1, the eNB‟s RRC configures measurement reporting trigger to the chosen UE. Reporting trigger for M1 can be 1) Periodic or 2) Serving cell becomes worse than threshold; Event A2. The UE sends the measurement report (RSRP and/or RSRQ of serving and neighboring cells) to the serving eNB if the reporting condition is met, and the serving eNB collects the data and sends it to the TCE. On the other hand, no RRC reporting trigger is required for M2 because PHR is carried by MAC signaling. If MDT data collection for M2 is configured, the serving eNB collects the PHR information triggered by normal MAC mechanisms. Similarly, M3 Received Interference Power and M4 Data Volume measurements are also performed by the eNB itself so that no additional RRC signaling is required. If M6 is set, all the existing event-triggered measurement reports configured for RRM purposes are collected, for example, Event A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, B1, and B2 events. Differently from M1, RRC measurement configuration is not additionally configured solely for MDT purpose. However the measured metric is similar to M1, which are RSRP or RSRQ.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

475

Chapter 9 SON

Location information can be included in the measured data. Two positioning methods are supported, that is, Standalone GNSS/GPS and Enhanced Cell ID (ECID). If GNSS/GPS positioning method is chosen, the serving eNB request UEs to include standalone GNSS/GPS location result as the best effort manner. Then the standalone GNSS/GPS supporting UE can include the detailed location information if data available. If E-CID method is chosen, the serving eNB collects eNB Rx-Tx Time Difference and UE Rx-Tx Time Difference which are the raw data for E-CID. The serving eNB sends the data to TCE, but calculation of detailed location based on collected data is out of scope of the eNB. Among E-CID raw data metrics defined in 3GPP, Angle of Arrival (AoA) trace is not supported. If either GNSS/GPS or E-CID related data is not available, location may be estimated based on signal measurement results for M1, that is, RF fingerprint, according to the TCE implementation. Configuration message of Immediate MDT mainly contains the following information:

List of measurements: M1 (RSRP/RSRQ) and/or M2 (PHR) and/or M3 (Received Interference Power) and/or M4 (Data Volume) and/or M6 (Measurement report collection triggered by RRM events)

Reporting trigger: Periodic or Event A2 (Only for M1) Report amount: Number of measurement reports sent (Only for M1 + Periodic) Event threshold: Reporting threshold for measurement report (Only for M1 + Event A2)

Area scope: Area scope where the MDT data collection should be conducted Positioning method: GNSS/GPS and/or E-CID The eNB immediately starts the MDT operation when it receives the configuration message and the target user is selected. Because Immediate MDT reuses the existing 3GPP standard procedures, the operation is mostly transparent to the UEs. In Logged MDT, only periodic downlink pilot strength measurement can be performed during idle mode operations. Configuration parameters for Logged MDT are sent to the UE through RRC signaling procedure after the UE transits to the connected state. However, the actual data collection is done while the UE is in idle state. On reception the Logged MDT configuration message over RRC, Logged MDT-capable UE saves the parameters. Then, the UE starts to collect data after the UE‟s state is changed to idle state by considering the saved MDT configuration parameters. After the measurement data is collected during idle mode, UE notifies existence of logged MDT data during RRC connection establishment procedures. Then, the eNB may request the UE to send the logged data, and the received data is sent to the proper TCE based on TCE ID in the logged data. Configuration message of Logged MDT mainly contains the following information:

Logging duration: Logging duration: The timer value for completely stopping the logging job. If the UE‟s state changes from idle to connected state, logging stops for a moment. However, the timer continues independent of state changes. Logging will continue if the UE goes to idle before this timer expires. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

476

Chapter 9 SON

Logging interval: Periodicity of measurement during idle mode Trace Reference and Trace Recording Session Reference: Uniquely identifying the MDT session in the whole PLMN

Area scope: Area scope where the MDT data collection should be conducted TCE ID: The ID which uniquely identifying the TCE where the data should be delivered. All the eNBs maintain the unique mapping table for TCE ID to TCE IP address. The following figure describes the concepts for Immediate and Logged MDT operation.

Additionally, UE RLF reporting (by Rel.9 or later UE) trace and RRC Connection Establishment Failure (RCEF) reporting (by Rel.11 or later UE) trace are also supported as management based MDT trace. RAN EMS orders some cells to trace the RLF or RCEF reports sent by UEs. The, the eNB does not perform any specific triggering action for the trace but just collects the RLF or RCEF information when the reporting is received in the specified area. The collected information is sent to the TCE server.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

477

Chapter 9 SON

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate 1 Signalling Based Immediate MDT oThe SIG_BASED_IMMEDIATE_MDT_ALLOWED (system parameter) must be set to True in the eNB. oProper information for TCE must be set.

2 Signalling Based Logged MDT oThe SIG_BASED_LOGGED_MDT_ALLOWED (system parameter) must be set to True in the eNB. oProper information for TCE must be set.

3 Management Based Immediate MDT oThe MGMT_BASED_IMMEDIATE_MDT_ALLOWED (system parameter) must be set to True in the eNB. oConfigures the MDT parameters and activates immediate MDT trace from the LSM. oProper information for TCE must be set.

4 Management Based Logged MDT oThe MGMT_BASED_LOGGED_MDT_ALLOWED (system parameter) must be set to True in the eNB. oConfigures the MDT parameters and activates logged MDT trace from the LSM. oProper information for TCE must be set.

Key Parameters CHG-MDTCTRL-PARA/RTRV-MDTCTRL-PARA Parameter

Description

SIG_BASED_IMMEDIATE_MD T_ALLOWED

This parameter shows the whether to permit to the Signaling Based Immediate MDT on demand. False: Signaling Based Immediate MDT request is not allowed. True: Signaling Based Immediate MDT request is allowed.

SIG_BASED_LOGGED_MDT_ ALLOWED

This parameter shows the whether to permit to the Signaling Based Logged MDT on demand. False: Signaling Based Logged MDT request is not allowed. True: Signaling Based Logged MDT request is allowed.

MGMT_BASED_IMMEDIATE_ MDT_ALLOWED

This parameter shows the whether to permit to the Management Based Immediate MDT on demand. False: Management Based Immediate MDT request is not allowed. True: Management Based Immediate MDT request is allowed.

MGMT_BASED_LOGGED_MD T_ALLOWED

This parameter specifies the whether to permit to the Management Based Logged MDT (Minimization Drive Test) on demand. False: Management Based Logged MDT request is not allowed.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

478

Chapter 9 SON Parameter

Description True: Management Based Logged MDT request is allowed.

MDT_UE_PICKUP_RATE

This parameter represents the selection rate which it uses when selecting the Management Based MDT object UE. If the random number generated between 0 is this value or less, select as MDT object UE.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 37.320: UTRA and E-UTRA; Radio measurement collection for Minimization of Drive Tests (MDT); Overall description; Stage 2 (Release 10) [2] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 10) [3] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 10) [4] 3GPP 36.413: E-UTRAN; S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) (Release 10) [5] 3GPP 36.423: E-UTRAN; X2 Application Protocol (X2AP) (Release 10) [6] 3GPP 32.421: Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment trace; Trace concepts and requirements (Release 10) [7] 3GPP 32.422: Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment trace; Trace control and configuration management (Release 10) [8] 3GPP 32.423: Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment trace; Trace data definition and management (Release 10)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

479

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO2011, Drive Test Optimization (Coverage and Capacity Optimization) INTRODUCTION Samsung Drive Test Optimization (DTO) is a solution for automatically optimizing the network at initial stage of LTE system. This function can reduce the OPEX used to optimize the network at initial stage through automated initial network optimization. Samsung DTO provides the following functions at the steps of initial network optimization: Step

Function

1

Drive test

Collecting, reporting and making automated the RF information. 1-1) Install the DM software that has the real time reporting function (at the interval of one second) to the terminal for testing to make report to a remote control node (SSOM). 1-2) If test UE supports 3GPP MDT with location measurement/report capability, the feature can be operated based on MDT without DM software through configuration in SSOM. 2) SSOM displays RF information reported by the DM software/MDT in real time.

2

Analyze

Finding a problem section: Find and display a RF performance degradation area. Analyzing RF environment: Display the information on the RF environment (RSRP and SINR) on the optimized clusters through the heat map and the CDF.

3

Optimize

Recommending the new values of antenna E-tilt/Azimuth and RRH power to improve RF performance through the algorithm. The operator decides a parameter to be recommended to improve RF performance.

4

Apply

Changes the antenna parameter remotely in the optimization cluster. Displays the recommended value proposed by the algorithm through SSOM GUI. The change is decided by the operator.

BENEFIT Operator can reduce the OPEX through the amount of manual processes involved in initial network optimization through drive test.

The result of optimizing the network at the initial stage improves the effective quality of users.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency In case of the DTO function, Smart SON Manager and Smart Scheduler are required. (DTO function can operate even when Smart Scheduling functions (DL Smart, UL Smart) are turned off.) Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

480

Chapter 9 SON

In case of some UEs, the compatibility of real time reporting DM apps is impossible. Only UEs with modem chipsets from Qualcomm can support and interlocking may not be allowed depending on a maker, a model, a firmware version and so on.

UE should support 3GPP MDT capability (with location information) for DTO operation based on MDT.

Remote control of E-tilt/Azimuth requires antenna products supporting the remote control of E-tilt/Azimuth. For the antenna product supporting remote control of E-Tilt/Azimuth, Smart SON Manager (SSOM) can perform remote antenna parameter control.

Remote azimuth control function is vendor-specific function. eNB S/W may not support the function for some antenna manufactures (vendors). In this case, remote control of E-Tilt/Azimuth in SSOM is not supported.

Acquisition of accurate information on antenna position, height, Mechanical Tilt (M-Tilt), antenna direction, and 3D antenna pattern based on site survey is required. Limitation The DTO function cannot work in indoor, because it is difficult to acquire the GPS information in the indoor environment.

Since the change in shadowing depending on each location may be considerable in the dense urban environment where there are many skyscrapers, optimization performance and efficiency may be reduced.

Recommendation of E-Tilt/Azimuth values based on auto-optimization is limited to the antenna supporting remote E-Tilt/Azimuth function.

Activation/deactivation of Trace/MDT by Smart SON Manager (SSOM) are available only when Samsung EPC is adopted in the network. If other vendor's EPC is adopted in the network, operator may manually perform activation and deactivation of Trace/MDT.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Architecture Samsung DTO provides Smart SON Manager (SSOM) and Smart SON Server and the overall architecture is as shown in the figure below:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

481

Chapter 9 SON

The main NEs of the DTO are as follows: In addition to the following NEs, CSM (MME EMS), MME, and so on. are all NEs included in the DTO architecture for the call trace function. SSOM Central node controlling the operation of DTO

Displaying real time RF information Displaying moving routes Displaying the result of the analyzed RF environment of the Smart SON Server Displaying the recommended value of the antenna parameters of the Smart SON Server

Changing remote e-tilt, azimuth, and power (For DTO operation based on MDT information) Collects the UL RF information by receiving the call trace report from eNB (the SRS received power) (corresponding to the TCE under the 3GPP standards). Smart SON Server Analyzing RF environment oReceives the collected DL RF information and site information during the drive test from the SSOM. o(For DTO operation based on DM application) Collects the UL RF information by receiving the call trace report from eNB (the SRS received power) (corresponding to the TCE under the 3GPP standards). oReceives the analysis policy from the SSOM.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

482

Chapter 9 SON

oAnalyzes the RF environment of the optimized clusters based on the collected DL/UL RF information. oReports the analysis result to the SSOM.

Optimizing antenna parameters oReceives the optimization policy from the SSOM. oDraws the antenna parameter value to improve the RF performance by the optimize policy and reports to the SSOM. DM Web Server (Required for DTO operation based on DM application) Terminal DM information collecting server

Keeps the received real time RF information from the DM application of the tested UE.

The SSOM monitors the collected RF information and brings the data whenever new RF information is created. LSM (EMS) The SSOM acquires the site information from the LSM.

The SSOM orders the call trace activation/deactivation to the LSM. The SSOM orders the change in the antenna parameters to the LSM. Smart Scheduler The Smart scheduler is located in the equipment same to the Smart SON Server. Also, it collects the information on the UL SRS of the neighbor cell delivered to the call trace. eNB The eNB delivers information such as SRS and statistics, which are acquired from UEs, to Smart SON Server

The eNB applies optimized RRH power and Antenna e-tilt of RRH. Samsung DTO Call flow The overall operating procedure of Samsung DTO is as shown in the figure below:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

483

Chapter 9 SON

The whole procedure can be classified into 7 steps as follows:

1 Step of preparing a drive test o(For DTO operation based on DM application) Enter the DM web server IP (public) to UE for testing. oThe Smart SON Manager transmits the drive test starting message. This message informs to Smart SON Server of the drive test start. oAfter transmitting the drive test starting message, the SSOM enters IMSI of the tested UE and trace activation command is delivered to the EMS (only available for Samsung EPC.).

2 Step of conducting the drive test For DTO operation based on DM application:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

484

Chapter 9 SON

oWhen start of the drive test (test route drive start) is ordered to the tested UE, the DM application of the tested UE starts uploading the DM information collected in real time to the DM web server. oThe eNB delivers SRS received power information received from the Smart Scheduler to the Smart SON server. oThe RF information collected during the drive test is as follows: Common

IMSI of UE GPS information

Location Height Time Lock/Unlock Status

Serving Cell PCID Serving Cell ECGI SFN (Serving Cell) DL

Serving

RSRP RSRQ RSSI SINR

Number(#) of Neighbor # (Neighbor)

PCID RSRP RSRQ

UL

Serving

SRS Rx. Power

Neighbor

SRS Rx. Power

For DTO operation based on MDT information: oThe eNB uploads MDT reports from MDT activated test UE to SSOM. oThe eNB delivers the SRS received power information received from the Smart Scheduler to the SSOM. oThe RF information collected during the drive test is given in Table 2-2: M1+UE Location Trace Reference (MCC+MNC+Trace ID) Time Stamp MDT Info. Flag(0: M1+UE location, 1: M4, 2: M5) M1

RSRP/RSRQ/PCI

Pcell (=measResultPCell)

DL earfcn (Not included in MeasResults IE) ECGI (Not included in MeasResults IE) PCI (Not included in MeasResults IE) measResultPCell

rsrpResult rsrqResult

Scell1 (=MeasResultServFreq)

DL earfcn (Not included in MeasResults IE) ECGI (Not included in MeasResults IE) PCI (Not included in MeasResults IE)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

485

Chapter 9 SON servFreqId-r10 measResultSCell-r10

rsrpResultSCellr10 rsrqResultSCellr10

measResultBestNeighCellr10

physCellId-r10 rsrpResultNCellr10 rsrpResultNCellr10

~ Scell5 (MeasResultServFreq)

DL earfcn (Not included in MeasResults IE) ECGI (Not included in MeasResults IE) PCI (Not included in MeasResults IE) servFreqId-r10 measResultSCell-r10

rsrpResultSCellr10 rsrqResultSCellr10

measResultBestNeighCellr10

physCellId-r10 rsrpResultNCellr10 rsrpResultNCellr10

Neighbor Top 1 (=MeasResultEUTRA)

physCellId measResult

rsrpResult rsrqResult

~ Neighbor Top 8 (=MeasResultEUTRA)

physCellId measResult

rsrpResult rsrqResult

UE Location

triggering event

Triggering event

GNSS pos

ellipsoid-Point-r10, ellipsoidPointWithAltitude-r10, ellipsoidPointWithUncertaintyCircle-r11, ellipsoidPointWithUncertaintyEllipse-r11, ellipsoidPointWithAltitudeAndUncertaintyEllipsoid-r11, ellipsoidArc-r11, polygon-r11 (This is choice IE which is selected by UE, Included in LocationInfo-r10 IE of MeasResults IE)

3 Step of ending the drive test o(For DTO operation based on DM application) Provide the test routing drive end command to the tested UE and stop reporting the DM information. oThe Smart SON Manager sends the drive test ending message to the Smart SON Server and inform end of the test. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

486

Chapter 9 SON

oOnce end of the drive test, the SSOM delivers the trace deactivation command to the EMS and the trace ends. (Only available for Samsung EPC.) o(For DTO operation based on MDT information) SSOM delivers the MDT deactivation command to the EMS and then the MDT for the test UE is deactivated. (only available for Samsung EPC) oDeliver the list of all PCIs included in the DM/MDT information through the initial antenna parameter requesting message to the EMS and receive initial parameters of all antennas belonging to the PCI from the EMS. oDeliver the DM/MDT information to the Smart SON Server through the drive test analysis starting message of the SSOM.

4 Selecting DTO area (optimized cluster) oSelect the area to perform analysis and optimization based on the RF information collected from the Smart SON Server.

5 Analyzing RF environment oThe Smart SON Server performs analysis of RF environment to the DTO area selected in 4) based on the RF information collected through the steps 1) to 3) (DM/MDT information and trace information). oThe Smart SON Server reports the result of the analysis to the SSOM.

6 Antenna Optimizing parameters oThe Smart SON Server optimizes the antenna parameters in the test route/DTO area. oThe Smart SON Server reports the result of the optimization to the SSOM.

7 Applying the optimized antenna parameters oThe SSOM delivers the optimized antenna parameters to the EMS. oThe EMS delivers the optimized antenna parameter values to eNB and the parameters are optimally changed. (E-tilt values of Multi RET in eNB are applied in parallel.)

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Smart SON DTO function has precedence over TPC and ATO functions. If DTO function is activated, TPC and ATO stop their operation and transit to suspend state. Pre-condition eNB should interwork with Smart SON Server, and operational state should be enabled.

In SSOM, LSM should be registered. In LSM, Smart SON Server and MME should be registered. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

487

Chapter 9 SON

For call trace at Smart SON Server, Smart SON Server should be included in TCE table. Feature Activation & Action 1 Before DTO activation, confirmation and information input for the following DTO related PLD parameters through EMS are required:

aSet SON_DTO_FUNC_ENABLE value of optimization target eNB‟s SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL PLD to Auto.

bSet SON_AZIMUTH_CTRL_ENABLE, SON_TILT_CTRL_ENABLE, SON_POWER_CTRL_ENABLE values of optimization target cell‟s SON_FUNC_CELL_CONTROL PLD to Auto. (Set those values can be set to Off if azimuth/tilt/power cannot be changed due to HW constraint or operator does not want the change of steer/tilt/power..)

cOperator enters attributes of optimization target eNB‟s SON_DTO_FUNC PLD.

dOperator enters attributes of optimization target cell‟s ANTENNA_CONF PLD.

2 Activation of DTO function in SSOM aOn Drive Test registration screen, enter Test Name, IMSI, Smart Son Server, TCE Address, MME Name, Reference Test, and Map View Type. Then, click the confirmation button.

bIf new Drive Test is successfully registered, Start button appears bottom of Drive Test Tab screen. If Start button is clicked, moving path and graph data are displayed on the screen in real-time.

3 Activation of real-time report function in DM app. (This step is skipped when DTO operates based on MDT)

aEnter DM Web Server IP address and port (6001) for real-time RF information reporting in DM app.

bReal-time RF information reporting starts upon clicking Apply and connect button.

4 Perform DTO Analyze/Optimize in SSOM. aIf Stop button clicked, Drive Test ends and Analyze screen appears. bClick Start Analyze button (wait 3 min - retry) cIf Analyze is finished, Compare button and Optimize tab are activated. By clicking Compare button, problem path can be identified.

dClick optimize tab and click Start Optimize button (wait 3 min - retry) eIf Optimize is finished, Compare button and Apply tab are activated. By clicking Compare button, problem path can be identified.

fOptimized results can be identified by clicking Apply button. Operator can apply the optimized results by selecting antenna information.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

488

Chapter 9 SON

Feature Deactivation After using DTO function, DTO can be deactivated by clicking finish button on SSOM.

SON_DTO_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to Off. Key Parameters Entering Drive Test Information When clicking the drive test button at the SSOM, the pop-up window for entering the drive test-related information appears and the operator enters the information required to perform the drive test. Parameters for drive test Parameters

Description

Test name

Drive test name

IMSI

The International Mobile Subscriber Identity

Smart SON Server

Select the Smart SON Server IP to perform the RF environment analysis and optimization.

TCE Address

Private IP of the Smart SON Server

MME Name

Select the MME to perform the call trace function.

Reference test

Drive test which is the subject of comparison Click the checkbox to compare the result of the reference test and the new drive test drive test after completion of the drive test.

Parameters for Analyze Policy The operator may set the analyzing options of Samsung DTO by using the following parameters: Parameters for analyze policy Parameters

Description

Drive test step

Information on the flag classifying the primary drive test and secondary or higher drive tests

Performance metric

Threshold to be used to select a problem section

Performance threshold

Threshold to be used to select a problem section

Duration of problem section

Minimal length of the problem section

Distance between grid points

Binning distance of optimized cluster

Parameters for Optimize Policy The operator may set the optimization options of Samsung DTO by using the following parameters: Parameters for optimization policy Parameters

Description

Optimize command

Performance metric to be used for optimization

Optimize item

Select an antenna parameter to control by checking the checkbox.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

489

Chapter 9 SON

Setting DTO Operation Mode The operator may set and view the operating mode, either automatic or release, in Samsung DTO functions by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB Parameters

Description

SON_DTO_FUNC_ENABL E

Whether to enable the DTO (drive test optimization) SON function, (one of the SON functions). Off (0): The function is turned off. Auto (1): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change is applied automatically.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9) [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9) [3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions [4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements [5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

490

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO2021, Tx Power Control (Coverage and Capacity optimization) INTRODUCTION Samsung Tx Power Control (TPC) is a function of automatically controlling the transmission power of the RRU. Also, this function performs to improve UE throughput during the operation of Smart LTE System. Samsung TPC fully satisfies the requirements of the 3GPP LTE standards. It consists of three detailed functions as follows:

Collecting information oCollecting the network status (UE distribution and channel status) and statistical information of the network

Deciding the transmission power of the RRU oDeciding the transmission power of the RRU based on the information on the collected network status

Setting the transmission power of the RRU oApplying the transmission power of the RRU decided to the RRU oChanging and delivering to UE the system parameters depending on the decided transmission power of the RRU

BENEFIT By controlling the transmission power of the RRU depending on the network status, possible to increase the whole network throughput.

By controlling the transmission power of the RRU depending on the network status, possible to increase the edge UE throughput.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency In case of TPC function, Smart SON Manager and Smart Scheduler are required. (TPC function can operate even when Smart Scheduling functions (DL Smart, UL Smart) are OFF)

To collect the information on the received signal of UE, the eNB/Smart scheduler must support the SRS acquiring function.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

491

Chapter 9 SON

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Architecture The blocks related to Smart SON TPC include Smart SON Server (with Smart Scheduler), Smart SON Manager (SSOM), eNB, and EMS and the whole architecture is as follows:

The main NEs for the TPC operation are as follows: eNB Collects information to control the transmission power of the RRU (loading information, SRS received power, and statistics of the network quality).

Reports the collected information to Smart Scheduler. Receives the transmission power by RRU from Smart Scheduler. Applies the transmission power of the RRU. Delivers the information on the transmission power of the RRU through SIB2. Smart Scheduler Receives information to control the transmission power of the RRU (loading information, SRS received power, and statistics of the network quality) from eNB.

Decides transmission power of the RRU based on the received information. oTLM TPC: Algorithm of controlling the transmission power of RRU to maximize throughput and load metric. oRoll-back: Roll-back algorithm to prevent degradation of the network quality due to the control of transmission power of the RRU by TLM TPC. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

492

Chapter 9 SON

Delivers the transmission power by RRU to eNB. EMS Saves TPC-related PLD information and delivers to Smart SON Manager and eNB. Smart SON Manager (SSOM) Delivers TPC-related PLD information to Smart Scheduler.

TPC Operation Flow The whole operating flow of Samsung TPC is as follows:

1 The EMS delivers the TPC-related PLD to eNB and SSOM. 2 The SSOM delivers the received TPC-related PLD to Smart Scheduler. 3 The eNB delivers the SRS received power by UE to Smart Scheduler by collecting the power.

4 The Smart Scheduler processes and stores the received information on the SRS received power by UE.

5 The eNB collects and delivers to Smart Scheduler the statistics of the network quality (HO and call drop-related statistics).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

493

Chapter 9 SON

6 The eNB collects and delivers to Smart Scheduler the scheduling-related information (loading information, and so on.).

7 The Smart Scheduler decides transmission power of the RRU by considering status of the network based on the collected information (scheduling information, statistics of network quality, and SRS received power).

8 The Smart scheduler delivers the decided transmission power of the RRU to eNB.

9 The eNB changes cell configuration information based on the received transmission power of the RRU and delivers the information on the changed transmission power of the RRU to UE through SIB2.

TPC Operation Algorithm The transmission power of the RRU of Samsung TPC is decided by two algorithms as follows:

1 Algorithm of controlling the transmission power of the RRU to maximize throughput and load metric.

2 Roll-back algorithm to prevent the degradation of the network quality due to the control of the transmission power of the RRU by TLM TPC. The detailed information on each algorithm is explained below. TLM TPC In Samsung TPC, TLM TPC improves throughput of the edge UE without performance degradation of the average UE throughput by controlling the RRU transmission power of all cells managed by Smart Scheduler. TLM TPC works as follows:

Collecting information oCollecting information on the network status (loading by UE, SRS received power, and loading by cell)

Deciding the transmission power of the RRU oDeciding the transmission power of the RRU based on the information on the collected network status

Configuring the transmission power of the RRU oApplying the transmission power of the RRU decided to the RRU oChanging and delivering to UE the system parameters depending on the decided transmission power of the RRU Detailed explanation on the detailed functions of each algorithm is as follows: Collecting Information The eNB collects PRB utilization of the cell and the PRB utilization by UE during the TLM TPC interval. Once collected, it reports the PRB utilization of the collected cell at the TLM TPC interval to Smart Scheduler. In addition, eNB reports SRS received power of the cell from UE to Smart Scheduler by measuring the power. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

494

Chapter 9 SON

Deciding the Transmission Power of the RRU Smart Scheduler decides the RRU transmission power by cell maximizing the cost function through power search based on the collected information from eNBs. Herein the cost function is the sum of the log (UE throughput) for UEs in all cells managed by Smart Scheduler. In addition, UE throughput is modelled using UE information (PRB utilization, SRS received power) from eNBs. In addition, power search is performed only within the designated power range. Configuring the Transmission Power of the RRU Smart Scheduler delivers decided transmission power of the RRU of the cell to eNB. The eNB configures the RRU transmission power of the cell with that of the cell received from the Scheduler. Also, it transmits information on the changed RRU transmission power of the cell to UE through SIB2. Roll-Back In Samsung TPC, roll-back keeps the network quality through recovery of the RRU transmission power when the network quality is degraded by the change in the RRU transmission power by TLM TPC algorithm. Roll-back works as follows:

Collecting information oCollecting statistical information on network quality (HO and call droprelated statistics)

Monitoring network quality oChecking the occurrence of the network quality degradation based on statistical information on the network quality

Adjusting RRH Tx power change range of TLM TPC oPreventing network quality degradation by adjusting RRH Tx power change range of TLM TPC. Detailed explanation on the detailed functions of each algorithm is as follows: Collecting Information The eNB collects information on the call drop rate and HO success rate of the cells during the roll-back interval. Once collected, it reports the information to Smart Scheduler at the roll-back interval. Monitoring Network Quality Smart Scheduler stores the history of network quality based on the information on the call drop rate and HO success rate of the received cells from eNBs. Smart Scheduler calculates the average call drop rate and HO success rate of each cell for the previous specific hours. This average calculation is based on the current time by using the information on the call drop rate and HO success rate with the history of network quality. Smart Scheduler confirms the following conditions for each cell. A cell is determined as a network quality degradation cell if the cell satisfies any of the following conditions:

[Condition 1] Average call drop rate > KPI_{CallDropRate} Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

495

Chapter 9 SON

[Condition 2] Average HO success rate < KPI_{HOSuccessRate} Adjusting RRH Tx Power Change Range of TLM TPC Smart Scheduler reduces the range of RRH Tx power change for the network quality degradation cell. TLM TPC prevents network performance degradation due to TLM TPC by deciding Tx power of the network quality degradation cell within the adjusted RRH Tx power change range.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Pre-condition Interworking between eNB and Smart SON Server is required, and operational state should be enabled. Feature Activation 1 For TPC activation, confirmation and information input for the following TPCrelated PLD parameters through EMS are required.

aSet SON_TPC_FUNC_ENABLE value for TPC target eNB to Auto. bSet SON_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE value for TPC target cell to Auto. cFor the cell of eNB where SON_TPC_FUNC_ENABLE value is OFF, SON_PWR_CTRL_ENALBE value cannot be set to Auto.

2 Configure PLD parameters related with RRH Tx Power determination algorithm. aTLM TPC Apply of Algorithm (TLM_PC_ENABLE = Auto) Configuration of TLM TPC operation period (TPUT_LOAD_PC_ENABLE) Configuration of range of TLM TPC power change (POWER_RANGE)

bRoll-back function Apply of Algorithm (STATS_CHECK_ENABLE = Auto) Configuration of Roll-back operation period (STATS_CHECK_PERIOD)

3 If DTO function is activated during TPC operation, operation of TPC function is stopped and its state transits to suspend state. Feature Deactivation SON_TPC_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to OFF.

Key Parameters The operator may set and view the operating mode, either automatic or release, in Samsung TPC by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

496

Chapter 9 SON Parameters

Description

SON_TPC_FUNC_ENABLE

Whether to enable the TPC (Tx. Power Control) SON function. Off (0): TPC function is turned off. Auto (1): TPC function is turned on.

The operator may set and view the Tx power changing mode, either automatic or release, by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL Parameters

Description

SON_PWR_CTRL_ENABLE

Whether to enable the power control. Off (0): Power change according to TPC function is turned off. Auto (1): Power change according to TPC function is turned on.

Counters and KPIs Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

Intra eNB Handover

IntraEnbAtt

The number of Intra-eNB handover execution attempt to intra-eNB neighbor cell

IntraEnbSucc

The number of Intra-eNB handover execution success to intraeNB neighbor cell

InterX2OutAtt

The number of X2 HO execution attempt to inter-eNB neighbor cell

InterX2OutSucc

The number of X2 HO execution success to inter-eNB neighbor cell

InterS1OutAtt

The number of S1 HO execution attempt to inter-eNB neighbor cell

InterS1OutSucc

The number of S1 HO execution success to inter-eNB neighbor cell

InterX2InAtt

The number of X2 HO execution attempt from inter-eNB neighbor cell to own eNB cell

InterX2InSucc

The number of X2 HO execution success from inter-eNB neighbor cell to own eNB cell

InterS1InAtt

The number of X2 HO execution success from inter-eNB neighbor cell to own eNB cell

InterS1InSucc

The number of S1 HO execution success from inter-eNB neighbor cell to own eNB cell

RRC connection establishments

ConnEstabSucc

The number of RRC connection setup success

RRC Connection Re-establishment

ConnReEstabSucc

The number of RRC reestablishment success

Call Drop

CallDrop_ECCB_R ADIO_LINK_FAILU RE

The number of call released due to radio link failure

CallDrop_ECCB_A RQ_MAX_RE_TRA NSMISSION

The number of call released due to maximum retransmission in RLC

X2 Handover Out

S1 Handover Out

X2 Handover In

S1 Handover In

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

497

Chapter 9 SON

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9). [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9). [3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions. [4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements. [5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

498

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO2031, Antenna Tilt Optimization (Coverage and Capacity Optimization) INTRODUCTION The Antenna Tilt Optimization (ATO) Coverage and Capacity Optimization (CCO) as LTE network optimization during the operation consists of a function of monitoring the network change and calculating the optimized tilt value after detecting the change in the network. These functions work at the configurable interval. The ATO CCO controls service coverage and received signal level of UE by changing the electrical tilt (e-tilt) through using the RET antenna. Such function may provide the optimized air interface (RF environment). To perform ATO CCO, Smart SON Server collects the following information from UE and eNB:

UE information oSounding Reference Signal (SRS) power by using Smart Scheduler, NI information oPeriodic Measurement Report (MR) information oMDT information including RSRP, UE location information

eNB information oStatistical information on the internal collection of eNBs (PM) oScheduling information (PRB usage per UE) The detailed functions of the ATO CCO without MDT information are as follows:

Monitoring change in air interface oCalculating the change index parameter based on collected information UE count Outage ratio :radio link failure probability Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) NbrINR : Interference to noise ratio working to the neighbor cell as interference component oDetermining the occurrence of the air interface change to the specific index conditions

E-tilt optimization oMonitoring the change of the air interface, deciding e-tilt difference fit for following conditions to the target cell: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

499

Chapter 9 SON

SNR difference to target SNR NbrINR difference to target NbrINR oDeciding effectiveness and consistency of e-tilt difference as follows: Confirming the improvement of average serving/neighbor cell SINR Confirming the collection in specific e-tilt The detailed functions of the ATO CCO with MDT information are as follows:

1 E-Tilt Optimization Calculating optimal e-tilt based on information collected through MDT 2 Apply of optimal e-tilt Applying optimal e-tilt to corresponding cells Rolling back if network quality is degraded after new e-tilt apply

BENEFIT The operator can reduce CAPEX and OPEX cost consumed in the past to manage the network status.

Because e-tilt is decided to optimize the coverage and capacity of each LTE cell, the quality of the received signal is improved and the outage ratio is reduced.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency Smart SON Manager and Smart Scheduler are required for the ATO. (ATO CCO can operate even when Smart Scheduling functions (DL Smart, UL Smart) are OFF.)

Supporting the UL SRS report/periodic MR of UE: To collect the information on the received signal of UE, the eNB and the Smart Scheduler must support the function of acquiring the periodic MR/SRS.

To support the automatic optimization of e-tilt during the operation, the RETantenna that may control e-tilt through the RET module must be supported.

UE should support 3GPP MDT with location information in order to collect location information and RF status required for MDT based ATO CCO operation. Limitation On assumption that optimization of the initial network is performed, ATO calculates the optimization value by detecting any occurrence of the change in the wireless network status. Also, this calculation occurs due to the construction of a new building during operation of the service.

(For ATO CCO operation without MDT information) Because it works in a way of reducing a trial error at an interval, a certain period of time is required to optimize. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

500

Chapter 9 SON

(For ATO CCO operation with MDT information) If UE fail to report MDT report message including location information, accuracy of ATO CCO optimization results for the corresponding cell can be degraded.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Architecture The blocks related to the Smart SON ATO CCO include Smart SON Server (with Smart Scheduler), Smart SON Manager (SSOM), eNB, and EMS and the whole architecture is as follows:

The main NEs for ATO CCO operation are as follows: Smart SON Manager (SSOM): SON GUI (ATO Function Control) Configuring ATO CCO working environment oATO CCO operating period oATO CCO working interval to monitor change in air interface (ATOperiod) oATO CCO working time to monitor change in air interface oTilt optimization working interval (TOperiod) o(For ATO CCO operation without MDT information) Ratio of selecting the target to configure periodic MR o(For ATO CCO operation with MDT information) UE selection ratio for MDT reporting (MDT report UE ratio)

Confirming application of the change in tilt (Operation of manual application) Confirming description on the tilt application (history management) Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

501

Chapter 9 SON

For ATO CCO operation with MDT information: oSSOM transmits MDT and statistic information collection request to LSM oSSOM transmits MDT information, UE based measurement information collection request to Smart SON Server oSSOM calculates average load per cell based on the collected load per cell information, and transmits the average load per cell to Smart SON Server oAfter antenna tilt adjustment, SSOM calculates RLF occurrence ratio whenever it receives RLF information, and it determines whether network performance is degraded or not. oIf SSOM determines that network performance is degraded, SSOM transmits tilt adjustment request to LSM for roll back operation. oAfter transmitting roll back request to LSM, SSOM transmits roll back notification to SSOM. oSSOM displays SINR heat map for before and after apply of optimal e-tilt to operator (TBD). oSSOM transmits e-tilt adjustment request to LSM. oSSOM transmits acknowledgment for e-tilt adjustment complete to Smart SON Server. oSSOM transmits MDT deactivation request to LSM. oSSOM transmits algorithm end request to Smart SON Server. eNB (For ATO CCO operation without MDT information) RQA Function oConfiguring or terminating a periodic measurement report (pMR) with a specific UE oDelivering SRS information by UE to Smart Scheduler oDelivering serving/neighbor RSRP information to Smart SON server

PM (ATO CCO related statistics) oCollecting RRC connection (Re) establishment/RLF item by using the call information oDelivering statistical information to Smart SON Server at the configured interval to the SON GUI

RET antenna management oChanging/managing e-tilt parameters depending on result of the ATO operation o(For ATO CCO operation with MDT information) Transmitting acknowledgment message to LSM after completing e-tilt adjustment.

(For ATO CCO operation with MDT information) MDT and scheduling information collection oCollecting MDT information from UE and transmitting the collected information to Smart SON Server Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

502

Chapter 9 SON

oTransmitting scheduling information (PRB usage) for connected UE to Smart SON Server Smart Scheduler SRS management Function

Managing serving/neighbor cell SRS/NI information Sharing SRS information with Smart SON server Smart SON Server (with Smart Scheduler) Detection of change in air interface oCalculating a detection parameter with the collected information from eNBs/Smart Scheduler oDetermining change in air interface by using the detection parameter oSelecting a cell whose air interface is changed

Tilt optimization Function oCalculating a tilt optimization parameter with the collected information from eNBs/Smart Scheduler o(For ATO CCO operation without MDT information) Deciding change in etilt for the cell selected in the detection function oFor ATO CCO operation with MDT information) Deciding the change in etilt and priority for apply of the change. oDetermining effectiveness of e-tilt values whose previous interval is changed oDetermining optimization of e-tilt oTransmitting the decided value of e-tilt and information required to display to SSOM EMS PLD sync function: Managing PLD change/maintenance

For ATO CCO operation with MDT information: oTransmitting MDT activation and request for statistic information collection to eNB of cells participating in ATO CCO. oTransmitting network statistic information (load/RLF information per cell) received from eNB to SSOM. oTransmitting e-tilt adjustment request to eNB of corresponding cells. oTransmitting e-tilt adjustment complete acknowledgment to SSOM. oTransmitting MDT deactivation request to eNB of cells participating in ATO CCO.

Smart SON ATO CCO Function Operation of ATO CCO without MDT Information Smart SON ATO CCO without MDT information starts depending on the scheduling information entered in the SSOM, and the whole flow is as follows: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

503

Chapter 9 SON

1 Starting operation of ATO CCO by the SSOM. oConfigure ATO CCO operation in the SSOM. oThe SSOM updates ATO CCO related PLD value from EMS every TOperiod. oThe SSOM delivers updated PLD to the Smart SON Server.

2 Updating PLD information The Smart SON Server updates PLD value from the SSOM.

3 Operating ATO The SSOM triggers operation of ATO CCO to the Smart SON Server every ATOperiod.

4 Configuring Radio Quality Analysis (RQA) oConfigure periodic MR to be collected by eNB at the SSOM. oThe SSOM request eNB to operate RQA.

5 Collecting information

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

504

Chapter 9 SON

oThe Smart SON Server collects serving/neighbor cell SRS information from the Smart Scheduler during TOperiod. oThe Smart SON Server collects the information on periodic MR (optional) and PM statistics from eNBs during TOperiod. Interface for statistic information collecting: FTP

6 Operating the function of monitoring change in air interface oCalculate the detection parameter by using (5) information. oDetermine change in the network by using the detection parameter. oIf change in the network does not occur, the SSOM alarms the end of the ATO CCO operation/Operate from (10). oSelect the cell in the network change to the target to change tilt.

7 Determining the change in e-tilt oCalculate the tilt optimization parameter by using (5) information. oDetermine e-tilt change by using the tilt optimization parameter for the selected cell. oDetermine effectiveness and rollback of the changed e-tilt at the past interval. oIf change in the e-tilt does not occur, the SSOM alarms the end of the ATO CCO operation/Operate from (10).

8 Alarming change in e-tilt oThe Smart SON server delivers the changed e-tilt to SSOM. oThe SSOM transmits the change e-tilt to EMS. oThe EMS transmits the changed e-tilt to eNB for apply the changed e-tilt value to the RET. (E-tilt values of multi RET in eNB are applied in parallel.)

9 Performing operation of the e-tilt optimization (repeatedly). Perform (5) and (7)~ (9) every TOperiod.

10 Stopping operation of RQA The SSOM request eNB to stop operation of the RQA.

11 Holding the operation until the next ATOperiod Operation of ATO CCO with MDT Information The following figure shows call flow of ATO CCO function (with MDT information)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

505

Chapter 9 SON

1 If one or more than one Smart SON function (ATO CCO, ATO COC, NCSR, TPC) is in operation during network in service, following operations are always performed:

eNB transmits PRB usage of each connected UE to Smart SON Server Smart Scheduler transmits SRS Rx power and estimated value of NI per connected UE to Smart SON Server

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

506

Chapter 9 SON

2 If operator selects Activation after configuring parameters for ATO CCO operation through GUI of SSOM, SSOM generates MDT activation and request on statistics collection, and it transmits those messages to LSM. In addition, SSOM generates MDT data, UE based measurement collection request, and it transmits those messages to Smart SON Server.

3 Upon receiving MDT activation and request for statistics from SSOM, LSM generates and transmits MDT activation request and request for PM statistics to eNB including target cells of ATO CCO.

4 eNB that has received MDT activation request starts to collect MDT information from MDT UEs.

5 eNB that has received request for PM statistics starts to collect PM information (load/RLF information per cell).

6 Smart SON Server which has received MDT data, UE based measurement collection request starts to collect SRS Rx power and NI from Smart Scheduler.

7 eNB periodically reports collected MDT data to Smart SON Server. 8 eNB periodically reports collected load/RLF information per cell to LSM. 9 LSM transmits received load/RLF information per cell to SSOM. 10 SSOM determines whether network quality is degraded or not in every PM statistic period.

11 If SSOM determines that the network quality is degraded due to apply of new e-tilt, SSOM immediately transmits tilt control request for the purpose of roll back to LSM.

12 At the end of data collection period, SSOM calculates average load per cell and transmit the average load per cell to Smart SON Server.

13 Smart SON Server starts analysis at the end of data collection period. 14 Smart SON Server calculates new e-tilt values for target cells of ATO CCO. 15 Smart SON Server transmits determined e-tilt values and data for display heat map to SSOM.

16 Upon reception of new e-tilt values, SSOM generates tilt adjustment request and transmits it to LSM.

17 SSOM displays SINR heat maps for before/after new e-tilt apply (TBD). 18 LSM receiving e-tilt adjustment request orders corresponding eNBs to adjust etilt.

19 eNB receiving e-tilt adjustment request adjusts e-tilt. If e-tilt adjustment is completed, eNB generates acknowledgment and transmits it to LSM.

20 LSM receiving acknowledgment for e-tilt adjustment relays the acknowledgment to SSM.

21 If SSOM receives acknowledgment of e-tilt adjustment from all cells that have requested to adjust e-tilt, SSOM transmits tilt control completion message to Smart SON Server.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

507

Chapter 9 SON

22 If SSOM that has determined network quality degradation and requested roll back of e-til receives acknowledgment for the e-tilt roll back, SSOM transmits roll back notification message to Smart SON Server.

23 If operator selects Deactivation through SSOM or the configured time expires, SSOM generates MDT deactivation and request for statistics collection stop, and it transmit those messages to LSM. In addition, SSOM generates MDT data and UE based measurement collection stop request, and it transmit the message to Smart SON Server.

24 LSM receiving MDT deactivation and request for statistics collection stop transmits MDT deactivation request and statistic data collection stop messages to eNBs for target cells of ATO CCO.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Pre-condition The eNB should interwork with Smart SON Server, and operational state should be enabled.

If Radio Quality Analysis (RQA) is activated by other function, current RQA should be deactivated and RQA should be reactivated for the purpose of ATO.

In SSOM, LSM should be registered. In LSM, Smart SON Server and MME should be registered. (For ATO CCO operation without MDT information) If Radio Quality Analysis (RQA) is currently running for other purpose, the current RQA operation should be disabled and RQA should be rescheduled for the purpose of ATO CCO.

(For ATO CCO operation with MDT information) Smart SON Server should be registered in TCE table in order to enable MDT information collection in Smart SON Server.

(For ATO CCO operation with MDT information) LTE-SO0901 Minimization Drive Test Optimization (MDT) feature must be supported. (For detail information on the MDT function, refer to the LTE-SO0901 feature description and system operation.) Feature Activation 1 In SSOM, MDT usage for ATO CCO should be configured by selecting Usage of MDT. oUsage of MDT is configured as On, MDT based ATO CCO is activated. oUsage of MDT is configured as Of, MDT based ATO CCO is deactivated and MR based ATO CCO operation will be performed.

2 For ATO CCO operation without MDT information (MR based ATO CCO operation) Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

508

Chapter 9 SON

aBefore activation of ATO CCO, confirmation and information input for the following ATO CCO-related PLD parameters are required. SON_ATO_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to Auto or Manual. Setting of RQA related parameters iRQA_ENALBE value must be set to On (1). iiSMART_SON_ATO_FLAG value must be set to True. iiiSTART_TIME_HOUR and START_TIME_MIN are configured with start time of RQA is enabling.

bActivating ATO CCO function in SSOM. Configure Usage of MDT to Off and click Register button on ATO Schedule Job screen. Configure Smart SON Server, Period, Schedule Term (ATOperiod), Start At, Algorithm Term (TOperiod), and Call rate in SSOM GUI Configuration.

3 For ATO CCO operation with MDT information aBefore activation of ATO CCO, confirmation and information input for the following ATO CCO-related/Tilt-related/MDT-related PLD parameters are required. SON_CCO_MDT_FUNC_ENABLE of SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL PLD for ATO CCO target eNB must be set to Auto. SON_TILT_CTRL_ENABLE of SON_FUNC_CELL_CONTROL PLD for ATO CCO target cell must be set to Auto. Attribute of SON_CCO_MDT_FUNC PLD for ATO CCO target eNB should be configured by operator. Attribute of ANTENNA_CONF PLD for ATO CCO target cell should be configured by operator. MGMT_BASED_IMMEDIATE_MDT_ALLOWED of MDT_CTRL_PARA PLD for the ATO CCO target cell should be set to True.

bActivate ATO CCO function through SSOM Click registration button after selecting Usage of MDT to On and configuring Period for MDT based ATO. Click confirm button after configuring Smart SON Server, Period, Start Time, MDT report UE ratio, Algorithm Type, Usage of Load Statistics DB on ATO(CC) registration screen.

4 Apart from the configuration registered in SSOM, ATO CCO can be activated by clicking ATO Start button.

5 ATO CCO is performed during network operation, and ATO CCO cannot simultaneously operate with DTO.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

509

Chapter 9 SON

Feature Deactivation Delete configuration contents registered in SSOM.

Apart from the configuration registered in SSOM, operator can deactivate ATO CCO function by clicking ATO Stop button.

For ATO CCO operation without MDT information (MR based ATO CCO operation): oSON_ATO_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to Off and disabling RQA function. oRQA_ENALBE value must be set to Off (0). oSMART_SON_ATO_FLAG value must be set to False.

For ATO CCO operation with MDT information: oSON_CCO_MDT_FUNC_ENABLE value must be set to Off.

Key Parameters The operator may set and view the operating mode, among automatic, manual or release, in Smart SON ATO by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB Parameters

Description

SON_ATO_FUNC_ENABLE

Whether to enable the ATO (antenna tilt optimization) Coverage and Capacity Optimization SON function without MDT information. Off (0): The function is turned off. Manual (1): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change is reported to the LSM and then the operator determines manually whether to apply the changed parameter value. Auto (2): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change is applied automatically.

SON_CCO_MDT_FUNC_ENA BLE

Whether to enable the MDT-based ATO (CCO) SON function, (one of the SON functions). Off (0): The function is turned off. Manual (1): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change is reported to the LSM and then the operator determines manually whether to apply the changed parameter value. Auto (2): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change is applied automatically.

The operator may set and view the e-tilt changing mode, either automatic or release, in use of the RET by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL Parameters

Description

SON_TILT_CTRL_ENABLE

Whether to enable the Tilt control Off (0): The function is turned off. Auto (1): The parameter value is changed by an algorithm

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

510

Chapter 9 SON

Counters and KPIs ATO CCO without MDT Information Counters related with Smart SON ATO CCO function without MDT information Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

RRC connection establishments

ConnEstabSucc

The number of RRC connection setup success

RRC Connection Reestablishment

ConnReEstabSucc

The number of RRC reestablishment success

Call Drop

CallDrop_ECCB_RADIO_LINK_ FAILURE

The number of call released due to radio link failure

ATO CCO with MDT Information Counters related with ATO CCO function with MDT information Family Display Name

Type Name

Type Description

PRB_TOTAL

TotPrbDLAvg

Resources used for PDSCH/PDCCH transmission among all downlink resources.

MRO_RLF

CoverageHole

The number of RLF/HO failure occurrence according to coverage hole in this cell region.

CoverageHoleN

The number of RLF/HO failure occurrence according to coverage hole for this cell region toward neighbor cell N.

RRC_ESTAB

ConnEstabSucc

The number of RRC establishment success

RRC_REESTAB

ConnReEstabSucc

The number of RRC re-establishment success.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9) [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9) [3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions [4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements [5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

511

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO2032, Antenna Tilt Optimization (Cell outage compensation) INTRODUCTION The Samsung Antenna Tilt Optimization (ATO) for Cell Outage Compensation (COC) feature improves RF environment (SINR) of the cell outage area by automatically adjusting antenna tilt of neighboring cells of the outage cell, if the outage occurs for a specific cell during the operation of LTE system. ATO COC is based on Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) function. ATO COC consists of RF map generation/update, cell outage detection, cell outage compensation, and cell outage clear functions.

1 RF information map creation and update function oCreating and updating RF information map by collecting MDT Data and realtime RF information.

2 Cell outage detection function oCell outage detection by monitoring change of cell status information. oCell outage detection based on statistic information.

3 Cell outage compensation function oCalculation of e-tilt values for neighboring cells of the outage cell for compensating cell outage area. oCells participating in ATO COC operation maximize average SINR of cell outage area by adjusting their antenna tilts.

4 Cell outage clear function oIf the cell outage is cleared, antenna tilts of ATO COC participating cells are returned to the value of antenna tilt before the cell outage occurs. The following figure shows Concept of Antenna Tilt Optimization (COC).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

512

Chapter 9 SON

BENEFIT By supporting operator to quickly detect cell outage, time required to recover network operation can be reduced.

Cell outage compensation enables operator to continuously provide services to the users located in cell outage area.

User can be provided service with short interruption time in case of cell outage occurrence.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency ATO COC requires Smart SON Manager and Smart Scheduler.

Support of UE UL SRS report/Periodic MR function is required. To collect information on received signal of the UE, eNB and Smart scheduler should support periodic MR/SRS acquisition functions.

Support of Remote Electrical Tilting (RET) is required. For enabling e-tilt automatic adjustment during network operation, RET antenna which can adjust e-tilt through RET module is required.

UE should support 3GPP MDT function (immediate MDT (M1/location)). Limitation Certain time is required for determining cell outage detection for cell outage compensation in order to accurately determine cell outage situation.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

513

Chapter 9 SON

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Architecture The blocks related to the Smart SON ATO COC include Smart SON Server (with Smart Scheduler), Smart SON Manager (SSOM), eNB, and EMS. Overall architecture for Smart SON ATO COC is shown in the following figure.

In the above architecture, operation of each entity for Smart SON ATO COC is as follows:

1 Smart SON Manager (SSOM) oParameter configuration for ATO COC operation iActivation/deactivation of ATO COC feature iiMDT based ATO period (determination period of statistic based cell outage detection) iiiMDT Report Target UE selection ratio oDetermination of Cell Outage Detection (COD) ivPeriodic COD : Determination of COD based on statistics data from EMS

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

514

Chapter 9 SON

vEvent driven COD : Determination of COD based on cell status abnormality information from EMS oCOD identification functionality (Auto/Manual apply operations) oFunction for confirm ATO COC apply (Manual apply operation) oFunction for check ATO COC apply history (history management) oRequest of MDT activation and statistic data collection to EMS oRequest of MDT data/RF information collection to Smart SON Server oCOC with MDT operation request/Apply of new e-tilt values

2 eNB oMDT configuration iManaging MDT operation for specific UE iiReporting SRS information per UE to Smart Scheduler iiiReporting MDT measurement data to Smart SON Server oPM (ATO COC related Statistics) iCollecting RRC connection (Re)Establishment/MRO RLF based on Call information iiReporting statistics to EMS in every statistics reporting period. oRET Antenna Management iApplying/managing e-tilt parameter which is determined by ATO COC

3 Smart Scheduler oSRS Management Function iManaging Serving/Neighbor Cell SRS/NI information iiSharing SRS information with Smart SON Server

4 Smart SON server (in Smart Scheduler) oRF Information Map Management Function iGenerating/managing RF information map based on information collected in eNB/Smart Scheduler (MDT/SRS Rx power/Network quality) oTilt optimization Function iCalculating optimal e-tilt values based on the RF information map.

5 EMS oSystem parameter management (change/maintenance) oCollecting MDT and statistic information from the target cells and transmitting them to SSOM in a certain period. oInforming SSOM the cell status abnormality if time that certain cell‟s status is kept disabled is longer than certain time duration.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

515

Chapter 9 SON

Smart SON ATO COC Function ATO COC Operational Procedure Smart SON ATO COC operation starts when operator activates the function through SSOM GUI. Operational procedure of ATO COC is as follows:

1 Collection of MDT and real-time RF information aSmart SON Server collects MDT information, SRS Rx power, CQI, RI, MPR from eNB.

2 RF information map creation and update aSmart SON Server creates service area based on location information of MDT collection target cells, and divides the collection area as a form of grid.

bSmart SON Server updates RF information collected during COD determination period in each grid.

3 Cell Outage Detection (COD) aSSOM performs COD based on cell status change. bSSOM performs COD based on periodic statistics collection. 4 Cell Outage Compensation (COC) Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

516

Chapter 9 SON

aSmart SON Server selects COC target cells which will participate in COC operation, by using RF map.

bSmart SON Server determines antenna tilts of COC target cells, which maximizes average SINR of Cell Outage area.

5 Cell Outage Clear (COC) aIf the cell outage is cleared, the values of antenna tilt of COC target cells return to the values used before the cell outage occurs. ATO COC call flow Call flow of Smart SON ATO COC feature is as follows:

1 SSOM registers/activates ATO COC function. 2 If ATO COC function is activated by operator or schedule, SSOM requests required operations for ATO COC to EMS and Smart SON server.

3 EMS requests eNB to perform MDT activation/statistic report if ATO COC related operation is requested from SSOM.

4 Smart SON Server collects MDT data from eNB and SRS Rx power from Smart Scheduler if activation of ATO COC function is requested from SSOM.

5 eNB transmits collected MDT and scheduling data to Smart SON Server at every operational period.

6 EMS accumulates statistic information from eNB during the operational period, and transmits the accumulated information to SSOM.

7 Smart SON Server receives SRS Rx power from Smart Scheduler at every 1.28 sec.

8 Smart SON server generates and updates RF information map at every operational period based on the collected information.

9 SSOM determines cell outage by using statistic data collected after the end of operational period.

10 If cell outage is detected, SSOM transmits request of COC operation along with cell outage occurrence information to Smart SON Server (if operational mode is set to manual, operator‟s confirmation is required before performing COC.) If cell outage is not detected, SSOM does not perform COC.

11 If COC operation request is delivered from SSOM, Smart SON server calculates new e-tilt values of COC target cells for cell outage compensation based on RF information map updated until current operational period.

12 Smart SON Server informs SSOM the newly calculated e-tilt values. Then, SSOM requests EMS to apply the new e-tilt values.

13 EMS requests e-tilt adjustments to eNBs corresponding to the COC target cells. 14 If acknowledgment for e-tilt adjustment request is received by SSOM, SSOM informs operator about the operation results.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

517

Chapter 9 SON

Apart from the periodic COD operation, if EMS identifies that specific condition (cell status disable) is maintained for certain time duration, EMS reports the abnormal cell status to SSOM. Then, SSOM can detect cell outage based on the report from EMS. In this case, procedures from 10) to 14) are performed for COC.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

518

Chapter 9 SON

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Pre-condition The eNB should interwork with Smart SON Server, and operational state should be enabled.

If MDT is activated by other function, current MDT should be deactivated and MDT should be reactivated for COC with MDT function

In SSOM, EMS should be registered. In EMS, Smart SON Server and MME should be registered. In TCE table, Smart SON Server should be registered. (For ATO COC operation with MDT information) LTE-SO0901 (Minimization Drive Test Optimization, MDT) feature must be supported.

(For detail information on the MDT function, refer to the LTE-SO0901 feature description and system operation.) Feature Activation 1 Before activation of COC with MDT (ATO (COC)), confirmation and information input for the following COC with MDT-related system parameters are required.

aIn SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL relation, CocMdtFuncEn value must be set to Autoapply or Manualapply.

bIn SON_FUNC_CELL_CONTROL relation, TiltCtrlEn value must be set to Auto (enable).

cRequired setting for MDT activation must be activated. 2 Activating COC with MDT function in SSOM. aSelect Usage of MDT bInput the Period for MDT based ATO cClick Register button on ATO Schedule Job screen. dConfigure Smart Son Server, Overall duration of COC with MDT function and Call rate for MDT in SSOM GUI Configuration.

3 COC with MDT is performed during network operation, and it can simultaneously operate with CCO with MDT. But, it cannot simultaneously operate with DTO and NCSR Feature Deactivation Delete configuration contents registered in SSOM.

COC with MDT-related system parameters are set as follows In SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL relation, CocMdtFuncEn value must be set to Off. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

519

Chapter 9 SON

In SON_FUNC_CELL_CONTROL relation, TiltCtrlEn value must be set to Off(disable)

Key Parameters The operator may configure or change the operation of the Smart SON ATO (COC) by using the following configuration: Parameters for GUI configuration Parameters

Description

Unit

Smart Son Server

Select a server to perform ATO operation.

-

Period

Select a period where ATO (COC) operation is performed.

-

Start At

ATO operation starting time

-

MDT report UE ratio

Ratio of calls for MDT

%

Usage of MDT

Usage of MDT

-

Period for MDT based ATO

Periodic for COD

-

The operator may set and view the operating mode, among automatic, manual or release, in Smart SON COC with MDT by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB Parameters

Description

SON_COC_MDT_FU NC_ENABLE

Whether to enable the Antenna Tilt Optimization (COC with MDT) SON function, (one of the smart SON functions). Off (0): The function is turned off. Manual (1): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change is reported to the SSOM and then the operator determines manually whether to apply the changed parameter value. Auto (2): When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, this change is applied automatically.

The operator may set and view the e-tilt changing mode, either automatic or release, in use of the RET by using the following commands and parameters: CHG-SONFN-CELL/RTRV-SONFN-CELL Parameters

Description

SON_TILT_CTRL_E NABLE

Whether to enable the Tilt control Off (0): The function is turned off. Auto (1): The parameter value is changed by an algorithm

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

520

Chapter 9 SON

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification [3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions [4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements [5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases [6] 3GPP 32.422: Trace control and configuration management [7] 3GPP 32.423: Trace data definition and management

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

521

Chapter 9 SON

LTE-SO2041, New Cell Site Recommendation INTRODUCTION Samsung‟s new cell site recommendation solution automatically recommends the number and locations of new small cells to install when operating a Smart LTE system. The purpose of this function is to enhance network performance. Samsung‟s new cell site recommendation solution consists of the following processes:

1 Collecting information oCollects information on the network status (load and RF status) and network statistics in real-time.

2 Determining the need for additional small cells oDetermines whether additional small cells are required to enhance network performance based on the information collected during a certain timeframe.

3 Collecting trace information oCollects the location information and real time information using MDT.

4 Determining the number and locations of additional small cells to install oDetermines the optimal number and locations of additional small cells to install. oReports the optimal number and locations of the small cells to the network operator.

BENEFIT Improves the network throughput by selecting the optimal locations for small cells based on the network status.

Releases macro overloads caused by expanded macro coverage and increased subscribers.

Reduces operating expenses (OPEX) by automatically recommending the optimal number and locations of small cells.

Improves the service quality of UEs in problematic areas by selecting the optimal locations for small cells based on the network status.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency The Smart SON Manager and Smart SON Server are required for the new cell site recommendation function. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

522

Chapter 9 SON

The UE must have MDT capabilities to acquire the location information and the RF status. Limitation If UE fails to report its location information with MDT message, then the accuracy decreases for that cell.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Architecture The following figure shows the network architecture for Samsung‟s new cell site recommendation solution. The main network entities (NEs) in this architecture include the eNB, Smart Scheduler, LSM, and Smart SON Manager (SSOM).

The functions of the main NEs used in Samsung‟s new cell site recommendation solution are as follows:

1 eNB oCreates the network statistics (loading information, call drop rates). oReceives call trace reports from UE. oReports the collected information to the Smart Scheduler. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

523

Chapter 9 SON

2 Smart SON Server oDetermines the number of additionally required small cells and the installation locations. iSelects problematic areas (coverage holes, UE-dense areas) based on the MDT information. iiDetermines the number and locations of the new small cells required for network optimization. iiiReports the determined result to the SSOM.

3 SSOM (Smart SON Manager) oDetermines whether additional small cells are required. iDetects cell having coverage holes or cell in heavy load situation based on information collected by LSM, and determines whether detail information collection is required or not. iiActivates MDT for the detected cell if SSOM determines that detail information collection is required. oDisplays the problematic locations (coverage holes, UE-dense areas). oDisplays the optimal number and locations of the small cells to install.

4 LSM (LTE System Manager) oCollects information for determining whether new cell site is required or not. oCollects network statistic information from eNB, and forwards the collected information to SSOM.

New Cell Site Recommendation Function New Cell Site Recommendation Operation Flow The operating flow of Samsung‟s new cell site recommendation solution is as follows:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

524

Chapter 9 SON

1 eNB collects network service information (cell load and RLF information) of its managing cells, and delivers the information to LSM.

2 SSOM determines whether detailed information collection due to coverage hole or too heavy load is required or not (operation of new cell site recommendation is required or not) based on the network service information collected from LSM.

3 If SSOM determines that the operation of new cell site recommendation is required, it transmits MDT activation to the cell with problem, and SSOM transmits new cell site recommendation triggering to Smart SON Server.

4 Smart SON Server collects MDT and scheduling information. 5 Smart SON Server transmits MDT deactivation commend to SSOM, if all information required for algorithm operation is collected.

6 SSOM transmits MDT deactivation to eNB for stopping MDT collection. 7 Smart SON Server determines the number of additional small cells to install and the installation locations of the additional small cells to install. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

525

Chapter 9 SON

8 Smart SON Server reports the number of additional small cells to install and the cells‟ installation locations to the SSOM.

9 SSOM reports the number of additional small cells to install and the cells‟ installation locations to operator. New Cell Site Recommendation Detailed Operation 1 Collecting Information eNB collects its managing cell‟s PRB usage and PRB usage per UE during New Cell Site Recommendation period. Also, it reports the collected information related with cell loading to SSOM in every New Cell Site Recommendation period. In addition, eNB acquires UE‟s RLF information during the same period, and reports information of RLF occurred due to coverage hole to SSOM.

2 Determining Necessity of Additional Small Cell Installation Necessity of additional installation of new small cell is triggered by following two cases. oTriggering by coverage hole SSOM determines that cell in which RLF due to coverage hole does not satisfy condition requires installation of new small cell. oTriggering by too heavy loading SSOM determines that cell having cell loading higher than pre-defined level requires installation of new small cell. If SSOM determines that the installation of new small cell is required, SSOM transmits MDT activation to the cell with problem, and SSOM transmits new cell site recommendation triggering to Smart SON Server.

3 Determining New Cell Site In case that Samsung New Cell Site Recommendation function is performed, LSM transmits trace activation message to MME and eNB. During MDT information collecting duration, Smart SON Server collects RF information and location information from MDT UE through eNB. In addition, if RLF occurs, corresponding information is collected. Upon finishing MDT information collecting duration, trace deactivate message is delivered to MME and eNB. Smart SON Server performs following operations to estimate problem location based on collected information such as UE location, RSRP, and RSRQ. oFor case of triggering due to coverage hole iBinning the whole MDT area by specific size. iiFor each bin, calculating the values of received RSRP and SINR for all cells by averaging RF information in location corresponding to the bin. iiiDetermining bins where network quality (RSRP or SINR) is lower than specific threshold as problem area. ivDetermining coverage radius of new small cell according to the Tx power of the small cell.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

526

Chapter 9 SON

vLocating small cell at the bin having the worst network quality, and determining whether the small cell can cover all adjacent problem areas. viIf the small cell cannot cover all of the problem areas, moving the location of small cell to adjacent bin and determining whether the small cell can cover all problem areas. viiBin where the small cell can cover all adjacent problem areas is selected as new cell site location. viiiIf other problem area exists, increasing the number of additional small cells by 1, and repeating procedures iii~vi.

oIn case of triggering due to too heavy loading iBinning the whole MDT area by specific size, and calculating the PRB usage corresponding to each bin. iiDetermining coverage radius of new small cell according to the Tx power of the small cell. iiiLocating the small cell at each of all bins, and selecting a bin with the highest PRB usage in the coverage of the small cell. ivIf the cell is still too high loading status even though excluding the load expected to be accommodated by the new small cell, increasing the number of new small cell by 1 and repeating procedures ii and iii.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

527

Chapter 9 SON

Smart SON Server reports determined number of new small cells and their locations to SSOM.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate Smart SON New Cell Site Recommendation function has precedence over TPC and ATO functions. If DTO function is activated, TPC and ATO stop their operation and transit to suspend state. Since DTO function has precedence over New Cell Site Recommendation function, New Cell Site Recommendation function waits until operation of DTO function is finished, if DTO function is currently running. Pre-condition  eNB should interwork with Smart SON Server, and operational state should be enabled.

In SSOM, LSM should be registered. In LSM, Smart SON Server and MME should be registered. For call trace at Smart SON Server, Smart SON Server should be included in TCE table. Feature Activation & Action 1 Before New Cell Site Recommendation activation, confirmation and information input for the following related PLD parameters through EMS are required.

aSet SON_NCSR_FUNC_ENABLE value of optimization target eNB‟s SON_FUNC_ENB_CONTROL PLD to Manual.

2 Activate New Cell Site Recommendation function in SSOM. If the function is activated, RLF information and cell load information are collected to determine whether new cell installation is required or not. If SSOM determines that new cell installation is required, it is reported to operator.

3 If operator activates operation for new cell installation, Smart SON Server collects MDT information and scheduling information. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

528

Chapter 9 SON

4 After finishing the information collecting, Smart SON Server reports the number of newly required cells and their locations to operator, and finishes operations for MDT and scheduling information collecting. Feature Deactivation After reporting New Cell Site Recommendation operation to operator, operation for additional cell installation is deactivated.

Key Parameters CHG-SONFN-ENB/RTRV-SONFN-ENB Parameters

Description

SON_NCSR_FUNC_ENABLE

Whether to enable the New Cell Site Recommendation SON function, (one of the SON functions). Off: The function is turned off. Manual: When the parameter value is changed by an algorithm, the operator determines manually whether to apply the changed parameter value.

CHG-MDTCTRL-PARA/RTRV-MDTCTRL-PARA Parameters

Description

MGMT_BASED_IMMEDIATE _MDT_ALLOWED

This parameter shows the whether to permit to the Management Based Immediate MDT on demand. False: Management Based Immediate MDT request is not allowed. True: Management Based Immediate MDT request is allowed.

MDT_UE_PICKUP_RATE

This parameter represents the selection rate which it uses when selecting the Management Based MDT object UE. If the random number generated between 0 is this value or less, select as MDT object UE.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters and KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP 36.300: E-UTRA and E-UTRAN; overall description Stage 2 (Release 9) [2] 3GPP 36.331: E-UTRAN; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification (Release 9) [3] 3GPP 36.902: E-UTRAN; Self-configuring and self-optimizing network (SON) use cases and solutions [4] 3GPP 32.500: E-UTRAN; Concepts & Requirements [5] 3GPP 32.501: E-UTRAN; Self-configuration of network elements; OAM Requirements for Self Configuration Use Cases [6] 3GPP 32.422: Trace control and configuration management

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

529

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis LTE-OM9001, Cell Traffic Trace INTRODUCTION This feature provides detailed information at call level on all UEs in a specific cell. The traceable interfaces are UE-Associated S1, X2 and RRC. This trace result is transmitted to LSM or Trace Collection Entity (TCE) server.

BENEFITS This feature allows operator to analyze all the signaling messages transmitting and receiving in a specific cell, which can be used for troubleshooting.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency The LSM and MME are required.

The TCE server is required. Limitation The LSM can act as TCE server, but stores simultaneously trace results from up to six cells in E-UTRAN system.

In case of CPU overload status, tracing can be suspended to prevent the negative impact on the service users.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Samsung eNB provides 3GPP standard (TS 32.422 & 32.423) based Subscriber and Equipment Trace. This feature performs tracing signalling interface messages on all calls in the specific cell. The operator can control the cell traffic trace using cell ID through LSM. If trace results are generated, eNB reports the results to TCE.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

530

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

When several PLMNs are supported in the RAN, for starting Trace eNB shall only select UEs where the pLMNTarget = selectedPLMN-Identity that UE includes in RRCConnectionSetup message 3GPP TS 36.331. Management based trace procedure is as follows:

Management Based Trace Activation (New Call)

Management Based Trace Activation (Undergoing call setup)

Management Based Trace Activation (Existing Call)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

531

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

Management Based Trace Deactivation

If a call ends normally by sending a RRC Connection Release message to UE, the trace recording session for that call is ended. To stop tracing for the cell, the deactivate trace message is send to eNB through LSM.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The procedure for enabling cell traffic trace is as follows: Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

532

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

1 Log into LSM and select Performance Management | Call Trace. 2 Perform the management-based trace for a trace type. 3 The operator can select the following input parameters oTarget eNB oList of interface: S1, X2, and Uu oDepth: Minimum, Medium, and Maximum oTarget cell ID

4 Press REGISTER button, then [Register Call Trace] window is displayed. 5 Press Start button, then [Display Real Time Data] window is displayed. 6 Click DELETE button, then trace is deleted. 7 Click REFRESH button, then list in the trace list table is re-displayed. Key Parameters RTRV-TCE-LIST/CHG-TCE-LIST/CRTE-TCE-LIST/DLT-TCE-LIST Parameter

Description

tceType

This parameter represents the TCE server type and has to one of three below values. standAlone: TCE Server is standAlone Type. lsmEmbedded: TCE Server is embedded in LSM smartSon: TCE Server is for Smart SON server

Counters and KPIs Collected Data on Uu Interface according to the trace depth are as follows: Data Name

Message Name

Description

CS Fallback indicator

MOBILITY FROM EUTRA COMMAND

Whether a fallback to CS network is possible

CN Domain

PAGING

Identifies whether the domain is CS or PS network.

S-TMSI

PAGING

S-TMSI information of UE (MME code, M-TMSI)

ReestablishmentCause

RRC CONNECTION REESTABLISHMENT REQUEST

Cause of UE’s re-establishment

Wait time

RRC CONNECTION REJECT

The period of time for which the system waits until UE attempts a call again

Release Cause

RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

The reason for which UE’s connection has been released

Redirection Information

RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

The carrier frequency of the RAT used by UE during cell reselection

Establishment Cause

RRC CONNECTION REQUEST

The reason for which UE’s connection has been established

Selected PLMN-Identity

RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE

The UE selected PLMN ID

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

533

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Data Name

Message Name

Description

RegisteredMME

RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE

Information of MME with which UE is registered

Rat-Type

UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION

The RAT information of the capabilities given by UE

Measured Results

MEASUREMENT REPORT

The results measured by the terminal

CDMA2000-Type

HANDOVER FROM EUTRA PREPARATION REQUEST UL HANDOVER PREPARATION TRANSFER UL INFORMATION TRANSFER

CDMA2000Type information (1xRTT, HRPD)

Target RAT Type

MOBILITY FROM EUTRA COMMAND

The RAT information for the target

Collected Data on S1 Interface according to the trace depth are as follows: Data Name

Message Name

Description

E-RAB ID

All messages containing the ID

E-RAB ID

E-RAB Level QoS Parameters

E-RAB SETUP REQUEST E-RAB MODIFY REQUEST INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST

QoS for E-RAB

Cause

INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP FAILURE UE CONTEXT RELEASE REQUEST UE CONTEXT RELEASE COMMAND UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION FAILURE HANDOVER REQUIRED HANDOVER PREPARATION FAILURE HANDOVER REQUEST HANDOVER FAILURE HANDOVER CANCEL PATH SWITCH REQUEST FAILURE NAS NON DELIVERY INDICATION

Cause for failure of the message

Handover Type

HANDOVER REQUIRED HANDOVER COMMAND HANDOVER REQUEST

Handover type (IntraLTE, LTEtoUTRAN...)

E-UTRAN CGI

HANDOVER NOTIFY PATH SWITCH REQUEST INITIAL UE MESSAGE UPLINK NAS TRANSPORT

Cell global ID of eNB (PLMN ID + cell ID)

TAI

HANDOVER NOTIFY PATH SWITCH REQUEST UPLINK NAS TRANSPORT

Tracking area ID of eNB (PLMN ID + TAC)

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

534

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Data Name

Message Name

Description

Target ID

HANDOVER REQUIRED

ID of the target RAT which is the handover target

CDMA2000 HO Status

DOWNLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING

Whether HO to the CDMA2000 is successful

CDMA2000 RAT Type

DOWNLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING UPLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING

RAT information of the CDMA2000 (1xRTT, HRPD)

CDMA2000 Sector ID

UPLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING

Sector ID of the CDMA2000

CDMA2000 HO Required Indication

UPLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING

Whether UE has to prepare handover to the CDMA2000

Collected Data on X2 Interface according to the trace depth are as follows: Data Name

Message Name

Description

E-RAB id

All messages where it is present

ID of E-RAB

E-RAB Level QoS

HANDOVER REQUEST

QoS for E-RAB

Cause

HANDOVER REQUEST HANDOVER PREPARATION FAILURE HANDOVER CANCEL

Cause information of each message

Target Cell ID

HANDOVER REQUEST

Handover target’s cell ID

GUMMEI

HANDOVER REQUEST

Handover target’s GUMMEID

UE History Information

HANDOVER REQUEST

History of UE

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) [3] 3GPP TS32.422 Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment trace; Trace control and configuration management [4] 3GPP TS32.423 Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment trace; Trace data definition and management

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

535

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

LTE-OM9002, Subscriber and Equipment Trace INTRODUCTION The Subscriber and Equipment Trace provide detailed information at call level on one or more specific mobile(s). This data is transmitted to the TCE server.

BENEFITS This feature allows operator to analyze the signaling messages transmitting and receiving through S1-MME, X2 and Uu interfaces for a designated user, which can be used for troubleshooting.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency The TCE and MME are required.

The LSM can act as TCE server if LSM connect with Samsung Core system. Limitation If CPU critical alarm is occurred, all traces stop for system protection.

In case of using TCE server, operator should register TCE IP Address on eNB through ASM.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Samsung eNB provides 3GPP standard (TS 32.422 & 32.423) based Subscriber and Equipment Trace. This feature performs tracing signaling interface messages on a specific UE. Also, this feature supports mobility. If Trace Activation IE is contained in the Initial Context Setup Request message, or Trace Start message is received from MME, the eNB starts a trace for the call. If Trace Activation IE is contained in the Handover Request message received from the source eNB or MME in case of X2 or S1 Handover, eNB starts a trace for the call. If trace results are generated, eNB reports the results to TCE.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

536

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

Signaling based trace procedure is as follows:

Signaling Based Trace Activation

Signaling based trace deactivation

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

537

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

If a call ends normally by sending a RRC Connection Release message to UE, the trace for that call is ended. To stop the tracing, the deactivate trace message is send to eNB through MME.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate If Trace Activation IE is included in the Initial Context Setup Request message, the Trace Start message or the Handover Request (S1/X2) message from MME, the eNB starts trace for the call.

The operator can control the trace disable/resume threshold. oIf CPU state is higher than disable threshold, trace will be paused. oAfter trace disabled, CPU state is lower than resume threshold, trace will restart.

Key Parameters RTRV-TCE-LIST/CHG-TCE-LIST/CRTE-TCE-LIST/DLT-TCE-LIST Parameter

Description

tceType

This parameter represents the TCE server type and has to one of three below values: standAlone: TCE Server is standAlone Type. lsmEmbedded: TCE Server is embedded in LSM smartSon: TCE Server is for Smart SON server

Counters and KPIs Collected Data on Uu Interface according to the trace depth are as follows: Data Name

Message Name

Description

CS Fallback indicator

MOBILITY FROM EUTRA COMMAND

Whether a fallback to CS network is possible

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

538

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Data Name

Message Name

Description

CN Domain

PAGING

Identifies whether the domain is CS or PS network.

S-TMSI

PAGING

S-TMSI information of the UE (MME code, M-TMSI)

ReestablishmentCause

RRC CONNECTION REESTABLISHMENT REQUEST

Cause of UE’s re-establishment

Wait Time

RRC CONNECTION REJECT

The period of time for which the system waits until UE attempts a call again

Release Cause

RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

The reason for which UE’s connection has been released

Redirection Information

RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

The carrier frequency of RAT used by UE during cell reselection

Establishment Cause

RRC CONNECTION REQUEST

The reason for which UE’s connection has been established

Selected PLMN-Identity

RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE

The UE selected PLMN ID

RegisteredMME

RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE

Information of MME with which UE is registered

Rat-Type

UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION

The RAT information of the capabilities given by UE

Measured Results

MEASUREMENT REPORT

The results measured by the terminal

CDMA2000-Type

HANDOVER FROM EUTRA PREPARATION REQUEST UL HANDOVER PREPARATION TRANSFER UL INFORMATION TRANSFER

CDMA2000Type information (1xRTT, HRPD)

Target RAT Type

MOBILITY FROM EUTRA COMMAND

The RAT information for the target

Collected Data on S1 Interface according to the trace depth are as follows: Data Name

Message Name

Description

E-RAB ID

All messages containing the ID

E-RAB ID

E-RAB Level QoS Parameters

E-RAB SETUP REQUEST E-RAB MODIFY REQUEST INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST

QoS for E-RAB

Cause

INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP FAILURE UE CONTEXT RELEASE REQUEST UE CONTEXT RELEASE COMMAND UE CONTEXT MODIFICATION FAILURE HANDOVER REQUIRED HANDOVER PREPARATION FAILURE HANDOVER REQUEST HANDOVER FAILURE HANDOVER CANCEL PATH SWITCH REQUEST FAILURE NAS NON DELIVERY INDICATION

Cause for failure of the message

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

539

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Data Name

Message Name

Description

Handover Type

HANDOVER REQUIRED HANDOVER COMMAND HANDOVER REQUEST

Handover type (IntraLTE, LTEtoUTRAN...)

E-UTRAN CGI

HANDOVER NOTIFY PATH SWITCH REQUEST INITIAL UE MESSAGE UPLINK NAS TRANSPORT

Cell global ID of eNB (PLMN ID + cell ID)

TAI

HANDOVER NOTIFY PATH SWITCH REQUEST UPLINK NAS TRANSPORT

Tracking area ID of eNB (PLMN ID + TAC)

Target ID

HANDOVER REQUIRED

ID of the target RAT which is the handover target

CDMA2000 HO Status

DOWNLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING

Whether HO to CDMA2000 is successful

CDMA2000 RAT Type

DOWNLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING UPLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING

RAT information of CDMA2000 (1xRTT, HRPD)

CDMA2000 Sector ID

UPLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING

Sector ID of the CDMA2000

CDMA2000 HO Required Indication

UPLINK S1 CDMA2000 TUNNELING

Whether UE has to prepare handover to the CDMA2000

Collected data on X2 Interface according to the trace depth is as follows: Data Name

Message Name

Description

E-RAB id

All messages where it is present

ID of E-RAB

E-RAB Level QoS

HANDOVER REQUEST

QoS for E-RAB

Cause

HANDOVER REQUEST HANDOVER PREPARATION FAILURE HANDOVER CANCEL

Cause information of each message

Target Cell ID

HANDOVER REQUEST

Handover target’s cell ID

GUMMEI

HANDOVER REQUEST

Handover target’s GUMMEID

UE History Information

HANDOVER REQUEST

History of UE

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 [2] 3GPP TS36.413 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN); S1 application Protocol (S1AP) [3] 3GPP TS32.422 Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment trace; Trace control and configuration management [4] 3GPP TS32.423 Telecommunication management; Subscriber and equipment trace; Trace data definition and management Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

540

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

LTE-OM9004, CSL (Call Summary Log) Report INTRODUCTION This feature collects the detail information for a call. The call release type, call duration, and handover information and so on are automatically collected and transmitted to EMS or external server.

BENEFITS The operator can analyze the detail information of a call.

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency External server for CSL data is required. Limitation To support for all calls including normal calls, it is required to explain in advance about expending LSM capacity or external server. (Basically, LSM can store only the CSL data of abnormal calls.)

FEATURE DESCRIPTION The CSL data is collected by eNB. When a call is setup, eNB starts to collect information for the call. If the call is released, eNB reports CSL data to the external server.

By the configuration, eNB can support following cases:

Case1: LSM- CSL data of abnormal calls Case2: LSM- CSL data of all calls Case3: LSM- CSL data of abnormal calls, External server - CSL data of all calls Case4: LSM- CSL data of all calls, External server - CSL data of all calls Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

541

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

The CSL data includes detail information for a call. It includes a total of 10 information items: call information, common item information, connection information, release information, handover information, throughput information, RF information, adjacency information, UE history information, and call debugging information.

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate The operator can control to report the collected CSL information to external server by executing the CHG-CSL-INFO COMMAND.

Key Parameters RTRV-CSL-INF/CHG-CSL-INF Parameter

Description

DB_INDEX

Index

CSL_SERVER

The type of CSL Server.

Counters and KPIs There are no a related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE [1] 3GPP TS36.300 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

542

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

LTE-OM9010, VoLTE Monitoring INTRODUCTION The operator commands into Element Management System (EMS) to trigger the trace of VoLTE calls (UEs or cells) at eNBs. The eNB, after receiving the commands from EMS, collects the information of VoLTE traffic and sends them to EMS (or the external server). The operator can analyze the quality of VoLTE service and identify the cause and the location of problems traffic by postprocessing the collected information.

BENEFIT The operator can get benefits in analyzing the quality of VoLTE service and identifying the cause and location of problems.

VoLTE quality monitoring: Loss, jitter, and delay Identification of problem causes: Decompression failure due to RoHC error, loss, duplicated packet, out-of-order, and delay

Isolation of the section that problems occur: UL air, backhaul + core network, inter eNB, and DL air section

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency The LTE device

The EMS is required. The Mobility Management Entity (MME) is required to get TraceReference for UE trace scenario.

The Global Positioning System (GPS) is required to analyze the delay of VoLTE packets. Limitation The number of simultaneous UEs to be monitored per cell/eNB (TBD)

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Basic concept The operator commands into EMS (Element Management System) to trigger the collection of the information of VoLTE traffic (for some UEs or cells) at eNBs.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

543

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

The eNB, received the commands from EMS, collects the information of VoLTE traffic as indicated and sends them to the EMS or external server.

The operator can monitor and analyze the quality of VoLTE traffic by postprocessing the collected data.

The following figure shows VoLTE monitoring:

S1-C

MME

S6a

HSS

Uu S7

PCRF

PDNServing S5/S8 Gateway Gateway

SGi

S11 LTE UE

S1-U E NodeB

‘eNodeB’ sends the information of VoLTE traffic periodically

Operator’s IP services e.g. IMS

‘EMS’ commands to eNodeB and saves the information of VoLTE traffic

Operation Scenario UE Trace The operator can select several VoLTE UEs to be monitored by using TraceReference. Therefore, end-to-end VoLTE quality from originating UE to terminating UE can be monitored. Before enable VoLTE monitoring tool, operator should know TraceReference of a specific VoLTE UE to be monitored. (for example, from signal trace) Cell trace The operator can select cells, which are to be monitored by using specific cell ID. Then random VoLTE UEs in a certain cell are monitored. Therefore, VoLTE quality of a certain cell can be monitored. The following figure shows flow chart and collected information:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

544

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

eNodeB

EMS

Monitorin

g ON

Send Log da ta periodically

Log data includes: - RTP header and Time stamp - RoHC error event - SIP packet and Time stamp - Transmission completion time to UE

Analyzing Results (Example) By post-processing the collected information, operator can analyze the quality of VoLTE service (such as loss, jitter, and delay) and identifying the cause (such as decompression failure due to RoHC error, loss, duplicated packet, out-of-order, and delay) and the location of problems for each section (such as UL air, backhaul+Core network, inter eNB, and DL air section).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

545

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate To activate this feature, for UE based VoLTE monitoring, operator uses the CHG-VOMA-UE command to register Trace Reference of the specific UE for VoLTE Monitoring. It is noted that operator has to register signaling based trace for this UE in advance, to retrieve Trace Reference. In case of each VOMA_INDEX, different trace reference (=TRACE_REFERENCE_MCC + TRACE_REFERENCE_MNC + TRACE_ID) will be assigned, if operator use this trace reference, VOMA_USAGE will be set to EQUIP.

To activate this feature, for Cell level VoLTE monitoring, operator uses the CHG-VOMA-CELL command to change VOMA_USAGE to EQUIP for a specific Cell.

Key Parameters CHG-VOMA-UE/RTRV-VOMA-UE Parameter

Description

VOMA_INDEX

This attribute indicates Trace-Reference index which is on the VoMA Trace.

VOMA_USAGE

This attribute indicates the UE is used or not for VoMA Trace.

TRACE_REFERENCE_MCC

It is MCC (Mobile Country Code) of the Trace Reference for which VoMA trace is triggered. For example, if the Trace Reference received by S1AP or X2AP message is 43 58 07 00 34 D7, its BCD format PLMN ID is 43 58 07, and MCC is 348. (Reference : TS 32.423)

TRACE_REFERENCE_MNC

It is MNC (Mobile Network Code) of the Trace Reference for which VoMA trace is triggered. For example, if the Trace Reference received by S1AP or X2AP message is 43 58 07 00 34 D7, its BCD format PLMN ID is 43 58 07, and MNC is 570. (Reference : TS 32.423)

TRACE_ID

This attribute indicates decimal format of Trace ID in the Trace Reference for which VoMA trace is triggered. For example, if the trace reference received by S1AP or X2AP message is 43 58 07 00 34 D7, its BCD format PLMN ID is 43 58 07, and its Trace ID is 00 34 D7 in hexadecimal format and stored in this attribute as decimal number13527. (Reference: TS 32.423)

VOMA_QCI0

This attribute indicates the first VoMA Trace QCI.

VOMA_QCI0_MAX_LENGTH

This attribute indicates maximum length, which includes PDCP header and logging payload for QCI0.

VOMA_QCI1

This attribute indicates the first VoMA Trace QCI.

VOMA_QCI1_MAX_LENGTH

This attribute indicates maximum length, which includes PDCP header and logging payload for QCI1.

CHG-VOMA-CELL/RTRV-VOMA-CELL Parameter

Description

CELL_NUM

Cell number

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

546

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Parameter

Description

VOMA_USAGE

This attribute indicates the cell is used or not for VoMA Trace.

VOMA_QCI0

This attribute indicates the first VoMA Trace QCI.

VOMA_QCI0_MAX_LENGTH

This attribute indicates maximum length, which includes PDCP header and logging payload for QCI0.

VOMA_QCI1

This attribute indicates the first VoMA Trace QCI.

VOMA_QCI1_MAX_LENGTH

This attribute indicates maximum length, which includes PDCP header and logging payload for QCI1.

Counters and KPIs There are no related counters or KPIs.

REFERENCE N/A

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

547

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

LTE-OM9100, Key Performance Indexes INTRODUCTION The Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are used to monitor the quality of service provided to the end-user. They are calculated using counters collected by eNB. Some KPIs are defined in TS32.450 while others are proprietary to Samsung. This feature provides a brief introduction to KPIs. In case of detailed information, refer to Samsung LTE system counter description manual.

BENEFIT The operator can monitor the following characteristics of service provided to the end user.

Accessibility Retainability Integrity Availability Mobility

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION N/A

FEATURE DESCRIPTION ACCESSIBILITY ACCESSIBILITY These KPIs show probability for the end-user to be provided with E-RAB at request. The probability success rate for E-RAB establishment is calculated by multiplying the probability success rates for different parts of E-RAB establishment. The probability success rate for each part of E-RAB establishment is calculated as successful attempts divided by total number of attempts. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

ErabAccessibilityInit = (SumRrcConnEstabSucc/SumRrcConnEstabAtt) * (SumS1sigS1ConnEstabSucc/SumS1sigS1ConnEstabAtt) * (SumErabEstabInitSuccNbr/SumErabEstabInitAttNbr) * 100%.

Initial E-RAB establishment success rate

ErabAccessibilityAdd = (SumErabEstabAddSuccNbr/SumErabEstabAddAttNbr) * 100%.

Added E-RAB establishment success rate

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

548

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

E-RAB Connection Failure Rate = 0 if SumRrcConnEstabAtt = 0 OR SumS1sigS1ConnEstabAtt = 0 OR SumErabEstabInitAttNbr = 0. Otherwise, E-RAB Connection Failure Rate = 100 (SumRrcConnEstabSucc/SumRrcConnEstabAtt) * (SumS1sigS1ConnEstabSucc/SumS1sigS1ConnEstabAtt) * (SumErabEstabInitSuccNbr/SumErabEstabInitAttNbr) * 100%

Probability that the end-user is not provided with E-RAB at the initial request

RACH_SUCCESS_RATE These KPIs measure RACH success rate. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

NonHoRachSuccessRate = ((RachSumConnEstabSucc+ RachSumConnReEstabSucc)/(RachSumRandomlySelectedPreambles Low + RachSumRandomlySelectedPreamblesHigh)) * 100 %

Non-Handover RACH success Rate

HoRachSuccessRate = ((RachSumIntraEnbInSucc + RachSumInterX2InSucc + RachSumInterS1InSucc)/RachSumDedicatedPreambles) * 100 %

Handover RACH Success Rate

CONN_DROP_RATE This KPI measures the ratio of number of abnormally terminated E-RABs to number of successfully established E-RABs. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

ConnDropRate = CdrRelActive/(CdrSumEstabInitSuccNbr+CdrEstabAddSuccNbr)*100 %

Probability that the end-user abnormally loses E-RAB

SUCCESS_RATE This KPI measures RRC success rate, ERAB success rate, and call drop rate based on the RRC, ERAB, CALL_DROP, and HO statistics collected. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

RrcEstabSuccessRatio = (SumRrcEstabSuccess/SumRrcEstabAttempt) * 100%.

The average success rate of RRC_ESTAB.

ErabEstabSuccessRatio = (SumErabEstabSuccess/ SumErabEstabAttempt) * 100%.

The average success rate of ERAB_ESTAB.

CallDropRatio = (SumCallDrop_EccbDspAuditRlcMacCallRelease + SumCallDrop_EccbRcvResetRequestFromEcmb + SumCallDrop_EccbRcvCellReleaseIndFromEcmb + SumCallDrop_EccbRadioLinkFailure + SumCallDrop_EccbDspAuditMacCallRelease + SumCallDrop_EccbArqMaxRetransmission + SumCallDrop_EccbDspAuditRlcCallRelease + SumCallDrop_EccbTmoutRrcConnectionReconfig + SumCallDrop_EccbTmoutRrcConnectionReestablish + SumCallDrop_EccbS1SctpOutOfService/SumEstabInitSuccNbr + SumInterX2InSucc + SumInterS1InSucc + SumRatInSuccUTRAN) * 100 %.

The average call drop rate.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

549

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

CONN_TIME This KPI measures the connection setup time from RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE message. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

ConnSetupTime = (ConnTimeConnEstabTimeTot + ConnTimeEstabTimeTot + ConnTimeS1SigTimeTot)/(ConnTimeConnEstabTime Cnt + ConnTimeEstabTimeCnt + ConnTimeS1SigTimeCnt)

Elapsed time from transmitting RRC Connection Request to receiving Initial Context Setup Response

RETAINABILITY RETAINABILITY This KPI shows how often the end-user abnormally loses E-RAB during the time of E-RAB is used. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

ErabRetainability = (SumRelActive/RetainSessionTimeUE) * 100.

Number of E-RABs with data in a buffer that was abnormally released, normalized with number of data session time units.

RETAINABILITY_QCI This KPI shows how often the end-user abnormally loses an E-RAB (per QCI) during the time of E-RAB is used. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

ErabRetainability = (RetainRelActive/RetainSessionTimeQci) * 100 %.

The number by dividing the E-RAB Release count by E-RAB holding time.

INTEGRITY INTEGRITY These KPIs show how E-UTRAN impacts the service quality provided to the enduser. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

EutranIpThroughput = IntegrityEutranIpThroughputTot/IntegrityEutranIpThrou ghputCnt

E-UTRAN IP throughput per QCI

EutranIpLatency = IntegrityEutranIpLatencyTot/IntegrityEutranIpLatencyC nt

E-UTRAN IP latency per QCI

CELL_THRU These KPIs measure DL/UL cell throughput and DL/UL UE throughput. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

550

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

CellThruDLAvg = CellThruDLTot/CellThruDLCnt

Average Downlink sector Throughput Counter

CellThruULAvg = CellThruULTot/CellThruULCnt

Average Uplink sector Throughput Counter

UEThruDLAvg = UEThruDLTot/UEThruDLCnt

Average Downlink UE Throughput Counter

UEThruULAvg = UEThruULTot/UEThruULCnt

Average Uplink UE Throughput Counter

CellThruDLPeak

Peak Downlink sector Throughput Counter

CellThruDLTime

Number of seconds for Downlink Throughput within a Recording Period Counter

CellThruULPeak

Number of seconds for Uplink Throughput within a Recording Period Counter

CellThruULTime

Peak Uplink sector Throughput Counter

UEThruDLPeak

Peak Downlink UE Throughput Counter

UEThruULPeak

Peak Uplink UE Throughput Counter

WEIGHTED_CQI This KPI measures average channel quality indicator (CQI) reported by UEs. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

WeightedDLReceivedCQI = SumWeightedDLReceivedCQI/SumDLReceivedCQI

Average of channel quality indicator reported by UEs

AVAILABILITY AVAILABILITY This KPI measures the availability of E-UTRAN cell. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

EutranCellAvailability = ((CellAvailPmPeriodTime ReadCellUnavailableTime)/CellAvailPmPeriodTime) * 100 %.

Percentage of time the cell is considered available

CELL_CAPACITY This KPI measures the average simultaneous RRC-connected UE load per cell. The Following table shows the formula: Name

Description

ConnNoUEAvg = (ConnNoRrcAvg/ConnMaxCallCount) * 100 %.

The average RRC Connection Capacity rate (%) per unit time.

ConnNoUEMax

The maximum RRC Connection Capacity rate (%) per unit time.

UsageNbrRbAvg = (UsageNbrErab/UsageMaxDrbCount) * 100 %.

The average E-RAB Capacity rate (%) per unit time.

UsageNbrRbMax

The maximum E-RAB Capacity rate (%) per unit time.

ConnNoRrcAvg

The average RRC Connection per unit time.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

551

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

ConnMaxCallCount

The average available call count in the cell.

UsageNbrErab

The average number of E-RAB per unit time.

UsageMaxDrbCount

The maximum available number of E-RAB in the cell.

ENB_CAPACITY This KPI measures the average simultaneous RRC-connected UE load per eNB. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

EnbConnNoUEAvg = (EnbConnNoRrcAvg/EnbMaxCallCount) * 100 %.

The average RRC Connection Capacity rate (%) per unit time.

EnbConnNoRrcAvg

The average RRC Connection per unit time.

EnbMaxCallCount

The average available call count in eNB.

MOBILITY MOBILITY These KPIs measure E-UTRAN handover success rates. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

EutranMobilityHOIntra = (sumHOIntra_Succ/sumHOIntra_Att) * 100 %.

Intra-eNB handover success rate

EutranMobilityHOX2Out = (sumHOX2Out_Succ/sumHOX2Out_Att) * 100 %.

Outgoing X2 handover success rate

EutranMobilityHOX2In = (sumHOX2In_Succ/sumHOX2In_Att) * 100 %.

Incoming X2 handover success rate

EutranMobilityHOS1Out = (sumHOS1Out_Succ/sumHOS1Out_Att) * 100 %.

Outgoing S1 handover success rate

EutranMobilityHOS1In = (sumHOS1In_Succ/sumHOS1In_Att) * 100 %.

Incoming S1 handover success rate

EutranMobilityHOInterRatHrpd = (sumHOInterRatHrpd_Succ/sumHOInterRatHrpd_A tt) * 100 %.

Inter-RAT optimized HRPD handover success rate

EutranMobilityHOInterRatUtranOut = (sumHOInterRatUtranOut_Succ/sumHOInterRatUtr anOut_Att) * 100 %.

Outgoing inter-RAT handover success rate

EutranMobilityHOInterRatUtranIn = (sumHOInterRatUtranIn_Succ/sumHOInterRatUtran In_Att) * 100 %.

Incoming inter-RAT handover success rate

EutranMobilityHOInter = ((sumHOS1Out_Succ + sumHOX2Out_Succ)/(sumHOS1Out_Att + sumHOX2Out_Att)) * 100 %.

Outgoing handover success rate to an eNB of the same frequency

VOLTE_HO_SUCCESS_RATE These KPIs measure VoLTE handover success rate. The following table shows the formula:

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

552

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

VoLTE_IntraHoSuccessRate = (SumVoLTE_IntraEnbSucc/SumVoLTE_IntraEnbAtt) * 100 %

VoLTE HO Intra Success rate

VoLTE_X2HoSuccessRate = (SumVoLTE_InterX2OutSucc/SumVoLTE_InterX2OutAtt) * 100 %

VoLTE HO X2 Success rate

VoLTE_S1HoSuccessRate = (SumVoLTE_InterS1OutSucc/SumVoLTE_InterS1OutAtt) * 100 %

VoLTE HO S1 Success rate

LBHO_KPI These KPIs measure load-balancing handover success rate. The following table shows the formula: Name

Description

InterEnbHoSuccRatio = (SumInterEnbMlbHoSucc/SumInterEnbMlbHoAtt) * 100 %

Inter-eNB load balancing handover success rate

IntraEnbIntraCarrierGroupHoSuccRatio = (SumIntraEnbIntraCarrierGroupMlbHoSucc/SumIntr aEnbIntraCarrierGroupMlbHoAtt) * 100 %

Intra-eNB load balancing handover success rate to a separate carrier within the same eNB of the same frequency due to load balancing

IntraEnbInterCarrierGroupHoSucRatio = (SumIntraEnbInterCarrierGroupMlbHoSucc/SumIntr aEnbInterCarrierGroupMlbHoAtt) * 100 %

Intra-eNB load balancing handover success rate to a separate carrier within the same eNB of the different carrier group due to load balancing

SendbackHOSuccRatio = (SumSendbackHOSucc/SumSendbackHOAtt) * 100 %

Handover success ratio by sendback in eNB

SYSTEM OPERATION N/A

REFERENCE [1] LTE eNB Counter Description for SLR 5.0. [2] 3GPP TS 32.450: Key performance indicators: Definitions. [3] 3GPP TS 32.425: Performance measurements. [4] 3GPP TS 32.404: Performance measurements: Definitions and templates.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

553

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

LTE-OM9101, L1 and L2 Counters INTRODUCTION The Layer 1 (L1) and Layer 2 (L2) counters provide the data for statistical analysis at PHY/MAC layers. This data is used to monitor E-UTRAN performance. Some of these counters are defined in TS32.425 while others are specific to Samsung. This feature provides a brief introduction to counters. Only the counters which are visible to operators and are collected at PHY/MAC layers are included in this feature. In case of detailed information about all available counters, refer to Samsung LTE system counter description manual.

BENEFIT The operator can get data to perform statistical analysis related to the following:

Air MAC performance PRB utilization Radio resource utilization Random access performance Hybrid ARQ performance Adaptive modulation and coding performance Carrier aggregation performance eICIC performance E-RAB session time Received signal power statistics Transmitted signal power statistics

DEPENDENCY AND LIMITATION Dependency The LSM server should be available for receiving statistics data from eNB.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION AIR MAC PERFORMANCE AIR_MAC_BYTES Name

Description

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

554

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

AirMacByteUl

The sum of the size of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacTtiUl

The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacUlThru

Average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH.

AirMacUlEfctivThru

Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacByteDl

The sum of the size of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacTtiDl

The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacDlThru

Average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacDlEfctivThru

Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacUlThruMin

Minimum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacUlThruMax

Maximum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacDlThruMin

Minimum of the average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacDlThruMax

Maximum of the average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.

ULIpThruVol

The cumulated number that indicates the sum of the sizes of MAC SDUs that were successfully received through the PUSCH during the sample intervals of all UEs in the collection interval.

ULIpThruTime

The cumulated number of TTIs during the sample intervals of all UEs in the collection interval.

ULIpThruAvg

The calculated number that indicates the average per-second size which is derived from that MAC SDUs that were successfully received through the PUSCH during the sample intervals of all UEs is divided by TTIs during the sample intervals in the collection interval.

AIR_MAC_BYTES_PLMN Name

Description

PLMNAirMacULByte

The sum of the size of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period.

PLMNAirMacULTti

The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period.

PLMNAirMacULThruAvg

Average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH.

PLMNAirMacULEfctivThruA vg

Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period.

PLMNAirMacDLByte

The sum of the size of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.

PLMNAirMacDLTti

The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

555

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

PLMNAirMacDLThruAvg

Average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period.

PLMNAirMacDLEfctivThruA vg

Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

PLMNAirMacULThruMin

Minimum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

PLMNAirMacULThruMax

Maximum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

PLMNAirMacDLThruMin

Minimum of the average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

PLMNAirMacDLThruMax

Maximum of the average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AIR_MAC_BYTES_PCELL Name

Description

AirMacULByte

The sum of the size of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULByteCnt

AirMacULByte collection count

AirMacULTti

The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULThruAvg

Average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacULEfctivThruAvg

Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLByte

The sum of the size of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLByteCnt

AirMacDLByte collection count

AirMacDLTti

The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLThruAvg

Average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLEfctivThruAvg

Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULByteCurr

The most recently collected AirMacByteUl value

AirMacDLByteCurr

The most recently collected AirMacDLByte value

AirMacULThruMin

Minimum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacULThruMax

Maximum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacDLThruMin

Minimum value of average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLThruMax

Maximum value of average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

556

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

AIR_MAC_BYTES_SCELL Name

Description

AirMacULByte

The sum of the size of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULByteCnt

AirMacULByte collection count

AirMacULTti

The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period.

AirMacULThruAvg

Average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH.

AirMacULEfctivThruAvg

Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully received via PUSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLByte

The sum of the size of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLByteCnt

AirMacDLByte collection count

AirMacDLTti

The sum of sections that have MAC PDU successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLThruAvg

Average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLEfctivThruAvg

Average size of MAC PDU of the section successfully transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacULByteCurr

The most recently collected AirMacByteUl value

AirMacDLByteCurr

The most recently collected AirMacDLByte value

AirMacULThruMin

Minimum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacULThruMax

Maximum of the average size per second of MAC PDU successfully received via PUSCH

AirMacDLThruMin

Minimum value of average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

AirMacDLThruMax

Maximum value of average size per second of DCCT/DTCH MAC PDU that received HARQ ACK among MAC PDU transmitted via PDSCH during the statistics period

PRB UTILIZATION PRB_QCI Name

Description

PrbDl

The PRB usage used as downlink DTCH traffic

PrbUl

The PRB usage used as uplink DTCH traffic

PRB_TOTAL Name

Description

TotPrbDLAvg

The resource used for PDSCH/PDCCH transmission among the total downlink resource

TotGbrPrbDLAvg

Ratio of the resource used to transmit GBR traffic against the total downlink resources.

TotNGbrPrbDLAvg

Ratio of the resource used to transmit non-GBR traffic against the total downlink resources.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

557

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

TotPrbULAvg

The resource used for PUSCH transmission among the total uplink resource

TotGbrPrbULAvg

Ratio of the resource used to transmit GBR traffic against the total uplink resources.

TotNGbrPrbULAvg

Ratio of the resource used to transmit non-GBR traffic against the total uplink resources.

TotPucchPrbULAvg

The resource used for PUCCH transmission among the total uplink resource

TotPucchPuschPrbULAvg

The resource used for PUCCH/PUSCH transmission among the total uplink resource

TotNgbrSCellPrbDLAvg

Ratio of the resource used to transmit non-GBR traffic of SCell against the total downlink resources.

PRB_TOTAL_PLMN Name

Description

TotPrbDl_PLMN

Ratio of resource used for PDSCH/PDCCH transmission against the total PLMN downlink resource available.

TotPrbDlMin_PLMN

Minimum value of PLMNTotPrbDLAvg

TotPrbDlMax_PLMN

Maximum value of PLMNTotPrbDLAvg

TotPrbUl_PLMN

Ratio of resource used for PUSCH reception against the total PLMN uplink resource available.

TotPrbUlMin_PLMN

Minimum value of PLMNTotPrbULAvg

TotPrbUlMax_PLMN

Maximum value of PLMNTotPrbULAvg

PRB_SMART Name

Description

TotPrbCsRatio

The ratio of PRB to which coordinated scheduling is applied

TotPrbJtRatio

The ratio of PRB to which joint transmission is applied

TotPrbDLAllocRatio

The total ratio of allocated PRB

TotPrbCs

Total count of PRB to which coordinated scheduling is applied

TotPrbJt

Total count of PRB to which joint transmission is applied

TotPrbDLAvail

Total count of available PRB

TotPrbDLAlloc

Total count of allocated PRB

TotPrbNormRatio

The ratio of PRB to which normal (excluding CS/JT) scheduling is applied based on the total available PRB

TotPrbCsAllocRatio

The ratio of PRB to which coordinated scheduling is applied based on the allocated PRB

TotPrbJtAllocRatio

The ratio of PRB to which Joint transmission is applied based on the allocated PRB

TotPrbNormAllocRatio

The ratio of PRB to which normal (excluding CS/JT) scheduling is applied based on the allocated PRB

TotPrbNorm

Total count of PRB to which normal (excluding CS/JT) scheduling is applied

PRB_FULL_UTILIZATION Name

Description

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

558

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

DLPrbFullUtilRatio

The percentage of time during which all available PRBs for the downlink have been assigned

ULPrbFullUtilRatio

The percentage of time during which all available PRBs for the uplink have been assigned

RADIO RESOURCE UTILIZATION RRU_MEAS Name

Description

RruCceUsageDistDL1

Aggregation Level 1 of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceUsageDistDL2

Aggregation Level 2 of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceUsageDistDL4

Aggregation Level 4 of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceUsageDistDL8

Aggregation Level 8 of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceUsageDistUL1

Aggregation Level 1 of PDCCH UL grant

RruCceUsageDistUL2

Aggregation Level 2 of PDCCH UL grant

RruCceUsageDistUL4

Aggregation Level 4 of PDCCH UL grant

RruCceUsageDistUL8

Aggregation Level 8 of PDCCH UL grant

RruCceAllocationFailDLAvg

Average CCE allocation failure rate of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceAllocationFailULAvg

Average CCE allocation failure rate of PDCCH UL grant

RruPrbDLPcchAvg

Average usage rate of PCCH PRB

RruPrbULSrbAvg

Average PRB usage rate of Uplink SRB

RruPrbDLSrbAvg

Average PRB usage rate of Downlink SRB

RRU_MEAS_NEW Name

Description

RruCceUsageDistDL1

Aggregation level1 of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceUsageDistDL2

Aggregation level2 of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceUsageDistDL4

Aggregation level4 of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceUsageDistDL8

Aggregation level8 of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceUsageDistUL1

Aggregation level1 of PDCCH UL grant

RruCceUsageDistUL2

Aggregation level2 of PDCCH UL grant

RruCceUsageDistUL4

Aggregation level4 of PDCCH UL grant

RruCceUsageDistUL8

Aggregation level8 of PDCCH UL grant

RruCceAllocationFailDLAvg

The CCE allocation fail ratio of PDCCH DL grant

RruCceAllocationFailULAvg

The CCE allocation fail ratio of PDCCH UL grant

RruPrbDLPcchAvg

PCCH PRB Usage

RruPrbDLSrbAvg

Downlink SRB (CCCH/DCCH) PRB Usage

RruPrbULSrbAvg

Uplink SRB (CCCH/DCCH) PRB Usage

PDCCH Name

Description

Cfi1

The number of used CFI1

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

559

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

Cfi2

The number of used CFI2

Cfi3

The number of used CFI3

PDCCHCceUsedAgg1

The number of used aggregation level 1 for allocating PDCCH CCE

PDCCHCceUsedAgg2

The number of used aggregation level 2 for allocating PDCCH CCE

PDCCHCceUsedAgg4

The number of used aggregation level 4 for allocating PDCCH CCE

PDCCHCceUsedAgg8

The number of used aggregation level 8 for allocating PDCCH CCE

PDCCHCcePerUser

The average number of allocated CCE per UE

ACTIVE_UE Name

Description

UEActiveDl

The number of UEs satisfying one or more of the following conditions in a continuous 20 ms interval (sampling occasion) is summed every 80 ms for each QCI. If there is a DRB which receives a buffer occupancy request from the RLC If there is a DRB which receives an HARQ retransmission request when a collection interval ends, the average is calculated by dividing the summed number of UEs by the number of sampling occasions that occurred.

UEActiveDlTot

Sum of UEActiveDLAvg collected

UEActiveUl

The number of UEs satisfying one or more of the following conditions in a continuous 20 ms interval is summed every 80 ms for each QCI. If there is a DRB where the uplink data requested to be allocated using the Buffer Status Report message is waiting If there is a DRB which receives an HARQ retransmission request when a collection interval ends, the average is calculated by dividing the summed number of UEs by the number of sampling occasions that occurred.

UEActiveUlTot

Sum of UEActiveULAvg collected

SumActiveUEDL

This counter is the cumulated number per every TTI of DL DRB for each QCI which receives a buffer occupancy request from the RLC or which has received a HARQ retransmission request during the sampling period.

SumActiveUEUL

This counter is the cumulated number per every TTI of UL DRB for each QCI where the uplink data requested to be allocated using the Buffer Status Report message is waiting or which received an HARQ retransmission request.

RANDOM ACCESS PERFORMANCE RA Name

Description

HighSpeedMonitoring

The number of UEs which are monitored for moving speed

NoofHighSpeed

The number of high speed UEs which are monitored

DedicatedPreambles

The number of detected dedicated preambles.

DedicatedPreambleAssign Fail

The number of failures to get dedicated preamble allocation after requesting the dedicated preamble from the RRC to the MAC

Randomlyselectedpreambl esLow

The number of the preambles belonging to Group A among the detected contention based preambles

Randomlyselectedpreambl esHigh

The number of the preambles belonging to Group B among the detected contention based preambles

RACHUsageAvg

Average number of detected preambles

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

560

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

UE_LIMIT_TA_INITIAL_ATTACH Name

Description

RARFailByTaLimitation

The number of not-transmitted RAR’s due to TA Threshold in UE Initial Attach. If taBasedUeLimitFlag is set as 1 and if the TA value assumed by BTS after receiving preamble is larger than taThresholdForAttach, RAR is not transmitted for the preamble.

Timing alignment statistics families (TA, TA_RRE, TA_NORMAL_RELEASE, TA_ABNORMAL_RELEASE, TA_HO) Timing Advance (TA) is a MAC Control Element (CE) that is used to control uplink signal transmission timing. Timing advance is a negative offset, at UE, between the start of a received downlink subframe and a transmitted uplink subframe. Timing Advance offset compensates the propagation delay between eNB and UE. The following figure shows how propagation delay is compensated with TA command. The UE adjusts the uplink transmission by „2 * δ‟ so that eNB receives the uplink data on the exact uplink subframe boundary. The eNB can either send an absolute timing advance value or a relative timing adjustment value. Absolute TA value is 11-bit in size and is sent only during random access procedure (in random access response message). The relative timing adjustment is 6-bit in size and can be sent any time when UE is connected, using Timing Advance MAC control element. In case of random access response, the 11-bit timing advance command NTA*16 is used. In other cases, a 6-bit timing advance command indicates adjustment of the current NTAvalue, NTA,old to the new NTA value, NTA,new where NTA,new = NTA,old + (A -31)16. Here, adjustment of NTA value by a positive or a negative amount indicates advancing or delaying the uplink transmission. DL transmission subframe i

δ

DL Reception subframe i

at eNB

at UE

δ UL transmission subframe i

UL reception subframe i

at UE

at eNB

TA

TA = (N

TA

+N

TA offset).Ts

seconds

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

561

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

Categorizing the TA distribution according to specific events provides information about the distribution of distance from cell site where the events are occurring. This statistical information can be used for network optimization and planning. Samsung eNB provides a TA Distribution OM Family with 5 TA Distribution OM Groups:

Call Attempt TA Re-establishment TA Normal Call Release TA Abnormal Call Release TA Handover TA Though the OM group name indicates timing advance (TA), the distribution counters are provided in terms of distance from cell site in meters. Each of these OM groups provides PDF of UE distance with smaller granularity near cell center and with progressively reduced granularity towards cell edge. Call Attempt TA, Re-establishment TA, and Handover TA are calculated based on the absolute timing advance value (11-bit) sent to UE as part of random access procedure. This TA value is converted to distance in meters to provide the respective TA OM groups. Abnormal Call Release TA and Normal Call Release TA OM groups are calculated based on the final TA value. The eNB sends multiple relative timing adjustment values (6-bit) to UE until the call is released normally or abnormally. Also, it calculates the final TA value of UE by accumulating these relative TA values onto the last absolute TA value sent to UE. This final TA value is then converted to distance in meters to provide the respective TA OM groups.

Call Attempt TA (TA Family) Call Attempt TA is pegged when eNB receives MSG3 successfully as part of RRC connection establishment procedure. This TA OM Group pegs the timing advance sent to UE in RAR MAC PDU in those cases where MSG3 is RRC Connection Request message. The TA value sent to UE in this case is 11-bit absolute timing advance value. Call attempt TA OM group is pegged irrespective of accessibility success or failure after MSG3 reception at eNB. Call Attempt TA OM group is not pegged in the following cases that involve RACH procedure: Initial RACH procedure fails (for example, MSG3 time-out). The UE performs RRC Connection Re-establishment to serving cell when a call is ongoing, the Call Attempt TA OM does not get affected as it is already pegged when MSG3 is received. The UE performs RACH procedure after maximum re-transmission of Scheduling Request (dsr-TransMax). In this case, Call Attempt TA is not affected as the MSG3 received is not RRC Connection Request message (MSG3 in this scenario will be CRNTI control element along with/without BSR). The UE performs RACH procedure due to the reception of PDCCH order from eNB. In this case also, call attempt TA is not affected, as the MSG3 received is not RRC Connection Request message (MSG3 in this case will be CRNTI MAC Control element). Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

562

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

TimeAdvanceSection0

Distance (meter): 0~200, 16TS: from 0 to 2.

TimeAdvanceSection1

Distance (meter): 201~400, 16TS: from 3 to 5.

⋮

⋮

TimeAdvanceSection20

Distance (meter): 10001~, 16TS: from 127 to 1282.

Re-establishment TA (TA_RRE family) Connection Re-establishment TA is pegged when eNB receives MSG3 successfully as part of RRC connection Re-establishment procedure. This TA OM group pegs the timing advance sent to UE in RAR MAC PDU in those cases where MSG3 is RRC Connection Re-establishment Request message. The TA value sent to UE in this case is 11-bit absolute timing advance value. Connection Reestablishment TA OM group is pegged when eNB receives RRC Connection Reestablishment Request message, irrespective of whether the re-establishment attempt is rejected (RRC Connection Re-establishment Reject) or accepted (RRC Connection Re-establishment). During handover procedure, target eNB may receive RRC Connection Re-establishment Request as MSG3 (UE performs reestablishment procedure in case of HO failure). In this case, Connection Reestablishment TA is pegged at the target eNB. Name

Description

RRE_TimeAdvanceSection0

Distance (meter): 0~200, 16TS: from 0 to 2.

RRE_TimeAdvanceSection1

Distance (meter): 201~400, 16TS: from 3 to 5.

⋮

⋮

RRE_TimeAdvanceSection20

Distance (meter): 10001~, 16TS: from 127 to 1282.

Normal Call Release TA (TA_NORMAL_RELEASE Family) Normal Call Release TA is pegged when a call is released normally, that is, with any cause that is not related to accessibility failures and call drops. The cases include normal releases such as user inactivity-triggered release, MME-triggered releases, call release due to CSFB, call release due to inter-RAT re-direction, call release in source eNB after successful handover, and so on. Normal call release TA is pegged after accumulating all relative TA values sent to UE after the last absolute TA value transmission. This accumulated TA value is converted to distance from cell site and is used to update the OM counter. This calculated distance will indicate the distance at which the call is released. Name

Description

NormalRelease_TimeAdvanceSection0

Distance (meter): 0~200, 16TS: from 0 to 2.

NormalRelease_TimeAdvanceSection1

Distance (meter): 201~400, 16TS: from 3 to 5.

⋮

⋮

NormalRelease_TimeAdvanceSection20

Distance (meter): 10001~, 16TS: from 127 to 1282.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

563

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

Abnormal Call Release TA (TA_ABNORMAL_RELEASE Family) Abnormal Call Release TA is pegged when call is released with one of the cause that is not pegged under Normal Call Release TA, that is, all abnormal call release cases. The cases include call drops, accessibility failures, and other abnormal cases. This OM group provides information about the cell site distance where abnormal call releases are happening. Higher abnormal call releases at a specific cell site distance might call for network optimizations, drive tests and so on. Abnormal Call Release TA is pegged after accumulating all relative TA values sent to UE after the last absolute TA value transmission. This accumulated TA value is converted to distance from cell site and is used to update the OM counter. Below is the list of cause values for which Abnormal Call Release TA is pegged:

Call Drop cases CallDrop_„*‟ counters in CALL_DROP (24) counter family where „*‟ denotes a drop cause.

Failure Causes in RRC Connection Establishment OM group: ConnEstabFail_„*‟ counters in RRC_ESTAB counter family where „*‟ denotes a failure cause.

Failure Causes in E-RAB Setup OM group: ErabInitFailNbr_„*‟ counters in ERAB_ESTAB counter family where „*‟ denotes a failure cause.

Failure Causes in UE-associated logical S1 Connection Establishment OM group: S1ConnEstabFail_„*‟ counters in S1SIG counter family where „*‟ denotes a failure cause. In case of more information about CALL_DROP, RRC_ESTAB, ERAB_ESTAB, and S1SIG counter families, refer to LTE system counter description manual. Name

Description

AbnormalRelease_TimeAdvanceSection0

Distance (meter): 0~200, 16TS: from 0 to 2.

AbnormalRelease_TimeAdvanceSection1

Distance (meter): 201~400, 16TS: from 3 to 5.

⋮

⋮

AbnormalRelease_TimeAdvanceSection20

Distance (meter): 10001~, 16TS: from 127 to 1282.

Handover TA (TA_HO family) Handover TA is pegged when MSG3 is received successfully as part of handover procedure in target cell. In handover scenarios, the MSG3 received at target eNB can either be RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message or RRC Connection Re-establishment message. In both of these cases, handover is considered as success if UE gets connected to the target cell successfully. But Handover TA is pegged only when eNB receives RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message as the MSG3. In case, RRC Connection Reestablishment Request is received as MSG3 during handover, the TA value is pegged as Connection Re-establishment TA and not Handover TA. Random access procedure in case of handover can either be contention based or contention free and in both cases, the TA will be pegged in Handover TA OM group, if the MSG3 received is RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message. Name

Description

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

564

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

HOTimeAdvanceSection0

The cumulated count of the case that TA of RACH success UE in handover is between 0 and 2.

HOTimeAdvanceSection1

The cumulated count of the case that TA of RACH success UE in handover is between 3 and 5.

⋮

⋮

HOTimeAdvanceSection20

The cumulated count of the case that TA of RACH success UE in handover is between 127 and 1282.

Carrier Aggregation In case of carrier aggregation, as uplink CA is not supported, timing advance value for the PCell is pegged for all of the TA OM groups defined above. HYBRID ARQ PERFORMANCE TRANSMISSION Name

Description

DlResidualBLER_Retrans0

PDSCH BLER for the initial HARQ transmission.

DlResidualBLER_Retrans1

PDSCH BLER for the first HARQ retransmission.

DlResidualBLER_Retrans2

PDSCH BLER for the second HARQ retransmission.

DlResidualBLER_Retrans3

PDSCH BLER for the third HARQ retransmission.

DlTransmission_Retrans0

Number of initial PDSCH HARQ transmissions

DlTransmission_Retrans1

Number of first PDSCH HARQ retransmissions

DlTransmission_Retrans2

Number of second PDSCH HARQ retransmissions

DlTransmission_Retrans3

Number of third PDSCH HARQ retransmissions

DlTransmission_Nacked_Retran s3

Number of third PDSCH HARQ retransmission failures

UlResidualBLER_Retrans0

PUSCH BLER for the initial HARQ retransmission.

UlResidualBLER_Retrans1

PUSCH BLER for the first HARQ retransmission.

⋮

⋮

UlResidualBLER_Retrans26

PUSCH BLER for the twenty sixth HARQ retransmission.

UlResidualBLER_Retrans27

PUSCH BLER for the twenty seventh HARQ retransmission.

UlTransmission_Retrans0

Number of initial PUSCH HARQ transmissions

UlTransmission_Retrans1

Number of first PUSCH HARQ retransmissions

UlTransmission_Retrans2

Number of second PUSCH HARQ retransmissions

⋮

⋮

UlTransmission_Retrans26

Number of twenty sixth PUSCH HARQ retransmissions

UlTransmission_Retrans27

Number of twenty seventh PUSCH HARQ retransmissions

UlTransmission_Nacked_Retran s27

Number of twenty seventh PUSCH HARQ retransmissions

DlResidualBLER_RetransAvg

Average of distribution for DLResidualBLERRetrans.

UlResidualBLER_RetransAvg

Average of distribution for ULResidualBLERRetrans.

DlResidualBLER_RetransNak

PDSCH BLER for HARQ NACK.

UlResidualBLER_RetransNak

PUSCH BLER for HARQ NACK.

DlResidualBLER_RetransMin

Minimum value of DLResidualBlerRetrans

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

565

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

DlResidualBLER_RetransMax

Maximum value of DLResidualBlerRetrans

UlResidualBLER_RetransMin

Minimum value of ULResidualBlerRetrans

UlResidualBLER_RetransMax

Maximum value of ULResidualBlerRetrans

MIMO Name

Description

PdschBLERperLayer

PDSCH BLER for each layer

PuschBLERperLayer

PUSCH BLER for each layer

MIMO_NEW Name

Description

PdschTransmissionPerLayer

Transmission count per layer for PDSCH

PdschErrorPerLayer

PDSCH error count for each layer

PuschTransmissionPerLayer

Transmission count per layer for PUSCH

PuschErrorPerLayer

PUSCH error count for each layer

MCS Name

Description

PdschBLERperMCS0

PDSCH BLER transmitted to MCS 0

PdschBLERperMCS1

PDSCH BLER transmitted to MCS 1

⋮

⋮

PdschBLERperMCS30

PDSCH BLER transmitted to MCS 30

PdschBLERperMCS31

PDSCH BLER transmitted to MCS 31

PuschBLERperMCS0

PUSCH BLER received from MCS 0

PuschBLERperMCS1

PUSCH BLER received from MCS 1

⋮

⋮

PuschBLERperMCS30

PUSCH BLER received from MCS 30

PuschBLERperMCS31

PUSCH BLER received from MCS 31

UlReceivedMCS0

The number of times PUSCH of MCS 0 is received

UlReceivedMCS1

The number of times PUSCH of MCS 1 is received

⋮

⋮

UlReceivedMCS30

The number of times PUSCH of MCS 30 is received

UlReceivedMCS31

The number of times PUSCH of MCS 31 is received

DlSchedulerMCS0

The number of PRBs assigned to PDSCH MCS 0

DlSchedulerMCS1

The number of PRBs assigned to PDSCH MCS 1

⋮

⋮

DlSchedulerMCS30

The number of PRBs assigned to PDSCH MCS 30

DlSchedulerMCS31

The number of PRBs assigned to PDSCH MCS 31

UlSchedulerMCS0

The number of PRBs assigned to PUSCH MCS 0

UlSchedulerMCS1

The number of PRBs assigned to PUSCH MCS 1

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

566

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

⋮

⋮

UlSchedulerMCS30

The number of PRBs assigned to PUSCH MCS 30

UlSchedulerMCS31

The number of PRBs assigned to PUSCH MCS 31

DL_ACK_NACK_DTX_RATIO Name

Description

DlreceivedAckNackDtxRatio

ACK, NACK, DTX ratio

ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING PERFORMANCE DL_MCS Name

Description

DlTransmittedMCS0

The number of times that MCS 0 PDSCH is transmitted per layer/ codeword

DlTransmittedMCS1

The number of times that MCS 1 PDSCH is transmitted per layer/ codeword

⋮

⋮

DlTransmittedMCS30

The number of times that MCS 30 PDSCH is transmitted per layer/ codeword

DlTransmittedMCS31

The number of times that MCS 31 PDSCH is transmitted per layer/ codeword

DL_LAYER Name

Description

DlTransmittedLayer

Transmission counts per layer for PDSCH

DL_CQI Name

Description

DLReceivedCQI0

The number of times that CQI 0 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI1

The number of times that CQI 1 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI2

The number of times that CQI 2 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI3

The number of times that CQI 3 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI4

The number of times that CQI 4 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI5

The number of times that CQI 5 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI6

The number of times that CQI 6 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI7

The number of times that CQI 7 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI8

The number of times that CQI 8 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI9

The number of times that CQI 9 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI10

The number of times that CQI 10 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI11

The number of times that CQI 11 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI12

The number of times that CQI 12 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI13

The number of times that CQI 13 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQI14

The number of times that CQI 14 is received per layer/codeword

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

567

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

DLReceivedCQI15

The number of times that CQI 15 is received per layer/codeword

DLReceivedCQIMin

Minimum value of DLReceivedCQI

DLReceivedCQIMax

Maximum value of DLReceivedCQI

DLReceivedCQIAvg

Average value of DLReceivedCQI

DL_CQI_NEW Name

Description

DlReceivedCQIAvg

Average value of DL received CQI

DlReceivedCQI0

The number of times that CQI 0 is received per layer/codeword

DlReceivedCQI1

The number of times that CQI 1 is received per layer/codeword

⋮

⋮

DlReceivedCQI14

The number of times that CQI 14 is received per layer/codeword

DlReceivedCQI15

The number of times that CQI 15 is received per layer/codeword

DlReceivedCQIMin

Minimum value of DLReceivedCQI

DlReceivedCQIMax

Maximum value of DLReceivedCQI

CQIErase

Number of times layer/codeword CQI is erased

DL_CQI_NEW_PCELL Name

Description

DLReceivedCQI0

Number of receiving CQI 0 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI1

Number of receiving CQI 1 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

⋮

⋮

DLReceivedCQI14

Number of receiving CQI 14 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQI15

Number of receiving CQI 15 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQIMin

The minimum value of DlReceivedCQI received from CA UE whose cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQIMax

The maximum value of DlReceivedCQI received from CA UE whose cell is PCell

DLReceivedCQIAvg

The average value of DlReceivedCQI received from CA UE whose cell is PCell

CQIErase

Number of times that CQI erase per layer/codeword is received from CA UE whose cell is PCell

DL_CQI_NEW_SCELL Name

Description

DLReceivedCQI0

Number of receiving CQI 0 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI1

Number of receiving CQI 1 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

568

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

⋮

⋮

DLReceivedCQI14

Number of receiving CQI 14 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQI15

Number of receiving CQI 15 for a wideband CQI per layer/codeword transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQIMin

The minimum value of DlReceivedCQI transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQIMax

The maximum value of DlReceivedCQI transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

DLReceivedCQIAvg

The average value of DlReceivedCQI transmitted from CA UE whose the cell is SCell

CQIErase

Number of times that CQI erase per layer/codeword is received from CA UE whose cell is SCell

DL_SUBBAND_CQI Name

Description

DLReceivedSubband0CQI0

The number of times that CQI 0 of subband0 is received

DLReceivedSubband0CQI1

The number of times that CQI 1 of subband0 is received

⋮

⋮

DLReceivedSubband0CQI14

The number of times that CQI 14 of subband0 is received

DLReceivedSubband0CQI15

The number of times that CQI 15 of subband0 is received

DLReceivedSubband0CQIMi n

The minimum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband0

DLReceivedSubband0CQIMa x

The maximum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband0

DLReceivedSubband0CQIAv g

The average value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband0

Subband0CQIErase

The number of times that CQI erase of subband0 is received

DLReceivedSubband1CQI0

The number of times that CQI 0 of subband1 is received

DLReceivedSubband1CQI1

The number of times that CQI 1 of subband1 is received

⋮

⋮

DLReceivedSubband1CQI14

The number of times that CQI 14 of subband1 is received

DLReceivedSubband1CQI15

The number of times that CQI 15 of subband1 is received

DLReceivedSubband1CQIMi n

The minimum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband1

DLReceivedSubband1CQIMa x

The maximum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband1

DLReceivedSubband1CQIAv g

The average value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband1

Subband1CQIErase

The number of times that CQI erase of subband1 is received

⋮

⋮

DLReceivedSubband11CQI0

The number of times that CQI 0 of subband11 is received

DLReceivedSubband11CQI1

The number of times that CQI 1 of subband11 is received

⋮

⋮

DLReceivedSubband11CQI1

The number of times that CQI 14 of subband11 is received

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

569

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name 4

Description

DLReceivedSubband11CQI1 5

The number of times that CQI 15 of subband11 is received

DLReceivedSubband11CQIM in

The minimum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband11

DLReceivedSubband11CQIM ax

The maximum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband11

DLReceivedSubband11CQIA vg

The average value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband11

Subband11CQIErase

The number of times that CQI erase of subband11 is received

DLReceivedSubband12CQI0

The number of times that CQI 0 of subband12 is received

DLReceivedSubband12CQI1

The number of times that CQI 1 of subband12 is received

⋮

⋮

DLReceivedSubband12CQI1 4

The number of times that CQI 14 of subband12 is received

DLReceivedSubband12CQI1 5

The number of times that CQI 15 of subband12 is received

DLReceivedSubband12CQIM in

The minimum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband12

DLReceivedSubband12CQIM ax

The maximum value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband12

DLReceivedSubband12CQIA vg

The average value of DLReceivedCQI in the subband12

Subband12CQIErase

The number of times that CQI erase of subband12 is received

DL_PMI Name

Description

DlReceivedPMI0

The number of times that PMI 0 is received

DlReceivedPMI1

The number of times that PMI 1 is received

⋮

⋮

DlReceivedPMI14

The number of times that PMI 14 is received

DlReceivedPMI15

The number of times that PMI 15 is received

DL_RI Name

Description

DlReceivedRIAvg

Average value of DL received RI

DlReceivedRI0

Reserved

DlReceivedRI1

The number of times that RI 1 is received

DlReceivedRI2

The number of times that RI 2 is received

DlReceivedRI3

The number of times that RI 3 is received

DlReceivedRI4

The number of times that RI 4 is received

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

570

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

CARRIER AGGREGATION PERFORMANCE CA_ACT_DEACT Name

Description

SCellActivation

Count of activations (SCell)

SCellDeactivation_TO

Count of SCell deactivation occurrences by reason: When deactivation timer expires (SCell)

SCellDeactivation_Mismatch

Count of SCell deactivation occurrence by reason: When CA status of eNB and that of the UE are different (SCell)

CRNTIcollision

The number of Scell Activation fail due to C-RNTI collision (The C-RNTI of UE, who requests Scell activation to SCell, is already used in SCell)

SCellActUEAvg

The average number of Scell activated Ues

CA_ACT_INFO Name

Description

SCellActUEAvg

The average number of Scell activated UEs

SCellActivatedTime

The total time of Scell activated time

EICIC PERFORMANCE EICIC_ABS Name

Description

AvgABSNum

Average ABS number

ABSBin0

The ratio of not using ABS pattern

ABSBin5

The using ratio of ABS pattern used 5/40 as ABS ratio

ABSBin6

The using ratio of ABS pattern used 6/40 as ABS ratio

⋮

⋮

ABSBin22

The using ratio of ABS pattern used 22/40 as ABS ratio

ABSBin23

The using ratio of ABS pattern used 23/40 as ABS ratio

E-RAB SESSION TIME ERAB_SESSION_UE Name

Description

SessionTimeUEAvg

Average in-session time per UE

SessionTimeUETot

Sum of SessionTimeUEAvg collected

ERAB_SESSION_QCI Name

Description

SessionTimeQciAvg

Average in-session time per QCI

SessionTimeQciTot

Sum of SessionTime SessionTimeQciAvg collected

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

571

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

RECEIVED SIGNAL POWER STATISTICS POWER Name

Description

InterferencePower

Average interference over thermal noise for each PRB

ThermalNoisePower

Average Thermal Noise

RssiOverPath

Average RSSI for each antenna

RssiPath0

Average RSSI of Antenna #0

RssiPath1

Collected RssiPath0Avg count

RNTP Name

Description

RntpOwnCell_PRB0

RNTP of downlink PRB #0

RntpOwnCell_PRB1

RNTP of downlink PRB #1

⋮

⋮

RntpOwnCell_PRB98

RNTP of downlink PRB #98

RntpOwnCell_PRB99

RNTP of downlink PRB #99

RU_RSSI Name

Description

RuRssiAvg

The average values of RSSI

RuRssiMax

The maximum values of RSSI

RuRssiCurr

The most recently collected RSSI values

RuRssiTot

The total sum of the RSSI values

RuRssiCnt

Number of times that the RSSI values were collected

IIU_RSSI Name

Description

IiuRssiAvg

The average values of RSSI

IiuRssiMax

The maximum values of RSSI

IiuRssiCurr

The most recently collected RSSI values

IiuRssiTot

The total sum of the RSSI values

IiuRssiCnt

Number of times that the RSSI values were collected

RRH_RSSI Name

Description

RrhRssiAvg

The average values of RSSI for each RRH path

RrhRssiMax

The maximum values of RSSI for each RRH path

RrhRssiCurr

The most recently collected RSSI values for each RRH path

RrhRssiTot

The total sum of the RSSI linear values for each RRH path

RrhRssiCnt

Number of times that the RSSI values were collected for each RRH path

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

572

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

RrhRssidBmAvg

The average values of RSSI dBm for each RRH path

RrhRssidBmTot

The total sum of the RSSI dBm values for each RRH path

RrhRssidBmCnt

Number of times that the RSSI dBm values were collected for each RRH path

RSSI_PATH Name

Description

RssiPathAvg

The average value of RSSI for each path

RssiPathMax

The maximum value of RSSI for each path

RssiPathCurr

The most recently collected RSSI values for each path

RssiPathTot

Sum of RSSI values for each path

RssiPathCnt

RSSI values collection count for each path

IOT Name

Description

IotAvg

IoT Average

IotMin

IoT Min

IotMax

IoT Max

UL_SINR_DISTRIBUTION Name

Description

SinrDistULWbPreComp_Bin0

Uplink SINR Bin0 (-10~-8 dB) count before Outer-loop compensation

SinrDistULWbPreComp_Bin1

Uplink SINR Bin1 (-8~-6 dB) count before Outer-loop compensation

⋮

⋮

SinrDistULWbPreComp_Bin18

Uplink SINR Bin18 (26~28) count before Outer-loop compensation

SinrDistULWbPreComp_Bin19

Uplink SINR Bin19 (28~30) count before Outer-loop compensation

SinrDistULWbPostComp_Bin0

Uplink SINR Bin0 (-10~-8 dB) count after Outer-loop compensation

SinrDistULWbPostComp_Bin1

Uplink SINR Bin1 (-8~-6 dB) count after Outer-loop compensation

⋮

⋮

SinrDistULWbPostComp_Bin1 8

Uplink SINR Bin18 (26~28 dB) count after Outer-loop compensation

SinrDistULWbPostComp_Bin1 9

Uplink SINR Bin19 (28~30 dB) count after Outer-loop compensation

PUCCH_SINR_DISTRIBUTION Name

Description

PUCCHSinrDistBin0

The cumulated number of PUCCH SINR Bin0 (-10~-8 dB).

PUCCHSinrDistBin1

The cumulated number of PUCCH SINR Bin1 (-8~-6 dB).

⋮

⋮

PUCCHSinrDistBin19

The cumulated number of PUCCH SINR Bin19 (28~30 dB).

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

573

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

PUSCH_TX_POWER Name

Description

PhrRxCount

This counter is cumulated by 1 when PHR is received.

TxPowerSum

This counter is cumulated by the PUSCH Tx Power when PHR is received.

PowerLimitCount

This counter is cumulated by 1 if (PHR index - 23) is less than 0 when PHR is received.

AveragePuschTxPower

Average PUSCH transmission power

PowerShortageRatio

Percentage of received PHRs with PHR index - 23 < 0.

TRANSMITTED SIGNAL POWER STATISTICS RRH_TX_POWER Name

Description

RrhTxPowerAvg

The average value of RRH TX Power

RrhTxPowerMax

The Maximum value of RRH TX Power

RrhTxPowerCurr

The most recently collected RRH TX Power

RrhTxPowerTot

The total sum of the RRH TX Power values

RrhTxPowerCnt

Number of times that the RSSI values were collected for each RRH TX Power

UE_TX_POWER Name

Description

PuschRbCountAvg

Number of average uplink RBs except PUCCH RB

PuschRbCountTot

Number of accumulated uplink RBs except PUCCH RB

PuschRbCountCnt

Count of PuschRbCountAvg called

UETxPowerPrbAvg

Average UE TX Power on RB

UETxPowerPrbTot

Accumulated UE TX Power on RB

UETxPowerPrbCnt

Count of UETxPowerPrbAvg called

AllocCount

Number of RBs allocated for PUSCH

RRH_UE Name

Description

RrhUE

The number of UEs per RRH Count when UE operates PRACH process. Count when RRH receives MSG3 In the same RRH, when UE operates PRACH process, duplicate count may occur. During measurement period, when UE does not operate PRACH process, the corresponding UE is not counted for this counter. (Specifically, when UE moves between main cell and copy cell and, it does not operate PRACH process, the corresponding UE is not counted for this counter)

RF Name

Description

RuGain

RU Gain

RuGainCnt

a number of collection of RuGain

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

574

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis Name

Description

TxRfPower

Tx RF Power

TxRfPowerCnt

a number of collection of TxRfPower

OverpowerAlarmThr

Overpower alarm threshold

OverpowerAlarmThrCnt

a number of collection of OverpowerAlarmThr

LowpowerAlarmThr

Lowpower alarm threshold

LowpowerAlarmThrCnt

a number of collection of LowpowerAlarmThr

RfTemp

RF Temperature

RfTempCnt

a number of collection of RfTemp

TX_DIGITAL_IQ Name

Description

TxDigitalIq

Tx Digital I/Q

TxDigitalIqCnt

a number of collection of TxDigitalIq

SMART_SON_TX_POWER Name

Description

SmartSon_TxPowerAvg

The Average value of Tx Power

SmartSon_TxPowerMax

The Maximum value of Tx Power

SmartSon_TxPowerMin

The Minimum value of Tx Power

SmartSon_TxPowerTot

The total sum of Tx Power

SmartSon_TxPowerCnt

Number of times that the TxPower values were collected

SYSTEM OPERATION How to Activate This feature is basically enabled. The statistical data are collected during eNB operation and transmitted to LSM.

Key Parameters There are no related parameters

Counters and KPIs For detailed information about all available counters, refer to Samsung LTE system counter description manual.

REFERENCE [1] LTE eNB System Counter Description_SLR4.5.0. [2] 3GPP TS 32.450: Key performance indicators: Definitions. Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

575

Chapter 10 System Test and Analysis

[3] 3GPP TS 32.425: Performance measurements. [4] 3GPP TS 32.404: Performance measurements: Definitions and templates.

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 v2.0 © Samsung Proprietary and Confidential

576

Samsung eNB (LTE) Feature Description for PKG 5.0.0 Document Version 2.0 © 2015 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.